Fanuc Manuel guide I

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE l
OPERATOR S MANUAL B-63874EN/05
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
All specifıcations and designs are subject to change wíthout notice.
The export of thís product is subject to the authorizatíon of the government of the country from where the product ís exported.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot descríbe all the matters which must not be done, oг whích cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially descríbed as possible in thís manual should be regarded as ímpossíble .
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not followed by oг TM ín the main body.
B-63874EN/05 SAFETY PRECAUTtONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When usíng a machíne equipped with the FANUC IVIANUAL GUIDE i,
be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B 63874EN/o5
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
T1цs manual íncludes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventíng damage to the machine. Precautíons are classífıed ínto
Warning and Caution accordíng to the degree of the risk or the
severity of damage.
Also, supplementary ínformatíon is descríbed as Note.
Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to
use the machíne.
Q WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a damage of both the user
beíng injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure ís not obsenıed.
Q CAUTION
Applied when there ís a danger of the equípment beíng damaged, if the approved procedure ís not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to índícate supplementary ínformatíon other than Warníng and Cautíon.
- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-2
Bfi3874EN/05 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
To ensure safety while usíng a machíne featıuíng the MANUAL
GU1DE i functíon, observe the followíng precautíons:
WARNING
1 Confırm, on the screen, that the data has been entered
correctly before proceeding to the next operation.
Attempting operatíon with incorrect data may cause the
tool to strike the workpíece or machine, possibly
breaking the tool or machine or ínjuring the operator.
2 Before starting the machíne using the tool compensatíon
functíon, carefully determíne the dírection of
compensation and the compensation value, and ensure
that the tool will not strike the workpíece or machine.
Otherwise the tool or machine may be damaged or the
operator may be ínjured.
3 When using constant surface speed control, set the
maximum rotating speed of the spindle to a va1ue that ís
allowed for the workpiece and workpiece hold unit.
Otherwise, the workpiece or hold unit may be removed
by centrífugal force to damage the tool machine or injure
the operator.
4 Set a11 necessary parameters and data items before
starting MANUAL GU1DE i operatíons. Note that if the
cutting conditions are not suitable for the workpíece, the
tool may be damaged or the operator may be injured.
5 After creating a machíníng program using MANUAL
GU1DE i functions, do no run the machine on that
program ímmediately. lnstead, confırm every step of the
resultant program, and make sure that the tool path and
machining operatíon are correct and that the tool wí11 not
stríke the workpiece or machine. Before starting productíon machining, run the machíne wíth no workpiece attached to the machíne to make sure that the tool will not stríke a workpíece or the machíne. If the tool strikes the machíne and/or work-piece, the tool and/or machíne may be damaged, and even injuries the operator.
1Q CAUTION
After pressing the power-on button, do not touch any keys on the keyboard until the initial screen appears. Some keys are used for maíntenance or special operations such that pressing such a key may cause an unexpected operation.
s-3
B-δ3874EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. GENEØL
1 OVERVIEW OF TH1S MANUAL
2 READ AT F1RST
3 ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN
4 SYMBOLS USED
5 NOTES ON CREATING PROGRAMS
6 MANUAL GU1DE í SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
6. 1 . 1 Product Components
Operating Envíronment
METHOD OF 1NSTALLATION
SIMULATION CNC SELECTION
FULL-SCREEN DISPLAY
PARAMETER .............................................................................................. 23
RESTR1CT10NS ON USE ........................................................................... 23
NOTES ........................................................................................................ 24
ł SIMULATOR DEF1N1T10N F1LE FORMAT
Comment
Sectíon
Key
[Símnlator_MachíneSetting_MaxNumber] section г
[siinulatorMachinesettingnj section ................................................................................................. 26
DISPLAY DATA iní F1LE FORMAT
Comment
Section
Key
[settings] section .......................................................................................................................:........... 30
[frame_mainscreen] section
[cnctitle] section
[softkey] sectíon
[frame_mdíkey] sectíon
[mdikey] section
[frame_functionkey] section
[functionkey] section
Information to be passed when a buttoa is pressed ............................................................................. 38
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS λ B-63874EN105
11. OPERATION
1 OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
MA1N FEATURES OF MANUAL GU1DE τ
2 MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT
3 EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS
MACHINING PROGRAM VVINDOWAND E1DITNG
CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS
EDITING 1N A PROGRAM L1ST
SEARCHING FOR A MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE EDITED ................. 54
BAS1C EDITING OPERATIONS OF PART PROGRAM .............................. 55
Enteríng a Word INSERT key
Modífyíng a Word ALTER key
Modífyíng the Numeric Va1ue of a Word ALTER key
Deleting a Word DELETE key
Modifying a B1ock ALTER key
Deletíng a B1ock DELETE key
Changing the Program Number ALTER key
SEARCH FORWARD AND BACKWARD .................................................. 57
CUT ............................................................................................................. 58
COPY .......................................................................................................... 58
PASTE ......................................................................................................... 59
DELETE
KEY-1 N PASTE ............................................................................................ 60
UNDO, REDO
M-CODE MENU
i
F1XED FORM SENTENCE 1NSERTION
4 EDITING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS
ENTERING THE START COMMAND ,
SELECTING A CYCLE MACHINING TYPE .............................. 69
ENTERING CYCLE MACHINING DATA ..................................................... 71
SELECTING FIGURES
ENTERING F1XED FORM FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE MACHINING ....... 75
ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE
ENTERING CONTOUR PROGRAMS ......................................................... 81
ENTERING THE END COMMAND
CHANGING CYCLE MACHINING AND FIGURE DATA ............................. 83
c-
B-63874EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS
5 DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY


INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING .............................................................. 85
Arbítrary Fígures fortheXY P1ane ........................................................................ 86
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE YZ PLANE ............................................ 97
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE POLAR COORDINATE
1NTERPOLATION PLANE XC PLANE .................................................... 107
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE CYLINDRICAL SURFACE
ZC PLANE ............................................................................................... 118
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR TURNING ZX PLANE ............................... 129
ARBITRARY FIGURE COPY FUNCTIONS ............................................... 140
selecting an Arbitrary Fígure Copy Functíon
Copy Condítíon Input Screen
Executíng Arbitrary Figure Copy Operatíon
Figure after Arbítrary Fígure Copy Executíon
Notes on Arbítraтy Fígure Copy Operatíon
6 OPERATIONS IN THE MEM MODE
REWINDING A MACHINING PROGRAM ................................................. 149
EDITING W1TH THE MACHINING PROGRAM L1ST ................................ 149
SEARHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER 1N A PROGRAM ................... 150
SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING OPERATION .................... 150
CHANGING THE CURRENT POS1T10N DISPLAY ................................... 150
PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES .............................................. 151
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT RESULTS
DISPLAYING THE MACHINING SIMULATION WINDOW
DISPLAYING THE DRAWNG-DURING-MACHINING WINDOW
BG EDITING .............................................................................................. 153
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION
NEXT-BLOCK DiSPLAY FUNCTION
PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION
[P TYPE] Soft-key
[Q TYPE] Soft-key
7 OPERATIONS 1N THE MD1 MODE
8 OPERATIONS 1N THE MANUAL MODE HANDLE AND JOG
9 MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING
DRAWNG DURING MACHINING TOOL PATH ..................................... 163
J
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63874EN/05
Program Selection Operatíon and Other Operations in Drawíng duríng
Machíning
Selectíng Whether to Dísplay the Too1 Path or Not in Drawing duríng
Machiní
Scalíng, Movement, and Other Operatíons in Drawíng duríng Machíní
MACHINING SIMULATION TOOL PATH FOR Seríes 16i/18i/21i
Program Selectíon Operatíon and Other Operations in Machining Símulatíon
Too1 Path
Executíon Operations іn Machíníng Simulatíon Too1 Path
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations ín Machíníng Símulatíon
Too1 Path
MACHINING SIMULATION ANIMATED FOR Seríes 16i/18í/21i
Program Selectíon Operatíon and Other Operatíons іn Machíníng Símulatíon
Anímated
Executíon Operations іn Machiníng Siinulation Anímated
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operatíons in Machíníng Símulation
Anímated
Notes on Machíning Símulation
MACHINING SIMULATION TOOL PATH FOR Seríes 30í
Program Selectíon Operation and Other Operatíons in Machiníng Símulatíon
Too1 Path
Execution Operatíons in Machining Símulatíon Too1 Path
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operatíons іn Machíníng Simulatíon
Too1 Path
MACHINING SIMULATION ANIMATED FOR Series 30τ
Program Selectíon Operatíon and Other Operations in Machíning Siinulation
Øated
Execution Operatíons in Machiníng Símulatíon Anímated
Scalíng, Movement, and Other Operatíons ín Machíníng Simulatíon
Animated
DATA HANDLED DURING MACHINING SIMULATION FOR Seríes 30í 185
FUNCTIONS OPERATING DIFFERENTLY BETWEEN MACHINING
SIMULATION AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION FOR Seríes 30і
Functíons That Cannot Be Used for Machiníng Simulatíon
Functíons That Can Be Used for Machíning Símulatíon Mílling System
CHANGING WORKPIECE COORDINATE DURING MACHINING
SIMULATION ANIMATION, TOOL PATH DRAWING
SETTING OF DATA FOR ANIMATION
SPINDLE MOVEMENT ANIMATION FOR AUTOMATIC LATHES ........... 217
Functíon
Start Comnıand of Reflection
End Coınmand of Reflectíon
c-4
B-63874EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Símulation and Actual Workíng of the Machíne
10 SETTING DATA
SETTING THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA
[MEASUR] Soft Key
[+INPUT] Soft Key
SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA ............................................................... 228
[MEASUR] Soft Key
[NPUT] Soft Key
[] Soft Key
REGISTERING F1XED FORM SENTENCES ............................................ 233
Registering a New Fixed FoØ Sentence
Modífyíng a Fixed FoØ Sentence
Deleting a Fixed Form Sentence
hıitíalízation to Standard Fixed Form Sentences
11 BACKGROUND EDITING
STARTING BACKGROUND EDITING
ENDING BACKGROUND EDITING
OPERATIONS DURING BACKGROUND EDITING
12 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
BAS1C SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 244
OPERATING THE NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION ............... 246
RESTR1CT10NS ........................................................................................ 249
13 TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION
SETTING OF TOOL OFFSET DATA ......................................................... 252
SETTING OF TOOL DATA
Settíng of Too1 Type
Edíting of Too1 Name
Settíng of Too1 Set
Γ Entering of Too1 Data
Cuttíng Edge angle of Too1 Data Base Functíon
Inítialízing of Too1 Data
SELECTING TOOL DATA AT PROGRAM ENTERING ............................. 257
SETTING OF TOOL GRAPHIC DATA
Too1 Graphíc Data
ACCESSING TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION
Basíc Specificatíons
System Varíables
Readíng
Writíng
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63874EN705
Copying
Inítializatíon
Initialízatíon of All Tool Data
14 EDITING OF FREE FIGURE AND F1XED FORM FIGURE OF
SUBPROGRAMFORM
EDITING A FREE FORM FIGURE SUBPROGRAM ................................. 264
WARNING MESSAGE
EDITING A F1XED FORM FIGURE SUBPROGRAM
15 SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS
SHORTCUTS FOR VARIOUS CONFIRMATION OPERATIONS
SHORTCUTS FOR RANGE SELECTION ................................................. 269
SHORTCUTS FOR COPY OPERATION
SHORTCUTS FOR CUT OPERATION ..................................................... 269
SHORTCUTS FOR THE BASE SCREEN SOFT KEYS
SHORTCUT FOR STARTING THE CYCLE CHANGE SCREEN .............. 270
SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION SCREEN
SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM 1NSERTION
SHORTCUTS FOR THE M CODE 1NSERTION SCREEN ........................ 271
SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM L1ST SCREEN ................................ 271
SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM CREATION SCREEN ..................... 271
SHORTCUTS FOR THE COMMENT EDITING SCREEN
SHORTCUTS FOR THE SEARCH SCREEN ............................................ 271
SHORTCUTS FOR THE CYCLE 1NPUT SCREEN ................................... 272
SHORTCUT FOR THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
SETTINGSCREEN
SHORTCUT FOR THE TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN .................... 272
SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION
SCREEN.................................................................................................... 272
SHORTCUTS FOR THE CREATION SCREEN FOR REGULAR
PROGRAM REGISTRATION
SHORTCUTS FOR THE ALTER SCREEN FOR REGULAR PROGRAM
REGISTRATION ........................................................................................ 273
SHORTCUTS FOR THE PRESET SCREEN
SHORTCUT FEEDRATE THE MEASUREMENT RESULT SCREEN ....... 273
SHORTCUT FOR THE MANUAL MEASUREMENT SCREEN ................... 273
SHORTCUT FOR VARIOUS SETTING SCREENS
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE MA1N SCREEN ......................... 274
6
Ø-63874EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE 1NPUT SCREEN
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE CREATION SCREEN
16 HELP SCREEN
17 MEMORY CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
MEMORY CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT OF PART PROGRAM
Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Part Program ........................................... 278
Memory Card Output Operation for Part Program .............................................. 280
Memory Card Input Operatíon for Part Program ................................................ 282
Fí1e Format A1lowed for Memory Card Input/Output ......................................... 283
MEMORY CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT OF TOOL DATA
Memoгу Card Input/Output Screen of Too1 Data ................................................ 284
Memoгу Card Output Operatíon for Too1 Data ................................................... 285
Memoгу Card Input Operatíon for Too1 Data ..................................................... 286
Data Format ......................................................................................................... 286
MEMORY CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT OF F1XED FORM SENTENCES
Memoгу Card Input/Output Screen of Fíxed Form Sentences ............................ 287
Output Fixed Form Sentences ............................................................................. 288
Input Fíxed Form Sentences ................................................................................ 289
Format of Fíxed Form Sentences ......................................................................... 289
18 HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS
SETTING A MAXIMUM PROGRAM S1ZE THAT CAN BE HANDLED
HANDLING A PROGRAM LARGER THAN THE MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE S1ZE
19 CALCULATOR FUNCTION
CALCULATOR FUNCTION
20 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF 1N1T1AL VALUE DATA
AUTOMATIC SETTING OF 1N1T1AL VALUES ON THE 1NPUT DATA

AUTOMATIC TOOL DEF1N1T10N BLOCK COPY
21 SUPPORT FOR FOLDER MANAGEMENT FOR Series 30i ONLY 300
PROGRAM L1ST SCREEN
Data Displayed in the Program Líst .................................................................... 301
Operations Added for the Program List Screen .................................................. 302
Support for the Data Server ................................................................................. 303
MEMORY CARD 1/O SCREEN
SUBPROGRAM TAB ON THE CYCLE FIGURE SELECTION
OUTPUT OF AN ARBITRARY FIGURE AS A SUBPROGRAM
c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS Bfi3874EN/05
DISPLAY OF ARBITRARY FIGURES OF M98 SUBPROGRAMS ............ 305
22 SCREEN HARD COPY
23 DISPLAYING MACHINING T1ME FOR Seríes 16í/18i/21i ONLY
FORMAT OF MACHINING T1ME DATA .................................................... 308
OPERATION FOR 1NSERTING MACHINING T1ME .................................. 309
DISPLAY MACHINING T1ME ..................................................................... 311
24 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION ................ 313
COORDINATE SYSTEM SELECTION COMMAND
COORDINATE OF ARBITRARY FIGURES XZ, ZC, ZY PLANE
MACΣIINING SIMULATION
STATUS DIPLAY
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION ................................. 318
TOOL OFFSET DATA WINDOW
WORKPIECE SHIFT OFFSET DATA WINDOW
SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTIONS
] 1VIANUAL MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT CYCLE
MEASUREMENT RESULT DISPLAY SCREEN
CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 322
111. CYCLE MACHINING TYPES
1 M1LLING .............................................................................................. 325
HOLE MACHINING BY M1LLING .............................................................. 335
Ho1e Machíning Type B1ock
Ho1e Posítion B1ock XY P1ane
Ho1e Positíon B1ock YZ P1ane
Ho1e Position B1ock XC P1ane and End Face
Ho1e Positíon B1ock ZC P1ane and Cylíndrical Surface
Ho1e Position B1ock XA P1ane and Cylindrical Sшface
HOLE MACHINING BY TURNING ИПTH THE TOOL ROTATED
Machíning Type Blocks for Ho1e Machiníng Ьy Turning
with the Too1 Rotated
FACING ..................................................................................................... 370
Machíníng Type Blocks for Facíng
Fixed Form Fígure Blocks for Facíng XY P1ane
Fixed Form Fígure Blocks for Facíng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane
Aτbítrary Fígure Blocks for Facшg XY P1ane
Arbítrary Fígure Blocks for Facíng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane, ZC P1ane, XA P1аne 381
c-8
B-63874EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTOURING .......................................................................................... 382
Machíııing Type Blocks for Contouríng
Fíxed Form Figure Blocks for Contouring XY P1ane
Fixed Form Fígure Blocks for Contouríng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Contouríng XY P1ane
Arbítrary Fígure Blocks for Contouríng
YZ P1ane, XC P1ane, ZC P1ane, XA P1ane
EMBOSS MACHINING
Machíníng Type Blocks for Emboss machíníng
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Emboss machining XY P1ane
Arbítrary Fígure Blocks for Emboss machíníng
YZ P1ane, XC P1аne, ZC P1аne, XA p1аne
POCKETING
Machíníng Type Blocks for Pocketíng
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Pocketíng XY P1ane
Fíxed Form Fígure Blocks for Pocketíng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane
Arbítrary Fígure Blocks for Pocketíng XY P1ane
Arbítrary Figure Blocks for Pocketing
YZ P1аne, XC P1аne, ZC P1аne, XA P1аne
GROOVING
Machíníng Type Blocks for Groovíng
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Grooving XY P1ane
Fύced Form Fígure Blocks for Groovíng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Groovíng XY P1аne
Aгbitrary Figure Blocks for Groovíng
YZ P1ane, XC P1аne, ZC P1аne, XA P1аne
C-ÃX1S GROOVING .................................................................................. 465
Machíníng Type Blocks for C-axís Groovíng
Figure Blocks for C-axís Groovíng аnd A-axís Groovíng
REAR END FACING BY M1LLING
Rear End Facíng
ADDRESS SETTING OF ROTATION AX1S
Support for C-Axís Machining with Rotation Axís
C AX1S CLAMPING M CODE OUTPUT .................................................... 476
Outlíne
Va1ue of M Code Output
Dístínction between Maіn and Sub Spíndle
Posítion of M Code Output
2 TURNING
HOLE MACHINING WORKPIECE ROTATION
Machíning Type Blocks for Ho1e Machining Workpíece Rotatíon
TURNING .................................................................................................. 488
c-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63874EN/05
Machíníng Type Blocks for Turníng
Arbítrary Figure Blocks for Tıırníng
TURNING GROOVING
Machíníng Type Blocks for Turníng Grooving
Fíxed Form Fígure Blocks for Turning Гrrooving
THREADING
Machining Type Blocks for Threadíng
Fíxed Form Figure Blocks for Thτeadíng
REAR END FACING BY TURNING ........................................................... 569
Rear End Facíng
3 SLANT FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION
SUPPORTABLE MACHINE CONFIGURATION
SLANT FACE MACHINING COMMAND
COORDINATE CONVERSION ............................................................... 573
1V. MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
FOR Series 16i/18i/21i ONLY
1 MULT1-PATH LATHE APPLICATION
PREPARATION ......................................................................................... 582
Machíne Confíguratíon Settíng
Set Icon for Selected Turret
OPERATIONS OF MULT1-PATH LATHE .................................................. 584
Changíng Screens for Each Path
Changing by a soft-key ...................................................................................................................... 584
Changíng Ьy a swítch on a machíne operator s panel ....................................................................... 584
ANIMATION FOR MULT1-PATH LATHE ................................................... 585
Too1 Path Drawíng Duríng Machíníng and Too1 Path Machíning Símulatí
Machiníng Símulatíon Anímation
MACHINING SIMULATION FOR EACH PATH ......................................... 587
OTHERS
2 SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING
OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 591
DETAILS
How to Start
How to Fínísh
SCREEN CONFIGURATION
Dísplay Posítíon of Each Path
Status Dísplay Part
Current Posítíon Display Part
Program Dísplay Part
c-10
B-63874EN105 TABLE OF CONTENTS
HOW TO SELECT PATH .......................................................................... 596
OTHERS
3 PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
PREPARATION ......................................................................................... 598
Parameter
START AND END OPERATIONS .............................................................. 599
Start
End
DISPLAY CONTENTS
Ce11
Current Cell
Spíndle
Turret
Waítíng Líne
Transfer
BAS1C OPERATIONS ............................................................................... 604
Basíc Operatíons
EDITING OPEARTIONS
Insertíon of a Cell
Deletíon of a Cell
Copyíng of a Cell
Movíng of a Cell
Modíficatíon of Process Name
Program Edít
Assign of
Release of Waitíng
Assígn of Transfer
Release Transfer
Addítion of Optional B1ock Skíp for Each Path Program Check
Deletíon of Optional B1ock Skíp for Each Path Program Check
DEALING OF THE PART PROGRAM W1TH UNFITTED TO PROCESS
L1STFORM
FORMAT ................................................................................................... 631
OTHERS
V. TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
FOR Seríes 16ί/18ί/21i ONLY
1 ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS W1TH OFFSET NUMBERS
SELECTING THE SCREEN FOR ASSOCIATING A TOOL NUMBER
W1TH A OFFSET NUMBER
c-1 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63874ENlU5
SCREEN DISPLAY 1TEMS
DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE
2 V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES
SELECTING THE TOOL NUMBER-BY-TOOL NUMBER TOOL OFFSET
SETTINGSCREEN ................................................................................... 640
SCREEN DISPLAY 1TEMS
TOOL OFFSET
NOTES ...................................................................................................... 644
DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE
3 V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
SELECTING THE TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA SETTING SCREEN ...... 649
MAGAZINE DATA SCREENS MAGAZINE 1 TO 4 ................................. 650
Screen Display Items
Displayed Warning Messages
SPINDLE AND STANDBY POS1T10N TOOL DISPLAY SCREEN ............ 652
Scτeen Dísplay Items
Displayed Warning Messages
4 V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA
SELECTING THE L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA SETTING SCREEN
SCREEN DISPLAY 1TEMS
CHANGING TOOL PR10R1TY
UPDATING L1FE VALUES DISPLAYED ON THE TOOL L1FE DATA
SCREEN.................................................................................................... 65
Operation
GROUP NUMBER L1ST DISPLAY
DISPLAY OF GROUP NUMBER L1ST ...................................................... 663
Display Lífe States of Group
Restore Group Lífe .............................................................................,
DISPLAYED WARNING MESSAGES ....................................................... 666
SETTING THE L1FE NOTICE FLAG
5 TOOL L1FE DATA L1ST SCREEN
SELECTING THE L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA L1ST SCREEN
L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA L1ST SCREEN
6 MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES
SCREEN DISPLAY 1TEMS ........................................................................ б73
c-12
B-63874EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DISPLAYED OFFSET TYPES
SET BY THE MACHINE TOOL BUILDER ............................................... 674
7 DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN............................. 675
OPERATION ............... 676
8 OTHERS
RETURN TO MENU SCREEN
Return to SETTINGS Menu Screen

1NH1B1T10N OF EDITING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA AT CNC
STANDARD SCREEN ............................... 681
Operations
US1NG TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
V1. EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING OPERATION
1 EXPLANATORY NOTES
2 LATHE ....................................... 686
SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA
Setting of Z-axís Offset Data
Settíng of X-axís Offset Data
SETTING OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SH1FT
PREPARING OF THE F1XED FORM SENTENCE MENU
Enteríng the Fíxed Form Sentence for Turníng Machíning
Enteríng of the Fixed Form Sentence for Míllíng MachíØg
SETTING OF TOOL DATA
CREATING OF PART PROGRAM .................................. 696
Creating New Part Program
Operatíons of STØT Menu
Enterшg b1Ø foØ data ................................... 697
Enteríng Too1 Changing and Spíndle Rotatíng Blocks for Turníng Machíníng
Enteτing in ISO-code foØ dцectly ............................. 698
Enteńng Ьy fixed form sentence menu.......................... 698
Entering Outer Roughíng Process
i Entering outer roughíng cycle b1αk .................................................................................................. 699
Entering figure for outer τoughíng ..................................................................................................... 701
Entering Too1 Changing and Spindle Rotatíon Blocks for Outer Finishing ín
ISO-code Form
L Enteríng Outer Finíshíng Cyc1e Machining Process
Entering figure for outer finiØg cycle b1αk .................................................................................. 705
Entering figure for outer fıniØg ..................................................................................................... 706
Entering гeleaцівg morіon blocks ш ISO-code fonn ......................................................................... 706
Enteríng Tool Changíng and Spindle Rotatíng Blocks for C-axis
c-13
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63874EN/05
Entering in ISO-code form diτectly .................................................................................................... 707
Entering Ьy fixed fonn sentence meau .............................................................................................. 707
Enteríng C-axis Drillíng Process
Entering C-axis drilling cycle block ............... .............................................................................. 708
Entering hole position block .............................................................................................................. 709
Operatíons in the END Menu
Entering in ISO-code form direcцy .................................................................................................... 710
Entering by fixed fonn sentence menu .............................................................................................. 710
CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM .................................................... 711
Checkíng by Anímation
3 N1ACH1NING CENTER
SETTING OF TOOL LENGTH OFFSET DATA ......................................... 713
SETTING OF WORKPIECE OR1G1N OFFSET VALUE ............................. 715
PREPARING OF THE F1XED FORM SENTENCE MENU ......................... 717
Enteríng the Fíxed Form Sentence for Millíng
SETTING OF THE TOOL DATA ................................................................ 718
CREATING OF PART PROGRAM ............................................................ 719
Creatíng New Part Program
Operatíons of START Menu
En[eмg b1алk form data .................................................................................................................... 720
Enteríng Too1 Changíng and Spíndle Rotatíng Blocks for Roughing F1at End
Mí11
Entering in ISO-code fonn direcцy .................................................................................................... 721
Enteríng by fixed foım sentence menu .............................................................................................. 721
Entering Outer Wa11 Contouring Process
Entenng outer wa11 contouring rough cycle Ь1осk .......................................................................... 722
Enteríag figure for outer wa11 contouring τough ............................................................................. 723
Enteríng Pocket Roughing Process
Entering pocket roughing cycle Ь1осk ............................................................................................... 724
Entering figшe for pocket roughing .................................................................................................. 726
Enteríng Tool Changing and Spindle Rotatíng Blocks for Fínishíng F1at End
Mіll
Enteiing in ISO-code form directly .................................................................................................... 731
Entering by fixed fonn sentence menu .............................................................................................. 731
Enteríng Pocket Bottom and Side Fínishing Process
Entering pocket bottom fınishing cycle block ................................................................................... 732
Entering figure for pocket bottom fıníshíng ...................................................................................... 733
Entering pocket side finishing cycle block ........................................................................................ 734
Entering fıgшe for pocket side finishing ........................................................................................... 735
Enteríng Too1 Changíng and Spindle Rotatíng Blocks for Drí11
Entenng in ISO-code fonn diтecцy .................................................................................................... 736
Entering Ьy fixed fonn sentence menu .............................................................................................. 736
Enteríng Drilling Process
Entering drilling cycle block .............................................................................................................. 737
Entering hole position Ь1осk .............................................................................................................. 738
Operatíons іn the END Menu
Enteńng in ISO-code oтm direcdy .................................................................................................... 739
Enteтíng Ьy fixed fonn sentence menu .............................................................................................. 739
c-14
B-63874EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM .................................................... 740
Checking by Anímatíon
APPENDIX
A PARAMETERS
REQUIRED PARAMETERS ...................................................................... 744
Parameters Requíred for Basic Optíons
Parameters Required for Machíníng Símulatíon
Parameters Requíred for Other Options except Basic Optíon
For Seńes 30i only
BAS1C PARAMETERS .............................................................................. 747
Settíngs for the Co1or Palette for Screen Display
Parameters for Operatíons іn General
Parameters for the Axia1 Configuratíon of the Machíne
Settíngs for Spíndle Status Dísplay
Setting for the Display Language
Settíngs for Graphíc Dísplay
Settíngs for Machíníng Símulatíon Axes
Settíngs for Subprogram Selectíon Screens
Settíngs for the Co1or Palette for Screen Display
Settíngs for the Co1or Palette for Icon Display
Settíngs for the Co1or Palette for Guide Display
Settíngs for Too1 Path Drawíng Colors
Settíngs for Machíning Simulatíon Anímatíon Colors
Settíngs for Path Colors Duńng Too1 Path Plottíng
Settíngs for the A1locatíon of Startup Function Keys
Settíngs for Current Posítíon Display
Settíngs for F Load Meter Compensation
Settíngs for Too1 Management Functions
ettíngs for Arbitrary Figures
Other Parameters
Settings for Operations in General A11 Common Path
Settíngs for Operatíons in General For Seńes 30i
Settíngs for Operatíons іn General For Mu1tí C Executor
Settings for Operatíons ín General Each Path
Settíngs for Operatíons іn General A11 Common Path
Settíngs for Arbítrary Fígures XA P1аne
PARAMETERS FOR M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING
Parameters for Míllíng Cycles in General
Parameters for Facíng Cycles
Parameters for Contouring Cycles ...................................................:.................... 7 84
Parameters for Pocketíng Cycles
Parameters for Groovíng Cycles
c-15
TABLE OF CONTENTS Bfi3874EN/05
PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE OPTIONS .................................. 795
Parameters Common to Turning Cycles
Parameters for Turiiing Cyc1e Machiníng
Parameters for Threading Cycles
Parameter for Turníng and Groovíng Cycles
Parameters for Program Coordínate System Changíng Functíon and Tool
Offset Memory Changíng Function
Parameters for Machíníng Símulatíon Anímated
Parameter for Machíníng Símulation Anímated
Parameters for Mu1tí-path Lathe Function
Parameters for Icon of Path Number Dísplay
Other Parameters
B ALARIИS
C MANUAL GU1DE í SETUP METHOD
GENERAL ................................................................................................. 827
HARDWARE
SOFTWARE .............................................................................................. 828
Lathe Series 16ί/18ί/21ί
Machíning Center Seńes 16ί/18ί/21 ί
Lathe or Machíníng Center Seτíes 30ί
Lathe wíth Compound Machiníng Functíon Seńes 16і/18ί/21ί
Other Machínes Seńes 16ί/18ί/21ί
Other Machines Seríes 30ί
Note
PARAMETER SETTING
Lathe
Machíníng Center
Other Machínes
M CODE OUTPUTED DURING CYCLE EXECUTING
M code for Rigíd Tappíng
M code for Clampíng and Unclampíng Rotate Axis as ...................................... 844
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE ...................................................... 846
Lathe Seríes 16τ/18ί/21ί
Machíníng Center Seríes 16ί/18ί/21 ί
Lathe, Machíníng Center Seríes 30i

B-63874EN/05 GENERAL 1.OVERVIEW OF TH1S MANUAL
1 OVERVIEW OF TH1S MANUAL
Thís manual describes the functions of MANUAL GUIDE i for the
Seńes 16ί/18ί/21ί-MODEL B oг Seńes 30ί-MODEL A and the
1VIANUAL GUIDE i simulator for the personal computer.
For other functions, refer to the operator s manual for the Seríes
16i/18ί/21i-MODEL B oг Seríes 30i-MODEL A.
The specifications аnd usage of MANUAL GiЛDE ί may vary
according to the specifıcations of the operator s panel of a machine
too1. Be sure to read the manual províded by the machíne tool builder.
The functíons of the CNC machíne tool system are determíned not
oп1y by the CNC, but by the combínatíon of the machíne too1, the
power magnetíc círcuit in the machíne too1, the servo system, the CNC,
and the operator s pаne1.
It is impossíble to cover a11 possíble combínatíons of a11 functíons,
programming methods, and operatíons in a síngle mаnual.
Thís manual explaíns on1y the MANUAL GUIDE i operatíons
províded for the CNC. For índívídual CNC machíne tools, refer to
applícable manuals from the machíne tool builders.
Thís manual explaíns as mаny detailed functíons as possíble. However,
it ís not possible to describe a11 of the items whích cannot be done or
whích the operator must not do. Theτefore, please assume that
functíons other than those descńbed in thís manual cannot Ьe
performed.
Detailed ínformatíon and special condítíons are explaіned ín notes.
The readers may encounter new technícal terms in the notes not
previously defined or descńbed. In thís case, read this manual through
fvst, then review the details.
NOTE
MANUAL GU1DE i has options for supportíng
míllíng and turníng cycles, anímated símulatíon, and
set-up guidance. This manual covers these
functíons assuming that your machine has all these
functíons. However, your machíne may not actually
Ьe provided wíth some of these functíons.
Refer to the manual published by the machine tool
builder of your machine for details.
-3-
2. READ AT F1 RST GE N E RAL B-63874EN/05
2

READ AT F1RST
In this chapter, you will fmd the explanation of the place where you
should refer to when you operate MANUAL GUIDE i.
When tryíng to use a machine equipped wíth the FANUC MANUAL
GUIDE i, be sure to observe the safety precautíons written in thís
manual wíth sufficíent cautíon.
What ís MANUAL GUIDE
MANUAL GUIDE і ís the operation guídance to support an operator
on many situatíons such as creatíng a part program, checking Ьy
machíníng siniulation, set-up and actual machíning. These operatíons
can Ьe done on the only one screen.
ISO code form ís adopted as the part program format, ít ís widely used
on mаny CNC machíne tools, furthermore, machíníng cycles, which
can realize complícated machíning motions by simple programnıíng,
are províded.
As to the outlíne of MANUAL GUIDE i, refer to the following part.
Features
II MAIN FEATURES OF 1VIANUAL GUIDE i
Dísplayíng screens
I З. ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN
What kind of machínes can be supported?
MANUAL GUIDE i can be used for 1athe, machíning center аnd
compound machine íncludíng the following machine configurations.
Lathe
From 1-path to 3-path 1athe, whích includes Y-axis аnd tool
inclíníng axis.
Machining center
Machíníng center includíng workpiece rotating table аnd tool
inclining axís.
Compound machíne
Compound machíne wíth capabílíty of both lathe machining and
millíng.
IVIANUAL GiЛDE i has operatíon abílíty comnıon to the above
machines. So, you can operate on same screen commonly on the
above machine exceptíng machíníng cycles аnd tool offset data setting
whích aгe used for each machíne exclusívely.
-4-
B-63874EN/05 GE N E RAL AT F1RST
How to ínstall MANUAL GU1DE i to CNC
In ordínary case, MANAUL GUIDE ί is ínstalled in an CNC and
prepared by MTB such as parameter settíng. In that case, you can use
MANUAL GUIDE ί as it ís.
However, by some reasons, there is a case such líke you must install
MANUAL GUIDE í ínto CNC аnd set necessary parameter by
yourself.
In order to support you in that case, parameter setting and set-up
guidance explanatíons are prepaτed.
Explanatíons for the operations for ínstallíng 1VIANUAL GUIDE
ί ínto CNC newly.
Appendix A. PARAMETER
Appendix C. MANUAL GUIDE і SETUP METHOD
How to begin to operate MANUAL GU1DE i

In order to display the screen of 1VIANUAL GUIDE ί, press some
functíon button on the MDI pane1 of CNC. As to whích function
button should be used, refer to the manual made by MTB because ít
depends on the parameter and 14795 settíng.
NOTE
MANUAL GU1DE i operatíons cannot be done during
background edítíng mode of CNC program screen.
How to create a part program
In order to create a part program on MANUAL GUIDE i, refer to the
following part,
General operatíons flow of programmíng
VI. EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING OPERATION:
For lathe and machíníng center respectively, series of 1г
operations from settíng up such as offset data to creatíng a
part program and íts checkíng are explaіned.
ł
Basíc operatíons of part program edítíng
II З. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS:
ı Vańous edíting operations, which are used for the part
program in form of ISO code, are explained.
Detaíls of machíning cycles
I14. EDITING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS
II 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING
ARBITRARY FIGURES:
Operations of various machíníng cycles, whích can be used
for realízíng complicated machiníng, are explained.
In the ISO code form part program, simílar programs are used
frequently such as tools changing and spíndle rotatíon. 1VIANUAL
GiЛDE i supports those frequently used operatíons by the fıxed form
-5-
AT F1RST GENEØL 8-63874EN/05
sentence functíon. Fixed form sentences, programmíng template, are
made in advance and can Ьe used by selectíng from the menu dunng
programming operatíons. In to detaíls, refer to the following part.
Makíng and using of fixed form sentence
II FIXED FORM SENTΣNCE INSERTION
II REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES
1 How to check the created part program
As to the operatíons for checkíng the created paτt program on
1VIANUAL GUIDE i, refer to the followíng part.
Checking the part program
II 9. OPERATIONS IN MACØG SIMULATION:
Operatíons of checkíng the part program Ьy using
machining símulation, animation oг tool path drawíng, are
explained. And a1so, checkíng the tool path drawing of
actual motions during machiníng ís explained.
How to set the data needed for machinín
In order to execute actual machining, tool offset data and workpíece
coordínate data setØg must be done in advance. These data are
prepared as CNC standard functíon, but these data can Ьe entered by
using MANUAL GUIDE í too.
Settíng of tool offset data and workpíece coordínate data
II SETTING THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA
П SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA:
Convenient operatíons for workpíece coordínate data and
tool offset data setting are explaíned.
1
In order to execute anímation or machíníng cycle on MANUAL
GUIDE i, tool data necessary for these functíons such as tool type
must be defined ín advance. As for necessary operations, refer to the
following part.

Setting of data necessary for anímatíon and machining cycles.
П 13 TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION: 1
Too1 type, attachíng direction, cuttíng edge and nose angle
for lathe and so on are set as tool data for each offset
number. Operatíon for tool data base ís explained.
How to edít other part program duríng machiníg
By usíng a background edíting function, edítíng of other part program
duríng machíníng can Ьe done.
As for background edítíng operatíon, refer to the followíng part. ı
Operation of background edítíng
II 11 BACKGROUND EDITING
-6-
6-63874EN/05 G E N E ØL AT F1RST
How to modífy part of cycle machíníng motíons
Whi1e cycle machíníng which can Ьe used in MANUAL GUIDE i can
create the actual machíníng motíons automatícally by using entered
cycle data, modífying part of the created machíning motíons cannot be
done.
However, there is a case that part of created machíníng motions
should be modifıed for more effectíve machíníng.
In this case, converting the cycle machíníng block to standard ISO
code NC part program, motíon blocks which are made up with
G00/GO1/G02/G03 and so on, ís available.
The converted motion blocks are corresponded to each machíníng
motion, so by modifyíng part of converted blocks, the actual
machiníng motion can be changed.
NOTE
Ho1e machíníng and threadíng cycles are converted
to canned cycles, so the detailed motions executed
ín a canned cycle cannot be changed.
As for NC program conversion operation, refer to the following part.
Operations of NC program conversíon
II 12 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
How to conserve part program and tool data
In order to use part program and tool data agaín later, these data can
Ьe conserved Ьy outputting to memory card.
As for operatíons of outputtíng and ínputtíng these data to and from
memory card, refer to the followíng part.
Outputtíng and inputtíng of part program and tool data
II 17 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION:
In additíon to the operatíons of outputtíng and inputtíng of
part program аnd tool data, screen hard copy operations for
MANUAL GUIDE ί ís explaíned.
How to operate more quíckly
Almost a11 operations of MANUAL GUIDE ί use soft-key exceptíng
numeric data entering. However, íf you are ínured to MANUAL
GUIDE i operations, you may feel you can operate more quickly if
you use other key instead of soft-key one by one. Thís substitute key
operatíon ís caUed short cut key.
NOTE
On the sma11 key board, short cut key cannot be
used.
-7-
Aί F1RST GENEØL B-63874EN/05
As for short cut key operation, refer to the following part.
Detaíls of short cut key operatíon
II 15 SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS
Displayíng explanatíon of short cut key operatíon
II 16 HELP SCREEN:
Pressing HELP key on the MDI panel displays the window
of HELP screen for short cut key operatíons.
How to calculate the entering data
In order to calculate the data before enteńng, pocket calculator type
calculatíon functíon can Ьe used.
As for the operatíons, refer to the following part.
Details of operations for calculating data
II 19 CALCULATOR FUNCTION
How are other operatíons of MANUAL GU1DE í?
In addition to creatíng part program, mаny convenient functíons,
whích can be used for operating a machíne too1, are prepared on
MANUAL GUIDE i.
As for those operations, refer to the followíng part.
Other operatíons than creatíng part program
II 6. OPERATIONS IN THE MEM MODE
II 7. OPERATIONS IN THE MDI MODE
II8. OPERATIONS IN THE MANUAL MODE ØLE
AND JOG :
Operations for each mode are explaíned.
What kínd of machíning cycles can be used ?
On MANUAL GUIDE i, turníng, lathe machining, and mílling
machíníng cycles are prepared as optional functíon.
As for detaíls of machíníng cycle types and enteríng data, refer to the
followíng part.
Details of machiníng cycles
III 1 MILLING
III 2 TURNING
-8-
B-63874EN/05 GENEØL SCREEN
ALL-IN-ONE SCREEN
In MANUAL GU1DE i, basícally, oп1y oпe screen called the
A11-ín-one Screen ís used for a11 the operatíons from trial machíníng to
actual machiníng.
Tít1e area CNC status area
-т
MANUAL GUIDE i
ACTUAL Ø5 DIST TO GO SPINDLE
Status indicator window
FEED Ø/NIIN +
PROGRAM
Graphic window τ
t
Е
,
Message τ
window
Key-ín buffer Soft keys Pop-up window Program wíndow
Tit1e area:
The title of MANUAL GU1DE i ís always displayed.
CNC status area:
The followíng CNC statuses are displayed.
Mode
A1arm status
Reset or emergency stop status
Actual tíme
Status indícator wíndow:
The followíng ínformatíon about CNC ís displayed.
Actual machíne posítíon
Remaíning moving dístance of the actual block
-9-
SCREEN GENERAL 6-б3874EN/o5
Actual speed and load meter for the axís with the
maxiınum load
Remark It ís possible to display Actual speed in Feed per
revolution. Refer to the parameteτ
Spíndle rotatíng speed and spindle load meter
Program number and process number
Command values duríng automatic operation M,s,T,F
Graphic wíndow:
The followíng graphical drawíng ís displayed as needed.
Animated drawíng with a solid model machiníng
símulatíon
Too1 path drawing
Program wíndow:
The machíníng program ís displayed.
Pop-up wíndow:
Ttıe following supplemental screens are dísplayed as needed.
M-code menu
Fíxed format statement menu
Set data workpíece cooτdinate system, tool offset, fıxed
format statement registration
Program list
Data ínput window for machiníng cycles
Key-ín buffer:
Comments on data and input numeńcal data are dísplayed as
needed.
Message window:
The followíng messages are dísplayed as needed.
Meaning of the word whích a cursor ís allocated Guídance
Message
Remark It ís possible to display two Guídance Message of
M/T mode in the CNC for compound lathe.
Refer to the parameter
Meaníng of Machine Cyc1e whích ís executing
Content of Warníng and A1arm
5oft keys :
The comments on the followíng soft-keys are displayed as
needed.
Editíng operation menu
Machíníng cycle menu
Pop-up window menu
- 10 -
B-63874EN/05 GENERAL SCREEN
Remark
The soft keys described in this manual are specífıed to 12 keys
placed under the scleen, LCD, as shown in the followíng
example.
The meaníng of each sofft key ís various by the displayed content
on the screen, and wi11 Ьe dísplayed on the relevant part for each
key.
Example of sofft keys
ь^г, [ ј
Ih PAUSE S I ώlGLE SiOP
Ø г
Ш

Soft keys
ь
-11-
4.SYMBOLS USED GEN EØL B-63874EN/05
4 SYMBoLSUSEo
In thís manual, the following conventíons are used for keys.
1 Function buttons aгe índicated in bold type:
Example PROGRM, OFSET
2 The numbers to be input by numerical keys are underlíned.
Example
3 The input key ís índícated іn bold type ín the same way as the
functíon buttons.
Example llYPUT
4 Soft-keys aгe enclosed іn brackets []:
Example [LIST], [L1NE]
5 The cursor keys are índícated by the followíng symbols :
Example T, , ,
6 The page keys are indícated by the following symbols :
Example п , 4
`x

8.8ØB ; ..ø.. ....
и. oı ax
1, и7 і. и .
i. w w.
x вn. ı ıь .. . ... ......
Soft Key
Numeral Key

1NPUT Key
1 K,
At, S , ί.
ΓJ, H.
Functíon Button
Page Key
-12-
B 63874EN/05 GENERAL ON CREATING PROGRAMS
SNOTES ON CREATING PROGØMS
The notes that should be observed when creatíng a program are
descňbed below. Read the notes before creatíng a program.
1. General notes on machíning programs
<1> Use ISO code form G code commands basícally for a
machining program. Enter a command for símple motíon
directly with a G code, and use cycle machíníng for
complicated machining.
<2> Enter dírectly a tool change commаnd ínvolvíng the callíng
of the next tool by usíng a code such as a T code and M
code or by using a subprogram ca11 prepared by the machíne
tool builder, referring to the relevant operator s manual of
the machíne tool bui1der.
<3> Enter directly a tool length compensatíon command used
wíth a machíníng center by usíng a G code such as G43.
<4> For changíng tools or tool length compensatíon, a símílar
command ís repeatedly entered. So, such a command can
be entered easíly by registeríng a fıxed form sentence
beforehand.
2. Programmed commands requ ved before cycle machíníng input
<1> When usíng a tool database wíth a CNC of the M seríes, be
sure to enter a D commаnd offset number .
<2> Be sure to enter a spindle rotatíon commаnd. At the same
tíme, specífy whether to enaЬ1e oг dísable constant surface
speed control.
<3> No feedrate commаnd needs to be specífıed, because a
feedrate commаnd ís separately entered as a cycle
machíníng commаnd. However, specify a command for
feed per revolutíon or feed per mínute as requіred. For
example, operator know-how on executíng millíng ín
pocketíng by feed per revolutíon cаn be utílízed.
<4> Enter an M code commаnd for swítchíng between the
spíndle аnd C-axís, and a commаnd for C-axís reference
posítíon return as τequired.
<5> Enter M codes such as for coolant ON/OFF as requíred.
<6> By settíng bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 to 1, a polar
coordínate ínterpolation commаnd τequíred for
machíníng polar coord шate interpolation on the XC p1аne
can Ьe automatícally specífıed during cycle machíníng.
Upon completíon of the cycle machíníng, po1aг coordinate
ínterpolatíon ís automatícally cаncelled.
- 13 -
ON CREATING PROGRAMS GENERAL B-63874EN/05
<7> By settíng bít 3 of parameter No. 27000 to 1, a cylindrícal
ínterpolatíon command required for machining
cylíndńcal ínterpolatíon on the ZC p1аne can Ьe
automatícally specifıed duríng cycle machíníng. Upon
completíon of the cycle machíníng, cylіndτícal ínterpolatíon
ís automatícally cаncelled.
<8> Upon completíon of cycle machíning, the tool always
returns to the posítíon before the start of the cycle
machíning. By settíng bít 7 of parameter No. 27002 to 1,
the tool can be placed at a posítion dífferent from the 1
posítíon before the start of the cycle machiníng.
<9> When using G code system B or C wíth a CNC of the T
seríes T mode for a CNC for complex machiníng аnd
specífyíng cycle machíníng turning oг mílling , be sure to
swítch to the absolute coordínate system by specífyíng G90
beforehand.
<10>For the cycle machiníng mentioned above, a simílar
commаnd ís repeatedly entered. So, such a commаnd can
Ьe entered easily by regísteríng a fıxed form sentence
beforehand.
З. Cyc1e machíning
<1> With a CNC of the T seńes as we11, enter a coordínate value
for míllíng such as an I poínt coordínate in míllíng-based
hole machíníng as a radius va1ue even íf the value is аn X
coordinate.
<2> Specífy an I point coordínate not as a dístance from poínt R
but as a coord mate va1ue. 1
<3> Fígure data should be entered as a subprogram for
utílization ів roughíng, fnцshíng, and chamferíng. Thís
1 elíminates the need to enter fıguτe data each tíme.
<4> In machíníng of a projected portíon ísland figure , efficient
machíning can be achieved by usíng pocketíng wíth an
i ísland ínstead of usíng contouring. In thís case, specify a
blank as the outer wa11 of a pocket.
<5> In contouríng side facíng , enter a start poínt fıgure and end
poínt figure so that both figures contact each other. Thís
means that by startíng not from a corner of a fıgure but from
аn intermedíate point on a straíght 1ine, undercuttíng due to
approachíng the fıgure and retractíon cаn be elimínated.
<6> If the C-axis operates as the hole machíníng axís ів an
attempt to execute hole machíníng by usíng the C-axis as
the posítioníng axís, the C-axís may be set as an aкís 1
paгa11e1 to the X-axis wíth parameteτ No. 1022. In such a
case, set the parameters below to execute hole machíníng in
the axís dírectíon norma1 to the p1аne ínclud шg the C-axis.
When the parameter No. 5101 0 ís set to 1:
The hole machíníng axís ів a hole machíning canned
cycle ís the thírd axís for plane specifıcatíon.
1
- 14 -
B-63874 E N/05 GENERAL ON CREATING PROGRAMS
When the parameter No. 5103 2 ís set to 1:
If an axís normal to or para11e1 wíth a specífied plane ís
specífied duríng a hole machíníng canned cycle, the
specífıcatíon ís regarded as a posítíoning command.
<7> Wíth a CNC of the T seríes as we11, enter a coordinate va1ue
for míllíng such as an I poínt coordinate in míllíng-based
hole machíníng as a radíus value even íf the va1ue ís an X
coordínate.
4. Machining program entered on a multípath lathe
<1> When creatíng a machíning program for a multípath lathe,
create necessary processes on the process list screen before
creatíng machíníng operatíons. This allows the user to
víew the entire machíning program moτe easíly.
5. Animated simulatíon
<1> hen performing machíníng símulation of a program
íncluding a three-dimensíonal cooτdínate conversion
command, increase the dry run feedrate for example, by
selecting the rapid traverse rate to speed up the símulatíon.
<2> If a tool post ís placed on the lower side when anímated
símulatíon ís performed on a multípath lathe, the machíníng
performed on the síde opposite to the blank cаn Ьe viewed
during anímated símulatíon by pressing the [REVERS] soft
key.
- 15 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GεNεRAιв-бз87aεмıos
6
MANUAL GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE
PERSONAL COMPUTER
This chapter descńbes the MANUAL GLJIDE i símulator for the
personal computer.
NOTE
The specífıcatíons of the MANUAL GU1DE i
símulator for the personal computer are subject to
change as a result of product ímprovement.
- 16 -
в-sз874εиıo5GENEØι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
6./ OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Product Components
CD-ROM dísk
MANUAL GUIDE í símulator software for the personal
computer
Hardware protectíon key
Operatíng Envíronment
Main computer unít
- PC/AT-compatible machíne on whích
Wíndows 2000/XP Professional can run
- Japanese or English must Ьe usable on the OS used.
- Pentíum R llI, 1 GHz oг hígher
- Mcmoгy: 256 MB oτ morc
- Hard dísk: A free space of 150 MB ís requíred.
- A port must be provided.
- An Ethernet port must be provided not requíred in the case
of package licensíng .
- For símulatíon usíng a ínch screen wíth no MDI
buttons, XGA 1024x786 oг a hígher resolution ís requíred.
- For simulatíon usíng a ínch screen wíth MDI buttons,
SXGA 1280x1024 oг a hígher resolution is requíred.
- For símulation using a 15-ínch screen with no MDI buttons,
UXGA 1600x1200 oг a hígher resolutíon ís requíred.
- For símulatíon usíng a 15-ínch screen wíth MDI buttons,
QXGA 2048x 1536 or a hígher resolutíon is requíred.
- 17 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENERAιв-sзвıaεиıos
METHOD OF 1NSTALLATION
For ínstallatíon, the admínístrator authority for the computer ís
required.
Insert the CD-ROM of the MANUAL GUIDE i símulator for the
personal computer ínto the CD-ROM drive. Execute on
the CD-ROM dríve to start the ínstaller.
When the ínstaller ís started, a díalog box for selectíng a language to
be used for setup ís dísplayed. Select a language to be used for setup
from the líst then clíck [OK].

1
- 18 -
в-6з8ıaεиıo5GENERAι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
During ínstallation, the system prompts you to agree upon the license
agreement for usíng thís soflware. If you agree, clíck [Yes]. If you
select [No], a dialog box for checkíng if the ínstallation may bc
stopped is dísplayed.

Licenie Ag,
P1ease ead the fobиmg 6ceпѕe agreement caгeΓully.
P4eu the PAGE DOWN key to ѕee the Ieo[ ά the agιeeее,t.
10EN5E AGREEMENT
TNs ά a, Ag eeπкгd Ьetween you епd FANUC LTO [Fλ NС?..
the SØware Pгaλјct Γцп Softwmå 1 v iich you ece VMεyγγ yłpj
eemα t
GF uCENsε
FANUC ganłs you łhe oiowing right regardnrg the Øaгe
1 Yau пмyі use the SoftwØe aı a single coπφuіeі.
2 1rs case you wi11 use the Software upon the p1uгa1 numЬет of J
Do yоn acoept eц the feıms o? the precednrg License Ayдeemeпt? 1 you choone No tlın
setup wi1 cbse. To σпtal MоnuölGиde і 5aпulötα, yоо musł accept rtы Øeemerrh
:1e дi Sŕпε;:1
o
In the dialog box for ínstallatíon destínatíon selection, the ínstallatíon
destínatíon can be changed to a desíred destínatíon from the standard
one. Change the ínstallatíon destínation or click [Next] wíthout
changíng the destínatíon.
cмoøε oεи;пвгiσn ιαeгіon
sØ foldα where setup wi ŕα[a1 Θα.
-19-
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENεRАιв-8звıaεмıos
1n the dialog box for setup type selectíon, you can select fu11
ínstallatíon oτ custom ínstallatíon. When fu11 ínstallatíon ís selected,
a free space of about 700 IvlB ís required. For custom installatíon,
the required free space varies accordíng to the components to be
ínstalled.
When custom ínstallatíon ís selected, a dialog box for selectíng
components to be ínstalled ís displayed. Check each component to
Ьe ínstalled then clíck [Next]. Thís díalog box ís dísplayed also
when a component ís added or deleted after ínstallatíon. In thís case,
check a component to be added, and uncheck a component to be
uninstalled.
_ . < ,г
sØ cо.Øгка[:
. Øu Ø εøØкмт sεαp wı ŕuгε
sεbet the cmщѕсоѕαrtı ya, eм á гαtaι мa clыг the caпηеаaılк gou Ø not w b
oeıaívöaı
[ y, S αкѕ 16λ1 B Ø Яat oF
T ,flαк Ø ά ŕatabd fи [jsαies 16λ1B гo MD1 Keyτ eııbcııtiм of tiııиılatw. 5 ακѕ 16iT 8
. Sαкѕ1ÉTB noMDlKeys
Sαies 18Λ1B
j:]Sακѕ 16λ1B no MD1 Keys
Г]5αieѕ 1BTB
-[] Saies 18iT8 no MD1 Keysj
η Sαies 211M6 .J
pece Røqıiad o,ѕ E: 1564T2 K
Spece Avaielıle еа E: 9622 K
iгstałl5hì d
ε Ø ј І αd > І cmıαl
Upon completíon of ínstallatíon, attach the hardware key to the USB
port and execute the MANUAL GUIDE i símulator.
Do not attach the hardware key to the USB port before completíon of
software ínstallatíon.
- 20 -
в-sз8ıaεиıosGεNεØι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
SIMULATION CNC SELECTION
Start the MANUAL GUIDE i símulator by choosíng [start] menu
[Programs] [FANUC] > [ManualGuíde í SíØulator]. When the
MANUAL GiЛDE i sцnulator is started, a dialog box for sclectíng a
síınulator defmitíon fi1e used to execute the MANUAL GUIDE i
símulator ís displayed. In thís dialog box, select a defmítion to be
simulated then clíck the [OK] button to start the 1VIANUAL GUIDE i
sirnulator.
i
ŕAachine Type
ϊλK
Series 16iMB uvith MD1
Cancel
The símulator defmítion fıle is a text fıle where information such as
CNC model and display unit size ínformation ís wrítten ín a specífıed
format. By edítíng thís fı1e, a simulator enviroriment wíth a
user-specífıc configuratíon can be defined.
ł
İ

- 21 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENERAιв-6з87aεN1o5
FULL-SCREEN DISPLAY
When the IVIANUAL GUIDE í simulator is started, the símulator ís
dísplayed on the fu11 screen of the personal computer.
Maín símulator screen
________, ı . . w
X 388. B88
Y
Г 1θ8.θe8 F Ø
B - 1 -- - в
O, N. G P
. X, Yy Z Q<..
ц 1 Ј. K, R
i
Machine oØratíon MD1 button
hı ıttnn
Wíth the MANUAL GUIDE i símulator, the main símulator screen,
the MDI button screen operable usíng the mouse, and the machíne
operation button screen are dísplayed. A soft key operatíon can Ьe
performed Ьy clickíng a soft key on the main símulator screen or by
pressíng a key from F1 to F12 0п the keyboard of the personal
computer. Numeríc values and uppercase letters can be entered
through the MDI buttons or the keyboard of the personal computer.
For CNC-specífıc key ínput, clíck MDI buttons or machíne operatíon
buttons wíth the mouse. To quit the símulator, click the machíne
operation button [O].
- 22 -
в-sз874εиıosGεNεRAι GU1DE í SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
65 PARAMETER
1 Parameters created wíth the FS16ί/18ί/21ί cannot be ínput.
2 When usíng a parameter of the FS16ί/18ί/21ί, convert the
parameter to the FS30ί format.
3 Parameters in the FS30ί format can be used wíthout
І modífıcatíon.
4 The parameters related to the 1VIANUAL GUIDE í functíon are
basícally compatíble.
5 Parameter data cannot be output.
6 For the method of parameter input, refer to
Standard_рaτam stored on the CR-ROM.
7 The standard parameters are stored on the CD-ROM. By
edítíng the fıle wíth the text edítor and readíng the edíted fı1e, the
símulator can be customízed.
RESTR1CT10NS ON USE

1 Símulatíon usíng fu11-screen dísplay
The 1VIANUAL GU1DE i símulator is executed usíng the fu11
screen of the personal computer.
2 Memory card ínput/output functíon
A For ínput to/output from the memory card, use the memcard
folder under the ínstallatíon folder. The followíng can be
ínput/output usíng the memory card ínput/output functíon:
- NC programs
- Parameters
- Too1 database
B Тhe fi1e пame of the fıle in the memcаrd folder should
ínclude the extensíon and be 12 chaτacters oг 1ess.
- 23 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GεNEεгAιв-вз874εи/os
NOTES
1 Thc operatíon and functions listed below descríbed in the
operator s manual cannot be used wíth the IVIANUAL GUIDE i
simulator for the personal computer.
- Operation in the MDI mode
- Øeration in a manual mode handle, jog
- Mu1ti-path lathe functíon
- Too1 management Øctíon
- Setup support function
2 The MANUAL GUIDE і símulator for the personal computer has

a functional compatíbílity with the FS30í, but has some
specífıcation restrictions wíth the FS16i/18і/21 і.
3 Those functions that ínput external sígnals cannot Ьe used.
4 This does not correspond to the hyper threadíng technology
functíon.
- 24 -
в-sз87aεиıosGENEØι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
SIMULATOR DEF1N1T10N F1LE FORMAT
The simulator defmítíon fıle ís a text fıle where information such as
CNC model and dísplay unít síze ínformatíon is wrítten in a specifıed
format. The íní fıle format of Wíndows ís used.
Comment
A comment can Ьe wńtten on1y ín a continuous area at the top of a
fi1e.
A comment must start with a single quotation mark .
A síngle quotatíon mark wńtten at the start of a halfway data 1іne
does not comment out the character stríng that follows.
Section
The followíng two sectíons are used:
Símulator_MachíneSettíng_MaxNumber
Simulator_MachíneSettíngn
The character n represents a number from 0 to maxnumber of
Símulator MachíneSettíng_MaxNumber.
The character n ín the Símulator_MachíneSettingn section need not
Ьe successíve, but must not be duplicate. If n ís duplicate, the settíng
closer to the top of the fi1e ís selected. If a suffix greater than the
maxnumber key is assigned to a settíng, the settíng ís not processed.
Key
The followíng keys are used:
maxnumber
пame
cnctype
dísplaytype
pathtype
cnctype_title
fτom_dat_filepath
fi1ea11_dat_fılepath
srammgí_dat_filepath
mgídef folderpath
mgídef machíne_type
userdef filepathl
userdef_filepath2
keyíni_filepath
virtualmemcardfolderpath
- 25 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENERAιв-sзв74εиıo5
[Símulator MachíneSettíng_MaxNumber] sectíon
Key пame : maxnumber
Outlíne : Code a maxímum subscript value for the simulator
defmitíons to be found in the fı1e.
Character stríng to be set : Maximum subscript number to be found
Explanatíon : Code a maximum subscript va1ue for the simulator
defmítíons in the simulator defmítíon fi1e. A search
for a símulator defmítíon ís made untíl n of the
Símulator_MachíneSettíngn sectíon reaches
maхnumЬeг. A found símulator defцıitíon ís displayed
ín a selection díalog box.
[Símulator MachíneSettíngn] sectíon
Key name : name
Outlíne : Code the name assígned to a símulator defmítion.
Character string to be set : Arbitrary
Explanatíon : Code the name assigned to a símulator defmítíon. The
chaтacter stríng coded here ís dísplayed іn the simulator
defmítíon selectíon díalog box dísplayed when the MGí
manager ís started.
Key name : cnctype
Outlíne : Code a CNC model.
Character stríng to be set : FS16í , FS18í , FS21í , FS30í
Explanatíon : Code the model of the CNC. If an attempt to read a
fi1e descńbed below such as a fi1e fails, the
model coded in the MGí manager íni fi1e ís used.
Key name : dísplaytype
Outlíne : Code a dísplay unít type.
Character stríng to be set . , 15
Explanatíon : Code the type of the dísplay unit. At present, specífy
oт 15.
Key пame : pathtype
Outline : Code a path type.
Character stríng to be set : T , TT , TTT , M , TM , etc.
Explanatíon : Code a path type. Specífy T for T seríes síngle-path
control. Specífy TT for T series two-path control.
Specífy M for the M seríes. Specífy TM for
compound control.
Key name : cnctype_títle
Outline : Set a CNC model name for dísplay.
Chaтacter stríng to be set : Arbítrary
Explanatíon : Set a CNC model name for display.
- 26 -
в-sз87aεиıosGENERдι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
Key name : from_dat_fılepath
Outlíne : Code the relatíve path of corresponding to a
selected simulator defmítíon.
Character stríng to be set : Relatíve path of
Explanatíon : Specífy the relatíve path of correspondíng to a
selected simulator defmition. The fi1e coded here is
copied under the name to the memcard
d vectory under the símulator executíon directory.
Key name : fı1ea11_dat_fılepath
Outlíne : Code the Relative path of correspondíng to a
selected símulator defmítíon.
Character stríng to be set : Relatíve path of
Explanatíon : Specífy the relatíve path of correspondíng to
a selected símulator defmitíon. The fıle coded here ís
copied under the name to the simulator
executíon dírectory.
Key name : srammgí_dat_filepath
Outlíne : Code the relatíve path of sram_mgí.dat coпespondíng
to a selected símulator defınítion.
Character stríng to be set : Relatíve path of sram_mgí.dat
Explanatíon : Specífy the relative path of sram_mgí.dat correspondíng
to a selected símulator defmítíon. The fi1e coded here
is copied under the name sram_mgí.dat to the
símulator executíon directory.
Key name : mgidef folderpath
Outline : Code the relative path of the folder storíng the
MANUAL GUIDE defmítíon fi1e of a selected
símulatoт defmítíon.
Character stríng to be set :
Relatíve path of the folder storíng a 1VIANUAL GUIDE
defmítíon fıle endíng wíth .
Explanation : Code the relative path of the folder storíng the
MANUAL GUIDE defmítíon fıle of a selected
simulator defmítíon. From the folder coded here, a
MANUAL GUIDE defmitíon fi1e matching the type of
the definition fi1e to be specífıed next ís copied together
wíth the language fıle to the símulator execution
díτectory.
Key name : mgídef machine_type
Outlíne : Code the type of a 1VIANUAL GUIDE defmítíon fi1e.
Character stríng to be set :
TURN_VERTICAL , TURN_HORIZONTAL ,
MILLING_VERTICAL ,
MILLING_HORIZONTAL
Explanatíon : Code the type T/M seríes, vertícal/horízontal of a
MANUAL GUIDE defmitíon fi1e. The fi1e coded here
ís copied to the símulator execution dírectory.
- 27 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GεNεØιв-sзвıaεиıo5
Key name : userdef_folderpathl
Outline : Code the relative path of the user defmitíon fi1e of a
selected simulator definítíon.
Character stríng to be set : Relatíve path of a user defınítíon fi1e
Explanatíon : Code the relative path of the user defınition fi1e of a
selected símulator defınitíon. The fi1e coded here ís
copied under the name cex2datu to the símulator
execution dírectory. Up to two user defmitíon fıles
can be specífied. If no user defınitíon fi1e is necessary,
specífy a nu11 character stríng.
Key name : useτdef_folderpath2
Outlíne : Code the relative path of the user defmítíon fıle of a
selected simulator defınítion.
Character stríng to be set : Relative path of a user defniition fıle
Explanatíon : Code the relative path of the user defınítíon fıle of a
selected símulator defmítíon. The fıle coded here is
copied under the name cex3datu to the símulator
execution díτectory. Up to two user defmitíon fıles
can Ьe specífıed. If no user defmition fi1e ís necessary,
specífy a nu11 chaτacter stríng.
Key name : keyíní_fılepath
Outline : Code the relative path of an MDI key settíng fı1e.
Character stríng to be set : Relatíve path of an MDI key setting fi1e
Explanatíon : Code the relatíve path of a settíng fıle specífyíng the
layout of MDI keys, and so forth. By usíng
ínfoпnation such as character stríngs for input key
determínatíon and button dísplay posítions stored іn the
fıle specifıed here, the MGi manager displays the MDI
keys on the MGi manager.
- 28 -
в-6зsıaεıvıosGεNERAι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
Ó.9 DISPLAY DATA íní F1LE FORMAT
The dísplay data íni fıle ís a text fi1e where informatíon about images
and buttons to be arranged oп the screen is specífıed. The íní fi1e
format of Wíndows ís used.
Comment
A comment can Ьe written only in a contínuous area at the top of a
fi1e.
A comment must start wíth a síngle quotatíon mark .
A síngle quotatíon mark wńtten at the start of a halfway data 1 me
does not comment out the chaτacter stríng that follows.
Sectíon
The followíng sectíons are used:
[settíngs]
[frame_mainscreen]
[cnctítle]
[softkey]
[frame_mdíkey]
[mdíkey]
[frame_functionkey]
[finıctíonkey]
[settíngs] Specífies general screen layout ínformatíon.
[frame_maínscreen] : Specífıes informatíon such as screen component
posítions on the CNC dísplay section.
[cnctítle] and [softkey] below are іncluded ín
thís frame.
[cnctitle] Settíng for CNC model title sectíon display
[softkey] Settíng for soft key display
[frame_mdíkey] Frame dísplay setting for ØI key display
[mdíkey] Settíng for ØI key display
[frame_functíonkey] : Settíng for dísplay of keys such as the mode
swítch key other than the ØI keys
[functíonkey] Settíng for dísplay of keys such as the mode
swítch key
- 29 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GειyERAιв-6з8ıaεnυos
6. 9. 3 Key
The keys are described on a sectíon-by-sectíon basís.
[settíngs] sectíon
Key name : becolor
Outlíne : Specífy a background color.
Settíng method : becolor = r, g, b
Specify a number from 0 to 255 in r, g, and b.
Example: Grey ís specífıed as the background color.
becolor = 128,128,128
Detaíls : Specify a background coloτ Ьy the lightness values
of red r , green g , and blue b . A líghtness
va1ue ranges from 0 to 255. If a va1ue greater than
255 ís specifıed, the specifıcatíon of 255 ís assumed.
The background co1oг specifıed here ís used as the

background co1or for the overall screens and frames.
Key name : cncscrn_offsetx, cncscrn_offsety
1
Outlíne : Specify the dísplay posítíon of a CNC dísplay
sectíon application.
Settíng method : cncscrn_offsetx = x
: cncscrn_offsety = y
Each of x and y represents the number of píxels from
the top-1eft corner of the screen.
Example: is displayed at 320,60
from the top-1eft comeг of the screen.
cncscrn_offsetx=320 J
cncscτn_offsety=60
Detaíls : Specífy the positíon of a CNC display section
applícatíon in píxels. Specífy x,y in pixels, wíth 1
x,y = 0,0 for the top-1eft corner of the scre 1 en.
When an NC frame image is dísplayed, for example,
specífy x,y to display the CNC dísplay section at a
proper position.

Key пame : layout
Outlíne : Code the layout of MDI keys.
Settíng method : layout = QWERTY I ONG-M l ONG-T MINI-M l
MIλΠ-T
Example: The QWERTY layout is selected for the
MDI keys.
layout=QWERTY
Details : Set the layout of MDI keys by usíng a specified
character string. Heгe, oп1y a layout name ís
specífied. The actual layout of keys ís not
determined here.
-30-
в-6зs7aεNıosGENERaι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
[frame_mainscreen] section
Key name irnage
Outlíne Specífy the path of an ímage to be dísplayed in the
CNC dísplay sectíon area of the MGí manager.
Settíng method : ímage = drίve: dίrl f 1eпaіпe
Example: ímage=. ímage frameFS30í.bmp
Details Specify the path of a frame ímage to be displayed
around the CNC dísplay sectíon. When no fame ís
to be displayed, delete the codíng of the key ítself.
Either an absolute path or a relatíve path may be
used. The usable types of ímage fıles are bmp, jpg,
аnd gíf. The síze of аn ímage must match the síze
of the frame. Those portíons that exceed the frame
are not dísplayed. Those portíons that do not reach
the frame size aгe fılled usíng the co1or specífıed by
becolor.
Key пame vísíble
Outlíne Specífy whether to dísplay the maín frame.
Settíng method : vísíble = 0 ј 1
Example: When the maіn frame ís displayed
visible=l
Detaíls Specífy whether to dísplay the maіn frame. When
0 ís specified, the maín frame ís not dísplayed.
When 1 ís specífied, the maіn frame is displayed.
The maín frame íncludes the NC títle and soft keys.
So, when 0 ís specífıed not to dísplay the maín frame,
the CNC display sectíon is displayed, but the títle
and soft keys are not displayed.
Key name 1eft, top, width, height
Outlíne Specífy the display position and síze of the maіn
franıe.
Settíng method : 1eft =1eft
top = top
wídth = wídth
heíght = heíght
Example: When the position of the maín frame ís
230,20 , and the síze of the maіn frame
ís 800,600
1efr230
top=20
wídth=800
heíght=600
Detaíls Specify the position and síze of the maín frame in
pixels. For display posítíon specífıcation, assume
that the top-1eft corner of the screen ís at 1eft,top =
0,0 . When аn ímage ís to be pasted, the size must
match the síze of the ímage.
- 31 -
GU1DE i SlMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENERAιвsзв74εNıos
[cnctitle] section
Key name ímage
Outlíne Specífy the path of a títle ímage to be dísplayed
wíthín the main frame.
Settíng method : ímage = dríve:Øir1 +ј1eпame
Example: ímage=. image títleFS30í.bmp
Details Specífy the path of the fıle storíng a title ímage to be
dísplayed. Either an absolute path or a relative
path may be used. When the ímage key itself ís
deleted, no ímage is dísplayed, but the character
string of the title specifıed in the simulator deØtion
ьч displayed as text. The usable types of ímage
files aгe Ьmp, jpg, and gíf. The size of an ímage
must match the síze of the frame. Those portíons
that exceed the frame are not displayed. Those
portíons tńat do not reach the frame síze aгe filled
using the color specífıed by becolor.
Key name vísíble
Outlíne Specífy whether to dísplay the títle section.
Settíng method visíble = 0 І 1
Example: When the títle sectíon is dísplayed
vísíble=l
Detaíls Specífy whether to dísplay the title. When 0 ís
specífied, the títle ís not dísplayed. When 1 is
specífied, the títle is dísplayed. Specífy 0, for
example, when an ímage pasted to the main frame
already íncludes a title, and no títle needs to be
drawn additionally.
Key name 1eft, top, width, height
Outlíne Specífy the dísplay posítíon and síze of the títle
sectíon.
SetØg method : left =1eft
top = top
wídth = wídth
heíght = heíght
Example: When the dísplay positíon of the títle
section is 540,180 , and the síze of the
title sectíon ís 7000,400
1eit=540
1
top=180
wídth=7000
height--400
Detaíls Specífy the display posítion and síze of the títle
sectíon ín twíp. Specífy a desired dísplay position
as relative coordinates on the maín frame, wíth
1eft,top = 0,0 for the top-leit corner of the maín

frame. When an ímage ís to be pasted, the síze

must match the síze of the ímage.
a
-32- 1

в-sз8ıaεиıo5GεtyεεгAι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
[softkey] sectíon
Key name keynum
Outline Specífy the number of buttons that are displayed in
the maín frame and operate as soft keys.
Settíng method : keynum = n
Example: When 12 soft keys are used
keynum=l2
Detaíls Specify the number of buttons that are dísplayed іn
the main frame and used as functíon keys. The
number of buttons specifıed here ís used to specify
the numbeτ of key pressing information items to be
read next.
Key name keyn n: 0 to keynum-1
Outline Code a setting to be assigned to a button used as a
key.
Setting method : keyn = key1, key2, x, y, imagefτle
Example: When the first soft key ís assigned to the
operatíon of the F 1 key, the dísplay
posítion is 900,8220 , and an ímage to
be pasted is specifıed
key0= F1 , F1 ,900,8220,. ímage
Detaíls Code ínformatíon for settíng of a button to be
assígned as a soft key. The followíng ínformatíon
is to be set:
key 1 Specífy key ínformation to be descríbed
later to be passed to the CNC dísplay
sectíon application when a button ís
pressed.
key2 Specífy key ínformatíon to be passed to
the CNC dísplay sectíon applícatíon
when a button ís pressed while the
SHIFT button ís held down.
x, y Specífy the display position of a button
in twip. For dísplay position settíng,
specify relatíve coordinates on the maín
frame, with x,y = 0,0 for the top-1eft
corner of the main frame.
Imagefıle Specífy the path of the ímage fıle to be
pasted to a button. The size of an ímage
for a soft key ís 28x28 pixels when the
CNC model specífıed in the símulator
defmítion ís FS30í, and ís 33x18 pixels
for other cases. г
-33-

GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENεØιв-6з8ı4εиloь
[frame_mdikey] sectíon
Key пame : image
Outlíne : Specífy the path of an ímage to be dísplayed as a
frame for ØI key dísplay.
Settíng method : ímage = dríve: dírl і1eпame
Example: цnage=. image
Details : Specífy the path of a frame image to be displayed
around the ØI keys. When no frame ís to be
dísplayed, delete the coding of the key ítsel
Either аn absolute path or a relatíve path may be
used. The usable types of ímage files aгe bmp, jpg,
and gif. The síze of an ímage must match the size
of the frame. Those portions that exceed the frame
are not displayed. Those portions that do not reach
the frame síze aгe fılled usíng the co1or specífied by
becolor.
Key name vísible
Outline Specífy whether to dísplay a frame for ØI key
display.
Settíng method : visíble = 0 І 1
Example: When a frame for ØI key dísplay ís
dísplayed
vísíble=l
Details : Specífy whether to dísplay a frame for ØI key
dísplay. When 0 is specífied, no frame for ØI
display ís displayed. When 1 ís specifıed, a frame
for MDI key display ís displayed. When 0 ís
specífıed, the ØI keys are not dísplayed.
Key name : 1eft, top, wídth, height
Outlíne : Specífy the display position аnd síze of a frame for
ØI key display.
Settíng method : 1eft =1eft
top = top
width = wídth
height = height
Example: When the dísplay posítíon of a frame for
ØI key display is 230,20 , and the size
ís 800,600
1eft=230
top=20
wídth=800
heíght=600
Detaíls : Specífy the dísplay positíon аnd síze of a frame for
ØI key display іn pixels. For dísplay posítion
specifıcation, assume that the top-1eft corner of the
screen is at 1eft,top = 0,0 . When аn ímage ís to
be pasted, the síze must match the síze of the image.
- 34 -
в-6звıaεи1osGENERAι GU1DE í SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
[mdíkey] sectíon
Key name : keynum
Outline : Specify the number of buttons that are dísplayed in a
frame for ØI key dísplay and operate as ØI
keys.
Settíng method : keynum = n
Example: When 66 MDI keys are used
keynum=66
Details : Specify the number of buttons that are dísplayed in a
frame for ØI key display and operate as ØI keys.
The number of buttons specífıed here is used to
specify the number of key pressíng ínformation
items to be read next.
Key name : keyn n: 0 to keynum-1
Outlíne : Code a setting to be assigned to a button used as a
key.
Settíng method : keyn = key1, Øy2, x, y, ímagefıle
Example: When the fırst ØI key is assígned to the
operation of O , the dísplay posítíon is
6020,1350 , and an iinage to be pasted ís
specifıed
key0=0, ,6020, І 3 5О,.імаgео.Ьмр
Detaíls : Code information for settíng of a button to be
assigned as an ØI key. The followíng
ínformation ís to be set:
keyl Specify key ínformatíon to be descńbed
later to be passed to the CNC display
sectíon applícation when a button ís
pressed.
key2 Specífy key ínformatíon to be passed to
the CNC dísplay sectíon application
when a button is pressed while the
SHIFT button is held down.
x, y Specífy the dísplay posítíon of a button
in twíp. For dísplay posítíon settíng,
specífy relatíve coordínates on the frame
for ØI key dísplay, wíth x,y = 0,0
for the top-left corner of the frame for
ØI key display.
Imagefıle Specify the path of the image fi1e to be
pasted to a button. The síze of an ímage
for a soft key ís 36x36 píxels.
- 35 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENEØιв-бзв7aεNıos
[frame_functionkey] sectíon
Key пame : ímage
Outlíne : Specífy the path of an ímage to be dísplayed as a
frame for functíon key display.
Settíng method : ímage = drίve: dίrl й1eпame
Example: ímage=. ímage
Details : Specífy the path of a frame ímage to be displayed
around the function keys. When no frame ís to be
displayed, delete the coding of the key itsel
Either an absolute path or a relatíve path may be
used. The usable types of image fıles aгe Ьmp, jpg,
and gíf. The size of аn image must match the size
of the frame. Those portíons that exceed the frame
are not dísplayed. Those portíons that do not reach
the frame síze are fi11ed usíng the color specífıed by
becolor.
Key name : vísíble
Outlíne : Specífy whether to dísplay a frame for function key
dísplay.
Settíng method : vísíble = 0 l 1
Example: When a frame for function key dísplay is
dísplayed
vísíble=l
Details : Specífy whether to dísplay a frame for functíon key
dísplay. When 0 ís specifıed, no frame for function
dísplay ís dísplayed. When 1 ís specifıed, a frame
for function key dísplay ís dísplayed. When 0 ís
specífied, the functíon keys are not dísplayed.
Key name : 1eft, top, wídth, heíght
Outlíne : specífy the display positíon and síze of a frame for
functíon key dísplay.
Settíng method : left =1efi
top = top
width = width
heíght = height
Example: When the display posítíon of a frame for
function key dísplay ís 230,20 , and the
size is 800,600
1eft=230
top=20
wídth=800
heíght=600
Detaíls : Specífy the display posítion and síze of a frame for
function key dísplay in píxels. For dísplay posítíon
specifıcation, assØe that the top-1eft corner of the
screen ís at 1eft,top = 0,0 . When an ímage ís to
be pasted, the síze must match the síze of the ímage.
- 36 -
в-sзв74εи/OsGENERAι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
[functionkey] sectíon
Key name : keynum
Outlíne : Specify the number of buttons that are dísplayed in a
frazne for function key dísplay and operate as
functíon keys.
settíng method : keynum = n
Example: When two function keys are used
keynum=2
Detaíls : Specify the number of buttons that are displayed in a
frame for functíon key dísplay and operate as
functíon keys. The number of buttons specifıed
here ís used to specífy the number of key pressíng
informatíon items to be read next.
Key name : keyn n: 0 to keynum-1
Outline : Code a settíng to be assígned to a button used as a
key.
Setting method : keyn = key1, key2, x, y, ímagefıle
Example: When the fvst functíon key is assigned to
the operation of the auto key, the
display posítíon ís 450,660 , and an
ímage to be pasted is specífıed
key0=^r,^r,450,60,. ímage
Detaíls : Code ínformatíon for settíng of a button to be
assígned as a functíon key. The following
ínformatíon ís to be set:
keyl Specífy key ínformatíon to be descńbed
later to be passed to the CNC dísplay
sectíon application when a button ís
pressed.
key2 Specífy key informatíon to be passed to
the CNC dísplay section applícation
when a button ís pressed while the
SH1FT button ís held down.
x, y Specífy the display posítion of a button
ín twip. For dísplay posítíon settíng,
specify relatíve coordínates oп the franıe
for functíon key dísplay, with x,y =
0,0 for the top-1eft corner of the frame
for functíon key dísplay.
Øagefile Specífy the path of the ímage fi1e to be
pasted to a button. The síze of an ímage
for a soft key is з6x36 píxels.
-37-
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENERAιв-sзs7aεиıos
lnformatíon to be passed when a button ís pressed
When specífyíng buttons such as soft keys, MDI keys, and functíon
keys ín a dísplay data íní fi1e, specífy key ínformatíon to be passed to
the CNC dísplay sectíon applícation when the buttons aтe pressed .
The format for key specification is descňbed below.
The format for button settíng ís as follows:
Settíng method : keyn = key1, key2, x, y, imagefıle
To assígn the pressíng of a when the keyn button ís pressed, code
a in key1. To ínput b when the key ís pressed while the SHIFT
key ís held down, code b іn key2.
Example: keyn = a, b, x, y, ímagefıle
A character coded here ís ínput to the CNC display sectíon
applícatíon. So, íf a character not supported Ьy the CNC
dísplay sectíon applicatíon is coded, an unpredíctable operatíon
results.
The table below índícates the CNC keys аnd correspondíng
character strings. In аn íní fi1e, code the character stríngs
corresponding to CNC keys to be operated.
1
;
1
- 38 -
в-sз874εиıo5GεNεRAι GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
CNC key ` Correspondíng CNC key Correspondíng
character strin character strín
A a 1 1 =_
В Ь 2 2
C c 3 3
D d 4 4
E e 5 5
F f 6 6
G 7 7
H h 8 8
1 i 9 9
J 0 0
K k -
L 1
M m / /
N n
O o
ρ ? ?
Q COMMA
R r No corresponding
character strin
S s
T t = =
U u
v v + +
W w
X x
Y y No corresponding
character strin
Z z SP SPACE
- 39 -
GU1DE i SIMULATOR FOR THE PERSONAL COMPUTER GENERAιв-sзв74εNıo5
CNC key Correspondíng CNC key Correspondíng
character strín character strín
RESET _ SOFTKEY 1 Q _
HELP SOFTKEY 2 A _
SH1FT _ SH1FT SOFTKEY 3 Z
ALTER SOFTKEY 4 X
1NSERT ^ SOFTKEY 5 C
DELETE DEL SOFTKEY 6 V
1NPUT ENTER SOFTKEY7 B
PAGEUP PDUP SOFTKEY8 N
PAGEDOWN PGDN SOFTKEY 9 M
UP E SOFTKEY10 L
DOWN D SOFTKEY 11 R
LEFT S SOFTKEY 12 T
R1GHT F SOFTKEY 13 Y
MEM MODE ^г SOFTKEY 14 U
ED1T MODE ^d SOFTKEY 15 1
EX1T F4 SOFTKEY 16 O
SOFTKEYL W SOFTKEY17 G
SOFTKEY R P SOFTKEY 18 H
SOFTKEY 19
- 40 -
11. OPERATION




L
ι

B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 1.OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
1 OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
- - 3 -
1.OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE OPEØTION в-6з8ı4εиıos
MA1N FEATURES OF MANUAL GU1DE i
By usíng MANUAL 1L IDE i, the operator can carry out routíne
machiníng easíly.
1 Integrated operatíon screen that enables almost a11 routíne
machíníng operatíons
A síngle integrated operatíon screen enables routíne machining
operations íncluding machíníng program input/edítíng, anímated
símulatíon-based machining program checks, production
machining, MDI operatíons, and manual operations wíth JOG
and ØLE.
2 Machíníng programs in ISO code format
Usíng ISO code machíníng programs, whích are ín wíde use,
enables the operator to specífy símple operatíons with símple
commands, such as those for straíght línes and ares, and
complicated machíníng operatíons wíth machiníng cycles easíly.
3 Hígh affiníty wíth CAD/CAM
ISO code machíníng programs created usíng CAD/CAM can be
used wíthout modífication. Addíng advanced machíníng cycles to
these machíníng programs makes them perfect machíníng
pτograms. They can be checked easíly, usíng anímated
símulatíon.
4 Advanced machíníng program edítíng
Usíng advanced edítíng functions, such as substríng search and
cut/paste vía the clipboard, enables easy edítíng of machining
programs.
5 Advanced machíníng usíng machining cycles option
Advanced machíníng cycles are avaílable whích cover various
types of machíníng íncludíng míllíng and turning. Wíth these
machíníng cycles, ít ís possíble to perform complex machíníng
by creatíng and ruØg programs easíly.
6 Fixed format program menu-driven símple program entry
Regíster a series of frequently used machiníng operatíons
prevíously as a menu, аnd select necessary machíning operations
from the menu when creatíng a machíníng program. Thís method
can elímínate the trouble of enteríng símílar machiníng
operatíons repeatedly.
7 M code menu
It ís possíble to ínput M codes easíly by referencíng explanatíons
dísplayed іn аn M code menu. Machíne tool buílders can create
the explanatíons easíly.
-44-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 1.OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE
8 Realistíc anímated simulation option
Machíníng programs can be checked easíly, using an animated
símulatíon method that can realístically show what the surface
machíned with a specífıc type of tool tip ís 1íke. In additíon, you
can check a símulated workpíece as íf you were looking at a real
workpiece because the anímated símulation method uses solíd
models for a11 operations, from míllíng to turníng, for the
workpíece.
9 Advanced set-up guídance option
It ís possíble to set up machíning operations and check the
precision of machined workpieces easíly, usíng an advаnced
set-up guidance functíon that can handle a11 measurements, from
tool offset measurement to the measurement of workpíeces in
machíne tools.

10 Supportíng a wíde varíety of machíne types íncludíng lathes
and machiníng centers
MANUAL GUIDE i supports lathes 1 to 3, vertícal and
horizontal machíníng centers, and tíltíng head-equípped
machíníng centers wíth 3+ 2 axes. It also supports compound ι
l machíne tools that are capable of turníng and míllíng.
1
- 45 -
2.MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT OPERATION B-63874EN/05
ZMACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT
Machíníng programs used wíth MANUAL GUIDE і are created using
the ISO code format, which ís widely used in CNC machíne tools.
They use 4-dígit G code machiníng and measurement cycles to
ímplement further advanced machiníng operations.
These 4-dígít G code machíning and measurement cycles can Ьe ínput
and edíted easily, usíng menu windows in whích machíning data can
be entered ínteractívely.
When a machíning program ís being edíted, an explanation about an
address poínted to with the cursor ís dísplayed at the bottom of the
screen.
Remark
Word ís the mínímum data unít of NC part program, аnd
specífıed Ьy the combinatíon of address A to Z and numerical
data 0 to 9, +, -, decішal poínt .
Address means the content of numerical data such as movíng
axís name.
Remark
Cшsor of the part program means the part whose background
aгea ís dísplayed by yellow. The part displayed by yellow ís
called selected by the cursor, and program edíting operatíon
wíll be dealt on thís part.
There aгe 2 case cases for the selected part by the cursor.
1 1 block
When the cursor moved the top of the next block by
pressíng the cursor key >, the whole word data івcluded іn
the block are selected.
When the cursor selects the top word data of some block,
the whole word data іncluded in the block are selected by
pressíng the cursor key .
In case that the whole word data іnclude ín the block are
selected by the cursor, the next or prevíous 1 block wí11 be
selected by pressíng the cursor key L oг T.
2 1 word
In case that the whole word data ín 1 block are selected by
the cursor as descńbed above, if you push the cursor key
oτ , the cursor wí11 select 1 word on1y. By pressíng the
cursor key or agaín, the cursor wí11 select the next 1
word.
When the 1 word ís selected, the cursor wí11 select the 1
word of same order in the nest or prevíous block by
pressíng the cursor key T or .
- 46 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 2.MACHINING PROGRAM FORMAT
Remark
In the screen, in whích numerical data are directly entered such
as offset data or cycle machíníng data, the cursor is specifıed by
displaying the data frame by b1ue.
The part specified by blue frame ís called data ítem selected by
the cursor , and you can enter the proper data by pressíng
llYPUT key after enteríng numeric data by numeńc keys.
By pressing the cursor key < T > sL, you can select the next or
prevíous data item.
- 47 -
3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
3 EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS
- 48 -
B-δ3874EN/05 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
З. Ì MACHINING PROGRAM WINDOW AND E1DITNG
ΘlΣDE ί ј 18:58:16
0 1188 s θ н T8 e 111b
.ź 0 ,
F Se_ п88 eеее ø.øøø
Ї
ø F G81 18 48 54 аа A Ø Ø 69. 1 13. 1

659:
58 К2BB. Z18. :
61зее D1BB. L18B.
T8181 :
61128 P1. 05. H1E
Eе.9 Oθ.3 K108. t
222.
0 PROGR ц1 MUttBER
И
RE4łHD üłStZE L1F1EMCł ј јя[ЕР
1v1ANUAL GίЛDE i uses a program wíndow to ínput and edít
machíníng programs in ISO code format .
The program wíndow ís operated usíng the following soft keys, whích
are dísplayed by pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] oτ ńghtmost soft
key [>] several tímes.
RE WIND CHSIZE LINENO 5ETING
[REWIND] : This soft key takes you to the beg mning of the program.
[CHSIZE] : This soft key zooms the program wíndow to fu11 screen.
[LINENO] : Thís soft key selects whether to dísplay the 1іne number
at the beginníng of each block. The line number ís not
memorízed in the machíning program.
[SETING] : Thís soft key opens the settíng screen.
The scroll bar displayed on the ńght edge of the program window
índícates the approximate posítion of the cursor throughout the
machiníng program.
The cursor ís moved around ín the program wíndow, usíng the cursor
keys -, T, L, and -+. Pressíng - moves the cursor right іn a block.
To move the cursor to the next block, you need to select the block
entírely once and then select an indivídual address. Pressíng. - has
the same effect as for -> except for the dírectíon ín which the cursor
moves.


- 49 -
3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS OPEØTION 6-63874EN/05
The program is edíted usíng the following soft keys, whích are
displayed by pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or ńghtmost soft key
[>] several times.
NE WPRG OPEN 5RCHT SRCHJ O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYP5T PA5TE
Remark
Basically, soft keys are placed ín form of 1 1ine. By pressíng the
ńght end key [>], the soft keys shífted to right dírection by 10
wi11 appear. By pressing the 1eft end key [<], the 1eft síde soft
keys shífted by 10 wi11 appear.
When the ńght end soft keys are displayed, the 1eft end soft keys
wi11 appear by pressíng [>]. When the left end soft keys are
dísplayed, the ńght end soft keys wí11 appear Ьy pressíng [<].
-50-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS
NE WPRG O LIST SRCHT 5RCH O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYP5T PAθTE
Pressíng [NEWPRG] dísplays the program creatíon wíndow.

. 0 l3Bθ
For the program creation window, the followíng soft keys are
dísplayed.
Γ
CREATE CANCEL
l
In this window, enter a program number, usíng numeric keys, and then
press [CREATE].
Usually, the program number ís 4 dígíts, but you can use 8 dígits
program number when the correspondíng optional functíon ís added.
Pressíng [CREATE], new program wíth entered program number on1y
ís created, and ít ís dísplayed in the program wíndow. In that case, the
following soft keys for edítíng operation are dísplayed.
NTVl1 RG O LIST SRCHT SRCHsi O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
In addition to the above operatíon, you can create new part program
by entering new program number after the address O , and pressing
INSERT key.
- 51 -
3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63874EN/05
3,3 EDITING 1N A PROGRAM L1ST
NE WPRG O LIST sRCHT 5RCH- O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
Pressing [O LIST] dísplays a wíndow that lists registered machíning
programs.
By pressing the < oτ > cursor key, a sort type sort by number, sort
by date and tíme of updatíng, or sort by síze can be selected.
BBB2: CENIER DR1LL M61 15:34
BBBσ: Pe ] ET1NG 61 15:34
FØ RBUОtł CYL. M6 15:34
BBB6: FØ RECTП161λAR MG11 1594
BBB7: ØФIR.CYØE M8I 15:3A
e010 : ØØ.581M1RE 001 16:53
p 8811: 6R8Φ11Ф6 FREE F. 00I 15:A5
ј ΘB13: FJЮ8VING 92 S08ØE M 16:05
8188: 1685
1000 : 16:59
1881: 17:11
The following soft keys are displayed in the wíndow. They can be
used for edítíng such as copying or deletíng machíníng programs.
NE W COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEØCH MCØD SRTORD OPEN CLO5E
[NEW] : Thís soft key dísplays the program creatíon wíndow, іn
which you can create machíníng programs.
[COPY] : Thís soft key dísplays the program copy wíndow. After
a program number ís entered usíng numeríc keys,
pressing [COPY] copies the specífıed program.
[DELETE] : This soft key dísplays a message for askíng you
whether you really want to delete a specifled program.
Pressíng [YES] deletes the specifıed program. Pressíng
[NO] cancels the request to delete the specífıed
program.
[EDTCOM] : Thís soft key dísplays the comment program name
edít wíndow. If you move the cursor, usíng or >,
and enter a character, usíng MDI keys, the character
appears at the 1eft of the cursor. Usíng the CAN key can
delete the character at the 1eft. Pressíng [ALTER]
causes the comment to be changed.
- 52 -
8-63874EN/05 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
[SEØCH] : This soft key dísplays the progrØ search wíndow.
After enteríng a desired program number in the wíndow,
usíng numeríc keys, press [SEØCH].
[M CARD] : Thís soft key enables ínput/output to and from the
memoгy card.
[ALLDEL] : Thís soft key dísplays a message for checkíng íf a11
programs may be deleted. Pressíng [YES] deletes a11
programs. Pressíng [NO] cancels the deletíon of a11
programs.
[SRTORD] : This soft key switches the sort order for dísplayíng
programs between ascendíng order and descending
order.
[OPEN] : After placíng the cursor on a program you want to edít,
using the T or cursor key, pressíng thís soft key
selects the program and closes the líst wíndow. Then,
the soft keys descríbed at the top of thís subchapter are
dísplayed agaín.
[CLOSE] : Thís soft key closes the program list wíndow.
- 53 -
1T1NG MACHINING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63874EN/05
SEARCHING FOR A MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE
EDITED
NE WPRG Π LIST 5RCHT SRCHі- O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST [?ΛBTЕ
After entering a desired program number, usíng nØeric keys,
pressing [O SRCH] can select the program.
Pressíng [O SRCH] without enteríng a program number causes the
next program to be selected.
Pressíng the O key on the ØI pаne1, the soft keys changes to the
above one, so enter the program number to be searched and press [O
sRCH].
And as another way, you can select the program in the program list by
pressíng [OPEN] after placíng the cursor oп the program number to be
selected.
When the part program ís selected, the content of the part program is
displayed ín the program wíndow, and the above soft keys wí11 be
dísplayed.
- 54 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
BAS1C EDITING OPERATIONS OF PART PROGRAM
Since MANUAL GUIDE i uses ISO-code form part program, edíting
of 1 word, minimum unít of the program and made from address and
numeńcal data, are avaílable by usíng IIYSERT, ALTER and
DELETE keys, which are placed on the ØI pаne1.
Enteríng a Word 1NSERT key
Operation
1 Select the word, before wbich you want to insert the new
word, by placing the cursor. Otherwíse, select the block,
before which you want to ínsert the new word, by placíng
the cursor.
2 Enter new word by ØI keys. Plural words can be entered
at once.
3 Press IIYSERT.
NOTE
1 1n the case a parameter ís set to
0, when a cursor ís placed on the word ín the cycle
machíníng block and an operator ís goíng to ínsert a
new word, the warning to confırm an operator
whether ít can be done or not wí11 be dísplayed.
Modífying a Word ALTER key
Operation
1 Select the word to be modífied by placíng the cursor on the
word.
2 Enter new word by ØI keys. Plural words can Ъe entered
at once.
3 Press ALTER.
Modifyíng the Numeric Va1ue of a Word ALTER key
Operation
1 Select the word to be modífied Ьy placíng the cursor on the
word.
2 Enter new numeńc data only by ØI keys. Plural words
can not be entered.
3 Pτess ALTER.
- 55 -
3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63874EN/05

Deletíng a Word DELETE key
Operation
1 Select the word to be deleted by placíng the cursor on the
word.
2 Press DELETE.
NOTE
1 As the deletíng operation in the CNC program
screen, no prompting message for deieting a word
ís dísplayed.
2 Program number, Oюooc, and end of program, ,
cannot be deleted.

Modífyíng a B1ock ALTER key
Operatíon
1 Select the block to be modifıed Ьy placing the cursor on the
block.
2 Enter new word by ØI keys. Plural words can be entered
at once.
3 Press ALTER.
Deleting a B1ock DELETE key
Operatíon
1 Select the block to be deleted by placíng the cursor on the
block.
2 Press DELETE.

Changíng the Program Number ALTER key
Operation
1 Select the program nØber word, Oxxxx, by placing the
cursor on the word.
2 Enter the address O and new program number by MDI
keys.
3 Press ALTER.
- 56 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
SEARCH FORWARD AND BACKWARD
NE WPRG O LIST SRCHT 5RCH O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
[ ]
After a character string ís entered usíng ØI keys, pressíng [SRCHt]
backward search or [] forward search searches for the
specifıed character stríng. A substring can also Ьe searched for.
If the character string is found, key-ín buffer is cleared, but the stríng
ís displayed in the [ ] under [SRCHT] and [SRCHL].
This displayed string can Ьe used for the next tíme searchíng operatíon.
0n1y pressíng [SRCHT] or [SRCHL] without enteríng same stríng
again, you can search the same stríng over and over.
- 57 -
3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
CUT
NE WPRG O LI5T SRCHT SRCH-- O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE

Pressing [CUT] dísplays a message that prompts you to select a range
of data to be cut. Fírst select the cut range Ьy displayíng ít ín yellow ,
using cursor keys, and then press [CUT]. The data cut off from the
specífıed range ís stored on the clípboard. The contents of the
clípboard can be pasted to other places in the program and to other
programs.
C1іp board ís the memory, in which the content of part program can be
stored temporary. By pressíng [CUT] oг [COPY], the content of the
cursor selected is stored іn ít, then the o1d content ís cleared. The
content of the c1іp board ís cleared at the power off of CNC.
A c1іp board size cаn be selected usíng bíts 4 and 5 of parameter No.
14701.
Bit 4= 0, bit 5= 0: Sets a clíp board size of 1024 bytes.
Bit 4= 1, bít 5= 0: Sets a c1іp board síze of 2048 bytes.
Bit 4= 0, bít 5= 1: Sets a c1іp board síze of 4096 bytes.
Bít 4= 1, bit 5= 1: Sets a clip Ьoаrd síze of 8192 bytes.
NOTE
The contents of the clipboard are presenıed until
the power is shut off oг other data is stored on the
clipboard. So, the clípboard contents can be used
any number of tímes.
COPY
NE WPRG O LI5T SRCHT SRCH O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE

Pressíng [COPY] dísplays a message that prompts you to select a
τange of data to be copied. Fírst select the copy range Ьy dísplayíng it
in yellow , using cursor keys, and then press [COPY]. The data copied
from the specifıed range ís stored on the clípboard. The contents of the
clípboard can Ьe pasted to other places in the program аnd to other
programs.
- 58 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
PAsτε
NEWPRG O LIST SRCHT SRCHІ- O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
Pressíng [PASTE] pastes the contents of the clipboard to the place that
immediately follows the current cursor posítíon.
The c1ipboard contents are preserved.
DELETE
NE WPRG O LIST SRCHT SRCH І O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KΣYPST PASTE

M
г Pressíng [DELETE] dísplays a message that prompts you to select a
range of data to be deleted. Fírst select the delete range Ьy dísplayíng
it in yellow , usíng cursor keys, and then press [sELECT]. A message ĺ
appears which asks whether you really want to delete the selected data.
Pressìng [YES] deletes the data.
The deleted data ís not stored on the clípboard. The clípboard
preserves the previous contents.
- 59 -
3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
KEY-IN Pasτε
NE WPRG O LIST SRCHT 5RCH O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PA3TE

Pressíng [KEYPST] copíes the contents of a range selected displayed
in yellow usíng the cursor to the key-ín buffer.
Usíng the < and cursor keys can move the cursor around ín the
key-ín buffer, so a character entered using an ØI key can be placed
íØmedíately before the cursor. Pτessíng the CAN key deletes the
character at the left of the cursor.
The character stríngs ín the key-ín buffer can be used in the same
maпвeг as for ordínary editíng. Pressíng the ALTER key, for example,
replaces the cursor-selected current contents in the program wíth the
current contents of the key-іn buffer. Pressíng the INSERT key
ínserts the key-ín buffer contents to the place that ímmedíately follows
the cursor-selected contents in the program.
1 Pressíng CAN after SЯIFT clears the contents of the key-ín buffer.
NOTE
Usíng key-in paste enables a very long comment
program and part of a custom macro program block
to be changed easily.
- 60 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
312 UNDO, REDO

G-CONT UIVDO REDO WK-SET T-OF5 SETING

Pressíng [REDO] duríng edítíng in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or
t MEM mode can cancel undo a program edítíng operation usíng the
1VIANUAL GUIDE i. Pressíng [UNDO] can cancel redo the
cancellation of an operation. Thís function can be used, for example,
when a block has been deleted by místake.
NOTE
1 Before the undo function oг redo functíon can be
ε
used wíth MANUAL GU1DE i, the síze of a buffer
for storíng operatíons must be set in parameter No.
14861. When 0 ís set ín the parameter, a 5-KB
Γ
buffer is allocated.
2 The undo and redo functíons can be used for
edítíng operatíons in a selected program. Thís
means that the creatíon of a new program and the
deletíon of a program cannot be undone, and the
edíting of the key-ín buffer cannot be undone.
3 When the screen display ís swítched or an
operatíon for openíng a program is performed, the
buffer ís cleared.
- 61 -
3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63874EN/05
3. 13 M-CODE MENU
Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or ríghtmost soft key [>] several
tíØes dísplays [M CODE] as follows:
STØT CYCLE END MECYC ALTER M CODE FIXFRM

Pressing [M CODE] dísplays the M code menu.
I ,
581:T1 ØINE 8TØ ДFiER 1Я1.
5527HE 55G4155 F1N151E5 7HE PRO6RN11.
M30:TіЕ MØIHE F1N15FE5 THE PRійіНMM.
M9B:CNLLIN6 0F SUBPROΓıIN1N.
N94:END 0F SUBPROGRПй.
N19B:SUDPROΓØ Ø Ø EMTE1Dц1L. lE1qRY.
The followíng soft keys are dísplayed for M-code menu.
INSERT INB+; CANCEL
Select an M code group, usíng the E-- and > cursor keys, and then
select an M code from the M code group, using the T and L cшsoг
keys.
Pressing [INSERT] inserts the selected M code to the place that
follows ímınedíately the cursor posítion ín the program. Pressíng
[INS+;] ínserts an EOB to the place that follows immedíately the M
code at the same tíme.
Enteríng M-code contínuously and pressíng [1Ns+;] at 1ast, plural
M-code can be entered ín one block.
By the followíng operations, M-code in a part program can be altered
dírectly by usíng M-code menu.
1 P1ace a cursor on the M-code should be altered.
2 Press [ALTER] or INPUT-key, then M-code menu wí11 be
displayed.
3 Select a M-code by placing a cursor in the M-code menu
wíndow.
- 62 -
в-6зв,aεиıo5 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
4 Pressíng [ALTER], then M-code wí11 be replaced to the newly
selected one.
NOTE
1 1n many cases, M codes in the M code menu are
set up to a machíne tool by the machíne tool
buílder. So, the M code menu varíes from one
machine tool to another.
2 1f the bít 4 of parameter No. 14850 ís set to 1, M
code menu ís dísabled.
- 63 -
3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS OPEØTION B-δ3874EN/05
F1XED FORM SENTENCE 1NSERTION
Pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] or ríghtmost soft key [>] several
times dísplays [FIXFRM] for milling oг turning.
However, there ís a case that eíther of them ís dísplayed dependíng on
the machíne constructíon, so ínto details, refer to the document made
by machíne tool buílder.
xamole of softv kev menu for turnin g

Pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] oг rightmost soft key [>] several
times displays [FIXFRM].
If [FIXFRM] is displayed together wíth a millíng soft key menu,
pressíng ít dísplays a millíng fixed form sentence menu. If [FIXFRM]
is dísplayed together with a turning soft key menu, pressíng ít dísplays
a turníng fıxed form sentence menu.
STΛRT CYCLE ENTD MECYC ALTER FIGURE M CΠI E; EIXFRM
σ ııee
и eıııe τΘ

.
.. .,
:. τoα ØНЕε
з. в-Φ Іs RoτHτε
4. CλUf15 0Н
Š.C-я 1S oFF
The following soft keys are displayed for the fıxed form sentence
menu.
INSERT CANCEL

- Ø -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 3.ED1TING MACHINING PROGRAMS
Select a fıxed form sentence group, usíng the < and i cursor keys,
and then select a fıxed form sentence from the fixed form sentence
group, usíng the T and 1ґ cursor keys.
Pressing [INSERT] inserts the selected fixed form sentence to the
place that follows ínØediately the cursor position in the program.
Usíng thís functíon makes ít easy to enter machíníng program patterns
fixed form sentences that may be used frequently.
As the followíng example, you can regíster the fıxed form sentence, in
which undefined data ís replaced to the special character such as ? .
1. TOOL CH?ıNGE
G28 G91 X0. Y0. ;
G28 Z0. ;
T? ;
M03 S? ;
When the fıxed form sentence, in which this specíal character ís
іncluded, is ínserted to the part program, warning to urge аn operator
to enter the defined data.
Enteríng the data that ís used actually аnd pressíng ALTER can make
the correct part program.
Thís specíal character is dísplayed in red in the program wíndow.
Thís special character and dísplaying color cаn Ьe modífıed by settíng
corresponding parameters.
Set ASCII code іn decimal va1ue of the special character to the
parameter If 0 ís set to this parameter, ? ís used as the
specíal character.
Set the color code of the displayíng co1oг to the parameter
іn form of AABBCC . AA is red color va1ue, BB is green co1oг value
and CC ís blue color value. If 0 ís set to this parameter, the character is
dísplayed in red.
NOTE
1 1n maпy cases, fixed form sentences in the fıxed
form sentence menu are set up to a machine tool
by the machine tool buílder. So, the fıxed form
sentence menu varies from one machine tool to
another.
Operators can make changes and addítions to the
menu. For details, see the descriptíons about
[SETING].
2 Start and end command fıxed form sentences can
be called from the fıxed form sentence group
separately, using, respectively, [START] and
[END].
- 65 -
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
4
EDITING CYCLE MACHINING
OPERATIONS
Pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several
times dísplays the followíng cycle machíníng soft key menu.
Two cycle machining types, míllíng and turning, are optionally
supported. A soft key menu is available for each cycle machiníng
type. 1
STØT CYCLE END MESCYC ALTER FIGURE M CODE FIXFRM
See Sections and for explanatíons about [M CODE] and
[FIXFRM]. 1
F1ow of creatíng a part program
Soft key menus for process programming
,й .....
,г
EHD мεscYc Fi XFRM
End
Cyc1e Processing 1
Process End Menu ; Process Start Menu Process Cyc1e Menu
x н н :
Z 8. 8881 ε ;, и:ιаІ α.. rεос . гь,.. m. . ιa ιιwиε.ιнc цкom, иc 1

τ.ιπІиα и пe σ
J
π π,Ё и.π o ,Ø я і - . : ., п aãε-чø
Γ _.:1_ 1 - _1 - I ^1-1_l _ 1:
Cyc1e Shape Menu
2 I
c ,
Oniy the menu of the cycle form which
caп be used in the selected
processing cycle is displayed
automatically.


- 66 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS
ENTERING THE START COMMAND
sТØт CYCLE END MESCYC ALTER M CODE FIXFRM

Pressing [STØT] displays the start command fıxed form sentence
menu.
Example of the fıxed form sentence menu for millíng start
6Ø Ğ
c
р
STØT ıиB. . јØLRfйC ., .
1 IØ cH Y1GE
1.5τЯRτ MILLING .Іf
d. B-f1X1S R07RTE ь І
1X1S et
ύ.ci1X1S eFF
jsELECI cvcis YOtJ wuπ τo ІнØτ. мдsн csειεcП.
1
xamnle of the fixed form sentence for turnin start

ј ІвtІІЈЇ t . R:ТІ. o uøe
420.ØØØ X S и eıııe тe
2
eиe c ., ,. 5
SтØт јS1:Ø IFt 13. 1
. .
.- TØ cHN16E
ЯX15 ROτeTE
eН WI SS
яX1S OFF
εLEст cWYΣ v1k1 4 й τ τo ІнØτ. PUSN ıØεcτЈ.
1

Select a fixed form sentence, usíng the T and cursor keys.
Pτessíng [INSERT] inserts the selected fixed form sentence to the
place that follows ímmedíately the current cursor posítíon ín the
program.
Thís operatíon makes ít easy to enter machíning program patterns
fıxed form sentences that are used frequently at machíníng program
start.

- 67 -
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1n many cases, fıxed form sentences in the fıxed
form sentence menu are set up to a machine tool
by the machine tool builder. So, the fıxed form
sentence menu varies from one machíne tool to
another.
Operators can make changes and additions to the
menu. For details, see the descriptíons about
SETING].
i

,
1
_68_
B-δ3874EN/05 OPERATION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS
SELECTING A CYCLE MACHINING TYPE
sтØт CYCLE END ME5CYC ALTER FIGUBE M CODE FIXFRM
Pressíng [CYCLE] dísplays the cycle machiníng menu.
нπιε нcэCн. εui Ë нлcн. Co +τu 9τЈ иC;lrOčкετ [ иі Rπou І иc 1

σ 2. CОHTO1цčIHG IØTOM FτиlςЮ
[ ОNTOØING SIDE FIHISH
-ρ ОHTOORIHGCCλü 1FER
LECT CYCLE YOiJ 13f 1T TO ıNSERT. P11ςH [SELFCT I

2. TUčHIN6 IHHER ROUGH
Γ
Іi1_ З. T 1<čNING FRCE ROU6H

a.τURHτиscOUTER sEMI-FINiSH 4
5.TURHIH6 1NNER SEMI-f1Hı5H Γ
The followíng soft keys are displayed for the cycle machíning menu.
SELECT CANCEL

Select a cycle machíníng group, using the and > cursor keys, and
then select a cycle machining type from the cycle machiníng group,
using the T and cursor keys.
Pressing [SELECT] dísplays the data entry wíndow for the selected
cycle machíníng type.
After a menu nØber ís inputted, ít ís possíble that cycle machiníng ís
selected by pressing INPUT key.
Γ

- 69 -
1
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE

The scroll bar displayed on the right edge of the
cycle machining menu window indicates the
approximate positíon of the cursor throughout the
cycle machining menu.
1f the scroll bar marker ís on the middle of the scroll
bar, therefore, ít ís 1ikely that part of the cycle
machíning menu is hidden behind the window. 1f
this is the case, pressing the cursor key makes
the hidden part vísíble.


- 70 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS
ENTERING CYCLE MACHINING DATA
a f .
,o ııee
x 420.ØØ0 и eıυв
İı Θ
ς ctn C01δι. ЛE,Яτι ,
y вoττoн тнιc a+εsЅ т= ^в
н sІoε τнІαиεsЅ s=
ctJi DEVTH OF пx ι Ј = s Γ
ѕііж гіиτѕи εмrnиπ іc=Г
вoтτoи FІиτsн ιm н τ = . Г
FEEB UNTE- SIN . CUT ε=Γ
FEED UNTE- oτн. cUT υ
FEEB UNTE - иxІsε= Icut DEPTH OF PDDiUS ir
ч τи аяεxп.s.cим. INCH>
The cycle machining data entry wíndow ís dívided into two sections,
oлe section for cutting condítíons and the other for detailed data.
CUT COND. DETAIL
Pressíng the E or cursor key switches between the two sections
and changes the displayed tab. The character in the selected tab is
dísplayed ín b1ue.
Pressíng the T or cursor key can place the cursor on a desired data
ínput item.
There are two types of data ínput ítems. One type includes those
entered as nØbers, аnd the other type, those selected from a menu
dísplayed usíng a soft key. For the fírst type, the message KEY IN
NlTMERALS. ís dísplayed in the lower sectíon of the window. For
the second type, the message SELECT SOFT KEY ís displayed.
Necessary data can Ьe entered by referencíng a comment for the data
ínput ítem and a gaíde chart dísplayed in the wíndow.
The followíng soft keys are displayed for the machíníng cycle data
window.
Cнcuнs CANCEL
When the necessary data has been entered, pressíng [INSERT] ínserts
a block for the related cycle machíníng ínto a machíníng program.
- 71 -
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS OPERATION B-б3874 E N/05
NOTE
1 Among the data item displayed in the cutting condition
window, there are data should be danger if they are set
automatically such as cutting amount or feedrate. These
data should be entered by an operator always. Other data
aгe set automatically.
2 Data ítems dísplayed in the detaíl window are usually set
automatically by duplicating the value entered last time. So,
check these automatically set value and modify them if
necessary.
3 Executing cycle machiníng requires a cycle machíning
block and a fıgure block, which wi11 be explaíned later.
Once a cycle machíning block has been entered, therefore,
be sure to enter a fıgure block in succession.
4 A data item with an asterisk displayed at íts ríght end has a
default value. You need to enter no data if you accept the
default value.
5 The [CHCURS] soft key is displayed in data entry windows
for cycle machining, fıgure, and contour programs.
Pressing this soft key can select whether the and >
cursor keys are to be used for tab switching or cursor
movement withín the entered data. 1f tab switching is
selected, Tab <-- is displayed in the upper ríght section
of the window. 1f cursor movement is selected, Character
-- is displayed.
1
1
- 72 -
в-sзв7aεNıo5 OPEØTION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS
SELECTING FIGURES
In usual case, enteríng a cycle motíon block displays contínuously
the followíng fgure menu exclusívely used for the already entered
cycle machíníng.
Exam 1e of fı ure menu for nocketín
., σ ııe0
42Ø.000 и e ю
гe

і аІіі
POCKET F1G 5UiłRROGKΦ?

в 2. ж-C1Ø CσØ
Q З. ж-τкЯО cд κsи ε
1. ХУ-ѓ Е mκ +uε FτH кε
. Ч2-Ѕі RЕ CuВxYluε
ECT F16UF YOU Ø TO 1N5FRT. PσSłf iSELECT7.
щ7
ЕLLLі1ґЫЉL1L
L
The cycle figure menu window ís divíded into two sections, one
sectíon for selecting fıgшe and the other for subprogram.
Еxample of tab for pocketíng
POCKET FIG SUBPROGRAM
When the figure selectíon window ís selected, the characters of the tab
are dísplayed in b1ue. Select a desíred fıgшe by movíng the cursor
with the cursor keys T and .
SELECT CANCEL
Pressíng [SELECT] dísplays a data entry wíndow for the selected
fgure. ι
There are 2 types of figures used for cycle machiníng, fıxed form
figure and free form fıgшe.
The former one ís predefined fıgшe such as square and círcle, and can
be specífıed by enteríng mіnіmum data such as side length or círcle
radíus.
The later one is specífıed Ьy enteríng figures by líne-or aгc along the
f gшes written on a b1ue print one by one.
- 73 -
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
Pressíng the > cursor key dísplays the menu window of subprogram
aтіd the character in the selected tab ís dísplayed in b1ue.
If some fıgшe blocks were created as subprogram in advance, the
subprogram number and name are dísplayed in the subprogram menu,
and suitable subprogram can be selected by placíng the cursor on it.
Pressíng [SELECT] create the block for callíng the selected
subprogram as M98 Pxxxx ; in the actual part program.
It is specífıed by program number to be dísplayed in the subprogram
menu or not.
For turníng cycle machíníng fıgшe, the mínímum and maximum
program number of the programs should be used as the subprogram
aгe set ín the parameter TFIGSNO and
TFIGENO .
For míllíng cycle machiníng fıgшe, the minímum and maкímum
program number of the programs should be used as the subprogram
are set ín the parameter MFIGSNO and
MFIGENO .
Subprogram whose number is wíthín these range ís dísplayed in the
subprogram menu for turníng oг millíng cycle fıgшe.
Over 2 fıgшe blocks can be specífıed continuously for one cycle
machiníng block. If addíng another figure block to the part program in
whích cycle machíníng block and figure block were already ínserted,
press [FIGURE] in the soft-keys of program screen and make the
fıgшe menu wíndow display.
But, ín this case, a11 figure menus for a11 kind of cycle machíníng aгe
displayed in one screen. Thís ís different from the figure menu
displayed at the tíme some cycle machining block ís ínserted.
STØT CYCLE END ALTER FIGURE M CODE FIXFRM

NOTE
The scroll bar dísplayed on the ríght edge of the
fıgure menu wíndow índicates the approximate
posítíon of the cursor throughout the fıgure menu.
1f the scroll bar marker ís on the middle of the scroll
bar, therefore, ít ís 1ikely that part of the fıgure
menu ís hídden behínd the window. 1f thís ís the
case, pressing the .L cursor key makes the hídden
part vísible.
- 74 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS
ENTERING F1XED FORM FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE
MACHINING
selecting the fixed form fıgшe dísplays the data entry window for
cycle machíníng fixed form data entry window.
xamvle of the nocketíng fixed form fı
aus.ısгzε гacε Posıτj
ł гGURE TYPE T=
BflSE P05ГТt0м в=
нE[GHT UΣFTN L=
CEMFR POIMTςX? H=
cεиτεк rдτмтí j
ιεн тн ГØ x нxıіmЅj
Гεиcтн FaR и aWx[ıs
CINìNER Rfü IUS R_
AHCi E ΦÍ
A data entry wíndow for hole positíons, fixed form figшes mílling ,
turning groove figшes, oт screw figures turning may Ьe extended
over two pages as necessary.
Pressing the oτ i cursor key swítches between the two pages. It
also changes the dísplayed tab.
Pressíng the T or cursor key can place the cursor on a desíred data
input item.
There are two types of data ínput ítems. One type includes those
entered as nØbers, and the other type, those selected from a menu
ł
dísplayed using a soft key. For the fırst type, the message KEY IN
λΠJMERALS. is dísplayed іn the lower section of the window. For
the second type, the message sELECT SOFT KEY is dísplayed.
Necessary data can be entered by refeτencíng a comment for the data
input ítem and a guide chart displayed in the window.
The followíng soft keys are displayed for the fixed form fıgure data
entry windows.
CONCAV CλNCEL
When the necessary data has been entered, press [1NSERT] or
[NXTFIG], then a block for the related figшe block ís ínserted into a
machíníng program.
Pressíng [INSERT] returns to the program wíndow. Pressing
[NXTFIG] displays figure selectíng menu agaín.
- 75 -
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 Moгe than one fıgure can be entered in successíon
for a síngle cycle machíníng type.
Cyc1e machíning ís executed for each of the
specifıed fıgures sequentially.
2 An ordinary 1S0 code block can be entered
between cycle machíníng and fıgure blocks. 1f this
ís done, no machíníng operation takes place ín the
cycle machíning block. lnstead, the 1S0 code block
entered before the fıgure block ís executed. Cyc1e
machíníng ís executed only ín the fıgure block after
the 1S0 codt block has been executed.
Output as a subprogram
When bít 1 of parameter No. 14851 ís set to 1, fıxed form fıgure data
can be output as a subprogram. The operation procedure is descńbed
below.
<1> Press the [INSERT] soft key in the fixed form figure data input
wíndow.
ıx
._,u 20ІЈИ
,и eoo5e
S ø 0
нииε rnsτтjsкır 1εεmε иπsІ 11
BйŚE PU5ITIØ и=
CCNTCR P07Н X H= 12. 5
- CENiER Po1ЫT Y u- б5.
RfłD1US R 72.
SiRRi POJItT RHGIE H=Γ
HUMØ oε HOLΣ C=јё
- 76 -
B-G3874EN/05 OPEØTION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS
<2> A screen for selectíng fixed form figure data as a subprogram ís
dísplayed as shown below.

. 1NSERT IN CURRENT PROGRRM
- CREЯTЕ ЯЅ UB PROGRRM
HtT ј

јЅІЕСТ ØATIVE METHOD.
<3> When creatíng fıxed form fıgшe data as a subprogram, select
CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM .
г----
- INSERT IN CURRENT PROGRAM
CREATE RS SUB PROGP,RM
SUBPRO H0.: -
COMMEНT: --
<4> If a comment ís entered, the entered comment ís added to the
M98P block of the maín program and the subprogram at the
tíme of program output.
<5> Pressíng the [OK] soft key outputs a created fıxed form fıgшe
program as a subprogram to the machíníng program.
C
г
- 77 -
ι
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS OPERATION B-63874ENl05
ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA FOR CYCLE
MACHINING
For cycle machíníng, an arbitrary fıgure consisting of círcles and
straight línes can Ьe entered by performíng automatíc calculation on
entered data to obtaín the end poínt of each figure even if no end point
ís specífied on the drawing.
1 Entering start poínts
Be sure to enter a start poínt for the begínníng of an arbitrary
figure.
After enteríng necessary data, press [OK].
.,
ELEMENT 1
FIGLIRE TYPE T=
START POINT X X=[
START POINT Y Y=
BASE POSITION Z=[
ECT SOFT KEY.
2 Selecting a figure
A menu for fıgure selection is displayed on soft keys as shown
below. Select whatever ís necessary.

LINE ARC A^RC CR CC ALTER DELETE RECALC CREATE CANCEL
l LL 1
3 Entering fıgure data
When a figure ís selected, a figure data entry window appears. In
thís window, enter the figure data specífied on the drawíng.
Γ
There aгe two types of data ínput items. One type íncludes those
entered as numbers, and the other type, those selected from a
menu dísplayed usíng a soft key. For the fırst type, the message
KEY IN NUMEØLS. ís displayed in the lower section of the
wíndow. For the second type, the message SELECT SOFT
KEY is dísplayed.
After enteríng the necessary data, press [OK].
1
-78-

B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS
NOTE
As fıgures are entered, they are drawn ín the fıgure
entry wíndow.
1n the upper section of the wíndow, symbols for
entered fıgures aгe displayed sequentíally, starting
at the 1eft. The E- oг -+ cursor key can be used to
select an entered fıgure; the línes that correspond
to the selected fıgure wi11 be dísplayed ín yellow.
4 Changíng figure data
P1ace the cursor on the fıgшe that contaíns the fıgшe data you
want to change, and press [ALTER]. The fıgure data entry
wíndow appears. In this wíndow, place the cursor on the data
ínput item you want to change, and enter new data.
If you want to delete data, press the CAN and INPUT keys ín the
stated sequence.
Pressíng [OK] closes the figure data entry wíndow. Press
[RECALC] to perform calculatíon for a11 entered figures, and
check drawn figures to see íf the íntended changes have been
made.
5 Insertíng new figures
After placíng the cursor on the fıgшe that precedes ímmediately
the place where your want to add a fıgшe, select the fıgure to be
added from the soft key menu.
In the fıgure data entry wíndow that appears for the new figure,
enter figure data necessary for the figure, and press [OK].
Press [RECALC] to perform calculatíon for a11 entered figures,
аnd check drawn fıgшes to see íf the íntended addítíons have
been made.
6 Deletíng unnecessary figures
After placíng the cursor on the figure you want to delete, press
[DELETE].
Press [RECALC] to perform calculatíon for a11 entered fıgures,
and check drawn fıgшes to see íf the íntended deletions have
been made.
7 Changing figures
If you want to change the type of an entered figure, delete ít and
enter a new fıgшe.
8 Wrítíng entered arbítrary figures to machíning programs
After a11 necessary fıgшes have been entered, they can Ьe written
to machíníng programs.
There are two methods for wrítíng figures to machíníng programs.
The fırst method wrítes directly to the currently selected
machíníng program. The second method writes to a newly
created subprogram.
Affter necessary data has been entered, pressíng [CREATE]
dísplays a wíndow for selectíng oпe of the creatíon methods.
- 79 -
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS OPERAτιON B-63874ENl05
Select whichever creation method you want, usíng the T and L
cursor keys.
To write to the machiníng program that has been selected, simply
press [OK].
To create a subprogram, enter a new subprogram number to the
subprogram number ítem, and then press the ØUT key. You
can enter character strings as a comment if necessary. The
comment is displayed as a program name in the líst wíndow.
Pressíng [OK] now creates a subprogram and writes fıgures to
the subprogram.
NOTE
See Chapter 5, Detailed Descríptíons about
Entering Arbitrary Figures, for descriptions about
data for arbítrary fıgures.
- 80 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPERATIONS
ENTERING CONTOUR PROGRAMS
It is possíble to enter arbítrary figшes consisting of circles and straíght
lines contour programs , whích aгe different from cycle macbining.
Pressing [G-CONT] displays the same window as for the arbítrary
fıgшe data described earlier. After performíng the same operatíons to
enter figures, wríte them to the last machining program.
In this case, a GO1/G02/G03 program in ISO code format ís created.
NOTE
See Chapter 5, Detailed Descríptíons about
Enteríng Arbítrary Figures, for descriptíons about
data entered for contour programs.
1 Entering insertíon character stríngs
Any character string can be entered to a11 fıgшe blocks entered
for a contour program.
The Iλ1S. STRIN tab ís added to the entry window for each
figure block of the contour program.
lnsertíon character strín
Data item Meanin
F LAST STRING Character stńng consístíng of up to 16 characters
entered at the begínníng ímmediately after an
EOB of each fi ure block
B NEXT STRING Character stńng consístíng of up to 16 characters
entered at the end immediately before an EOB of
each fi ure block
Usíng INSERT STRIλ1G can enter G codes and feedrates ínto figшe
blocks.
NOTE
1NSERT STRING can enter neíther a comment
based on a paír пoг aп EOB.
2 Edítíng fıgure blocks in contour programs
A figшe block entered to a contour program can be edited by
performíng fıgшe calculatíon іn the same manner as when ít was
entered.
- 81 -
4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS OPEØTION 6-б3874EN/05
For editing fıguτe blocks, entered fıgure data ís wrítten as a
comment to each fıgure block.
There ís a start poínt G code G1200, G1300, G1450, G1500, or
G1600 in the fırst figure block ín contour prograØing. P1ace
the cursor on the block, and press the [ALTER] soft key.
This operatíon dísplays a screen for edítíng contour programs.
On this screen, perform the same edítíng operatíon as for other
arbítrary fıgures.
- 82 -
6-63874EN/05 oPEØTION 4.ED1TING CYCLE MACHINING OPEØTIONS
ENTERING THE END COMMAND
sтØт CYCLE END MESCYC ALTER FIGURE M CODE FIXFRM
τ
Pressíng [END] dísplays the end command fıxed form sentence menu.
1235
Q N 81234 U Te
- gc 18 н a
e 8 e
. зε=т:
г.PR[ІбκRM εнU ıs -s ι
. σ s
.
s
ιεст cvcιε УαЈ 888110 нØ. wısи гsειεcτј.
I sεяτ
Select a fixed form sentence, using the T and .L cursor keys.
Pressíng [INSERT] ínserts the selected fixed form sentence to the
place that follows ímmedíately the current cursor posítíon iii the
program.
Thís operatíon makes it easy to enter machíníng program patterns
fıxed form sentences that are used frequently at machíning program
start.
CHANGING CYCLE MACHINING AND FIGURE DATA
To change the contents of a machining cycle and fıxed form figure,
place the cursor on the related block, and press [ALTER].
To change the contents of an arbítrary figure and contour program,
place the cursor at the fırst of the related blocks, аnd press [ALTER].
In аny case, a data entry wíndow for these ítems appears. After
makíng the necessary data changes, press [CREATE] ín the same
manner as for new entry. New figures aгe wrítten to the machíning
program.
- 83 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-б3874EN/05
5
DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT
ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
This chapter explaíns data for arbitrary figures entered wíth
MANUAL GUIDE i.
NOTE
1 When entering arbitrary fıgures, enter a11 the data
for each figure specifıed on the drawing.
1f superfluous data is entered, it wí11 not be used in
fıgure calculation; only the data necessary for
figure calculation is used.
2 1f a11 the data necessary for figure calculation is
specified on the drawing, entering ít enables figure
calculation. 1f data ís insuffıcient, however, it is
necessary to calculate and enter the necessary
figure data separately.
3 1f arbitrary-fıgure calculation according to MANUAL
GU1DE i produces more than one candidate figure,
the fıgure that passes the shortest path wi11 be
seiected automatically.
1n caiculating a contact between an arc and straight
line oг between two ares, a figure that links two
fıgures smoothly is selected automatically.
4 On the program editing screen, after moving the
cursor on the sub program ca11 command M98
P whích is composed by the arbitrary fıgure
blocks, pressing the [1NPUT] key displays the
window for editing the arbitrary fıgures to edit
directly.
5 When positioning the cursor on the block of
subprogram calling in the program-edítíng screen,
arbitrary fıgures of the subprogram is drawn on the
graphic window.
- a-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
1NCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING
In enteríng arbitrary figures of element LIλ]E or ARC , the end
poínt can Ьe set as an íncremental programming.
When positioníng the cursor on END POINT , the soft key []
and [] are dísplayed.
1 When the operator pushes the soft key [], END POINT
ís set to
Start Point of the fıgure =End Poínt of last fıgure + .
And mput the increment oг decrement in successíon. As result of
pushíng [INPUT] key, the plus íncremental value ís set.
2 When the operator pushes the soft key [], END POINT
ís set to
Start Point of the figure =End Poínt of last figure - .
And input the íncrement or decrement in successíon. As result of
pushíng [INPUT] key, the mínus íncremental va1ue ís set.
:..

Г тІFНіьѓ
.
ELEHENT йTTRtDUTE
LINE DIRECTION D=fRi HT
END P01HT 2
LRST CONNECTION L-NOTHING
NE T COHNECT10U И= нOiн1Ч6
Y 1 H Н1 1ERf S.

јSELECT 50FT KEY.
ј
ŠT. PťI ŠT. P I CFK,l1R ì CRNCEL
- 85 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 1f the last fıgure element ís CORNER R oг
CHAMFER , The point to set as the start point in
this function is as follows.
Start Point Start Point
ς
Fig1 Last fıgure is a chamfer. Fig2 Last fıgure is a comer R.
2 1f END PO1NT of the last fıgure is pending, END
PO1NT ís not set to the start point by pressing the
software key [] and []. The warning
message START PO1NT 1S PENDING. is
displayed.
5. Arbitrary Fígures for the XY P1ane
Arbítrary figures ín the XY plane can be used ín the followíng types
of míllíng.
1. Facíng
2. Contouríng Síde cuttíng
3. Pocketíng
4. Grooving
5. Emboss machíníng
NOTE
1 See Chapter 1, Milling, in Part 111 for detailed
descríptíons about data to be entered for each type
of cycle machining.
2 When entering an arbitrary fıgure for pocketíng,
make its end point coincide with its start point. To
put another way, combíne parts fıgures with blank
fıgures ín such a way that a closed curve is
created.
Pocketing ís carried out ín this closed curve.
3 1t is possible to specify PART and BLANK as
ELEMENT TYPE for an individual arbitrary fıgure.
1f a pocket is open in part, this BLANK can be
used to enter an arbítrary fıgure resembling a blank
fıgure for the open portion, thus carrying out
optimum pocketing.
_86_
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Start point: G1200 XY p1ane
.,
ELEMENT 1
EIGURE TYPE
START POINT К
START PQINT Y
BASE POSITION
HEIGNT/DEPTH
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure in facing
Note 2 [CONVEX] : Used as an outer-perimeter figure in
contouring
[CONCAV] : Used as an inner-peńmeter fıgure in
contouring and emboss machìning or a
figure in pocketing
GROOVE : Used as a fı ure in grooving
X START PO1NT X X Ørdinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı ure
Y START PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı ure
Z BASE POS1T10N Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary fı ure
D HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cutting surface
Remarks This item is displayed in Contouring,
Pocketin , Gгсоvіng and Emboss machinin .
W GROOVE W1DTH Groove width Positive value
Remarks This item is displayed in Groovíng. _
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [R1GHT] : The ńght side of an entered figure as cutting
[LEFT] : The 1eft side of an entered fıgure as cutting
Remarks This item is displayed in Open fıgure of
Contourin .
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the items, whích are
dísplayed on the input data window in editing or
alteríng.
2 Select, with a fıgure type for a start point, which
mílling operation is to use an arbitrary fıgure. Data
to be entered for the start poínt varies depending
on what figure type is selected. For details, see
descriptíons about the respectíve milling types.
- 87 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 3
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : Used as a fıgure in facing
[2] : Used as an outer-penmeter fıgure in contouring
[3] : Used as an inner-perimeter fıgure in contouring and
emboss machining or a fıgure in pocketing
[4] : Used as a fıgure in grooving
in ut value
H START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start point in ut value
V START PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the start point in ut value
B BASE POS1T10N Position of the machining surface in ut value
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cuttíng surface
input value
Remarks This item is displayed in Contouring,
Pocketin , Grooving and Emboss machinin .
D GROOVE W1DTH Groove width Positive value input value
Remarks This item is dis 1a ed in Groovin .
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : The right side of an entered figure as cutting
[2] : The 1eft side of an entered fıgure as cutting
input value
Remarks This item is displayed in Open figure of
Contourin .
NOTE
3 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which aгe
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- 88 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Straight 1ine: G1201 XY plane
ELENEHT јAτтRIBUтε
LINε DIRECTION D=LEFT UP
END POI NT X X= ^
END POINT Y Y=
ANGLε A=
LAST CONNECTION L=NOTHING
NEXi. CQNNECI I UN. :.. - M NOT N I NG
εY I N иllмÉRfλĽš.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanìn
D L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft ke .
X END PO1NT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming is роѕѕіЬІе.
Y END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming is роѕѕіЫе.
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
Remarks This data may not Ьe displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
strai ht 1ine.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately preceding
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact vvith the immediately
recedin fi ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately followíng
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact wńth the immediateiy
followin ii ure initial value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
-
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the ítems, whích are
dísplayed on the ínput data window in edítíng oг
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT X X Ørdínate of the end point of a straíght 1ine
calculatíon result
V END PO1NT Y Y Ørdínate of the end point of a straíght líne
calculatíon result
K L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straíght line is selected from a menu
indícated on a soft key.
in ut va1ue
C END PO1NT X X Ørdínate of the end point of a straight 1ine
in ut value
D END PO1NT Y Y Ørdínate of the end point of a straight line
ín ut value
A ANGLE straight-líne angle
in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] :1n contact wíth the ímmedíately precedíng fıgure
[0] : Not in contact wíth the immediately precedíng figure
ín ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : 1п contact wíth the immediately followíng fıgure
[0] : Not in contact wíth the immediately followíng fıgure
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portíon
ín ut value
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection oг contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2`OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program wíndow as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- 90 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Aгc CW : G1202 XY plane
Aгc CCW : G1203 XY p1ane
ELEHEHTјaттRτвuтε 1
EHD PDIHT x x=I
END POINT Y Y=
RADIUS R=
CENTER POINT CX Cx=ј
CENTER PDINT CY CY =
LAST CONNECTION L= NOT HI NG
HEXT CDNNECTIDN м=NOTHING
RDUTE TYPE U= SHORT
tмм INCN
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data item Meanín
X END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming s роѕѕіЬіе.
Y END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming ìs роѕѕіЬіе.
R RADIUS Aгc radius
CX CENTER PO1NT CX X coordinate of an arc center
CY CENTER PO1NT CY Y coordinate of an arc center
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately preceding
fıgure l
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fi ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the ímmediately preceding
fıgure
г [NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedın fı ure initial value
U ROUTE TYPE [LONG] : An aгc with a short route is made
[SHORT] : An aгc with a long route is made
inítial value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.

NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the ínput data window in editing or
alteríng.
- 91 -
г
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION Bδ3874EN/05
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data item Meanín _
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END P1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Aгc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc center calculation result
C END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point in ut value
D END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point in ut value
E RADIUS Arc radius in ut value
P CENTER PO1NT CX X Ørdinate of an arc center in ut value
Q CENTER PO1NT CY Y coordinate of an arc center in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding flgure
in ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
U ROUTE TYPE [1] : An arc with a long route is made
[0] : An arc with a short route is made
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection oг contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program wíndow as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- 92 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Chamfering: G1204 XY plane
ELEHENT TIRIEtJTE
CHAMFER C=Γ
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data item Meanín
C CHAMFER Amount of chamferin radius value, positive value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data item Meanin
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the input data window in editing or
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanin
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
calculation result
V END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
calculation result
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering radius value, positive value
in ut vaiue
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
ìn ut value
NOTE
2`OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- -
- 93-
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
2 By setting the parameter , Corner
element between a blank element and a part
element can be created in the opposite direction.
, c 4
c1

, c
c c c
Dotted line blank element
Normal line part element
-4-3-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Corner roundíng: G1205 XY p1ane
ELEMENr jATтRτвuтε
CARNER RAD I US R=
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data item Meanin
R CORNER RADIUS Corner roundin radius value, positive value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the input data wìndow in editing or
alteríng.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END P1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Arc radius calculatìon result
1 CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc center calculation result
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : clockиńse
3 : counterclockwise
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
- 95 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B 63874EN/05
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
3 By setting the parameter , Corner
element between a blank element and a part
element can be created in the opposite direction.
End of arbítrary fígures: G1206 XY plane
Thís block is output at the end of a seńes of arbitтary-figure blocks.
NOTE
A series of arbitrary fıgures must be enclosed
between G1200 start point and G1206 end of
arbitrary fıgures .
- 96 -
в-s3s7aεNıo5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
52 ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE YZ PLANE
Arbitrary fıgшes in the YZ plane can be used ín the followíng types of
míllíng.
1. Facing
2. Contouring Síde cuttíng
3. Pocketíng
4. Groovíng
5. Emboss machiníng
NOTE
See Chapter 1, Míllíng, ín Part 111 for detailed
descríptíons about data to be entered for each type
of cycle machining.
Start point: G1300 YZ plane
ELEMENT
FIGURE TYPE T=
STNRT POINT Y Y=
START POINT Z Z=
BflSE POSITION x-J
HEIGHT/DEPTH D=
ELECT SIJFT KEY.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T FIGURE ATTRI6UTE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure in facing
Note 2 [CONVEX] : Used as an outer-peńmeter fıgure in
contouring
[CONCAVE] : Used as an ìnner-perimeter fıgure in
contouríng and emboss machining or a
figure in pocketíng
GROOVE : Used as a fi ure in grooving
Y START PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı ure
Z START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
X BASE POS1T10N Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary fı uгe
D HEIGHT/DEPTH Heíght or Depth from Base position to cutting surface
Remarks This item is displayed in Contouring,
Pocketing, Grooving and Emboss
machinin .
W GROOVE W1DTH Groove width Positive va1ue
Remarks This ìtem is dis 1a ed in Groovin .
- 97 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63β74EN/05
ı ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meaníng
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [R1GHT] The right side of an entered figure as
cutting
[LEFT] The 1eft sïde of an entered fıgure as cutting
Remarks This item ís displayed in Open flgure of
Contouring.
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the ítems, whích are
displayed on the input data wíndow in editíng or
altering.
2 Select, wíth a fıgure type for a start point, whích
mílling operation ís to use an arbitrary fıgure. Data
to be entered for the start poínt varies dependíng
on what fıgure type ís selected. For details, see
descriptions about the respective millíng types.
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 3
Data item Meanin
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : Used as a flgure in facing
[2] : Used as an outer-peńmeter flgure in contouring
[3] : Used as an inner-perimeter fıgure in contouring and
emboss machining or a fıgure in pocketing
[4] : Used as a fıgure in grooving
in ut value
H START PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the start point in ut value
V START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the start point in ut value
B BASE POS1T10N Position of the machining surface in ut va1ue
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cutting surface
input value
Remarks This item is displayed in Contouring,
Pocketin , Grooving and Emboss machinin .
D GROOVE \PJlDTH Groove width Positive value input value
Remarks This item is dis 1a ed ìn Groovin .
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : The right side of an entered flgure as cutting
[2] : The 1eft side of an entered figure as cutting
Remarks This item is displayed in Open flgure of
Contouńng.
in ut value
NOTE
3 OUTPUT DATA means the ítems, whích are
displayed on the program wíndow as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- 98 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Straíght 1íne: G1301 YZ p1ane
ELEMENT јAT TR I B1Л E
LINE DIRECTION D=
END POINT Y Y=I
END PO I НT 2 2=ј
ANGLE R=ј
LAST CONNECT l 0N L= NOT H I NG
ЫEXT CONNECTION M=NOTNING
IsELECI SβFT KEY.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
D L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft ke .
Y END PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming is роѕѕіЬІе.
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straìght line
Remarksl This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming s роѕѕіЬіе.
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
Remarks This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
strai ht 1ine.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact wth the immediately
preceding fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately following
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
followin fı ure initial value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
va1ue.
- 99 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the input data window in editing or
altering _
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín _
H END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straıght line
calculatìon result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
calculation result
K L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft key.
in ut value
C END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
ìn ut value
D END PO1NT Z Z Ørdinate of the end point of a straight line
in ut value
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : 1n contact with the immediately following fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately following fıgure
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of plural intersectíon oг contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, whích are
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- 100 -
Bfi3874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Aгc CW : G1302 YZ plane
Arc CCW : G1303 YZ plane
ELEHENT ATTRIBUTE
END POINT Y Y=
END POINT Z 2=Г
RADIUS R=Г
CENTER POINT CY CY =Г
CENTER POINT CZ CZ=Г
LAST CONNECTION L=NOTHING
НEКT CONNECTION H= NOTHING
ROUTE TYPE 1= SHORT
јft.йi+ INCH
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
Y END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming is possibie.
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming is possible.
R RADIUS Aгc radius
CY CENTER PO1NT CY Y coordinate of an arc center
CZ CENTER PO1NT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n cдntact with the immediately preceding
figure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately preceding
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı ure inıtiaİ value
U ROUTE TYPE [LONG] : An arc with a long route is made
[SHORT] : Aп arc with a short route is made
initial value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meaning
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portìon
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the input data window in editing or
alteríng.
- 101 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05

ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meaníng
H END PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point calculation resultј
R RADIUS Arc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc center calculation result
C END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point in ut value
D END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point in ut value
E RADIUS Aгc radius in ut value
P CENTER PO1NT CY Y coordinate of an arc center in ut value
Q CENTER PO1NT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] :1п contact with the immediately preceding figure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
U ROUTE TYPE [1] :An arc with a long route is made
[0] : An arc with a short route ìs made
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value _
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection oг contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creatíng
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- 102 -
B 63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Chamfering: G1304 YZ p1ane
Е HІ
ELEMENT 1AT1RIBU1E
CNAMFER C=Γ

EY IN NUMERALS.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
C CHAMFER Amount of chamferin radius value, positive value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
va1ue.
ε
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the input data window in editing or
aitering.
ELEMENT å ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
1 Data item Meanín
H END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight hne
calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight hne
calculation result
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering radìus value, positive value
in ut va1ue
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
diрlay purposes. __
- 103 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
3 By settíng the parameter 0=1, Coгпeг
eiement between a blank element and a part
element can be created ín the opposite directíon.
, c 1 ,
c

c
\
c
Dotted líne : blank element
Normal 1ine : part eiement
- 104 -
в-sзв7aεNıo5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Corner rounding: G1305 YZ p1ane
ELEHEHL fλT TRI BUTE
CORNER RADIUS R=
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
R CORNER RADIUS Corner roundin radius value, positive value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the ítems, whích are
dísplayed on the ínput data wíndow in editing or
alteríng.
ELEMENT å ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanïn
H END PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END P1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Aгc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of an arc center calculation resutt
J CENTER PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc center calculation result
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : clockwise
3 : counterclockwise
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
- 105 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION в-s3в7aεNıo5
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creating
program: 1t can be referenced oniy for program
display purposes.
3 By setting the parameter , Corner
eiement between a biank element and a part
eiement can be created in the opposite direction.
End of arbítrary figures: G1306 YZ plane
Thís block ís output at the end of a seńes of arbítгary-figuτe blocks.
NOTE
A series of arbitrary fıgures must be enclosed
between G1300 start point and G1306 end of
arbitrary fıgures .

J
ıı
J

λ

,
;
- 106 -
J
в-s3в74εN/o5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE POLAR COORDINATE
1NTERPOLATION PLANE XC PLANE
The followíng types of millíng can be specífied also for the polar
coordínate ínterpolatíon p1ane XC plane , and arbitrary fıgures in the
XC p1aлe caл be used in these míllíng types.
1. Facíng
2. Contouríng Síde cuttíng
3. Pocketing
4. Groovíng
5. Emboss machцı пg
NOTE
1 See Chapter 1, Millíng, in Part 111 for detailed
descriptions about data to be entered for each type
of cycle machining.
2 X coordínate values specifıed for the XC plane
must also be díameters.
Start poínt: G1500 XC plane
.,
ELEMENT l
FIGURE TYPE T= і
START PDINT X X=
START POINT C C
BASE POSITION Z
HEIGHTıDEPTH D=ј
SELECT SOFT KEY.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [FACE] : lised as a fıgure in facing
Note 2 [CONVEX] : Used as an outer-perìmeter fıgure in
contouring
[CONCAV] : Used as an inner-peńmeter fıgure in
contouring and emboss machining or a
fıgure in pocketing
GROOVE : Used as a fı uгe in grooving
X START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start poirit of an arbitrary fı uгe
C START PO1NT C C coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
Z BASE POS1T10N Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary fi ure
D HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cutting surface
Remarks This item is displayed in Contouring,
Pocketin , Grooving and Emboss machinin .
- 107 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION в-6з874ENı05
1 _ ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1_ _
Data ítem Meanín
W GROOVE VИDTH Groove иńdth Positive value
Remarks This item is dis 1a ed in Groovin .
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [R1GHT] : The right side of an entered fıgure as cutting
[LEFT] : The 1eft side of an entered fıgure as cutting
Remarks This item is displayed in Open fıgure of
Contouńn .
F FACE POS1T10N [+FACE] : References the fıgure +end face
[-FACE] : References the flgure -end face
Remarks This item is displayed when the parameter
No.27000Ø=1. _
Y ROTATION AX1S [C] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
NAME [A] : The rotation axis is the A axis
[B] : The rotation axis is the B axis
[E] : The rotation axis is the E axis
Remarks This item is displayed when the parameter

NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, whích are
displayed on the ínput data window in editíng or
altering.
2 Select, with a fıgure type for a start point, which
milling operatíon ís to use an arbítrary fıgure. Data
to be entered for the start point varíes depending
on what fıgure type ís selected. For detai[s, see
descriptíons about the respective míllíng types.
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 3
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : Used as a fıgure in facing
[2] : Used as an outer-perimeter fıgure in contouring
[3] : Used as an inner-perimeter fıgure in contouńng and
emboss machining or a fıgure in pocketing
[4] : Used as a fıgure in grooving
in ut value
H START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start point in ut value
V START PO1NT C C coordinate of the start point in ut value
B BASE POS1T10N Position of the machining surface in ut value
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cuttìng surface
input value
Remarks This item is displayed in Contourìng,
Pocketin , Grooving and Emboss machinin .
D GROOVE W1DTH Groove width Positive value input va1ue
Remarks This item is dis 1a ed in Groovin .
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : The right side of an entered fıgure as cuttíng
[2] : The 1eft side of an entered figure as cutting
Remarks This item ís displayed in Open flgure of
ı Contouring
in ut value`
- 108-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 3
Data ítem Meanín
Y ROTATION AX1S [1] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
NAME [2] : The rotation axis is the A axis
[3] : The rotation axis is the B axis
[4] : The rotation axis is the E axis
in ut value
Z FACE POS1T10N [1] : References the fıgure +end face
[2] : References the fıgure -end face
in ut value
NOTE
3 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- 1 09 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-б3874EN/05
Straight 1ine: G1501 XC p1ane
? ELEMEHT έλ1 TRIBItTE ј
LINE DIRECTION D=
+:;EHD POINT X X=
EHD POINT C C=f
İ-;
RHGLE A=ј
LAST CONNECTION L= NDT H I NG
HEКT CONNECTION M= NOTHI NG
ELECT 50FT KEY.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
D L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft key. _
X END PO1NT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming is роѕѕіЬІе.
C END PO1NT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
oп the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming is роѕѕіЬІе.
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
Remarks This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
strai ht 1ine.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately
preceding figure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı uгe initial value _ _
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately following
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
following figure initial value __JI
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meaníng
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
,
- 110 -
б3874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the ínput data wíndow in editing or
alteríng.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
calculation result
V END PO1NT C C coordinate of the end point of a straíght line
calculation result
K L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft key.
in ut va1ue
C END PO1NT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
in ut value
D END PO1NT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
in ut value
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : 1п contact váth the immediately following fıgure
[0] : Not in contact vvith the immediately follováng fıgure
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut va1ue
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection oг contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creatíng
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- ІН -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION 6-б3874EN/05
Arc CW : G1502 XC plane
Arc CCW : G1503 XC plane
ELEMENI 1fЭπRІвllтε
POτмт x x=
END POіиτ C C=
RNDIUS R=f
CENTER POINT CК CX=
CENTER POINT CC CC=ј
LNST COННECT I ON L= OT H I NG
NEXT COHHECT I UN M= NOT H NG
ROUTE TYPE U=SHORT
CMM NCN3
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
X END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming is possibIe.
C END PO1NT C C coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming is possibie.
R RADIUS Aгc radius
CX` CENTER PO1NT CX X coordinate of an arc center
CC CENTER PO1NT CC C coordinate of an arc center
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact иńth the immedíately preceding
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact wìth the immediately
recedin fı ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately preceding
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı ure initial value
U ROUTE TYPE [LONG] : An arc with a long route is made
[SHORT] : An arc with a short route is made
initial value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the input data window in editíng o[
altering.
- 112-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT C C Ørdinate of an aгc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Arc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT C C Ørdinate of an arc center calculation result
C END PO1NT X X Ørdinate of an arc end point in ut value
D END PO1NT C C Ørdinate of an arc end point in ut value
E RADIUS Aгc radius in ut value
P CENTER PO1NT CX X coordinate of an arc center in ut value
Q CENTER PO1NT CC C Ørdinate of an arc center in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] :1n contact váth the immediately preceding flgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
U ROUTE TYPE [1] : An arc with a long route is made
[0] : An arc with a short route is made
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection or contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2 `OUTPUT DATA means the items, whích are
dísplayed on the program wíndow as creating
program. 1t can be referenced on1y for program
dísplay purposes.

- 1 13 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Chamfering: G1504 XC plane
ELEHENT нτтRІвUтε
cннмFεк c=
KEY IN NUMERALs.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1 _
Data ítem Meanín
C CHAMFER Amount of chamferin radius value, positive value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meaníng
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the ítems, which are
díspiayed on the input data wíndow ín edítíng or
alteríng.
ELEMENT å ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanin
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
calculation result
V END PO1NT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight líne
calculation result
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering radius value, positìve vaiue
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portìon
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
díspiayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced oniy for program
dispiay purposes.
- 114 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
NOTE
3 By setting the parameter , Corner
element between a blank element and a part
ł
element can be created in the opposite directíon.
, c \
c1

c
с f \ c c
Dotted line : blank element
Normal line : part element

k
,F
,ł
1
ι

1
ι
- 115 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Coгпeг roundíng: G1505 XC plane
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1 _
Data item Meanìn
R CORNER RADIUS Comeг roundín radius value, positive value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an ínítial
value.
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the ítems, whích are
dísplayed on the ínput data wíndow ín edítíng or
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanin
H END PO1NT X X coordínate of an arc end роіпt calculation result
V END PO1NT C C coordínate of an arc end роіnt calculatíon result
R RADIUS Aгc radius calculatíon result
1 CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT C C coordinate of an arc center calculatíon result
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : clockwíse
3 : counterclockwise
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank φrtion
ín ut value

- 116 -
B-63874EN/o5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
dispiayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
3 By setting the parameter , Corner
element between a biank element and a part
element can be created in the opposíte dírection.
End of arbítrary figures: G1506 XC plane
Thís block is output at the end of a series of arbítrary-figure blocks.
NOTE
A series of arbitrary fıgures must be enclosed
between G 1500 start poínt and G 1506 end of
arbítrary fıgures .
- 117-

5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-δ3874EN/05
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR THE CYLINDRICAL
SURFACE ZC PLANE
The followíng types of mílling can be specífied also for the cylíndrical
surface ZC p1ane , and arbítrary figwes in the ZC plane can Ьe used
іп these mílling types.
1. Facíng
2. Contouríng Síde cutting
3. Pocketíng
4. Groovíng
5. Emboss machíníng
NOTE
See Chapter 1, Milling, in Part 111 for detaíled
descríptions about data to be entered for each type
of cycle machining.
Start poínt: G1600 ZC plane
.. .,
ειεіεит
FIGURE TYPε 1 Е Г:ІіЈ
START POINT 2 Z=
START POINT C C=
BASE P05I110и X=
HEIGNT/DEPTH D=
зELECT SOFT KEY.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure in facing
Note 2 [CONVEX] : Used as an outer-perimeter fıgure in
contouring
[CONCAV] : Used as an inner-perimeter fıgure in
contouring and emboss machining or a
fıgure in pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure in grooving
Remarks Be sure to select [FACE] if facing is
selected.
Z START PO1NT Z 2 coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
C START PO1NT C C coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
X BASE POS1T10N Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary
fı u e
- 118 -
B-s3874εNıo5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
D HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base posítion to cutting surface
Remarks This item is displayed in Contouring,
Pocketing, Grooving and Emboss
machinin .
W GROOVE VИDTH Groove width Positìve value
Remarks This item is dis 1a ed in Groovin .
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [R1GHT] : The right side of an entered figure as
cutting
[LEFT] : The 1eft sìde of an entered fıgure as cutting
Remarks Thìs item is displayed in Open fıgure of
Contourin .
Y ROTATION AX1S NAME [C] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
[A] : The rotation axis is the A axis
[B] : The rotation axis is the B axis
[E] : The rotation axis is the E axis
Remarks This item is displayed when the parameter

NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the ìtems, whích are
dísplayed on the ínput data window ín edíting or
altering.
2 Select, with a fıgure type for a start poínt, whích
milling operatíon is to use an arbitrary fıgure. Data
to be entered for the start point varies dependíng
on what fıgure type ís selected. For details, see
descriptions about the respective míllíng types.
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 3
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : Used as a fıgure in facíng
[2] : Used as an outer-peńmeter fıgure in contouring
[3] : Used as an ínner-perimeter fıgure in contouring and
emboss machining or a fıgure in pocketing
[4] : Used as a fıgure in grooving
in ut value
H START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the start point in ut value
V START PO1NT C C coordinate of the start point in ut value
1 START PO1NT Z Z cдordinate of an arc end point calculation result
AX1 S
J START PO1NT C C coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
AX1 S
B BASE POS1T10N Position of the machining surface in ut va1ue
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cutting surface
Remarks This item is displayed in Contouring,
Pocketing, Grooving and Emboss machining.
in ut value
D GROOVE W1DTH Groove width Positive value
Remarks This item is displayed in Groovíng.
in ut value
- 119-
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION в-б3874εиıo5
- ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 3
Data ítem Meaníng _
P ı FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : The rìght side of an entered fıgure as cutting
[2] : The 1eft side of an entered fıgure as cutting
Remarks This item is displayed in Open figure of
Contouńng .
in ut value _
Y FACE POS1T10N [1] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
[2] : The rotation axis is the A axis
[3] : The rotation axis is the B axis
[4] : The rotation axis is the E axis
in ut value
NOTE
3 OUTPUT DATA means the ítems, which are
displayed on the program wíndow as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 120 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Straíght 1ine: G1601 ZC plane
. .
ELEriENT јRTTRIBUTE
LINE DIRECTION D=
END POINT Z Z=
END POINT C C=І
ANGLε A=І
LAST CONNECTION L=NOTHING
HEXТ , .Ct1NktÉCT I λN 11 HOT H I NG
SEιεCT SOFT KEY.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data item Meanín
D L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft ke .
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming is роѕѕіЬіе.
C END PO1NT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming is роѕѕіЬІе.
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
Remarks This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
strai ht 1ine.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact иńth the immediately
preceding fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1п contact with the immediately following
figure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
fоІІо пg fı ure initial value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 7
Data item Meanín
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
- 121 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the input data window in editing or
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanin
H END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end poınt of a straight line
calculation result
V END PO1NT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
calculation result
K L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft key.
in ut value
C END PO1NT Z Z Ørdinate of the end point of a straight line
input value
D END PO1NT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
in ut value
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] : 1п contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in uł value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately following fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately following fıgure
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection oг contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
dispiayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 122 -
B-б3874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Arc CW : G1602 ZC plane
Arc CCW : G1603 ZC p1ane
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE
END POINT 2 Z=
END POINT C C=
RADIUS R=j
CENTER POINT cZ CZ=
CENTER POINT CC cC=
1 ιяSт COЫиεCтτOи L=NOTHI NG
иEXT CONNECTION м= иoτнτ иG
RUUTE TYPE U= sHURT
MM, INCH
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming is possibie.
C END PO1NT C C coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming is possibie.
R RADIUS Aгc radius
CZ CENTER PO1NT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center
CC CENTER PO1NT CC C coordinate of an arc center
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately
preceding fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately
preceding fıgure
h [NO SET] : Not in contact wìth the immediately
recedin fı uгe initial value
U ROUTE TYPE [LONG] : An arc with a long route is made
[SHORT] : An arc with a short route is made
initìal value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the items, whích are
dísplayed on the ínput data wíndow ín editing or
altering.
- 23 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION в-638ıaεм1o5
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem - Meaníng
H 1 END PO1NT Z 1 Z coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT C C coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Arc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT Z Z Ørdinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT C C coordinate of an arc center calculation result
C END PO1NT Z Z Ørdinate of an arc end point in ut value
D END PO1NT C C Ørdinate of an arc end point in ut value
E RADIUS Aгc radius in ut value
P CENTER PO1NT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center in ut value
Q CENTER PO1NT CC C coordinate of an arc center in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immedíately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately precedíng fıgure
ín ut value
U ROUTE TYPE [1] : Aп aгc wíth a long route is made
[0] : An arc with a short route ís made
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portíon
in ut value
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of plural íntersection oг contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2`OUTPUT DATA means the ítems, whích are
dísplayed on the program wíndow as creatíng
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 12--
в-s387aεNıo5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Chamfering: G1604 ZC plane
.
ειεмεмт ε π τı τЈтε
cнaмεεε
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
C CHAMFER Amount of chamferin radius value, positive value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data item Meanín
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
va1ue.
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the input data window in editing or
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end poìnt of a straight line
calculation result
V END PO1NT C C coordinate of the end point of a straight line
calculation result
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfeńng radius value, positive value
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which aгe
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 125 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION в-в387aENıo5
NOTE
3 By setting the parameter , Corner
element between a blank element and a part
element can be created in the opposite dírectíon.
, c \
c1
І
c
с f
c
Dotted line : blank element
Normal line : part element
- 126 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Corner rounding: G1605 ZC piane
і
ELEHEHT јAтТRlBuтε
CO2NER RADI US R=Ј
EY IN NUMERALS.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data item Meanin
R CORNER RADIUS Corner roundin radius value, positive value
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, whích are
dispiayed on the input data window in editing or
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT C C coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Arc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT C C coordinate of an arc center calculation result
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : Clockипse
3 : Counterclockwise
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portìon
in ut value
- 127 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, whích are
displayed on the program window as creatíng
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
3 By setting the parameter , Corner
eiement between a blank element and a part
element can be created in the opposite dírectíon.
End of arbitrary figures: G1606 ZC plane
Thίs block ís output at the end of a series of arbítrary-fıgure blocks.
NOTE
A series of arbitrary fıgures must be enclosed
between G1600 start poínt and G1606 end of
arbitrary fıguresj.
- 128 -
в-sзв7aεиıo5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR TURNING ZX PLANE
Arbítrary fıgures ín the ZX plane can be used in tuming.
1. Outer surface rough]semifinish/fmish turning
2. Inner surface rough/semífmish/fmish turning
З. End surface rough/semifmish/fmish turning
NOTE
1 See Section , Turning, ín Part 111 for detaíled
descríptíons about data to be entered for each type
of cycle machining.
2 VVhen entering an arbitrary fıgure for turning, make
íts end poínt coíncíde wíth íts start poínt. To put
another way, combine parts fıgures with blank
figures іп such a way that a closed curve ís
created.
Turníng ís carried out ín thís closed curve.
3 1t ís possible to specífy PART and BLANK as
ELEMENT TYPE for an índívidual arbítrary fıgure.
Thís BLANK can Ьe used to enter an arbítrary
figure resembling a blank figure to be actually
machined, so any portion other than the blank
portíon wí11 not be cut. Thís way, optimum rough
turning can be realized.
Start poínt: G1450 ZX p1ane
ііі; .,
ELEHENi ј
START POINT DX DX=
START POINT 2 2=
EY IN NUMERALS.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA 1
Data ítem Meanín
DX START PO1NT DX X Ørdinate of the start point of an агЫtгагу fı ure
Z START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the start point of an агЬіtгагу fı ure
- 129 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63вıaENıo5
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the input data window ín editing or
altering.
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanin
H START PO1NT DX X coordinate of the start point in ut value
V START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the start point input value
NOTE
2`OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 130-
в-sзвıaεиıo5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Straight 1ine: G1451 ZX piane
ELEMENT τткτ вıзтε
Lτиε DIRECTION D=
END PIIINT DX DX=1
END PLìINT Z Z=
RНGιε A=
LAST COЫНECTIOи L=NOтHING
MEXT CONNECTION M=NOTHING
јELECт SOFT KEY.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
D L1NE DIRECTION The directíon of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated oп a soft ke .
DX END PO1NT DX X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straíght 1íne.
Remarks2 lncremental programming is possible.
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end poínt of a straight line
Remarks1 This data may not be displayed depending
on the value entered as the direction of the
straight 1ine.
Remarks2 lncremental programming s роѕѕіЬІе.
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
Remarks This data may not be displayed
depending on the value entered as the
direction of the strai ht 1ine.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT]: 1п contact with the immediately preceding
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [ТANGNT]: 1п cдntact with the immediately following
fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
followin fı ure initial value
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
F F1N1SH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for finishing positive value
Remarks 1t ís possible to set the feedrate to each
block on Finishin .
- 131 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the ínput data window in editing or
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanin
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of the end poınt of a straight line
calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straìght line
calculation result
K L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft key.
in ut value
C END PO1NT DX X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
in ut value
D END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
in ut value
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately preceding figure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] :1n contact with the immediately following figure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately following fıgure
in ut value _
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection oг contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value _
F F1N1SH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for fınishing

in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, whích are
displayed on the program wíndow as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 132 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Arc CW : G1452 ZX plane
Arc CCW : G1453 ZX plane
ELEMENT ЯTTRIRUTE
END POINT DX
END POINT 2 Z=Γ
RADIUS R=
CENTER POINT CDX CDX=
CENTER POINT CZ CZ=
LRsT CONNECTION L=NOTHING
HEXT CONNECT I 0H M= НOT H I NG
кEx I N иuMεRЯІs.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
DX END PO1NT DX X coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming is роѕѕіЬіе.
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks lncremental programming is роѕѕіЬІе.
R RADIUS Aгc radìus
CDX CENTER PO1NT CDX X coordinate of an arc center
CZ CENTER PO1NT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : 1n contact with the immediately
preceding fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
recedin fı ure initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately
following fıgure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately
_ following fıgure initial value
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
F F1N1SH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for fınishing positive value
Remarks 1t is possible to set the feedrate to each
block on Finishin .
1
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the input data window in editing or
alteríng. _




- 133 -

5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION вsзв7aεNıo5
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanin
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an aгc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordınate of an arc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Arc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc center calculation result
C END PO1NT X X Ørdinate of an arc end point in ut value
D END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end ı oint in ut value
E RADIUS Aгc radius in ut value
P CENTER PO1NT CDX X Ørdinate of an arc center in ut value
Q CENTER PO1NT CZ Z Ørdinate of an arc center in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] : 1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value _
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : 1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[0] . Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value _ __
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
---- _______
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection or contact. the operator
sets a candidate. i
in ut value
F F1N1SH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for fınishing --
in ut value
NOTE
Ì
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which aгe
displayed on the program wíndow as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 134 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Chamferíng: G1454 ZX plane
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE
CHAMFER
CEY I H NUMERALs.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
C CHAMFER Amount of chamferin radius value, positive value
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
va1 ue.
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
F F1N1SH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for fınishing positive value
Remarks 1t is possible to set the feedrate to each
block oп Finishin .
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the ínput data window in editing or
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering radius value, positive value
in ut value
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
F F1N1SH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for fınishing
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program wíndow as creatíng
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
ı
- 135 -
ι

5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION 8-63874EN/o5
NOTE
3 By settíng the parameter , Corner
element between a blank element and a part
element can be created ín the opposite direction.
,
c 4
c1
І
c
c c
Dotted line : blank element
Normal line : part element
- 136-
в-6зв74εиıo5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Corner rounding: G1455 ZX p1ane
ειεгıεнт aтτRτвuτε 1
CORNER RADIUS R=
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
R CORNER RADIUS Corner roundin radius value, positive value
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks The system sets the last data as an initial
value.
ATTRIBUTE 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
F F1N1SH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for finishing positive value
Remarks 1t is possible to set the feedrate to each
block on Finishin .
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the input data window in edítíng or
altering.
ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Arc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT X X Ørdinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT Z Z Ørdinate of an arc center calculation result
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : Clockиńse
3 јL Counterclockwise
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion
in ut value
F F1N1SH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for fınishing
in ut value
- 137 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
dispiayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
3 By settíng the parameter , Corner
element between a blank element and a part
element can be created ín the opposíte directíon.
End of arbitrary fígures: G1456 ZX p1ane
Thís block ís output at the end of a series of arbítrary-figure blocks.
NOTE
A series of arbitrary fıgures must be enciosed
between G1450 start point and G1456 end of
arbitrary fıgures .
- 18 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
D1N509 :
Pressíng the [D1N509] soft key dísplays the sub-wíndow. By enteríng
necessary data, a neck figure for D1N509 caті be created.
X
w

ь Э ; P z,X
--
1 d
; ψ
,--- --
Z

D1N509F :
Pressing the [D509-F] soft key displays the sub-wíndow. By entering
necessaıy data, a neck figure for D1N509-F caл be created.
X
L w
Z
D1N76 :
Pressing the [DIN76] soft key dísplays the sub-wíndow. By enteńng
necessary data, a neck fıgure for DIN76 caті be created.
X

Z
- 139 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION в-sз8ı4εи105
5,6 ARBITRARY FIGURE COPY FUNCTIONS
A specifıed aгea of fıgure can Ьe copied para11e1 copy, mirror copy, or
rotational copy for addition as a new figiire on the arbitrary fıgшe
creation screen or contour program input screen.
1 Para11e1 copy
A specifıed area of arbítrary fıgшe ís copied specifıed tímes after
the selected area.
2 Rotatíonal copy
A specífıed area of arbítrary fıgшe ís copíed specífıed tímes
around specífıed coordínates after the selected area.
3 Mіпoг copy
A specífıed aгea of arbitrary fıgшe ís mirror-copied relatíve to a
specífıed symmetry axís.
Selecting an Arbitrary Figure Copy Functíon
Aл arbítrary fgшe copy functíon can Ьe selected by pressíng the
[PARAL], [ROTATE], oг [MIRROR] soft key dísplayed when the [>]
soft key ís pressed on the arbítrary fıgшe edítíng screen.

<1> The followin arbítra fıeure edítine screen is dísnlaved:
.,
T R ->;
нsu;
8θ
13 1
sv vssasv a ssaι
ЅLЕСі SUFT KEY.
- мJ
ειтεa DELETE
<2> Pressíng the [>] soft key displays the followíng soft keys for
arbítrary fıgшe copy operatíon:
- 140 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Copy Condítíon lnput Screen
1 PaгaІІe1 copy
Paгa11e1 copy can Ьe selected by pressing the [PARAL] soft key.
The followíng screen ís displayed:
.
Λ1
CENV IT UN
NUHBER 0F REPET1T 0NC=
Y IN lMM R4IL5.
assssι
NUMBER OF REPETITIONC = :
Enter the nØber of times a selected fıgure ís to be copíed.
2 Rotatíonal copy
Rotational copy can be selected by pressíng the [ROTATE] soft
key.
The followíng screen ís dísplayed:
,
І h ,
aОN іПØ
1иPІЈτ τYPε ____________
CVNTFR PtHNT cxcx=ј
cεитεк гoτит cУ cY
иuмaER L F FEt tiUNCf
sειεcτ sueт κεЇ.
σ sіііι
jsELECV Ø KEY.
INPUT TYPE :
Select [CENTER] or [RADIUS] to specífy the method of
condítíon ínput.
- 141 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION B-б38ï4EN/05
CENTER POINT CX, CENTER POINT CY :
Enter the X coordínate and Y coordinate of a rotation center
around which a rotation ís made.
NUMBER OF REPETITIONC = :
Enter the number of tímes a selected figure is to be copied.
When BY RADIUs is selected ín INPUT TYPE , the
following screen is displayed:
tО . іп , ε έ e ηİ :Ø =
Ј1 ІІйFі1 o 295
C 1 P. ;
, и
CONDITION
HPOT TYPE p BY RAD10S
RADIOS R
ROTATION AIRECTION D Ćw
NUMØER Ø REPET7 T І ОNC=-Г
Y IN 1йR1FRALS.
+ ьσσss
RADIUS :
Enter the distance from the start or end point of a selected
figure to the rotation center poínt.
ROTATION DIRECTION :
Select [CW] or [CCW] to specífy the direction of rotatíon
copy operatíon.
- 142 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
3 Mírror copy
Mírror copy caп Ьe selected by pressíng the [MIRROR] soft key.
The followíng screen ís dísplayed:
coиnτтτaи
sPεcıfv flF sYMMEταи Ч--
ςYtriETRY flК Ѕ
ЅY ЯIETRY RКIS Y Y= ;
SPECIFY OF SØTRY :
Use the [COORD] or [ANGLE] soft key to select the
method for specífyíng a symmetry axís.
SYMMETRY AXIS X, SØTRY AXIS Y:
Enter X and Y coordínates through whích the symmetry
axís for minor copyíng passes. The symmetry axís should
pass through the end poínt of a specifıed fıgure and these X
and Y coordínates.
When BY ANGLE ís selected in sPECIFY OF
sØTRY , the followin - screen appears:
σ
cπидТτ oи 1
ЅPECIPY 0F SYtR1ETRY R BY COORDIN
...__: __..._.. SELECT SΠFT KEY.
- 143 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
ANGLE:
Enter the angle between a symmetry axís used for mírror
copy operatíon and the horizontal axís. The plus dírectíon
of the horizontal axís represents 00. Enter a positíve va1ue
for an angle made toward the plus vertícal axís directíon.
Enter a negatíve va1ue for an angle made toward the mínus
vertícal axís direction.
1
/ ı
+Direction

/
/
/
/
NOTE
Data entered on the para11e1 copy ínput screen,
rotatíon copy input screen, or mirror copy ínput
screen ís not output to the program.
Each fıgure entered by a type of copy operation is
automatically expanded as an arbitrary fıgure
element, so that each fıgure can be modifıed.
However, the state before copy operatíon cannot be
automatícally resumed.
- 144 -
в s3s74ENıo5 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Executing Arbítrary Figure Copy Operation
Use the operatíon procedure described below.
Example Para11e1 copy
<1> Enter the number of repetítion on the copy input screen then
ress the [OK1 soft ke
чes

coиОıПoи
NUMB6R oF REPETІTλoНc-л
IИ
ELEci ØT KËY.
<2> The screen for specifyíng aв area of fıguτe used as a copy source
appears. Move the cursor to the icon of the fıgure element at
the start of the area, then lıress the [sELECT] soft ke
431 .ь jo 29Ø5
z
B Γ` Φl.
fY 88
13. 1
ıı w
SEIECT CFlИCEE
Pressíng the [CANCEL] soft key returns the screen display to the
arbítrary figure edíting screen.
NOTE
A selected copy source ranges from the fıgure
where the cursor is placed when the [SELECT] soft
key ís pressed to the last fıgure.
- 145 -
5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES OPERATION Bfi3874EN/05
<3> At thís tíØe, the graphíc wíndow dísplays a figure produced by
executíng copy operations repeatedly. A fıgшe produced by
copyíng ís inserted after the selected copy source.
Pressíng the [NO] soft key returns the screen dísplay to the
previous step.
<4> Pressing [YES] at the end fixes a figure produced by repeated
copy operations.
3 S4SS99 3
- 146 -
B-δ3874EN/05 OPERATION 5.DETAILED DESCR1PT10NS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES
Fígure after Arbitrary Fígure Copy Execution
When the screen used for enteríng a copíed fıgшe ís opened by
selectíng [ALTER], the set ínput ítems díffer from those set for the
fıgшe before beíng copied, as described below.
For a straíght 1ine:
On1y the input items LINE DIRECTION and END POINT
are set.
For an arc:
0n1y the ínput items RADIUS and END POINT are set.
If a copy source fıgшe includes a corner R and chamfer, the corner R
and chamfer are an arc and straíght 1іne, respectívely, in a figure
produced by copyíng.
Thís ís because paτa11e1, rotatíon, or mírror copy operatíon is
performed accordíng to the end poínt ínformatíon of the copy source
figure. So, inforØatíon such as NEXT CONNECTION set for a
copy source fıgure ís not reflected ín a fıgшe produced by copyíng.
Notes on Arbítrary Fígure Copy Operatíon
A waпіng ís output íf the result of expansíon based on аn
attempt for copy operatíon exceeds the maxímum allowable
number of blocks.
The end poínt of the last selected copy source figure needs to be
fixed.
The element ímmedíately before a selected copy source figure
must not be a corner R or chamfer. Moreover, the startíng
element and endíng element of a selected copy source figure
must not be a corner R аnd chamfer.
- 147 -
6.OPERATIONS 1N THE MEM MODE OPERATION B1ì3874EN/05
6 OPERATIONS 1N THE MEM MODE
< ;
.iØ= :; јІ7ґ 1882
x ιee S Ø x0 e . e н e eіee2
z г e. 88e ı ır.
7
eηe
Y с 5 F Ø ,:ee e. e ы
1e 48 54 8e с Ø.ØØØ а,. , Γ97 95 69. 1 13. 1

6 x θθ 88 81Ø2 :
Z 8. Bθθ 819θ8 D1θ8. 1188. kn. :
Y B.θBB T8 648 :
C tf28
61932 02. D18. ООθ. ; Fy
91 : 4 61838 о18. 528. T18. 15, ri8.
C3. M2. 1188. WEB. E1ое. P1.
в28. R98, θ1. 28. Y98. ć2. : 61228 T2. θθ. 1-1B. H8. YB. Ø é έ Ø. :
M02 : 9
d JI
θEuХнл
81łı 1 Ч θcaі π śaдиı ПG м ετІε ,і τ мьтa aіιкu tм н
When the MEM mode ís selected wíth the machíne operator s pane1,
the soft keys shown below appear on the screen of MANUAL GUIDE
i. Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] oг the rightmost soft key [>]
changes the page of the soft key dísplay to the second page.
RE WIND O LI5T BGEDIT N 5RCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST MCHDRW ŚI \1 LλT
NC CNV P TYPE Q TYPE WRk CO T OF8 SETING
Note Note
For [SETING], [WRK CO], and [T-OFs], see Chapter 10, sETTING
DATA, in Part II.
NOTE
When the optional functíon of PROGRAM
RE-START, the soft-key of [P TYPE] and [Q TYPE]
are dísplayed on the screen.
- ı-ıs
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 6.OPERATIONS 1N THE MEM MODE
REWINDING A MACHINING PROGRAM
WIND O Lτsr BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACТP05 PRESEr MESLST MCHDRW SIMLAT
By pressíng [REWIND], you can return to the beginníng of a selected
program.
EDITING W1TH THE MACHINING PROGRAM L1ST
REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRE5Er MESLSr MCHDRW
τ
By pressíng [O-LIST], a wíndow showíng a líst of registered
machíníng prog rams ís dísplayed.

PRОбЈ6м ØıFREε 17 ı 303
мЈЮRY NRFλ Ø/FRFΣ 2280 51606Ø
HO.: MT Ø[FIED ØTE 5I2k CHΠR.
2828: 2882-07-23 89:51 12Ø
1848: 2882-07-12 ıгы
2824: 2882-87-16 17c53 12Ø
2825: 2802-07-12 22:87 120
2BC11 e 2002-87-13 22:21 120
2832: 28Ø2 θ7-13 21:38 120
2811: 2ΘØ2 θ7-29 18:32 6
2132: 2802-87-16 21:58 120
2048: 2ΘØ2 θ7-16 13:2A 12Ø
1999: 2082-87-15 16:89 6Ø
2841: 2982-07-16 13:24
2803: 2982-87-17 11:17 6Ø 60
ј 0081: 2002-97-19 11:49 60
PROξ,RFW HIIIHER. ØND SELECT ØT KEY.
The following soft keys appear, allowing you to select machíníng
programs.
SEØCH SRTORD OPEN CANCEL
[SEARCH] : A wíndow for searchíng programs appears. Enter the
number of the program you want to search for wíth
numeńc keys, then press [SEARCH]. The search
window can be closed usíng [CANCEL].
[OPEN] : After performíng the above search operatíon or movíng
the cursor to a desired program number by usíng the
cursor keys T and , press [OPEN]. Then the program
ís selected.
[CANCEL] : C1ose the list wíndow.
[SRTORD] : Thís soft key switches the sort oгděг for displaying
programs between ascendíng order and descending
order.
- 149 -
б.OPERATIONS 1N THE MEM MODE OPERATION B-δ3874EN/05
SEARHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER 1N A PROGRAM
R .Гλ IλГ > H ;I;UIT N SRCH O 51t E I acТгuS PRESET MESLST MCHDRW
sØт
When you enter the sequence number you want to search for by using
numeńc keys then press [N SRCH], you can search for the block
havíng the sequence number.
When you press [N SRCH] wíthout enteríng any data, the sequence
number N ís searched for sequentíally.
If the sequence number ís not found, a warníng ís dísplayed. It can be
released by pressing a key.
SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING OPERATION
RE WIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH 0 SRCH ACTP05 PRESET MESL5T MCHDRW SIMLAT

When you enter the program number you want to select by using
numeńc keys then press [O SRCH], the program wíth the program
number is selected and dísplayed in the program wíndow.
By pressing [O SRCH] without enteríng any key, the next program ís
selected.
NOTE
1f the parameter ís set to 1 , pressing
[O SRCH] without enteríng any data, the next
program is not selected.
CHANGING THE CURRENT POS1T10N DISPLAY
REWIND 0 LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH PRESET MESLST MCHDRW SIMLAT
By pressíng [ACTPOS], the current position display in the status
display wíndow in the upper part of the screen changes ín the
sequence ACTUAL POS. ABS -+ ACTUAL POS.
RELATIVE -> ACTUAL POS. MACHINE
If the manual handle interrupt optíon function ís attached, the posítíon
display changes ín the sequence ACTUAL POS. ABS -
ACTUAL POS. RELATIVE -> ACTUAL POS. MACHINE
-i ØLE INTΣ - ØLE
- 150 -
B-δ3874EN/05 OPERATION 6.OPEØTIONS 1N THE MEM MODE
66 PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES
REWIND O LI5T BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST MCHDRW 5ØT

By pressíng [PRESET], a relative coordínates presetting window
appears, allowing you to preset relative coordinates.
.,
1Я І ИїІ1 e ıeez
:X 66 6 ØØ.ØØØ , е e 61662 2 e. e IS ØØ Øx
iZ y
e.ØØØ
с Ø.ØØØ 6 8 . 0 M Ø 066 Y
F 0 186 18 48 94 80
GYJ 95 69. 1 13. 1
θg 688 _ ._ ........... .__ ...-..--.. -.
/ς 686 01ØØ7 ,
7 886 2 6λ`R1Ø D1Ø. K8.
Ø15 Eγ 888 16648 :
Ø15 800 4 112θ :
5 61932 12. 816. 958. : V-ØX75 -246. 975 U 11
H-H7 1S 61Ø78 018. 529. 118. 15. 316.
.... C]. 42. F18B. V1flΘ. E18Ø. P1. - 628. 898. 01. X2Θ. 198. 22. : кεaπ Øτ UtiJE. н 61218 τ2. 80. ι-lØ. HB, tR. 1і88.
ьиО. :
NØ2 г
ı І y
Ø ısıu 8LL 8 alјlб CAUCEL
When the relative coordínates presettíng window ís dísplayed, the
following soft keys are displayed:
ORIGIN ALL 0 ACTPOS ALTER CANCEL
1
[ORIGIN] : Set the axís selected with the cursor keys to O. At thís
tíme, no relatíve coordínates are preset.
[ALL 0] : Set a11 axes to O. At thís time, no relatíve coordínates
are preset.
Remark You can set a desíred coordínate va1ue for an axis
selected by the cursor by enteríng the value you want
to preset by using numeńc keys then pressíng the
ØIIT key. At thís time, as descńbed above, the
relative coordinates are not yet preset.
[ACTPOS] : Change the current posítion dísplay in the status display
wíndow ín the upper part of the screen in the sequence
ACTUAL POS. ABS - ACTUAL POS.
RELATIVE ACTUAL POS. MACHINE .
If the manual handle ínternıpt optíon function ís
attached, the posítíon display changes in the sequence
ACTUAL POS. Aвs ACTUAL POS.
RELATIVE > ACTUAL POS. MACHINE
ØLE _ HANDLE

- 151 -
6.OPEØTIONS 1N THE MEM MODE OPERATION в-sз87aεиıo5
[ALTER] : Preset the relatíve coordínates to coordínate values set
by the above operatíon. This soft key also closes the
relative coordínates presettíng window.
[CANCEL] : Cance1 presetting of coordinates and just close the
wíndow.
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT RESULTS
REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MΣSLST MCHDRW ЅØT
τ
By pressíng [MESLST], a wíndow showíng a list of ineasurement
results can be displayed. For detaíls of thís wíndow, see MANUAL
GUIDE i Operator s Manua1 Set-up Guídance Functíon oг the
manual made by machíne tool buílder.
DISPLAYING THE MACHINING SIMULATION WINDOW
REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N 5RCH O 5RCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST MCHDRW SIMLAT
τ
By pressing [SIMLAT], a machíníng simulatíon wíndow can bc
dísplayed. For machiníng simulatíon, see Chapter 9, OPERATIONS
IN MACHINING SIMULATION, іn Part II.
Press [GRPOFF] to close the machining símulation wíndow.
DISPLAYING THE DRAWING-DURING-MACHINING
WINDOW
RE WIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTP05 PRESET MESLST MCHDRW SIMLAT
τ
By pressíng [MCHDRW], the drawíng-duríng-machiníng wíndow can
be dísplayed. For detaíls of drawíng during machíníng, see ,
OPERATIONS IN MACHIMNG SIMULATION .
Press [GRPOFF] to close the drawíng-duríng-machíníng wíndow.
- 152 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION 6.OPERATIONS 1N THE MEM MODE
610 BG EDITING
REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST MCHDRW

By pressíng [BGEDIT], the background editing functíon can be used.
For detaíls of the background editing functíon, see П.11,
OPERATIONS IN BACKGROIJND EDITING .
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION
NC CNV WK 5ET T-OF5 5ETING
By pressíng [NC CNV], the NC program conversíon function can be
used. For detaíls of the NC program conversion functíon, see ,
OPERATIONS WITH THE NC PROGRAM CONVERSION
FUNCTION .

- 153 -
6.OPEØTIONS 1N THE MEM MODE OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Ó. 12 NEXT BLOCK DISPLAY FUNCTION
During símulatíon executíon or operatíon in the MEM mode or MDI
mode, the travel distance data of the block to be executed next ís
dísplayed.
NOTE
1 During actual machining, the travel distance of the
actually executed block is dispiayed in the D1ST
TO GO columns, but during machíníng simulatíon,
0 value is displayed always in those columns.
2 1n order to dispiay the travel dístance data of the
block to be executed next duríng single block
operation, set the parameter No.310Ø2 to
In case of machíníng símulatíon nor path drawíng during actual
machíning ís not executed
The travel distance data of the next block ís automatícally
dísplayed.
: e 22
181 ς+ fl ıн 812зa ..:
1
36
1 8 . 3 8 8 a 8 7 8 T 1 46.5Ø2Ø - 8X ıD 1 H 1
ÌS 18Ø8
iθ.θθ д θ Σ 8 Ø ε , 8 e 8 .8 H 99
681 1? A8 54 Вй
64399986912
θвθθØ . вw w w esπ вαe ws aσпe І
181
x Ø.88θ ,. Ø 1 199. H1 t .
т -чз. θøe 61868 T28. 55. J18. K8. H0.
2 8.88я 1399. ц3øH. 6299. 12, α. F2.
a e.θe8 stae. 82. xae. 22. :
11221 12. Ø . L2Fl. łł 1. UY,
Uııe. W1IL ne.
Ë t 3 61 169 .3. u8- K8. s Hв. s 6589.
üЗ99. ε Ø. ц2. 95, α. 22.
838: GONí WR1 9 л RUUØf ,-< MWì PfY> Yі f?flCfffT F7H1.θ2EЈ
ib. 1128 691 28. 1
ϊ з 628 X8. 58_ 1
72 й9B :
Jβ .., +
RE17ıHL I _115 T ØE ł: ІØ 1tt o - 154 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 6.OPEØTIONS 1N THE MEM MODE
1в case of machíning símulatíon or path drawíng during actual
machíníng is executed
Usually, the travel dístance of the next block ís not displayed.
.,
x Ø ee
s θ Ø.ØØo H ØØ
Ø.Ø98 T 1 Y -14.5θØ;; ,. D Ø 1 H 1
Ø Ø.88 . Ø Ø98 S 11BØ H 99
z г 3BØ.8BØ F θ 981 1, 49 54 88
θ.θθθ 643 98 96 69
g
Pтessíng [CHGDSP] erases the display of spíndle аnd actual
feedrate informatíon and displays the travel dístance data of the
next block. Pressíng [CHGDSP] again returns the screen to the
display of spíndle аnd actual feedrate ínformation.
- 155 -
e.OPEØTIONS 1N THE MEM MODE OPEØTION Bfi3874EN/05
PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION
When a tool ís broken, or machiníng is to be restarted after holídays,
for example, the block number or sequence number of a block from
which machining is to be restarted can be specífıed usíng thís functíon
to enable machining to be restarted from the block. This function can
also be used as a high-speed program check function.
Two methods of restartíng are avaílable: P type and Q type.
NOTE
To use this functíon, the order of movement to a
program restart posítíon needs to be set in
parameter No. 7310.
fP TYPE] sOtt-key
NC CNV P TYPE Q TYPE WK SET T-OFS SETING
1 When the program restart sígnal GOOØO turns to 0:
Pressing the [P TYPE] soft key has no effect. Nothíng occurs.
2 When the program restart signal GOOØO turns to 1:
<1> Enter one of the followíng in the key-ín buffer:
1. Sequence пumЬeг
2. N sequence numЬeг
З. B block number
4. Nxxxyyyyy xxx: Number of repetitíon 3-dígít
yyyyy:Sequence number 5-dígít
5. xxxyyyyy xxx: Number of repetítíon 3-dígít
yyyyy:Sequence number 5-dígít
For ítems 4 or 5, enter an 8-dígit number. For sequence
number 3 for two tØes, for example, enter N00200003.
<2> Press the [P TYPE] soft key.
If a va1ue entered into the key-ín buffer satísfıes none of the
items 1 through 5, an error is índicated.
<3> The program restart screen is displayed.
NOTE
1f [P TYPE] ís pressed without performíng aп
automatic operation even once after the power is
turned on, an emergency stop ís reset, or a P/S
a1aгm No. 094 to No. 097 ís reset, P/S atarm 097
ís íssued.
- 156 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION 6.OPERATIONS 1N THE MEM MODE
6. [Q TYPE] Soft-key
NC CNV P TYPE Q TYPE WK 5ET T-OFS SETING
1 When the program restart sígnal GOOØO turns to 0:
Pressíng the [Q TYPE] soft key has no effect. Nothíng occurs.
2 When the program restart sígnal GOOØO turns to 1:
<1> Enter one of the following in the key-ín buffer:
1. Sequence number
2. N sequence nØber
З. B block number
4. Nxxxyyyyy xxx: Number of repetition 3-dígít
yyyyy:Sequence number 5-dígit
5. xxxyyyyy xxx: Number of repetítion 3-dígit
yyyyy:Sequence number 5-dígít
For items 4 0г 5, enter an 8-dígit number. For sequence
number 3 for two tØes, for example, enter N00200003.
<2> Press the [Q TYPE] soft key.
If a value entered ínto the key-ín buffer satísfies none of the
ítems 1 through 5, an error is indícated.
<3> The program restart screen is dísplayed.
- 157 -
7.OPERATIONS 1N THE MD1 MODE OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
7 OPERATIONS 1N THE MD1 MODE
67 . гøø øØ eτı sθ e
Z ø.øøøY 9_B BΘí гλ 8 м σ
Y -246 .975 e.ØØe ø
зεм 1σ aя sa σε
Г ;97 95 17. I
ø. øøø. _ - -
. . ..... .л.... 6ΘB ı 6 e.ØΘθ1 1p411111
L1 θ.BBB X
ЁT Ø.θBB
C. 8. BBB
θ ı 41 Ч1н^
When the ØI mode ís selected wíth the machíne operator s panel, the
soft keys shown below appear on the screen of MANUAL GUIDE i.
Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>] cØges
the page of the soft key display to the second and thírd pages
sequentially.
REWIND LINENO ACTPOS PRESET
REWIND SRCHT SRCH-Ј CH5IZE COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
CO OFFSET SETING
For soft keys [ACTPOS] and [PRESET] on the fırst page, see the
followíng sectíons:
CHANGING THE CØNT POSITION DISPLAY
PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES
- 158 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 7.OPEØTIONS 1N THE MD1 MODE
The sofft keys on the second and thírd pages are used for edítíng
machíníng programs entered by ØI. For detaíls on these soft keys,
see the followíng sectíons:
MACHINING PROGRAM WINDOW AND EDITING
SEARCH FORWARD AND BACKWARD
CUT
COPY
PASTE
DELETION
KEY-IN PASTE
For [SETING], see Chapter 10, SETTING DATA, ín Part I1.
- 159 -
8.OPERATIONS 1N THE MANUAL MODE HANDLE AND JOG OPERATION в-6зв7aεиıo5
8
OPEØTIONS 1N THE MANUAL MODE
HANDLE AND JOG
e 1235
; Ы 81274
Y 46.50ØI : . 11
О4 D 8 88
S 1 H 99
Ĺ lØ.ØøØÌn в.eee F - ε 5808
Ø ýøee ı7 HO 54 88
G49 98 98 64 A
и
ι00
tt 8.8θθı 61220 12. B8. 1-20. H8. UØ.
Y Θ.BØØ I UцB. ЧвB. 80. :
1 Ø. θΘB j `. 818σ8 7λ8. Ки. S HH. Ś F`.if18.
: H 8. 8ØO Y .i88. 8286. ч2. β. C?. Č2. :
: 088 P82θ8 POCKET řlGlátF.:1 ;
GľH G47 lFl. .
628 8. Y8. :
12 06 :
82.
= 083 11588 :
600 G98 G54 Ø. Y8. ;
1 6dЭ XU38. H2_:
7
When the handle oг jog mode ís selected wíth the machíne operator s
pane1, the followíng soft keys appear on the screen of MANUAL
GUIDE i:
MESURE ME5L5T ACTPOS PRE5ET SETING
NOTE
1 [MESURE] and [MESLST] aгe displayed only when
the Set-up guidance optional functíon ís attached.
By pressíng [MESURE], a wíndow for set-up guídance functíons that
aτe performed in the manual mode ís dísplayed. By pressíng
[MESLST], a wíndow showíng a list of ineasurement results ís
dísplayed. For detaíls of these wíndows, see Set-up Guidance in Part
IV.
For soft keys [ACTPOS] and [PRESET], see the followíng sections:
CHANGING THE CØNT POSITION DISPLAY
PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES
For [SETING], see Chapter 10, SETTING DATA, ín Part II.
- 160 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
9
MACHINING SIMULATION AND
DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Select the MEM mode on the machine ouerator s ane1.
Х
В. 4 81234
B. ыыBBы T 1
:Y 46.50Ø B. B 18 H H
2 1Ø.000 B. BBa 5 1Я88 м 99
F LBHH
698 17 4B 54 88
G49 98 9B 69
0 000
GØB x B.ыBe u1a_r, ,
Y 65992 B13Θ. 1198. 1C1B. 165. 245.
Z Ø.BØB 1 B. ;
Q 628 691 20. ;
62э 921. Yo. :
TB1 g9L ;
D1
ыłFł 1598 ее. :
eQ3 51BEКł :
Θłfł L9 Ø Ø. YB. :
643 ]f1Π. H1 :
65861 12L. ss. L3. 118. KB, HH.
αEu HD o ε 1 λC7P1Ä 11 нТЊ3 sІІ9ιц
RE WIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST MCHDRW 5IMLAT
When you press [MCHDRW], the DRAWING-TOOL PATH screen ís
dísplayed.
When you press [SIMLAT], the SIMULATE-ANIMATE screen
appears wíth the following soft keys:
REWIND START PROCE5 5INGLE STOP INIT CUTDSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
When you press [TLPATH], the SIMULATE-TOOL PATH screen
appears wíth the followíng soft keys:
RE WIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP DISP NODI5P CLEAR ANIME GRPOFF
Pressing [AλΠME] selects the mode for machiníng sinıulatíon
animated again.
- 161 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAVVING DURING MACHINING OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
Pressíng [AGØOFF] in the machiníng simulatíon, animation and tool
path drawing, or drawíng during machíníng mode, the screen gets
back to the memory mode screen.
- 162 -
B63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
DRAWING DURING MACHINING TOOL PATH
9 1235
N T8ц e 34
69 69
5 888 M 38
F 5BB8
608 17 48 5d 69
6C9 98 98 69
[, 628 691 ZB.;
., 628 68. Y8. ę
İ` 181
i. A1 :
. 669 698 99. ı
tг 993 51BΘ8 :
i. 699 699 6Sг 8.
мB Б43 188. N1 : .........: . :
while a machíníng operatíon ís beíng performed on the machíne, the
tool path can Ьe drawn. This function ís avaílable also duríng machíne
lock and dry run operation.
NOTE
1 To perform drawing during machiníng, open the window for drawing
during machining by pressing [GRP ON] before starting machining
operation.
2 1f a coordinate system change ís specifıed in the program during
drawing, drawing is performed wíthout changing the coordinate
system.
3 1n the drawing duríng machíning, when the workpiece specífyíng
block is executed, form of a workpíece is drawn in form of wíre
frame. Drawíng color of the workpiece can be specifıed by the
parameter
4 When a símulatíon window ís opened, a blank fıgure drawing at the
last drawing is displayed. However, íf bít 4 of parameter No. 27310 is
set to 1, no blank fıgure is displayed when a simulatíon wíndow is
opened.
5 Too1 path drawing with a muiti-path system is performed on1y at the
selected path for dísplaying. And a simulatíon wíndow ís ínitialized if
the selected path for displaying is changed. So íf the selected path
for displaying is changed in dísplaying a free blank fıgure, the
drawing is initialized for a column fıgure which encloses ít.
6 Path drawing is performed using values ín the workpiece coordinate
system. Coordinates that a11ow for tool compensatíon cutter
compensation, tool length compensation, geometry compensation,
and wear compensation , tool tip control, or the like are not used for
drawing.
7 Thís function cannot be used with the MANUAL GU1DE i símulator
for the personal computer.
- 163 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAИПNG DURING MACHINING OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
When drawing during machíníng tool path ís selected, the soft keys
shown below appear. Pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] or the
ńghtmost soft key [>] changes the page of the soft key dísplay to the
second or third page.
1 st page soft-keys :
RE WIND STARт PROCE5 SINGLE STOP INIT CUT D5P INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
2nd page soft-keys :
LARGE SMALL AІЈTO ROTATE -MOVE MOVE-+ TмOvE J,-мoVE CENTER
3гd page soft-keys :
DISP NODISP CLEAR T-OFS SETING
Program Selectíon Operatíon and Other Operatíons in
Drawíng during Machiníng
REWIND O LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTP05 PRESET MESLST GRPOFF
1st page Soft keys are used for operations such as selectíon of a
program. These key operatíons are the same as the operatíons in the
MEM mode, so see the sections listed below.
To close the wíndow for drawíng during machíning and stop the mode
for drawíng during machíning, press [GRPOFF].
REWINDING A MACHINING PROGRAM
EDITING WITH THE MACHINING PROGRAM LIST
SEARCHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN A PROGRAM
SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING OPERATION
CHANGING THE CØNT POSITION DISPLAY
PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT RESULTS
- 164 -
8-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAИПNG DURING MACHINING
9. Selectíng Whether to Display the Too1 Path or Not in Drawíng
during Machíning
DISP NODISP CLEAR WK SET T-OFS SETING
3гd page soft keys mainly allow you to select whether to dísplay the
tool path oг not.
For [SETING], see Chapter 10, SETTING DATA, in Part II.
[NODISP] : As soon as this soft key ís pressed, drawing of the tool
path is stopped. The tool path is not drawn until [DISP] ís
pressed next.
[DISP] : As soon as this soft key ís pressed, drawing of the tool
path ís started.
Remark 0n1y necessary tool path portions can be drawn Ьy
usíng [DISP] and [NODISP].
[CLEAR] : Erase the tool path drawn so far. Immediately after this
soft key is pressed, tool path drawíng ís dísplayed.
Scalíng, Movement, and Other Operatíons in Drawíng duríng
Machiníng
LARGE SMALL AUTO ROTATE E-MOVE MOVE-i TмovE мovE CENTER
2nd soft keys a11ow you to perform scaling and movement of a tool
path drawíng as we11 as selectíon of a drawíng coordínate system.
NOTE
The operations explained below must be performed
before tool path drawing ís started.
1 Scalíng and movement
[LARGR] : Increase the drawíng magnífıcatíon.
[SMALL] : Decrease the dτawíng magnifıcation
[AUTO] : When the blank form block for animation has been
ínput to the machíning program, perform automatíc
scaling so that the blank fıgure ís fit in the wíndow.
NOTE
1f a blank form for anímatíon has been entered,
automatic scaling ís performed when the
corresponding block is executed for the fırst
tíme.
- 165 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAVИNG DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-63874EN/05
[< MOVE] : Move the viewpoínt leftward. As a result, the tool
path drawn moves ńghtward.
[MOVE >] : Move the viewpoínt leflward. As a result, the tool
path drawn moves leftward.
[TMOVE] : Move the viewpoínt upward. As a result, the tool
path drawn moves downward.
[LMOVE] : Move the víewpoint downward. As a result, the
tool path drawn moves upwaτd.
[CENTER] : Set the center of the tool path to the center of the
window.
2 Selectíng a drawíng coordínate system
[ROTATE] : Dísplay the soft keys shown below for selectíng
the drawíng coordínate system. A wíndow for
descńbíng drawíng coordinate systems ís also
displayed.
ø s Ø Н ø . ø.øø.ø T ø
Y Y
х
Ø θ. øøø `r ех О ø 80
z -10.00Ø Θ.øØB 5 øøø η 3ø д ø.eøø F 5eøø
F Ø 680 ı7 aø 54 ee
p Ø.000 649 64 98 69
166 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
XY zY YZ X2 ZX ISO XY I50 XY I50 YZ OK CANCEL
T l F -i ĺZ Л OK CANCEL
[XY] : Select the XY p1ane.
[ZY] : Select the ZY p1ane.
[YZ] : Select the YZ p1ane.
[XZ] : Select the XZ p1ane.
[ZX] : Select the ZX p1ane.
[ISO XY] : Select an equíangular coordínate system with the
posítíve direction of the Z-axís facíng up.
[ISO XY] : Select аn equíangular coordínate system wíth the
posítive dírectíon of the Z-axís facíng up. But, the
víew poínt ís opposed to the above one.
[ISO YZ] : Select аn equíangular coordínate system wíth the
posítive dírectíon of the X-axis facíng up.
[OK] : Perform drawing in the coordínate system selected
by one of the above soft keys.
[CANCEL] : Cаnce1 the coordinate system selected by one of
the above soft keys and use the orígínal coordínate
system for drawing.
[T] : Make a counterclockwíse rotatíon by selectíng the
ńght d vectíon víewed when you face the screen as
the center axís.
[.L.] : Make a clockwíse rotatíon by selectíng the right
dírectíon víewed when you face the screen as the
center axís.
[ ] : Make a counterclockwíse rotatíon by selectíng the
upward dírectíon víewed when you face the screen
as the center axis.
[ ] : Make a clockwíse rotatíon by selectíng the upward
dírectíon viewed when you face the screen as the
center axis.
[ η] : Make a clockwise rotatíon by selectíng the
dírectíon toward you víewed when you face the
screen as the center axis.
[ Л] : Make a counterclockwise rotation by selectíng the
dírectíon toward you víewed when you face the
screen as the center axís.
NOTE
A rotatíon ís made accordíng to the unit specífıed ín
parameter No. 14716.
- 167 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION B63874EN/05
MACHINING SIMULATION TOOL PATH FOR Seríes
16i/18í/21 і
?.

X Y GJ 4 6 3U . ï 5 к Ø0i e и.e : a e s iıı e ø º T eц и B
2 -1Ø .00Ø дe Bиe
ø . øøø
98 98 69 1]. 1
І1.ІІІ]
7:b :
Ø 691 26.
9 XB. Y8. :
1 1186 ;
6 96 pØ.
Э 51B8B
8 698 654 X8. Y8.
σ 3 X18Θ. N1 :. .
The path of the tool in a machíníng program can be drawn wíthout
performing actual machiníng operatíon on the machίne machiníng
simulatíon . Thís sectíon is an explanation for Seríes 16i/18i/21i
model B. In the case of Seríes 30í, see Sectíon
NOTE
1 To perform machining simulation, select the MEM
mode with the mode switch on the machine
operator s panel.
2 1f a coordinate system change is specifıed ín the
program during simulation, simulation is performed
without changing the coordinate system.
3 1n the drawing during machining, when the
workpíece specifying block is executed, form of a
workpiece is drawn ín form of wíre frame. Drawing
co1oг of the workpiece can be specífıed by the
parameter
4 When a símulation wíndow is opened, a blank
fıgure drawing at the last drawing is displayed.
However, íf bit 4 of parameter No. 27310 is set to
1, пo blank fıgure is dísplayed when a símulation
window is opened.
5 Too1 path drawíng wíth a multí-path system is
performed on1y at the selected path for displayïng.
And a simulation window is initialized if the
selected path for displaying is changed. So if the
selected path for displaying is changed in
displaying a free blank figure, the drawing is
initialized for a column fıgure which encloses it.
- 1ь -
в-6з87aεиıo5 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
NOTE
6 Path drawíng ís performed usíng values ín the
workpíece coordínate system. Coordínates that
a11ow for tool compensation cutter compensatíon,
tool length compensation, geometry compensation,
and wear compensation , tool tip control, or the like
aгe not used for drawing.
7 Simulation cannot be performed in aпy of control
modes of the high-speed and hígh-precision
functions commands for advanced preview
control, A1 advanced preview control, A1 contour
control, A1 nano contour control, hígh-precísíon
contour control, A1 hígh-precísíon contour control,
and A1 nano high-precísíon contour control .
8 1n símulatíon of a program havíng a sequence of
contíguous sma11 blocks, drawíng requíres longer
processíng tíme, possíbly causíng machíníng tíme
to become longer than actual machíníng tíme.
To close the machíníng símulatíon tool path window and stop the
drawing operatíon of machíníng simulation, press [GØOFF].
When machíníng símulation tool path is selected, the soft keys
shown below appear. Pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] oг the
ńghtmost soft key [>] changes the page of the soft key dísplay to the
second, third, oτ fourth page.
1 st page soft-keys :
RE WIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP DISP NODISP CLEAR ANIME GRPOFF
2nd page soft-keys :
LARGE 5MALL AUTO ROTATE F-MOVE MOVE- TмovE J мovE CENTER
3гd page soft-keys :
WK 5ET T-OF5 SETING
4th page soft-keys :
REWIND O-LIST CHGD5P N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST
- 169 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Program Selection Operatíon and Other Operations ín
Machíníng Símulation Too1 Path
WK SET T-OF5 SETING
REWIND O-LIST CHGDSP N 5RCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST
The soft keys on the 3гd and 4th pages are used for operatíons such as
program selectíon and offset data settíng. These key operatíons are the
same as the operations in the MEM mode, so see the sectíons listed
below.
REWINDING A MACHINING PROGRAM
EDITING WITH THE MACHINING PROGRAM LIST
SEARCHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER lN A PROGRAM
SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING OPERATION
CHANGING THE CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY
PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT RESULTS
Executíon Operatíons ín Machíning Símulatíon Too1 Path
RE WIND STØT PAUSE SINGLE 5TOP DISP NODISP CLEØ ANIME GRPOFF
On the 1 st page soft key, you can perform operatíons related to
executíon in machíníng simulatíon tool path .
For [SETING], see Chapter 10, SETTING DATA, ín Part II.
[REWIND] : Return to the begínníng of the machining program
selected for machíning símulatíon.
[START] : Start machíning simulatíon for the currently selected
machíning program.
[PAUSE] : Stop machíníng símulatíon temporaríly.
[SINGLE] : Cause a síngle-block stop when machíníng siØulatíon ís
performed in the contínuous mode. When machíning
símulatíon ís in the stopped state, thís soft key starts
machíníng símulatíon in the síngle-block mode.
[STOP] : End machíning símulatíon.
[NODISP] : From the block irrunediately after thís soft key is
pressed, suppress tool path drawíng. Too1 path drawíng
is not performed untíl [DISP] ís pressed next.
- 170 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAVVING DURING MACHINING
[DISP] : From the block ímmedíately after thís soft key ís
pressed, start drawing of the tool path.
Remark 0n1y necessary tool path portíons can be drawn by
usíng [DISP] and [NODISP].
[CLEØ] : Erase the tool path drawn so far. Too1 path drawíng
ímmedíately after this soft key ís pressed ís displayed.
NOTE
By setting bit 0 PRC of parameter No. 27310 to 1,
[PAUSE] can be changed to [PROCES] for
temporarily stopping machíning simulation at a
block specífyíng M01; .
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Machíníng
Simulation Too1 Path
LARGE SмALL AUTO ROTATE -MOVE MOVE-ı TмovE LмovE CENTER
2nd page soft keys a11ow you to perform scalíng and movement for
machíníng símulatíon tool path as we11 as selectíon of a drawíng
cooтdіnate system. These operations are the same as those ín drawíng
duríng machíníng. For detaíls, see Subsectíon
NOTE
1 Operatíons such as scalíng, movement, and
selection of a drawíng coordínate system must be
performed before machíníng símulation tool path
ís started.
2 1f a coordinate system change ís specífıed ín the
program duríng símulatíon, símulatíon ís performed
wíthout changing the coordínate system.
- 171 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-63874EN/05
MACHINING SIMULATION ANIMATED FOR Seríes
16τ118i/21 í
0 1235 T Ч θ1 ø T3A oe e
F s gе , . 8 :е 8Gg
648 19 dB 5d 64
G49 98 98 69
KΘ. :
1 828 691 2B. :
n б2B χθ. YB. :
9 181 486 :
81 :
648 658 fYi. :
u 48 51Bfl8 :
9 648 998 Ø 69. 8. :
в8d,3, ĺBB., :иі. ..: :..-,.-.
Animated símulatíon of a machíníng operatíon Ьy a machiníng
program can be performed wíthout performíng actual machíning
operatíon on the machine. Thís section is an explanation for Seríes
16i/18i/21 i-MODEL B. 1n the case of Seríes 30i, see Section
NOTE
1 To perform machining simulation, select the MEM
mode with the mode switch on the machíne
operator s panel.
2 1f a coordinate system change is specífıed in a
program under simulation, whether to perform
simulatíon with the same coordinate system or a
changed coordinate system can be chosen using
bit 1 ACD of parameter No. 27311. For details,
see Section
3 When a program that is composed by repeated
minute line segments like a program outputted by
CAD/CAM is executed, sometímes the speed of
simulation much slows down. 1n this case, please
set tool motion unit to parameter No. 27323 Ьy dot.
When tool moves over the value of thís parameter
on screen, the screen ís updated and the speed wi11
be accelerated. But, if the value of the parameter is
too large, the resolution wi11 decrease.
- 172 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
NOTE
4 A tool tip position in animated simulation has
coordínates of values in the workpíece coordínate
system. Coordinates that a11ow for tool
compensatíon cutter compensatíon, tool length
compensation, geometry compensation, and wear
compensatíon , tool típ control, or the líke are not
used for drawing.
5 Símulatíon cannot be performed in any of control
modes of the high-speed and high-precisíon
functions commands for advanced preview
control, A1 advanced preview control, A1 contour
control, A1 nano contour control, high-precision
contour control, A1 high-precísion contour control,
and A1 nano hígh-precísion contour control .
6 1n simulation of a program having a sequence of
contiguous sma11 blocks, drawíng requíres longer
processíng tíme, possíbly causíng machíníng tíme
to become longer than actual machíníng tíme.
To close the machíníng símulatíon anímated wíndow and stop the
drawing operatíon of machiníng simulatíon, press [GØOFF].
When machiníng síØulatíon anímated ís selected, the soft keys
shown below appear. Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or the
rightmost soft key [>] changes the page of the soft key display to the
second, thírd, or fourth page.
1 st page soft-keys :
REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP INIT CUT DSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
2пd page soft-keys :
LARGE SMALL AUTO REVERS ROTATE E-MOVE MOVE- TмOvE J мovE CENTER
3тd page soft-keys :
WK SET T-OFS SETING
4th page soft-keys :
REWIND O LIST CHGDSP N 5RCH 0 SRCH ACTP05 PRESET MESL5T
- 173 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
1 Program Selectíon Operatíon and Other Operatíons ín
Machíníng Simulation Anímated
WK SET T-OFS SETING
REWIM O LIST CHGDSP N 5RCH O 5RCH ACTP05 PRESET MESLST
The soft keys on the 3rd and 4th pages are used for operations such as
program selectíon and offset data settíng. These key operatíons are the
same as the operatíons in the MEM mode, so see the sectíons listed
below.
REWINDING A MACHINING PROGRAM
EDITING WITH THE MACHINING PROGRAM LIST
SEARCHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN A PROGRAM
SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING OPERATION
CHANGING THE CØNT POSITION DISPLAY
PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENT RESULTS
Executíon Operations in Machining Símulatíon Anímated
REWIND START PROCE5 SINGLE 5TOP INIT CUT DSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
On the 1 st page soft keys, you can perform operatíons related to
execution in machíníng símulatíon animated . The operations of
[REWIND], [START], [PAUSE], [SINGLE], and [STOP] aгe the
same as the operatíons in machiníng símulation tool path . For details,
see Subsectíon
[INIT] : Inítialíze the machíned blank used for anímation.
[CUT DSP] : Lets you swítch between 1/4 workpíece and entíre
periphery for rod blanks and drilled rod blanks.
Before starting anímated simulation, be sure to switch íf
necessary.
[INTERF] : Lets you select whether to make аn ínterference check
duríng aniınated símulatíon. If an ínterference check ís
enabled, a warning ís dísplayed when the tool típ
collídes with a workpíece during rapíd traverse, and the
portion collided wíth the tool tip ís dísplayed in the
same co1oг as that of the too1.
- 174 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
NOTE
V\th bít 0 1TF of parameter No. 27311, you can
select contínued operatíon 1TF = 0 oг temporary
stop 1TF = 1 íf tool ínterferes wíth the workpiece
during anímatíon.
Scalíng, Movement, and Other Operatíons ín Machíníng
Símulatíon Anímated
ØGE 5MALL AUTO REVERs ROTATE MOVE MOVE-> TмovE .iMOVE CENTER
The soft keys on the 2nd page a11ow you to perform scalíng and
movement for machíníng símulatíon animated as we11 as selection of
a drawing coordínate system. These operatíons are the same as those
іп drawíng duríng machiníng. For detaíls, see Subsection
[REVERS] : Change the víewpoint of the blank in anímatíon to the
exactly opposíte posítíon. You can use thís soft key
when, during machining with a sub-spindle oг
machíníng wíth the C-axís rotated, for example, you
want to see anímation from the opposite síde.
NOTE
1 Although [REVERS] may Ьe used even duríng
machíníng simulatíon, swítchíng wí11 sometímes be
delayed dependíng on the CNC status.
2 Operations such as scaling, movement, and
selectíon of a drawíng coordínate system must be
performed before machíníng símulatíon tool path
ís started.
Notes on Machiníng Símulatíon
Duríng the executíon of drawing, the system ís automatically placed іn
the machine locked state. Duríng the execution of drawíng, no
machine control signals are output by auxiliary and other functíons,
but control sígnals such as OP, STL, SPL, RST, and AL
may Ьe output. Duríng the execution of drawíng, the
drawíng-ín-progress sígnal CKGRP, shown below, ís output. If the
control signals that may be output during the executíon of drawíng
affect machine control, the PMC Ladder program must be modífıed so
that these sígnals are ignored, Ьy usíng the drawíng-in-progress signal.
7 6 5 Ø 3 2 1 o
F62 CKGRP
CKGRP Indícates that a dynamic graphics dísplay is being drawn for check
purposes.
In order to dístínguísh the executíng state of the program, machining
- 175 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
custom macro program can refer to the followíng system varíable
3010.
S stem vaıiable Va1ue Executing State
3010 0 Normal condítion Other than the foIiowing
status
1 Executíng automatíc oØratíon 1ncluding
Drawing dunng Machínín
4 Executing machining símulatíon Anímated,
Too1 Path


λ
ĺ
1

λ



- 176 -
B-δ3874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
MACHINING SIMULATION TOOL PATH FOR Series 30i
Duríng machining, the tool path of another program can Ьe drawn.
Wíth Seńes 30i MANUAL GUIDE i, the terms related to operation
and drawíng are defined as follows:
Automatíc operation Operation performed for actual machínin
Drawing dunng machining Too1 path drawing during automatíc operation
Background operatíon Vútual operatíon performed for símulatíon. Thís
operatíon can Ьe perFormed simultaneously wfth
automatíc o eratíon.
Machíníng símulation Machíníng símulatíon in Øckground operatíon
geneńc term for tool path drawing and animated
simulatíon
Too1 path drawing Machíníng simulatíon for drawing the tool path in
Øck round o eration
Animated drawing Machíníng simulatíon for animated simulation of
back round o eratíon
With FANUC Seńes 30i MANUAL GίΠDE i, machíning símulatíon
can be performed in the MEM mode and EDIT mode. When each
mode ís selected, the machíning símulatíon screen cаn Ьe displayed
usíng the operatíon descňbed below.
MEM mode
RE WIND O-LIsT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MCHDRW SØт
Pressíng [SIMLAT] dísplays the machíníng simulation
anímated screen and the soft keys for machiníng símulatíon.
EDIT mode
RεWIND CHGDSP LINENO SIMLAT SETING
Pressíng [SIMLAT] dísplays the machíníng símulatíon
anímated screen and the soft keys for machíníng símulatíon.
- 177 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 A program subject to simulation is placed in the
background editing selection state. So, if
background editing is in progress when the
[SIMLAT] soft key is pressed, the simulation screen
cannot be displayed. The warning message CAN
NOT OPERATE ON BG ED1T is displayed.
Terminate background editíng then press the
[SIMLAT] soft key.
2 A program selected when the [SIMLAT] soft key ís
pressed is the program being selected in the
foreground.
3 Иlhen machining simulation is termínated by
pressing the [GRPOFF] soft key, the program
selected for drawing is closed, and the program
selected in the foreground is placed in the
foreground selectíon state.
4 1f the screen display is swítched to another screen
during drawing, machiníng símulatíon is terminated.
5 1f the machining símulatíon screen is dísplayed
again after the machíning símulatíon screen is
terminated, the results of the prevíous simulation
aгe erased.
6 Animated simulation assumes that the tool tip is
placed at the current positíon. So, íf the tool ís
inclined with the tool inclination axis, drawing is
performed at a position different from the actual
tool positíon until the next move command is
specifıed for the tool tip. Coordinates that a11ow for
tool compensation cutter compensatíon, tool
length compensation, geometry compensation, and
wear compensation , tool tip control, or the like are
not used for drawing.
7 Símulatíon cannot be performed in aпy of control
modes of the high-speed and high-precision
functions commands for advanced preview
control, A1 advanced preview control, A1 contour
control, A1 nano contour control, high-precision
contour control, A1 high-precísion contour control,
and A1 nano high-precision contour control .
8 1n simulatíon of a program havíng a sequence of
contiguous sma11 blocks, drawing requires longer
processing time, possíbly causing machining time
to become longer than actual machining time.
- ı7в -
B 63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
To close the machíníng símulation tool path window and stop the
drawíng operation of machiníng símulation, press [GØOFF].
When machíníng simulatíon tool path ís selected, the soft keys
shown below appear. Pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] or the
ńghtmost soft key [>] changes the page of the soft key dísplay to the
second, third, oг fourth page.
1 st page soft-keys :
RE WIND 5TART PAUSE 5INGLE STOP DISP NODISP CLEAR ANIME GRPOFF
2nd page soft-keys :
LARGE SMALL AUTO ROTATE TмovE MOVE- tMOVE lMOVE CENTER
3гd page soft-keу
WK SET T-OFS SETING
4th page soft-keys
RE WIND O LIST T SRCH 1 SRCH O SRCH ACTP05 PRESET MESLST
- 179 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPEØTION в-6з8ıaεи10s
NOTE
1 The data displayed on the machiníng símulatíon
screen such as the current posítíon and remaining
travel distance is not automatic operation state
data but is machíning simulation data.
2 The machiníng símulation screen does not dísplay
spíndle information and feed information but
displays the next travel distance on1y.
3 On the machíning símulation screen, the remaíning
travel distance ís 0 at a11 times.
4 To stop machíníng simulatíon, press the [STOP]
soft key. 1f RESET key is pressed, foreground
operatíon is reset.
5 1f a blank registration command is executed in tool
path drawíng duríng machiníng símulatíon, the
blank fıgure ís dísplayed usíng a 1ine wire frame .
Use parameter No. 14773 to specífy the display
co1oг of the biank fıgure.
6 When the símulation window is displayed, the blank
figure data previously displayed is used for
drawing. However, when bit 4 of parameter No.
27310 is set to 1, пo blank fıgure ís dísplayed if the
simulation wíndow is open.
7 1n machíning simulatíon performed with a multípath
system, the tool path of the displayed path only ís
drawn. 1f the displayed path is swítched during path
drawing, the drawing screen is inítíalized. So, if the
dísplayed path ís swítched when an arbítrary figure
blank ís displayed, the blank is ínítíalízed to a round
rod figure enclosing the arbítrary fıgure.
8 1f the animated símulatíon optíon ís not selected, a
blank figure command ís ignored, and no blank
figure wíre frame ís dísplayed.
9 When simulatíon ís started from a midway point,
the modal state of the NC is not always executed
up to the midway point. So, íf simulation is started
from a midway poínt, correct drawíng operatíon
may not be performed.
In order to dístinguísh the executíng state of the program, machíning
custom macro program can refer to the followíng system varíable
3010.
S stem vańable Va1ue Executing State
3010 0 Normal condition Other than the following
status
-1 Executing machining símuiation Anímated,
Too1 Path
- 180 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAVVlNG DURING MACHINING
Program Selectíon Operatíon and Other Operatíons in
Machíníng Símulation Too1 Path
WK SET T-OFS SETING
RE WIND O LIST T SRCH 1 SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST
The soft keys on the 3гd and 4th pages are used for operations such as
program selectíon and offset data setting. These operatíons are the
same as operatíons in the MEM mode. However, no data can be set
duríng machíníng símulatíon.
NOTE
1 A program subject to símulatíon is placed ín the
background edítíng selection state. So, the selected
program ís placed ín the background edítíng selectíon
state.
2 Data such as offset data can be edíted at a11 tímes
except during machíning símulatíon. A modífıcatíon to
data can affect program executíon for automatíc
operatíon. So, before edítíng data, ensure that the
data ís not beíng used.
3 Offset data and coordínate system data ís copied for
machíníng símulation, and such símulation-dedicated
data ís used during machíníng símulatíon. Even íf
such data ís rewrítten usíng G10, for example, the
actual data ís not modífıed.
- 181 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-6з8ıaεиЮs
Executíon Operations ín Machíníng Símulation Too1 Path
REWIND sтØт PAUSE 5INGLE STOP DISP NODISP CLEØ Ø GRPOFF
On the 2nd page soft key, you can perform operations related to
execution in machíning símulatíon tool path .
[REWIND] : Return to the beginning of the machíning program
selected for machíning símulation.
[STØT] : Start machíning símulatíon for the currently selected
machíning program.
[PAUSE] : Stop machíning simulatíon temporarily.
[SINGLE] : Cause a síngle-block stop when machíníng símulatíon ís
performed in the contínuous mode. When machíníng
símulatíon ís in the stopped state, thís soft key starts
machiníng símulation in the síngle-block mode.
[STOP] : End machíníng símulatíon.
[NODISP] : From the block ímmediately after thís soft key ís
pressed, suppress tool path drawing. Too1 path drawíng
ís not performed untíl [DISP] is pressed next.
[DISP] : From the block ímmedíately after thís soft key is
pressed, start drawing of the tool path.
Remark On1y necessary tool path portíons can Ьe drawn by
usíng [DISP] and [NODISP].
[CLEØ] : Erase the tool path drawn so far. Too1 path drawíng
ímmedíately after this soft key ís pressed ís dísplayed.
NOTE
1 By setting bit 0 PRC of parameter No. 27310 to 1,
[PAUSE] caп be changed to [PROCES] for temporarily
stoppíng machíníng símulatíon at a block specifyíng
M01; .
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations ín Machíning
Simulatíon Too1 Path
The operatíons are the same as those operatíons performed wíth Seríes
16i/18i/21i-MODEL B. For detaíls, see Subsectíon
- 182 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRA\AnNG DURING MACHINING
MACHINING SIMULATION ANIMATED FOR Seríes 30í
Duńng machíníng, aníØated simulatíon can be performed for another
program.
The terms related to operation and drawíng for tool path drawíng
descńbed ín Section aгe applicable. See Sectíon
Wíth Seńes 30i MANUAL GUIDE i, machíning simulatíon
aØated can Ьe performed іn the MEM mode and EDIT mode. The
operatíon for dísplayíng the machíning símulatíon screen іn each
mode ís the same as for tool path drawing. See Sectíon
In order to dístinguísh the executíng state of the program, machining
custom macro program can refer to the following system variable
3010.
S stem vańable Va1ue Executing State
3010 0 Normal condition Other than the followíng
status
-1 Executing machíníng simulatíon Animated,
Too1 Path
Program Selectíon Operatíon and Other Operations in
Machíníng Símulatíon Anímated
The operations are the same as those operations performed for tool
path drawíng descńbed in Sectíon See Sectíon
Executíon Operatíons ín Machíníng Símulatíon Anímated
RE WIND STÁRT PAUSE SINGLE STOP INIT CUTDSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
Ori the 1 st page soft keys, you can perform operatíons related to
execution in machiníng simulation aníØated . The operatíons of
[REWlND], [START], [PAUSE], [SINGLE], аnd [STOP] are the
same as the operatíons in machíning simulatíon tool path . For detaíls,
see Subsectíon
[INIT] : Initíalíze the machíned blank used for anímatíon.
[CUTDSP] : Lets you switch between 1/4 workpiece and entíre
periphery for rod blanks and drilled rod blanks. Before
startíng anímated simulatíon, be sure to switch if
necessary.
[INTERF] : Lets you select whether to make an ínterference check
duríng anímated simulation. If an ínterference check ís
enabled, a warníng is dísplayed when the tool típ
collídes wíth a workpíece duríng rapíd traverse, and the
- 183 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAИПNG DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-sз8ı4εиıos
portíon collided wíth the tool típ ís dísplayed in the
same co1oг as that of the too1.
NOTE
With bít 0 1TF of parameter No. 27311, you can
select continued operation 1TF = 0 or temporary stop
1TF = 1 if tool interferes wíth the workpíece during
anímatíon.
Scalíng, Movement, and Other Operatíons ín Machíning
Símulation Anímated
The operatíons are the same as those operatíons performed wíth Seríes
16i/18i/21 τ-MODEL B. For detaíls, see Subsectíon
- 184 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
DATA HANDLED DURING MACHINING SIMULATION
FOR Series 30i
During machíníng simulation background operatíon , data ís handled
as índícated below.
<1> Parameter The same parameters are used for machíníng
símulatíon and automatíc o eratíon.
<2> Too1 compensatíon value Data used for machíníng simulatíon díffers from
Workpíece ońgín offset value data used for automatíc operatíon.
Extended гkpіece ońgín offset value
Macгo vańable
Fíxture offset data
<3> Too1 lífe management data These data items are not used for machíning
Too1 number offset data símulatíon.
3-dimensional eпoг compensation data
<1> Parameter
The same parameters as used for automatic operatíon are used for
machíníng símulatíon. However, no parameter can be rewritten
ín background operation. If an attempt ís made to rewńte a
parameter by programmable parameter ínput G10L50 , a
warníng NC statement error is output.
<2> Too1 compensatíon value, workpíece origín offset va1ue,
extended workpiece origin offset va1ue, macro vańable, etc.
Data used for background operatíon díffers from data used for
automatic operation. When background operation ís started, the
data for automatic operation ís copied to produce data for
background operation. Afterwards, the data for background
operation аnd the data for automatíc operation are handled
separately from each other. So, even when data ís rewritten usíng
G10, for example, background operatíon and automatic operation
do not affect each other. Note, however, that data rewritten in
background operatíon is erased wíthout beíng reflected in the
actual data foreground data .
<3> Too1 life management data, tool number offset data,
3-dímensíonal error compensatíon data
These data items are not used for background operation. So, íf an
attempt ís made to rewríte data by using G10, a warníng NC
statement error ís output.
- 185 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAИIING DURING MACHINING OPERATION e-sзв74εиıos
9. 7 FUNCTIONS OPERATING DIFFERENTLY BETWEEN
MACHINING SIMULATION AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION
FOR Seríes 30i
The functíons lísted below are major functions that operate in
background operatíon and automatíc operation dífferently from each
other. There aгe addítíonal functíons that operate dífferently.
<1> Custom macro
1 Interface sígnal
1000 to 1035 are always assumed to be 0 at a11 tímes.
2 Message output
A message output with 3006 ís not dísplayed but ís
ígnored.
3 C1ock
3001 and 3002 aгe ignored. So, note that íf a command as
índícated below is specifıed, for example, drawíng does not
proceed:
3001=1;
WHILE[ 3001 LE100]DO1;
END1;
4 Mírror ímage
3007 ís assumed to be 0 at a11 times.
5 State duríng program restart operation
3008 ís assumed to be 0 at a11 times.
6 External output commаnd
BPRNT, DPRNT, POPEN, and PCLOS aгe ignored.
<2> Functíons ígnored
1 G04 Dwe11
2 G20, G21 Inch/metńc conversíon
3 Auxílíary functíon M, S, T, B
4 G22,G23 Stored stroke límít on/off
5 PMC data settíng
6 Too1 retraction data settíng
7 Programmable díameter/radíus switchíng
8 Choppíng
9 G25/G26 Spíndle speed fluctuatíon detection oп/offl
<3> Functions that operate dífferently ín part
1 G28 automatíc reference posítion return ís drawn up to a
mídway poínt.
2 G29 automatic return from the reference posítíon ís drawn
from a mídway poínt.
3 G27 reference posítíon return check does not make a
reference position return check.
4 Stored stroke límít checks are not made.
5 G31 skíp function , and , , and
multí-step skip are drawn up to a specífıed posítion,
regardless of the skip sígnal.
6 G60 síngle d vectíon posítioníng ís drawn dírectly up to a
specífied posítion at a11 tímes even when the posítíoníng
díτectíon ís reverse.
- 186 -
в-6зв74εNıos OPEØTION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Functions That Cannot Be Used for Machíníng Símulatíon
<1> Functíons that operate dífferently in background drawíng
When the functíons below are specífıed, the operations described
below are performed.
: Involute interpolation
Círcular ínterpolation ís performed.
: Splíne interpolation
Línear ínterpolation ís performed.
When the functions below are specífıed, the operatíons descńbed
below are performed.
: Círcular threading B
Círcular ínterpolatíon ís performed. No rotatíon axís can
be drawn.
: Exponentíal ínterpolatíon
Línear ínterpolatíon ís performed for a straíght líne on1y.
G07 : Hypothetical axis ínterpolatíon
Cіrcular ínterpolatíon is performed.
<2> Functíons that disable background drawíng
When the functions below are specífied, a warníng NC
statement error is output, and background drawíng stops.
G10 : Data settíng Part of the functíon can Ьe used.
M198 : External sub program ca11
Functíons That Can Be Used for Machíníng Símulatíon
Milling System
G00 Positioníng
GO1 Línear ínterpoaltíon
G02/G03 Círcular ínterpolatíon Helical interpolatíon cannot
be drawn.
G17/G18/G19 P1аne selection
G33 Threading Drawn as línear ínterpolatíon
G40/G41 /G42 Cutter compensation / Cancel
G52 Loca1 coordínate system
G53 Machíne coordinate system select
G54 to G59 Workpiece coordínate system select
Extended workpiece coordínate system select
G65 Macгo ca11
G68/G69 Coordinate system rotation, 3-dímensional
coordinate conversion / Cаnce1
G90/G91 Absolute/íncremental programming
G92 Workpiece coordínate system change
Workpiece coordínate system preset
G94 Feed per minute
G95 Feed per revolutíon
G96/G97 Constant surface speed control / Cаnce1
M98 Sub program ca11
Cylíndrícal ínterpolatíon
Po1aг cooτdіnate ínterpolatíon
- 187 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAVИNG DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-63874EN/05
9, CHANGING WORKPIECE COORDINATE DURING
MACHINING SIMULATION ANIMATION, TOOL PATH
DRAWING
If a coordínate system ís changed ín the part program duríng
machíning símulation, anímation or tool path drawing, the drawing ís
performed on the changed coordínate system.
But in the path drawíng duńng machíníng, the drawíng ís performed
without changing the coordinate system.
Drawíng of Machiníng Simulation with this functíon is performed on
the standard coordínate system for drawing whích is initíalized by
G1900, G1901, G1902 drawing definition of blank form block or
G1998 Spíndle defmítíon block for drawing . Workpíece rotated axís
usually C-axís ís the rotated axis around Z-axis of the standard
coordinate system. The standard coordínate system ís by drawíng
definition of blank form block.
NOTE
1 Thís functíon ís not avaílable ín drawing duríng
machíníng.
2 Even if the coordínate system ís changed in
machíníng símulatíon, the axis drawíng of coordínate
system ís not changed.
3 Drawíng of machíníng símulatíon ís performed oп the
premíse that the top poínt of tool or the center poínt
of tool díameter ís on a commanded poínt at the
workpíece coordínate system. So, there are some
case where machíníng simulation ís dífferent from the
movement of rea1 machíníng before a posítíon
command after slantíng a too1.
4 Rotary axis about a blank, C-axís, is one about Z axís
of the basíc three axis. So, ín the case with rotary axís
about a blank, a WORK OR1G1N poínt of rectangular
solid blank must be set on the rotary axis by a blank
form block. Rotary axís about a column blank is one
about a center point of the díameter.
5 1f 3-dímentíonal coordínate conversíon command or
angular axis s machiníng command are performed in
slanting a too1, the slanted angle of angular axis is
made íneffectíve and a tool ís drawn on the slant of
the workpiece coordínate system changed by
3-dimentíonal coordinate conversion command or
angular axís s machíning command.
- 188 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
NOTE
6 When the blank regístratíon command for anímated
símulatíon or the spíndle swítchíng command G1998
is specifıed, the modal workpiece coordinate system
ís dísplayed to match the workpíece coordinate
system set with the blank registration command the
C-axís posítíon is also ínítíalízed .
7 1f drawíng of machíníng símulatíon ís performed from
an intermedíate point of the program, ít ís performed
as the continuous-state workpiece coordinate system
ís same as one of the last símulation.
8 Machíning símulatíon ís performed assumíng that the
tool típ posítíon radíus of the tool nose or tool radíus
center ís at specífied workpíece coordinates
absolute coordinates . So, if the tool típ ís not placed
at a specífıed posítíon, drawíng is not performed
correctly. Moreover, drawíng is not performed in a
coordinate system where tool compensation such as
cutter compensation, tool length compensatíon,
geometry compensation and wear compensation ,
tool nose control, and so forth aгe considered.
9 Rotary C-axís, rotary axis set by parameter ,
always rotates about a blank. And ín the case of a
rectangular solid blank, rotary C-axís rotates about
Z-axís on a WORK OR1G1N poínt.
10 Too1 drawíng ís not slant by the rotate angle in
drawíng of machining simulation of po1ar coordinate
ínterpolatíon.
1п the case of multi-paths T system, G1998 spindle defmitíon block
for drawíng and G1992 top of process defmítíon are as follows.
1 Parameter Nо.2731 1 1 ACD 1
Spíndle at whích anímated siinulation is performed ís
defined on1y by G1998 command.
Spíndle at which anímated siinulation is performed ís the
last comınanded by G1998 command at one of paths.
If Spindle of G1998 0г G1992 commanded at a path ís same
as the last commanded Ьy G1998 coØand, animated
simulation is performed at the path.
2 Parameter 1 ACD =0
Spindle at whích aØated símulatíon is performed ís
defined on1y Ьy G 1998 0г G 1992 commands.
Spíndle at whích anímated símulatíon ís performed is the
last commаnded by G1998 0г G1992 commands at one of
paths.
If Spíndle of G1998 or G1992 commanded at a path is same
as the last commanded by G1998 or G1992 commands,
aØated simulation ís performed at the path.
- 189 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAIMNG DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-6зв74εи10s
SETTING OF DATA FOR ANIMATION
When anímatíon can be performed, a blank figure and tool figure must
be set. Such anímatíon data must be set in the DRAWING
DEFINITION block, whích ís to be entered in a machíníng program.
To dísplay the wíndow for enteríng DRAWING DEFINITION data,
press [START] in the soft key menu for edítíng machíníng programs.

sτØт 1CdORD CONv BLANκ ]TOOL 1sει.5Pτ
2.CYLINDER BLHNK FIGURE
3. HOLLOW CYLINDER BLi iC FIGURE
4. FREE CONTOUR CYLINDER BLAHIC FIGØE
BLfłNK FIGURE
ER sPECIFY METNOD OF CONVERSIOH> PUSN [OK1.

sτARт ]COORD cгNN1βı.RNi: TOOL j i г. sPıнD. ]
і ІВІІ
Ј ІІІІІ
2. THRERD т0α
Ј 1.GROOVIHG TOOL
Ј 4. BUTTON TUR 1ING TOOL
5. STRR1GHт TOOL
FTER SPEClFY tETHOD OF CONVERSION, PUSH [
σ іі: іііі
.јς[QRD CΠHV]Tl1 jIIIE

1
ELECT CYCLE YOU ЧKłHT TO [SELECT7.
1
- 190 -
в-6зa74εnu05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
DRAWING DEF1N1T10N
G1902 Rectan u1ar solid
G1900 Column
B1ank form G1906 Column around X
block G1901 Co1umn with a hole
G1907 Co1umn with a hole around X
G1903 Prism
G1904 Prism иńth a hole
G1970 Start point
G1971 Lìne
G1972 Aгc C
Arbitrary blank G1973 Arc CC
fıgure block
G1974 Chamferin
G1975 Corner roundin
G1976 End
G1970 Ѕtагtроіnt
G1971 Line
Arbitrary blank G1972 Aгc C
fıgure block G1973 Aгc CC
around X G1974 Chamferin
G1975 Corner roundin
G1976 End
G 19 10 General- ur ose tool turnin
G1911 Threadin tool turnin
G1912 Groovin tool turnin
G1913 Round-nose tool turnin
G1914 Point nose strai ht tool turnin
G1921 Dri11 turnin , millin
Too1 defınition G1931 Counter sink tool millin
block -
G1932 F1at end mi11 millin

G1933 Ba11 end mi11 millin
G1922 Ta tumin , millin
G1923 Reamer turnin , millin
G1924 Boring tool turnin , millin
G1930 Face mi11 millin
Spindle
selection block G1998 Spindle selection
NOTE
1 A tool fıgure during anímatíon ís drawn by a tool
defınition block.
2 A blank ís inítíalized by a blank fıgure block.
3 When you use `Too1 Data Base Functíon , you do
not need to specify `Too1 Defınition B1ock .
- 191 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION Bf3874EN/05
B1ank form block rectangular solíd : G1902
,
WORK ı
WIDTł1
DEPIH -
HEIGHI н=Г
WORK ORI6]N X I=
WORK ORI6IЧ Y J=f
WORK IRIG1Ч Z K=f
WORK
Data ítem Meanín
B W1DTH Wıdth of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the
X-axis direction sitive value
D DEPTH Depth of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the
Y-axis direction ositive value
H HEIGHT Height of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the
Z-axis direction ositive value
1 WORK OR1G1N X Distance in the X-axis direction from the lower 1eft
corner of the rectangular solid to workpiece origin
ositive or ne ative value
J WORK OR1G1N Y Distance in the Y-axis direction from the lower 1eft
corner of the rectangular solid to иrorkpiece origin
ositive or ne ative value
K WORK OR1G1N Z Distance in the Z-axis direction from the lower 1eft
corner of the rectangular solid to workpiece oňgin
ositive or ne ative value
- 192 -
B63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
B1ank form block column : G1900
WORK
Data ítem Meanín
D DIAMETER Diameter of the column blank sitive value
L LENGTH Length of the column blank sitive value
K WORK OR1G1N Z Cutting a1lowance of the end face of the blank
Z-axís dístance betØen the end face and
vsork iece oń ín positive value
W WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 Cutting allowance of the back end face of the blank
Z-axís distance between the back end face and
work іece oń ín posítive value
NOTE
The input ítem of WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 W ís
prepared for a machíne wíth a subspíndle, and ís
displayed when the parameter 1 = 1.
B1ank form block column around X : G1906
Thís blank ís used for the machíning sinıulatíon whose workpiece
rotates around X-axís in machíníng centers.
Data settíng ís the same as the above co1Ø.
NOTE
1 There ís the followíng limítatíons when the símulatíon
whose workpiece rotates around X axís ís executed.
. This functíon is available in only machíníng
centers.
. Turníng cycle can t be simulated.
. Po1ar coordínate interpolatíon can t be
simulated.
. Under simulation as workpiece rotates
workpiece around X-axis, coordinate is
displayed in X, Y, -Z.
2 The following parameter setting is necessary.
. , 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
. : The axis number of work rotation
axis
- 193 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATIO 8 N -63874ENr05
B1ank form block column wíth a hole : G1901
,
UORK
OUTER DIRHETER D
INNNER DIRHETER Eή
LEHGTH L -
WORK 0RIG1N 2 K =Γ
1H HUNEØLS. <MH, IHCH
WORK
Data ítem Meanin
D DIAMETER Diameter of the column blank sitive vaiue
E 1NNER DIAMETER lnner díameter of the column blank osítíve value
L LENGTH Length of the column blank sitive value
K WORK OR1G1N Z Cuttíng allowance of the end face of the blank
Z-axis distance betØn the end face and
work iece ori in positive value
W WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 Cuttíng allowance of the back end face of the blank
Z-axis dístance between the back end face and
work iØ orì in positíve value
NOTE
The input item of WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 VV
ís prepared for a machíne wíth a subspíndle, and is
dis 1a ed when the parameter = 1.
B1ank form block column wíth a hole around X : G1907
This blank ís used for the machíning simulation whose workpiece
rotates around X-axís in machiníng centers.
Data setting is the same as the above column with a ho1e.
NOTE
1 There ís the following limitations when the
símulatíon whose workpiece rotates around X axís
ís executed.
- Thís functíon is available ín only machíning
centers.
- Turning cycle can t be simulated.
- Po1ar coordinate interpolation can t be simulated.
- Under simulation as workpiece rotates workpiece
around X-axis, coordinate is displayed in X, Y, -Z.
2 The following parameter setting is necessary.
- , 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
- : The axis number of work rotation axis
- 1 ч- -
в-sзв7aεrυ05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
B1ank form block prism : G1903
LJURk
NUHBER OF CíHčNER R=
D1λflETER D=Г
LENGTH L=
AHGLF OF ATTAC 1EНT H=
UORK OR1G1N Z K=
WORK ORlGIN ZČSPN 2гW=
0
FY IN NW1ERfы.s.
WORK
Data item Meanin
R NUMBER OF CORNER The number of corner
This must be a integer, larger than 2 and smaller
than 100.
D DIAMETER Diameter of the prism blank sitive value
L LENGTH Len th of the prism blank ositive value
A An 1e of attachment The an 1e between a comer and X axis
K WORK OR1G1N Z Cutting allowance of the end face of the blank
Z-axis distance between the end face and
wıırk iece oń in positive value
W WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 Cutting allowance of the back end face of the blank
Z-axis distance between the back end face and
work iece oń in positive value
NOTE
1 The input ítem of WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 W is
prepared for a machine with a subspíndle, and ís
dísplayed when the parameter 1 = 1.
l 2 On1y equilateral prism can be displayed.
1
3 Ang1e of attachment ís the angle that ís formed by
X-axis and one comer of blank fıgure. Refer to the
followíng fıgure.
Ì

`
-]95-
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION _ в-63в7aεNı05
B1ank form biock column with a hole : G1904
WORK
NUMHER OF CORNER R
OUTER DIі ЕTER D=Г
INNNER DIAHETĚR EГ
LENGIH LГ
RNGLE OF ATTRCHMEHT pжґ
WORK ORIGiN Z Uжґ
WORK ORI6IN 2 SPN 2 жґ
Y IH NíAΣRRLS.
WORK
Data ítem Meanín
R NUMBER OF CORNER The number of corner
This must be a integer, larger than 2 and smaller
than 100.
D DIAMETER Diameter of the prism blank sitive value
E 1NNER DIAMETER lnner diameter of the prism blank sitive value
L LENGTH Len th of the prism blank ositive value
A An 1e of attachment The an 1e between a comer and X axis
K WORK OR1G1N Z Cutting allowance of the end face of the blank
Z-axis distance between the end face and
иrork iece oń in positive value
W WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 Cutting allowance of the back end face of the blank
Z-axis distance between the back end face and
work iece oń in positive value
NOTE
1 The ínput item of WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 W is
prepared for a machine with a subspíndle, and ís
displayed when the parameter 1 = 1.
2 On1y equílateral prism can be displayed.
3 Ang1e of attachment ís the angle that ís formed by
X-axís and one comer of biank fıgure. Refer to the
following fıgure.
- 196 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Arbitrary blank fígure block start poínt : G1970
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1, 2
Data item Meanín
DX START PO1NT DX X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fıgure
ositive va1ue
Z START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
W WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 Cuttíng allovvance of a blank гeaг end face distance
between the rear end face and workpiece origin in
the Z-axis direction positive va1ue Note 3
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the ínput data window in edítíng or
altering.
2 Fígure input is performed based on the +X-síde
cross sectíon of the ZX plane of a round rod.
3 The ínput item of WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 W
is prepared for a machíne with a subspindle, and ís
displayed when the parameter 1 = 1.
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 3
Data ítem Meanin
H START PO1NT DX X coπrdinate of the start point in ut ualue
V START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the start point in ut value
W WORK OR1G1N Z SPN 2 Cutting allowance of a blank гeaг end face distance
between the rear end face and workpiece origin in
the Z-axis direction positive value in ut value
NOTE
3 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
dísplay purposes.
- 197 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-sзв7aENІО5
Arbitrary blank fígure block line : G1971
.,.
ELEMENI
LINE DIRECTION D= :. 1 : іі
END PO1NT 2 Z=
LAST CONNECTION L=NOTHING
__
HEXT CONHECT i ОН M=NOт HING
ELECT SOFT KEY.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanín
D L1NE DIRECTION Select a line direction from the dis 1a ed soft key menu.
DX END PO1NT DX X coordinate of a line end point
Remark This item may not be displayed, depending on
the in ut line direction value. _
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of a line end point
Remark This item may not be displayed, depending on
the in ut line direction value.
A ANGLE Line angle
Remark This item may not be displayed, depending on
the in ut line direction value.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the immediately preceding figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the immediately preceding
fi uгe. initial value
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the next figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the next fıgure. initial
value
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, whích are
displayed on the input data window in editing or
altering.
- 198 -
83874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAV\I1NG DURING MACHINING
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data item Meanin
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight 1ine
calculation result
K L1NE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu
indicated on a soft key
in ut value
C END PO1NT DX X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
in ut value
D END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
in ut value
A ANGLE Straight-line angle
in ut value
L LAST CONNECTION [1] : 1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[2] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : 1n contact with the immediately following fıgure
[2] : Not in contact with the immediately following fıgure
in ut value
S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection or contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program window as creating
program. 1t can be referenced on1y for program
dísplay purposes.
- 199 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-sзв7aEиıos
Arbítrary blank fígure block arc CW : G1972
Arbítrary blank figure block arc CCW : G1973
ELEMENT
END PПINT DX DX=Γ
END POINT Z 2=1
RЯDIUS R=1
CENTER POINT CDX CDX=j
CENTER PD1NT C2 CZ=ј
ιЯsτ coинεcτІoи I=NOTHING
нEXT COННECТ10Н м= NOTHI NG
ji EY IN NUMERALS.
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data item Meanín
DX END PO1NT DX X coordinate of an arc end point
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
R RADIUS Radius of an arc
CDX CENTER PO1NT CDX X Ørdinate of an arc center _
CZ CENTER PO1NT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the immediately preceding fıgure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the immediately preceding
fı ure. initial valueL -
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the next fıgure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the next fıgure. initial
_ value
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, whích are
displayed on the input data window in editíng o[
altering.
1
1
- 20O -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Γ
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA 2
í Meanín
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
R RADIUS Arc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc center calculation resu t
C END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point in ut value
D END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point in ut va ue
E RADIUS Aгc radius in ut value
P CENTER PO1NT CDX X coordinate of an arc center in ut value
Q CENTER PO1NT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center in ut va ue
L LAST CONNECTION [1] : 1п contact with the immediately preceding figure
[2] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
г M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : 1n contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
[2] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding fıgure
in ut value
ι S SELECT F1G. 1NF0. 1n the case of p1ura1 intersection or contact, the operator
sets a candidate.
in ut value
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
displayed on the program wíndow as creating
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.


ι

ł
Γ

г
- 2Π 1 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Arbítrary blank figure block chamferín : G1974
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
C CHAMFER Chamfer radius va1ue, positive value
NOTE
1 `1NPUT DATA means the ítems, whích are
díspiayed on the ínput data wíndow ín edíting or
alteríng.
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data item Meanín
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordínate of an arc end point calcuiation result
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfeńng radíus va1ue, posítíve va1ue
in ut value
NOTE
2`OUTPUT DATA means the ítems, which are
displayed on the program wíndow as creatíng
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purposes.
- 202 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAIΛПNG DURING MACHINING
Arbítrary blank fígure block corner rounding : G1975
ELEMENT 1NPUT DATA Note 1
Data ítem Meanin
R CORNER RADIUS Corner R radius radíus value, positive value
NOTE
1 1NPUT DATA means the items, which a[e
displayed on the ínput data window ín editing or
altering.
ELEMENT OUTPUT DATA Note 2
Data ítem Meanín
H END PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc end point calculation result
V END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point calculatìon result
R RADIUS Arc radius calculation result
1 CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of an arc center calculation result
J CENTER PO1NT Z Z coordinate of an arc center calculation result
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : clockиńse
3 : counterclockиńse
NOTE
2 OUTPUT DATA means the items, which are
dísplayed on the program wíndow as creatíng
program. 1t can be referenced only for program
display purPoses.
Arbitrary blank fígure block end : G1976
Thís block ís output at the end of a series of arbitrary figure blocks.
- 203 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-sзвıaεrυos
Arbítrary blank fígure block around X start point : G1970
Arbítrary blank figure block around X líne : G1971
Arbítrary blank fígure block around X arc CW : G1972
Arbítrary blank figure block around X arc CCW : G1973
Arbítrary blank fígure block around X chamferíng : G1974
Arbítrary blank fígure block around X corner rounding : G1975
Arbítrary blank figure block around X end : G1976
Thís blank ís used for the machíníng símulatíon whose workpíece
rotates around X-axís in machíníng centers.
Data settíng ís the same as the above arbítrary blank fgure.
NOTE
1 There ís the following limitations when the símulatíon
whose workpíece rotates around X axís ís executed.
. This function is avaílable in only machíníng
centers.
. Turning cycle can t be simulated.
. Po1aг coordinate ínterpolation can t be
simulated.
. Under simulation as workpiece rotates
workpiece around X-axis, coordinate is
displayed in X, Y, -Z.
2 The followíng parameter settíng is necessary.
. , 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
. : The axís number of work rotation
axis
- 204 -
ł
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
NOTE
1 The arc commands G1972 and G1973 and corner
roundíng command G1975 are changed to linear
elements wíth several blocks, and then displayed.
Depending on the fıgure, it may require a longer
time before being completely displayed.
2 lnput the end poínt of an arbitrary blank fıgure such
that it matches with the start point.
3 A seríes of arbitrary fıgures must be enclosed wíth
G1970 start point and G1976 arbitrary fıgure
end .
4 To edít an arbitrary fıgure, place the cursor on the
block of G1970 start point , then press [ALTER].
5 A fıgure for an end face portion cannot be
specífıed. An end face portion must contaín vertical
ι lines on1y.
6 A fıgure in the Z direction from an end face portíon
must be a monotonously increasíng or decreasing
fıgure.
- 205 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAV\flNG DURING MACHINING OPERATION Bfi3874EN/05
Too1 definítíon block general tool : G1910
[іІ4І1іІ1іЈ
тuoι HIIL DER 1
sετтІиe
cuτ εusε AиGLε Ч
иØ aNGLE в=
TIP LEHGTH c=Ј
N6SE RHDIUS
I ΓвЭ61 NflRY T Π u HOSE ε=
TIP POSITION Г_
TOO L
Data item Meanín
Q SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical and
horizontal lathes.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Ang1e of the cutting edge positive value
Remark Even when the same tool is used, the
location of the cutting edge angle varies with
the cutting direction for example, outer
surface machining and end facin .
B NOSE ANGLE Ang1e of the tool nose positive value
Remark Generally, the nose angle remains
unchanged even when the cutting direction
chan es.
C T1P LENGTH Length of the tool nose portion that can actually cut
ositive value
R NOSE RADIUS Radius of the tool nose ositive value
E 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position. Select a number from
the menu ındicated in the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical and
horizontal lathes.
F T1P POS1T10N [FRONT] : Display the tip in front of the holder. tool
for forward spindle rotation
[REAR] : Display the tip in the rear of the holder.
tool for reverse s indle rotation
HOLDER
Data ítem Meanín
L HOLDER LENGTH Len th of the holder ositive va1ue
W HOLDER W1DTH Wıdth of the holder posítive value
1 HOLDER LENGTH 2 When the tip is installed in the direction opposite to
the holder installation dírection, the distance between
the longitudinal end of the holder and tip center
ositive value
J HOLDER \NlDTH 2 When the tip is ınstalled in the direction opposìte to
the holder installation direction, the distance between
the lateral end of the holder and tip center positive
value
- 206 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Too1 definition block thread tool : G1911
.,
ι тooL н ЈιDfк
sεтτІuc o=1
IIP WIDTH R=
нosε ıε вa
НOsε ØD 1 πS
IMλG1NARi TOOL HOsF E=Γ-
TIP POS7T10N F=FRπN7
KEY IN HUMERlλLS.
TOO L
Data ítem Meanin
O SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and hońzontal lathes.
A T1P VИDTH Too1 tip width
B NOSE ANGLE An 1e of the tool nose ositive value
R NOSE RADIUS Radius of the tool nose ositive value
E 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position. Select a number from L
the menu indicated in the illustration.
k Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and hońzontal lathes.
F T1P POS1T10N [FRONT] : Display the tip in front of the holder. tool
for forward spindle rotation
[REAR] : Display the tip in the rear of the holder.
tool for reverse s indle rotation
HOLDER
Data ítem Meanin
L HOLDER LENGTH Len th of the holder ositive value
W HOLDER W1DTH Wıdth of the holder ositìve value
г - ?07 -
`

9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-sз87aENı05
Too1 definition block groovíng tool : G1912

TOOL Hі.DER
SETTING
TIP ЧIDTN
T1P LENGTN
NDSE RRDIUs
INλGINARY TOOL NDSE
TIP PQSITII 1
Y 1 Н Níβ 7äïs.
TOOL
Data ítem Meanín
Q SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and hońzontal lathes.
C T1P ИПDTH _ Tip width of the grooving tool ositive value
H T1P LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the grooving tool
sitive value
R NOSE RADIUS Radius of the tool nose sitive va1ue
E 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position. Select a number from
the menu indicated in the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and hońzontal lathes. _
F T1P POS1T10N [FRONT] : Display the tip in front of the holder. tool
for forward spindle rotation
[REAR] : Display the tip in the rear of the holder.
tool for reverse s indle rotation
HOLDER
Data ítem _Meaníng
L HOLDER LENGTH Len h of the holder ositive value
W HOLDER W1DTH Wıdth of the holder sitive value
- 208 -
B-б3874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Too1 defínitíon block round tool : G1913
І іІі ЕІ1
TOOL
Data ítem Meanín
O SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and hoňzontal lathes.
H T1P LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the round-nose tool
ositive value
R NOSE RAD1 US Radius of the tool nose sitive value
E 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position. Select a number from
the menu indicated in the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and horizontal lathes.
F T1P POS1T10N [FRONT] : Display the tip in front of the holder. tool
for forward spindle rotation
[REAR] : Display the tip in the rear of the holder.
tool for reverse s indle rotation
HOLDER
Data ítem Meanin
L HOLDER LENGTH Len th of the holder sitive value
W HOLDER W1DTH Wıdth of the holder ositive value
- 209 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-бзвıaεиЮs
Too1 defínítion block straíght tool : G1914

TOOL

Data ítem Meanin
Q SETTING Too1 installatíon dírectíon. Select the number of an
installatíon method from the íllustration.
Remark To be selected vísually for both veıtícat
and hońzontal lathes.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE An 1e of the cuttin ed e ositive value
B NOSE ANGLE An 1e of the tool nose sítíve value
C T1P LENGTH Length of the tool nose portion that can actually cut Ì
sítíve value
R NOSE RAD1 US Radius of the tool nose sìtíve value
E 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose positíon. Select a number from ı
the menu índicated in the illustration.
Remark To Ьe selected vìsually for both vertícal
and hońzontal lathes.
F T1P POS1T10N [FRONT] : Dísplay the tip in front of the holder. tool
for forward spíndle rotation 1
[REAR] : Dísplay the tip in the rear of the holder. 1
tool for reverse s indle rotatíon
J
HOLDER
Data rtem Meanin
L HOLDER LENGTH Len h of the holder sitíve value J
W HOLDER WlDTH Иhdth of the holder sitive value 1
1 HOLDER LENGTH 2 When the típ ís installed in the directíon opposite to
the holder ínstallation direction, the distance
between the longítudinal end of the holder and tip
center ositíve value
J HOLDER W1DTH 2 When the tip is installed in the dírection opposite to
the holder installation direction, the distance
between the lateral end of the holder and tip center i
ositive value
-210-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Too1 definition block driii : G1921
TOOL
Data ítem Meanín
Q SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical and
horizontal lathes.
D TOOL DIAMETER Dri11 diameter po_sitive value
B NOSE ANGLE Dń11 nose an 1e ositive value
H T1P LENGTH Dri11 1en th ositive value
- 211 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAV\IlNG DURING MACHINING OPERATION в-6звıaεNıos
Too1 definítion block counter sink tool : G1931
TOOL 1
SETTING a-Г
:. __
BOT70M D[RłEfER
CUTTER D1pλErER
T1P LENGTN
CUTTER LEHGTH B
ЅHAHK LENSTH L
SHAНK DINMETER
EY IN NtR1[RFB S.
TOOL
Data ítem Meanin
Q SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical and
horizontal lathes.
D BOTTOM DIAMETER Diameter of the end of the counter sink tool end
ositive value
E CUTER DIAMETER Diameter of the counter sink tool sitive value
H T1P LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the counter sink tool
tool axis direction, sitive va1ue
B CUTTER LENGTH Cutter length of the counter sink tool tool axis
direction, ositive value
L SHANK LENGTH Entire 1en th of the counter sink tool sitive value
W SHANK DIAMETER Diameter of the shank of the counter sink tool positive
value


- 212 -
в-sз87aεrυo5 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Too1 definítíon block flat end mi111 : G1932
JODL 1
sεтτннs
TOOL ПfRtETER
TtP ØTH
EY і H 1NRіЕRØ.
TOOL
Data ítem Meanín
Q SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and hońzontal lathes.
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter ositive value
H T1P LENGTH End mi11 tool 1en th ositive value
Too1 definition block ba11 end mi11 : G1933
TOOL
Data ítem Meanin
Q SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and hońzontal lathes.
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter ositive value
H T1P LENGTH End mi11 tool 1en th ositive va1ue
-2]3-
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPEØTION в-sзвıaεNЮs
Too1 definition block tap : G1922
TOOL
Data ítem Meanín
Q SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and horizontal lathes.
D TOOL DIAMETER Tap diameter ositive value
H T1P LENGTH Тар 1en th ositive value
Too1 definitíon block reamer : G1923
I OOL t
SEтT1NG ta=
TOOL D1λHETER D=
T1P LENGTN Н=
EY 1 н NiH1ERLМS.
TOOL
Data ítem Meanin
Q SETTING Too1 installation direction. Select the number of an
installation method from the illustration.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertìcal
and horizontal lathes.
D TOOL DIAMETER Reamer diameter ositive value
H T1P LENGTH Reamer 1en th ositive value
- 214 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Too1 defínítíon block boring tool : G1924
..
TOOL
Data ítem Meanin
Q SETTING Too1 installation dírection. Select the number of an
ínstallation method from the íllustratíon.
Remark To be selected visually for both vertical
and hońzontal lathes.
D TOOL DIAMETER Bonng tool díameter sitive value
H T1P LENGTH Bonng tool 1en h sítive value
Too1 definitíon block face mi11 : G1930
.M
t zH ι
TOOL
Data ítem Meanin
Q SETTING Too1 ínstallatíon dírection. Select the number of an
installatíon method from the íllustratíon.
Remark To be selected vísually for both vertical
and hońzontal lathes.
D TOOL DIAMETER Face mi11 díameter ositive value
H T1P LENGTH Face mі11 1en th ositive va1ue
ι
- 215 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Spíndle selectíon block: G1998
,
;
Eìr 1 NDL E NUMBER S=Γ
- -- . _. --- -- _ _ EY iН NUMEü.ł2 S.
sEL. sP1ND.
Data ítem Meanín
S SPINDLE NUMBER Spindle number of a subspindle positive number
Remark Enter 2 when the subspindle has the
spindle number 2. Enter 3 when the
subspindle has the s indle number 3.
NOTE
The menu above is prepared for a machine with a
subspindle, and is displayed when bit 1 of
parameter No. 14702 = 1.
- _16 -
в-sз87aεиıos OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
9, 70 SPINDLE MOVEMENT ANIMATION FOR AUTOMATIC
LATHES
This ís the addítíonal animatíon functíon to símulate machíníng that
utílízes movement of spindle for automatic lathes.
The optíon of spindle movement aníØatíon for automatíc lathe ís
necessary to use thís functíon.
NOTE
Thís functíon is avaílable for only Seríes 16і/18ź/21ź.
Functíon
If the command that reflects movement of master ín movement of
slave is entered in program and the command ís executed, slave
tool moves too. From thís movement, machíníng that utílízes
movement of spindle wi11 be símulated.
Start Command of Reflectíon
The sYNCDRAW tab wi11 be dísplayed by pressing [sTØT]. The
following wíndow for ínputtíng start command of reflectíon wí11 be
Γ dísplayed, after the SYNCDRAW tab is selected, the cursor is
placed on sTØT SYNCØONIZ-ATION CONTROL and IlYPUT
key ís pushed. The reflectíon in slave starts Ьy the command.
Start command of reflectíon : G1994
SYNCDRRW 1
SLЯüE TOOL POST P=
MRSTER RXlS 2=
SLЯVE ЯК1S R
F
CONTROL ØBE S=Г
KEY Н N1NERnLS.
Conditíon
Data ítem Meanín
P SLAVE TOOL POST Number of slave tool post in whích Manual Guíde i reflects
movement of master.
Q MASTER AX1S Number of axís that ís reflected X, Y, Z, oг C axís
R SLAVE AX1S Number of axis in which Guide i reflects movement of
master X, Y, Z, or C axis
S CONTROL MODE [SYNC]:Under synchronization control mode
NOSYNC :Not Under s nchronízatíon control mode
- 217 -
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-63874EN/05
End Command of Reflection
The followíng window for ínputting end command of reflection wi11
Ьe dísplayed, after the cursor ís placed on END
SYNCØONIZATION CONTROL in the SYNCDRAW tab and
INPUT key ís pushed. The reflection in slave fınishes Ьy the
coØand.
End command of reflection : G1995
EZ
sч иcдκЯw
Stfl H Ot_ POSi P=
Condítion
Data ítem Meanin
P SLAVE TOOL POST Numtıer of slave tool post in whích Manua1 Guide i reflects
movement of master.
NOTE
1 Setting the parameter No27310 5 to 1 ís
necessary to dísplay SYNCDRAW tab.
- г1в -
в-sз8ı4εиıo5 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Símulatíon and Actual Workíng of the Machíne
Between G1994 and G1995, the movement of axis number that ís
desígnated at Q is reflected in the movement of axís that ís designated
by R. And R is a numЬeτ of tool post that is designated by P.
Ex1. Workíng not under synchronous, composíte, or superimposed
control
Path-1 There ís reflect command Path-1 There ísn t reflect commandW orkíng of actual machíne
Not under synchronous, composíte, oNгot under synchronous, composíte, +X3
supeńmposed control oг superímposed control
ti Path-3
-X3
- +z
X1
Path-1
+X1
G1994 R2. SO.;
There isn t command.
Reflect movement of path-1
second axís Z-axis in movement
of path-3 second axis Z-axis .
[Dísplay in animation] [Dísplay in animation]
Move Z axis Move Z aıás
Too1 φs ís
Too1 pos isn t off and abs Abs pos
off and abs I І φs doesn t chan e. doesn t pos doesn t g change.
change.
G1995 P3.;
There ísn t command.
End reflection in path-3.
1
ι
1

ι
1
ι
F
г
и -219-
9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWlNG DURING MACHINING OPERATION B-δ3874EN/05
Workinи under svnchronizatíon control
Path-1 There ísn t reflect command Path-1 There ísn t reflect command Workíng of actual machine
Under synchronizatíon control Under synchronizatíon control +xз
ti
Paτh-з
-xз
+z
-xı
LJ
Path-1
+x1
G1994 R2. S1.; There isn t commaпd.
Reflect movement of path-1
second axís Z-axis іп movement
of path-3 second axis Z-axis .
[Dísplay in animatíon] [Dísplay in animatíon]
Move Z axis Move Z axis
Too1 pos isn t i Too1 pos is off Abs pos
off a d abs and abs pos I changes.
pos don t doesn t change.
change.
G1995 P3.;
There isn t command.
End reflectíon in path-3.
- 220 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 9.MACHINING SIMULATION AND DRAWING DURING MACHINING
Ex3. Woгkin under composite control oг superimnosed control
Path-1 There isn t reflect command working of actual machine
Under composite control or superimposed +xз
-n
control Pаth_з
-xз
-z +z
-xı
Path-1
+xı
G1995 P3.;
End reflection in path-3.
[Display ìn animation]
Move Z axis
Too1 pos isn t off. Abs
pos changes.
Not under composite control or superimposed
control
NOTE
1 The option of spíndie movement animation for
automatic lathe is necessary to use this functíon.
2 Set parameter to 1 when this function
ís used.
3 Master axís must be only basic three axes and C axis.
And slave axis must be the same axis as master.
4 1n animatíon, siave absolute axis isn t renewed though
under Synchronization control S1. is commanded in
G 1994 .
5 When machiníng simulation is fınished by reset key as
so on, the reflectíon wi11 be canceled.
6 Master tool post can t become slave tool post though
G1994 that designates the tool post as the slave is
command from other tool post.
7 Duríng reflectíng movement, when second start
command of reflectíon is executed and control mode
that is desígnated by second command is different
from former one, former start command wi11 be
canceled. When control mode is same as former one,
slave axís wi11 be newly added and former command
won t be canceled.
- 221 -
10.SETTING DATA OPEØTION B-б3874EN/o5
1 O SETTING DATA
<1> вasІC
1. WORK COORDINATE DATA
2. TOOL ODFFSET DATA
З. FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING
4. FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TURNING
5. SETTING OF OFFSET NO. AND TOOL NO.
6. TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
7. TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA
Remark For ítems 5, 6, and 7, see the descńptíon of V. Too1
Management Function.
<2> Iv1EASURE COND
1. SETTING
<3> CALIBRATION
1. SETTING
Remark For <22> arid <3>, refer to MANUAL GUIDE i
OPERATOR S MANUAL Set-up Guídance Function.
NOTE
The menu mentíoned above shows on1y ítems that
aгe requíred dependíng on the províded optíons
and the machíne type; a11 the items above are not
índicated.
For details, refer to the relevant manual issued by
the machine tool builder.
- 222 -
6-63874EN/05 oPERAT1oN 10.SETTING DATA
SETTING THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA
[WK SET] to open the workpiece coordínate data wíndow can be
displayed on a11 mode such as MEM, EDIT and manual mode.
Pressing the 1eØost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several
times dísplays the soft-keys íncluding [WK SET]
Example of MEM mode soft-keys
NC CNV WK SET T-OFs SETING
Pressíng [WK SET] dísplays the workpiece coordínate data wíndow.
For compound machíne tools, the workpíece coordínate settíng
wíndows for the T mode and M mode can be selected wíth
corresponding tabs.
For lathes, a wíndow for settíng the workpíece ońgín offset data and
workpíece coordinate shift data ís dísplayed.
For machíníng centers, a wíndow for settíng the workpíece ońgín
offset ís dísplayed.
Workníece ońяів offset window for millinи systeml
. σ 12э5
X s 3 6в8
X
B. eBB Ч 81234
Y 1 B
Y B . B σ eØ B 8X ıBB 08
z Ø.00 p e. BBB 5 Ø H B 0 _ 5008
F θ GBØ 17 CB 54 89
9 149 98 98 69 13 A ó.θθ0
ЧØR1φ1ECE OR[6IЧ RDD dflØIRS
00. tR2K CІЈ X Y A
BØ FJCI h1 8. 989 0. 808 -8. 008
01 654 Ø.BBB
82 655 0. 808 8.ØØ0
03 656 9. 008
94 657 0. 000
81 658 8.ØØ8
06 659
, Y 1ÌfЧf MX

1
NO Yt іГLО5Σ pΓТРоЅ ЫРіјт c
.
-2?3-
10.SETTING DATA OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Workpíece oń offset wíndow for turning s stem
,г
X θ . θØO
z θ.θβO
ÌÝ e:B
Y 0.Ø0β
іЮВKPІεCE oиτOτиІY RκP εCE SHIFT ς
8 uнκ c0 x Z c S
e0 D f , і e1 Ѕa
02 6ï5 -1BØ.eØe B.BθB
03 ы5ь
84 Ø
05 651
06 Ѕ 9
и τи иıіεØs.
ACτfØs
Workpíece shift offset wíndow for turníng system
.x S 0
z θ.θθθ rιι ex
B M 8
F B. BeθB F 0 Cee ıe ae 5a ee
`Y 197 99 BX
И1КKP1Eϊł Oи11:1HЧ0 KΓ Ił 1. THIFI 1
X 2 C Y
τиіп ua.uε 8. 008
и 18 нUffØ.
_JJ
MEπГØιіиaκЈТ
00. 4іи1CłOUF
The data ítems to be set and dísplayed are common to the
corresponding data ítems of the CNC. So, for details, refer to the
operator s manual of the CNC.
,
- 224 -
B 63874EN/05 OPEØTION 10.SETTING DATA
[MEASUR] Soft Key
АСTP
M
o
Σλ
S
SUR +INPUT cнcuкs NΠ.SRH CLOSE
By pressíng [MEASUR], the calculatíons below can be made.
Workpíece orígín offset window for míllíng system
Current machine coordinate va1ue - Target value of workpíece
coordínate
,
ØН11Σ ΦORD. ЧÚ4K CODRO.
CURRENT TØ El RESULT
624 - X Γ-- = К-fA81. 624
11F1Π tM24Σt ОЫ MqW ΦBRD.
Workpíece orígin offset window for turníng system
Current absolute coordinate value + Current settíng - Target va1ue
of workpiece coordínate
u іІ2іі
ee α І і ј І
θ2 Ø, λBSOLUTE ЧØ1f COбRD.
83 G5ı WR `i`EЫ 7 X1К EHT íRR6ET RESLLT
04 , К B.8θ0 č Xј 8Θ8 - = X B. BØ8
θ5 ί P1Π 7QRLE7 0М B K CooRD. 06 65 .....:.. .:: :: : ..: ...... .
-225-
10.SETTING DATA OPERATION B 63β74EN/05
Workpíece coordínate system shíft amount wíth the turning system
Current settíng - Current value of absolute coordínate + Target
va1ue of workpíece coordinate
и 8t234
Ø.ØØØ x e,εøe τø
ay
c s øмø
:C 0.θ00 e.eыe F
F 0 G8Ø І8 4Ю 54 ø8
Y ıır 697 Ø 69. 1 13. 1

41[ RKPiECĆ ОNКТ1 СІ sHIF
Іі4+ІεЇ 14
aвsвіuτε uoø ca игα.
cυRεεиЇ cuØнт τM26E Rεs λ.τ
x - x a eе . xа x e. eee
tигuτ τЯ Їіετ ON ІЯЈRк c8oкα.
Н Пн στОis.
Ѕ---
:ώ,
иpυτCi KEL
[NPUT] Soft Key
ACTPOS MEASUΣt +INPUT CHCURS CLOSE
By pressíng the [+INPUT], current va1ue + offset va1ue can be
calculated.
Work píece orı in offset wíndow for millín g system
іЧІ
π 12t15
x s θ e. øee Γ 44 e 81234
у ø.eвσ ııιıı.rrı ey 50 и 8 s eмø
z 8.θ8ø ε 5ØθØ
Ø.000 и F 0 180 1? 48 54 8ø
549 98 98 69
P.. - 8X
ь
YΛRRPtECE вЧGlиІλ9Ї 40
H0. URK C0 2 П
8в XΓ Ľ ι
Ø1 4
82 CTJRI?ENI 0FF5 І RiLIJ,.7
83 656 M e. eвθ - = X 8.8ΘE1
ы4 857 ІинІЈτ ovмsεт. e5 csσ
01 659 ø.eee e.eøe e.eeв
У Іи 194IERRL5.
- 226 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 10.SETTING DATA
Wor k iece nгістіп offιet wínλnw fnr turníng s steпıl
п
i 0 9999
x Ø.00θ и и1aκ
8. ОО τe
z O.ØØθ Н Θ.B . 88eΘΘ
e. ΘeΘ s Θиe с 0.Ø00 F Θ.ØØBB
6BB 18 46 54 80
0.00Ø 697 99 13.
a
uØгεcf oκі u κкPіeιξ j
ın. імκ cд x г c У
ee ατ
e1 654
82 655 ØRFNT oFfSET КESLLT
83 Ø К .8 θ8B ј= = 8. BθB
8A 45? lłЯΠ oFFSΣ7. 05 6Тe
86 659
Wor iece coordinate s stem shifft amount wíth the turníng system
600 θ.ØØØ ; И 81231
2 θΘ. 888; T S 8 2 Ø.00Ø Θ.eee ex
8118 C
с θ.θθθ e. BØ F θ F B. Θ88o
cθΘ 18 46 54 60
Y θ.θθθ - 8X 597 99 13,1
ΨКKP1E t Іλč1іј1И ИeКKPIĚCΣ iHIFT
M 2 C Y
5H1FT Uolf1E і3ØØ
CURRł.NT FFSET фјE6ц.τ
x e. ee8 ь x ^1 = x e. eee
јtФ99П oFFsεt.
,Ø и мue кaιs
L11
ІL
8τ caκει
- 227 -
10.SETľ1NG DATA OP E ØT1 ON B-63874EN/05
10,2 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA
[T-OFS] to open the tool offset data wíndow can be dísplayed on a11
mode such as MEM, EDIT and manual mode.
Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] oг ńghtmost soft key [>] several
tímes dísplays the soft-keys íncludíng [T-OFs]
Example of MEM mode soft-keys
NC CNV WK SET T-OFs 5ETING
τ
Pressíng [T-OFS] dísplays the tool offset data window.
M seńes
.
S РІі в 1225
x e.88в ] R в3236 , , e
Y 291 126 ź B.вeB o в M в
e. eıw 0 M σ
8.θθ8 F 5ØØ8 2 F θ OθØ 1, 48 54 ØB _______ 1.49989669 t:Ll 1A

mn ОFГsετ ј Ø днτн 1 as. t00L LCNGIM CΦ1P. CU71FR COπPEЧ`. н71Ø84
чO. R_0ііFτPY UFRG: ЙfGYEiКY і4E L2
θBі Еі 8. 086 e_ eex ee2 в.eee з.eeØ в. eBe
eB3 Ø.ØBB 2. ØØØ
8ΘA 8. 8Φ B. ØB8 θ. Ø Θ.8B8 φ 865 Ø.Ø88 B.ΘBB
0B6 8.8θ8 B.ØBØ Ø.88B Θ.Bσθ
ΘΘ7 8.BØ8 B. Оо8 B. ØBB
Ю Y IR NU43Wl.Ś.
....:... ___..
/ и ı aκ w: и1 1.
T seńes
іЈІ ІіИТїјТјІЅЅІ
ø øøø
: С ø øøø
Y θ . θёё
BεuMετar oитОεjτuεεж eFεsετ Іτom дaτa
. -нX1S 2-8К1S R88 115 V[
BB1 1 -Ø. 999 B. BB8 3
882 Θ.A88 3
θ83 3.BΘB 8
BBO B.OBØ 8
885 8.8flØ в.BBB B
8θ6 B.ØBØ 8.0Ø8 Ø.ØØØ θ
867 8.0Ø0 8.8Bθ в
Y 1M 1AΛ1FSő1L5.
_J J
8Ct lEΛS7 К 1H P T I Ж . C. CF1IXЛč ; H i, TZ C H L09ε
- 228 -
8-63874EN/05 OPERATION 10.SETTING DATA
For compound machíne tools, the following data ítems are dísplayed
for the T mode:
<1> T: GEOMETRY OFFSET
<2> T: WEØ OFFSET
<3> T: GEOMETRY TOOL TYPE OFFSET
<4> T: GEOMETRY WEØ TYPE OFFSET
The followíng data ítems are dísplayed for the M mode:
<5> M: TOOL OFFSET TOOL LENGTH COMP. / CUTTER
COMPENSATION
<6> M: TOOL TYPE OFFSET TOOL LENGTH COMP. / CUTTER
COMPENSATION
Data for each mode can be selected wíth a corresponding tab.
For lathes, data items <1> to <4> are displayed. For machíníng centers,
data items <5> and <6> are dísplayed.
The data to be set and dísplayed ín <1>, <2>, and <5> ís common to
the corresponding data in the CNC. For detaíls, refer to the operator s
manual of the CNC.
For data items <3>, <4>, and <6>, whích are related to the tool
management function, see the descriptíon of V. Too1 Management
Functíon .
- 229 -
10.SETTING DATA OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
[MEASUR] Soft Key
ACTP05 MEASUR +INPI T CHCURS CLOSE

By pressíng [MEASUR], Current machíne coordinate value - Target
value of workpiece coordínate can be calculated.
Wíth the [WEAR OFFSET] tab usable when tool geometry/wear
compensatíon optíon ís specifıed, Current machíne coordinate value -
Current geometry offset value - Target workpíece coordínate va1ue
can be calculated.
[MEASUR] can be used only on T seńes
п зeee
0.0ØØ и eз a
τe
z Ø.000
c
Y Ø.Ø00
6EOMETRY OFFSET ИØ ΛFFθET τΩςR. дAτд
Н0. К-p iS Ax75 RRD[U5 UTRT IP
ВВ` flHSOLITTE UORIT COTHTIY.
Øз cuαu..иτ τґгBετ RESULT
øaa x ě. øaГ _ øes
ВВО ΓгPиг τнαι τ Oи ЧORU coαгд. aøт
-230-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 10.SEπ1NG DATA
[NPUT] Soft Key
ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT CHCІЛ5 CLOSE
By pressíng the [+Iλ1PUT] soft key, Current va1ue + Offset value
can be calculated.
M seńes
0 1235 X 81Y3A
T 8
Y oe нв
F 5 8 8 й 8в 8
Z G8B 17 48 56 88 A 649 90 98 69
іІ
τ0α OΓFSEτ јт0α AнтB j
Тuα LEи6τн cOнP. cuтІE7č cOнPEM64тı80
48 ΦΣ.τRY UERR 011ετни uεWč eв
802 cU2Rεнτ іWε5ετ кεsu.Г 8e3 -3se.eeв . ti - -358. 809 084
089 јІіечЈТ øтsετ.
ee6 087
T series
1І8f і5εІі1іі
x 0.0ØH 2 ø.θøø
с Ø.øøØ
Y Ø.ØøO

ULOtiLTRD OFFSUI јцεOR OFГSΣί jIDXIL DFlff1
ύ. X-RR15 2-вX1S RqD1US
BB1
002 ü8ТК[H7 , OFFSΣT REзαґ
M-199. 999 + Кг. = 8Ø0
11Pј BFfSET.
896
007 8
Y 1 HlR1Oöθ.S.
231 -
10.SETTING DATA OPERATION Bδ3874EN/05
[] Soft Key
ACTPOS MEA3UR +INPUT Cнcuкs CLOSE

By pressíng the [Ø.C.] so key, Relative coordínate уa1ue caп Ьe
entered to the ofPset value dírectly.
M seńes
1235
x 01234
B. ØØe O , Ї Ø
θ . 8θ0 IO 8 Ø H 8 0
Д 5
Ø BØ 1, 4Ø 54 θ0 ó . 000 11,49 98 98 69
IUIL ØFFS cT 1T3LL, flГiø Ì
ΓUІλ eІ1нεwД tім
80. f FП t1ETF іІ[BR i Д 1S SRh.`44 Bθ Ø.θØB.;:<
ØB2 Y Д IЅ 741. 12fı
893 г
,804 Я Д IŠ 0 B . . 8 B 8 θ B B г: . ; .,.<. . 0 8. BØØ ł 8889 1e06 Ø.eθe
1.eθг e.eoØ ЕІЕСТ τиεчπ ττεм.
Іи нØHLRALs.
T seτies
. , U
X 14 83888 .:.:
18 2 ıııırıı Ø>
5 Ø H B E Ø.Ø00 F 8,81 08 F 8 880 18 48 Ø 80 .
Y Ø.ØØH GYJ 99 1з. ı
Іј.:. і?іІІ
εεoмεταr IIFF5ET jOεØ Øεεsετ Іıarn mıЇσІ
ЧØ. X- 7 15 ІРі.ТІР eeı : N: ,
882 -289. 999 wДx І s 3
893 H-Я 15 8. 800 Ø
ІЮ4 В-ЯX1 S B
895 8
ØB6 8
981 8 898 8LЕСТ 1І.СІЈτ STΠ1. θ
1ffY 1H HUTERθε.S. _______
і ЈЈ
-232-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 10.SETTING DATA
REGISTERING F1XED FORM SENTENCES
[SETING] to open the settíng window can be displayed on a11 mode
such as MEM, EDIT and manual mode.
Pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] or ríghtmost soft key [>] several
tímes displays the soft-keys includíng [SETING]
Example of MEM mode soft-keys
NC CNV WK SET T-OFs 5ETING
SETINGI dísDlays the window of settin
х
2
`C
Y
eцsіc nEB,uαε :tI CtR. i DEiXi i 05
i.: . RElì1ŠTER Fl CD FORH OENTENCC F0R TURNIN1à
ЅХ1ЕСТ SEiTIN6 1TEM aHD PUSN [SELξςT7
..,.λ
5Γ7 [CT CWiCEl.. ..
NOTE
1 On the T seríes CNC, the REGISTER F1XED
FORM SENTENCE menu for milling is dísplayed
only when the míllíng cycle optíonal function ís
attached. The menu for turning is always dísplayed.
2 On the M series CNC, the REGISTER F1XED
FORM SENTENCE menu for turning is displayed
only when the turning cycle optional function is
attached. The menu for mílling ís always dísplayed.
After selectíng the menu of REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE
FOR MILLING by placing the cursor, pressíng [SELECT] displays
the wíndow of data settíng.
By símilar operatíons, the wíndow for turníng cari be dísplayed.
- 233 -
10.SETTING DATA OPEØTION Bf3874ÉN/05
With FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING, which is cailed
Ьy [FØRM] displayed together wíth the milling menu, you can
modífy the contents of a selected fixed form sentence or add a new
sentence.
selectíng FØD FORM SENTENCE FOR ØLING dísplays the
following screen.
Selectíng FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TUNING displays the
followíng screen.
- 234 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 10.SETTING DATA
NOTE
1 The fıxed form sentence menu displayed in the tab
of FORM1 has same contents with the one
displayed in the START menu. lnto detail, refer to
the 11 ENTERING THE START COMMAND .
2 The fıxed form sentence menu displayed ín the tab
of FORM5 has same contents with the one
displayed ín the END menu. lnto detail, refer to
the 11 ENTERING THE END COMMAND .
3 When the parameter No. 14850 3 ís `1 , prohíbítíng
regístering fıxed form sentences by memory
protection key wi11 be enabled.
-235-
10.SETTING DATA OPEØTION B б3874EN 05
1 Registering a New Fíxed Form Sentence
When the REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE ØLING /
ØG wíndow is displayed on a screen, the following soft-keys
are displayed.
NEW ALTER DELETE sTAND. тo MNU
By pressing [NEW], a window for registeríng a new fixed form
sentence appears. At the same tíme, the followíng soft keys appeаr:

sτЯRτ CONPEиS, τиτI-RPO. ICONI ERT EмD
Е І1
REGISTERED HaNE:
-
t REGISTERFD SFNTENCF.: ._._ .._ _.......--- ..............
INPUT FIXE;D FORH SENIENCE RND РЦSH [1N5ERTT OR [ND
IECT FIXED FORH SENTENCE HND PIJSH SOFT FtEY.
COPY PΛSTΓ. INSERT ADD CANCEL
Positíon the cursor at the REGISTERED NAME ítem, from the
ØI keyboard enter the name of the fıxed form sentence you want to
register, then press the ØUT key to ínput the name.
Then, posítíon the cursor at the REGISTERED SENTENCE ítem,
enter a fixed form sentence from the ØI keyboard, press the ØUT
key, then press [INSERT] oг [ADD]. This can register the new fıxed
form sentence.
[COPY] : Select all regístered names oг fixed form sentences and
copy them to the clípboard.
[PASTE] : Paste the clip board contents. You can copy a part of a
machíníng program beíng edíted to the clípboard in
advance, then you can use ít later to, for example, copy
ít ín REGISTERED SENTENCE.
[INSERT] : Add the пame of the new fixed form sentence to be
regístered to a locatíon immediately before the item
posítíoned by the cursor when [NEW] ís pressed. The
menu numbers of the subsequent fıxed form sentences
aгe all íncremented Ьy one.
[ADD] : Add the name of the new fıxed form sentence to be
regístered to the end of the menu already regístered.
[CANCEL] : Cance1 a registration operation.
- 236 -
B-63874EN/05 OPE ØT1 ON 10.SETTING DATA
NOTE
1 About the number of fıxed form sentences per tab
and the maximum characters per fıxed form
sentence, the followíng settings can be selected.
<1 > The number of fıxed form sentences per tab
ís 10 and the maximum characters per fıxed
form sentence is 128.
<2> The number of fıxed form sentences per tab
ís 5 and the maximum characters per fıxed
form sentence is 256.
2 The characters per fıxed form sentence increase to
256 when bit 4 of parameter = 1.
3 Please power on again when the above parameter
is changed. And after that, fıxed form sentences
wi11 be initialized on starting the machine again.

1
1
ι

- 237 -
10. S ETT 1 N G DATA OPEØTION 6-63874EN/05
Modifying a Fixed Form Sentence
NEW ALTER DELETE sTØ. TO MNU

Posítíon the cursor to the name of the fixed form sentence you want to
modify, and press [ALTER]. A wíndow for modifyíng a fıxed form
sentence then appears.
sτiйRт ІcяМPεиs. ]TNIERP L ЈcΛіivεвт END 1
і
REG1 STERED E:
^αIING HBCHINING END
REGISTERED SE ΠENCE:
G28U?W?V?T?H05: M01 [
TER FIXED FDRλt SENTENCE AHD PUSH [
LECT F1XED F0Ø SENTENCE f1ND PUSH SDFT KEY.
When the above window ís displayed, the followíng soft keys appear:
COPY PASTE ALTER CANCEL
In the REGISTERED NAME and REGISTERED sENTENCE
items, the contents of the selected fıxed form sentence are displayed.
Select an ítem by usíng the T and L cursor keys, select the part you
, want to modify Ьy using the ε and cursor keys, then enter a new
character string from the ØI keyboard. This character string is
ínserted ímmediately before the cursor position.
Wíth the CAN key, you can delete the prevíous character string one
character at a tíme.
In the same way as in registratíon, [COPY] and [PASTE] can also be
used. ,
When you have modifıed REGISTERED NAME and
REGISTERED SENTENCE, you must press the INPUT key at the J
end of the modífıcatíon.
Pressing [ALTER] replaces the oríginal fixed form sentence wíth the
new fıxed form sentence.
-238-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 10.sETľ1NG DATA
Deletíng a Fíxed Form Sentence
NEW ALTER DELETE 5TØ. TO MNU

Posítion the cursor at the name of the fıxed form sentence you want to
delete, and press [DELETE]. Then a message for confirming a
deletíon operatíon ís dísplayed. If you press [YEB], the fıxed form
sentence ís deleted.
Pressing [NO] cancels the deletíon operatíon.
lnitíalízatíon to Standard Fíxed Form Sentences
NEW ALTER DELETE sTØ. TO MNU
The machíne tool buílder caл factory-set partícular fixed form
sentences as standard fıxed form sentences. For detaíls, refer to the
relevant mаnual issued by the machine tool buílder.
In thís case, the fıxed form sentences are stored as ínitíal data in a
memoгy aτea in which data cannot Ьe deleted.
You can use [sTØ.] to restore the ínítíal state factory-set Ьy the
machine tool buílder.
NOTE
1 VVhen fıxed form sentences are ínítíalízed, the
sentences that have been entered or modífıed so
far are a11 deleted; so, care is necessary.
2 A1so when the machíne tool buílder reads standard
fıxed form sentences into memory, initialization
using [sTAND.] ís requíred fırst.
When [STØ.] is pressed, a message for confırming ínítialízation ís
dísplayed. By pressíng [YES], ínitialízatíon ís performed.
Selectíng [NO] cancels the ínítíalízatíon.
-239-
1 1 .BACKGROUND EDITING OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
1 BACKGROUND EDITING
Duríng actual machining on the machine, contents of the other part
program can be edíted.
- 240 -
8-63874EN/05 OPERATION 11.BACKGROUND EDITING

STARTING BACKGROUND EDITING
When MEM mode ís selected on the machíne operator s panel, The

followíng program screen ís dísplayed whether the actual machíníng ís
executing or not.
ι 6 s θ н 81234 x 11
46.58ź ОЇ. 09 н B
B . B e B BB 5 1BΘθ н 99
1 .ВQ н F 5800
F θ 996 17 48 54 00
649 96 98 69

І69И І .-і
698
8. 068 ;
51962 9138. 092. H98. 161. 245,
2 KØ. :
И 128 691 28. :
628 КB. 38. :
T01 MK : İ αı : İ 889 698 8e. :
Нeз 11828 :
s 690 654 ц8. Ч8. , .843 xıBB. HЗ
86Θ 328.
RE WINЛ O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O 5RCH ACTP05. PRE5ET ME5L5T MCHDRW SIMLAT

Pгessíng the [BGEDIT] soft key swítches the screen dísplay to the
background edíting screen and dísplays the program list screen.
Move the cursor to a machíníng program to be edíted, with the cursor
I keys, then select the machíníng program by pressíng [OPEN].

YьčσLiгBM HØt1. USΦıFØ 34 . 3,
lΣ:HоЫY WHЕB USΦØ 9988 / 514448
ι pMłEнT lqD1FIED D47E S[2EČCHpЕ
1009 09I6 TEST PØ 2963-84-10 09:19 8415
1235 : 7811 7RUG4Flм іY1 1 . 1 1LxÉCUS ei ŁЖLОf 14Hі.
7900 4TH B IS 2803-86-89 16:38 242
7981: 4TH BxIS 2θB3--86-θ9 1648 548
7902 aτн Bxıs 2023-66-89 ıз:ıı 548
7918: 4τH B 1S 2003-86-12 1629 540
9200 : Y BHTER ØTØ 2203-84-09 14: 13
9801: ІHPEØ 2ØØ3-84-89 11:56
9BB2: HЕY W 2083-84-09 12:29
9003: ж τиFER PBCKEт 2003-04-09 1747 9994 XY 1NNER PØCKET 1754
9995 XY PeØT 2063-84-09 1757
9016 2883-84-09 18Θ2
F1ECT PRIXìнØM Ы liBER. 0ND SξLΣCT Ø KξY.
C PY 1λ FT
- 241 -
1 ı
1J
1
11.BACKGROUND EDITING OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
1
ENDING BACKGROUND EDITING
,
Duńng background edítíng, pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or

ńghtmost soft key [>] several tímes dísplays the soft-keys includíng
[BGEND]
BGEND

Pressíng the [BGEND] soft key ends the background editing screen
and returns the screen dísplay to the automatíc operatíon screen.
OPERATIONS DURING BACKGROUND EDITING
Operatíons during background editíng are basícally the same as
edítíng operatíons ín the EDIT mode. Note, however, that the use of
some operations ís restńcted.

Iı
J

J

J

- 242 -
в-6з874εиıos OPERATION PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
1 Lв NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
Pressing the [NC CNV] soft key starts the NC program conversion
functíon.
Wíth the NC program conversion functíon, a 4-digit G cycle
machíníng command can be dissolved ínto a single move command
and stored in the part program storage area of the NC.
When the NC program conversion function ís used, the millíng
cycle option or turning cycle optíon ís requíred.
- 243 -
PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION OPERATION B-63874EN/05
BAS1C SPECIFICATIONS
1 Wíth the NC program conversíon functíon, only a 4-dígít G cycle
machíníng command can be díssolved into a single move
command. Any other types of commands are output wíthout
modífıcatíon.
2 The NC program conversíon function can be used in the MEM
mode on1y.
3 0п1y an executed block becomes an NC program conversion
target.
4 A block contaíníng an M98, M99, or custom macгo program ís
not output to the conversíon destínatíon program.
5 In the case of multíple paths, NC program conversion ís
performed for each path.
6 If there ís a loop or condítíonal branch program of a custom
macro program, executed blocks on1y are output. A block
contaíníng a condítíonal branch program of a custom macro ís
not output to the conversíon destínatíon program.
7 If a loop or condítíonal branch program of a custom macгo
program íncludes a 4-dígít G cycle, the 4-dígít G cycle ís
expanded as many tímes as the number of repeats. A block
contaíníng a condítíonal branch program of a custom macгo ís
not output to the conversíon destínatíon program.
8 Whether to output a 4-dígít G cycle machíníng commаnd before
expansíon as a comment cаn be chosen usíng bit 5 of parameter
No. 14703.
Bít 5 of parameter No. 14703 = 0:
Outputs a 4-dígít G cycle machining commаnd before
expansion as a comment in NC program conversíon.
Bit 5 of parameter No. 14703 = 1:
Does not output a 4-dígít G cycle machíníng command
before expansíon as a comment in NC program conversion.
NOTE
1n Seríes 30τ, a 4-dígít G cycle machíning
command before expansion as a comment ís not
outputted.
- 244 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
9 In the case of a subprogram ca11, see the examples below. A
block contaíníng M98 0г M99 ís not output to the conversíon
destination program.
Example 1
Before conversion
00001
M98 P0002; -+ 00002
M30; GO X100. ;
GO X200. ;
GO X300. ;
After conversion M99;
00001
GO X100. ;
GO X200. ;
GO X300. ;
M30;

Example 2
ι Before conversion
00001
G 112811. P3. L3. M0. :
M98 P0002; - 00002
M30; ;
;
;
;
G 1456;
After conversíon M99;
00001
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION-sTART ;
G01X963Z1616;
G01X896 Z1654;
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION-END ;
M30;

г
ι
ь
E г
- 245 -
PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION OPERATION B-б3874EN/05
OPERATING THE NC PROGRAM CONVERSION
FUNCTION
Selecting MEM mode on the machine operator s pane1, and pressíng
the leftmost soft key [<] oτ ńghtØost soft key [>] several tímes
dísplays the soft-keys íncludíng [NC CNV]
σ 1235
и eıгз4 в.eBΘ 1e
8.8θΘ D 8 08
8.8ΘΘ 5 eмe
8.8Bв F 5888
GBB 19 48 54 08
049 94 98 69
_.мі н.і
088
К 01235 :
ч 2 61942 6134. 694. нэe. 165. 345.
z κe.
в 62869128 . : sze xe, иe. ,
τвı нØ ;
01 ι
.. 608 198 BB:
: HB3 11,84
6BØ 1 98 Ø B.+YB. `.
111.
L3. 2
NC CNV WK SET T-OFs 5ETING
<1> The [CREATE PROGRAM FOR DESTINATION] screen
appears. Enter the number of a conversíon destínatíon program,
then press the [CREATE] soft key.
CØTE CANCEL
τ
- 246 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION

г
<2> If the program already exists, a message for checking if the
program may be overwrítten ís dísplayed. If the program may Ьe
overwritten, press [YES]. If you select [NO], the screen goes
back to the memory program screen, so press [NC CNV] agaín
and enter other program number.
12
s 8 в,. 69 4 0 и в1234
тe
60 H 8
B.θθΘ 5 8 M Ø 2 0 H 8. 890 f 5800 F 0 608 17 49 54 90
A H49 98 98 69 13. 1
а: 11
6θB
9900 1l 3Š :
Ѓ 9. é 61982 9138. 898, tΓJB, 165. 345.
Kθ. :
ì 628 1191 28.
ØEST. Pf8I6Rfя1 ІЮ.9і5Г 4 628 Кθ. 78. : ..
.,Pю[ η;üϋłlτt ЧC E?:I` Л RцίіTГ ` T81 M86 ь
,- 61 :
Ø 608 690 60. ;
R 903 51808 :
`ì 600 694 684 18, 78.
ıы 643 110e. иІ :
τ2e. ss . ıз_
,.86h .мfl
<3> Press the [CREATE] soft key. A new program with the entered
number ís created. The NC program conversíon function screen

shown below appears to dísplay a conversion source program
window and a post-conversíon program wíndow at the same tíme.
Pressíng [CANCEL] switches the screen dísplay from the NC
program conversíon functíon screen to the program screen.
1
.,
ІВЯ ІІЖТІІIИбЈІ:і:е σ 9235
X 6 X θ 4 8 s 0 и 81234 τв
Y e. eыв ex 08 H 8 ź
6
2 в вгіe
д
;F 0 F 5686
Ù80 17 48 54 Ø
149 98 98 69
іІ1235 :
61982 B1I1. 89E
Φ.
626 691 28.
628 X8. fl. <; τв1 нaв :
oı :
6вв 698 66.
903 51860
686 698 654 Ø.

- 247 -
PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION OPERATION B-63874EN/05
<4> The followíng soft keys appear on the NC program conversion
functíon screen. Press [START] to start NC program conversion.
DEST. STØT PROCES SINGLE STOP OPEN REWIND N SRCH RETURN
[DEST.] : Creates a new conversion destínatíon program.
[START] : Starts NC program conversion executíon.
[PAUSE] : Stops NC program conversíon executíon temporarily.
[SINGLE] : Executes NC program conversíon block by block.
[STOP] : Stops NC program conversíon executíon.
[OPEN] : Selects a conversion source program from the program
list screen.
[REWIND] : Searches for a conversíon source program.
[N SRCH] : Makes an N search for a conversíon source program.
[CHPATH] : Displayed on1y when the multi-path option ís specifıed.
This soft key switches between paths.
[RETURN] : Ends the NC progrØ conversíon function and returns
the screen display to the ordínary MEM mode screen.
When bít 0 of parameter No. 27310 = 1, the [PAUSE] soft key ís
replaced wíth the [PROCES] soft key.
[РROCES] : Executes NC program conversion process by process.
<5> Duríng executíng NC program conversion, the converted part
program blocks are dísplayed ín the destínatíon wíndow.

., BØ
x H 81234
e.BBeЃ, U T 1
8.8B8ı 8χ 61 61
8. Θ2 e 5 1ØBB м 99
Z -LØ.ØØ rº Ø e Y .888 F F 588888
681 17 48 54 88 A O.ØØØ 842 96 98 69 13. 1
_ г..
іl1Mь F588. : 1B бãί llθB . 1 Ÿ ë + CS4 . ...
82 и-eь.5 F5q8. ; : 6ľ11ьľf , 55. JľŇ. Π1f. І .
;61 1-68. F5ΘΘ. ; F508. V3B0, ε288. H2. c2. P2.
Gλ -188. F58θ. : 648. B2. X4B. ϊ2. :
68 n. .. 612h1 1İ. DH. L-ĹFl- HH- Vf1.
јбб К-Ø; 9-88. : 1120. uнH. 81. :
t [ n . г 61040 J1B. HΘ.5 F508.
z-ıe.. vз88, ε2ю. 82. e5. c2. 22. :
і Z-28. F2θØ. . ;п H9θ pΘ,_ eB cPOCKEτ ε1G1Жεi
1 MØ. V-46. F5Θ0. 1`, 628 691 28. :
30 628 К0. 96. ;
92 1616 : і
H
1-ґј І h 1 pÌJ J
L DEST STØT PROCES tNGLE S?DP ІХіН R L1t ІІp H SRCFf ?εıuки
<6> ConfØ that the NC program conversion ends, then press
[RETURN].
DEST. STØT PROCES SINGLE STOP OPEN RE WIND N SRCH
- 248 -
в-sзвı4εиıos OPERATION PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION
1
RESTR1CT10NS
1 The NC program conversíon functíon cannot be used during
background editíng.
2 Blocks contaíníng the followíng words are not output to the
conversíon destínatíon program: ι
M98

M99
Custom macro condítíonal branch program
<1> GOTO
<2> ГF
<3> THEN
<4> WHILE
<5> END
Custom macгo variable assignment program
?-
Custom macгo extemal output command program
<1> POPEN
<2> PCLOS
<3> BPRNT[-]
<4> DPRNT[ ]
3 If аn a1aгm ís íssued duríng NC program conversíon, the results
of conversíon at that tíme aгe output to the conversion destínatíon
pгogτam.
4 During NC program conversion, the followíng soft keys cannot
Ьe used:
[DEST.], [START], [OPEN], [REWIND], [sRCH], [CHPATH],
[RETURN]
5 If an executíon mode other than MEM mode ís set during NC
pτogτam conversíon, the execution of NC program conversíon ís
termínated forcíbly.
6 Duríng NC program conversíon, the screen dísplay cannot be
swítched to the NC screen.
7 If on1y one block is inserted between WHILE programs, blocks
as many as the loop count are not output but on1y one block is
output.
Before conversíon
WHILE [ 1 EQ 2]DO1;
GOXO.;
END 1 ;
After conversíon 0n1y oпe block ís output even íf three loop
operatíons are performed.
GO X0. ;
- 249 -
PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION OPERATiON Bfi3874EN/05
8 The NC program conversíon functíon ís designed to expand a
4-dígít G cycle machíning code. So, NC program conversion ís
not performed as expected in cases other than the cases índicated
below.
Example 1 When both the machíníng command and figure comınand
of a cycle aгe present on tbe maіn program
00001
Gl 12811. RО.8А95.В80.ЈЗ.РЗLЗ.МО.FО.5Х1 .Yl .ZlO. ;
;
G1451 НО.VО.К7.DО.LО.МО.ТІ. ;
G1451 Н5.VО.К1 .С5.LО.МО.ТІ. ;
τ2. ;
G 1456;
M30;

Example 2 When the fıgure command of a cycle ís present on a
subprogram
00001
;
M98 P0002; 00002
M30; ;
G1451 НО.VО.К7.DО.LО.МО.ТІ. ;
G1451 Н5.VО.К1 .С5.LО.МО.ТІ. ;
;
G 1456;
M99;

It ís assumed that the subprogram íncludes oп1y the figure
command of a cycle.
9 Executed program blocks are the target of NC statement
conversíon.
10 Feeárate commаnd ís converted wíth decímal poínt
11 When custom macro block exít before executíng stop commаnd
M00, M01, M02, M30, M99 , executíng stop command M00,
M01, M02, M30, M99 ís not converted.
12 When M98 block exít before executíng stop coØand M00,
M01, M02, M30, M99 , executíng stop command M00, M01,
M02, M30, M99 ís not converted.
13 A block íncludíng M198 ís not converted.
- 250 -
B 63874EN/05 OPERATiON DATA BASE FUNCTION
13 TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION
- 2J1 -
DATA BASE FUNCTION OPEØTION Bδ3874EN/05
13. 7 SETTING OF TOOL OFFSET DATA
For a compound machine, the followíng data items are dísplayed for
the T mode:
1 T : GEOMETRY OFFSET
2 T : WEAR OFFSET
3 T : TOOL DATA
4 T: GEOMETORY TOOL TYPE OFFSET
5 T: GEOMETORY WEAR TYPE OFFSET
6 T: GEOMETORY DATA TYPE OFFSET
The followíng data ítems are dísplayed for the M mode:
7 M: TOOL OFFSET TOOL LENGTH COMP. / CUTTER
COMPENSATION
8 M : TOOL DATA
9 M: TOOL TYPE OFFSET TOOL LENGTH COMP. /
CUTTER COMPENSATION
10 M : TOOL TYPE DATA
Each mode can Ьe selected wíth [M---T] soft key.
For lathes, data items 1 to 6 aгe dísplayed. For machíníng centers,
data items 7 to 10 aгe displayed.
ііі і
т:GE:oМ 1т:Оεяк т:тoaι Пqтfi 6εo-rσι : JIR-TOL :DRtR-TUL
иП. x-Øxıs 2-RXIS r-axτs RRUIUS
001 ^І 0
002 127. 088 12.7Ø8 8.0ØØ Ø
003 10Øб.B35 Ø.8Ø8 Ø.0Ø0 Ø
004 9499. 800 9999. 088 9999. 800 ы. 008 e
885 0. 108 8
806 9999. 800 8
007 1088. 338 -188. 441 8. 088 0. 000 8
Y 2 Ч MUnER LS.
The data to be set and dísplayed in 1 , 2 and 7 is comØon to the
corresponding data in CNC. For detaíls, refer to the operator s manual
of the CNC.
And for lathes, inputtíng tip radíus va1ue of míllíng tools in radius ís
necessary. If not, sometímes alarm ís gíven.
For data items 4 , 5 and 9 , which aгe related to the tool
management function, see the descriptíon of Too1 Management
Function ín Appendix.
For data ítems 3 , 6 , 8 and 10 , which is about tool form data, see
next sectíon.
- 252 -
6-63874EN/05 OPEØTION DATA BASE FUNCTION
SETTING OF TOOL DATA
By selectíng tool data tab in tool offset wíndow, tool data settíng
wíndow ís dísplayed. Too1 data ís the data that ís necessary for
executíng anØation or cycle, and their items are tool radíus, kind of
too1, name, settíng and tool form data. Of a11 ítems, tool radius ís
ínputted ínto radíus for lathes oг cutter radíus compensatíon for
míllíng in tool offset table. The rest ís inputted in TOOL DATA
tab.
These data are reserved іn SØ, so oпce set, they aren t deleted
though the power supply is cut. But more than 300 tools cаn t Ьe
ínputted.
Besides, by parameter , you can decide whether tool
data tab ís displayed or not.
1 Setting of Too1 Type
By placíng cursor on an ítem for selectíng kínd of too1, the followíng
soft keys appeаr. When appropriate soft key ís pushed, a type of tool
ís selected and íts icon ís dísplayed. A1so tool пame ís dísplayed on the
ńght of the icon.
Soft keys for selectíng kínd of tool for lathes or T mode of combíned
machíne
GENERL THREAD GROOVE BUTTON sTRAIT CHCURS INIT CLOSE
DRILL CHAMFR F END B END TØ REAMER BORING F MILL CLOSE
Soft keys for selectíng kínd of tool for machíning centers or M mode
of combíned machíne
DRILL CHAMFR F END B END TAP CHCURs INIT CLOSE
REAMER BORING F MILL CLOSE
- 253 -
DATA BASE FUNCTION OPERATION B-63874EN/05

Edítíng of Too1 Name
To edít tool name, place cursor on tool name, change mode ínto
character, ínput alphabets oг numerals, and push ØUT.
This function ís useful to dístínguísh similar tools.
Settíng of Too1 Set
When a cursor ís placed on tool settíng number, a guidance wíndow is
automatícally dísplayed in the right of the screen. By ínputtíng tool
settíng number and pushing ØUT, tool settíng can be set.
Enteríng of Too1 Data
By placíng cursor on ítems of tool data, guidance window ís
automatically dísplayed. By ínputting tool data va1ue аnd pushíng
ØUT, tool data cаn be set. Then three-whole and one-decímal
number can Ьe ínputted when unít ís [deg.]. When [ínch] oг [mm],
eíght-figure number can Ьe ínputted. But numbers that ís ínputted to 7
decіmal places aгe rounded off to 6 decimal places.
The names of ítem аnd the numbers of item depend on kínd of too1.
See below about the detaíl. In thís table, tools that don t have to set
tool data are omítted.
Too1 data isn t necessary to execute míllíng cycle. So millíng cycle
can be executed though tool data isn t set. ,
Too1 form data for turnin
K1ND OF TOOL GENERAL THREAD GROOVE
Data1 Cutting ed e an 1e Nose an 1e Tip wídth
Data2 Nose an 1e Tip 1en th
1
K1ND OF TOOL BUTTON STRAIGHT
Datв1 Тір 1en h Cutting ed e an te
Data2 Nose an 1e
м Too1 form data for mі11іn
K1ND OF TOOL DR1LL CHAMFER
Data Nose an 1e Cutter diameter
: Cyc1e can be executed íf not set
,
- 254 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION DATA BASE FUNCTION
Cuttíng Edge angle of Too1 Data Base Function
Aп angle that ís made by a líne paгa11e1 with holder wídth and cutting
edge ís defıned as a cuttíng edge ang1e.
Ho1der Ho1der
Wıdth Wıdth
T T
A A
A a Aa Cuttíng Edge angle
La para11e1 with holder width
1. Draw a straíght 1іne that ís para11e1 wíth holder width
2. An angle that ís made by a straight líne La and a straíght líne T is
defined as a cuttíng edge angle
Ho1der Wıdth
Aa Cutting edge angle
La para11e1 wíth holder wìdth
З. In case of L form holder, the wídth of a part that ís installed típ ís
defined as holder width.
Actually MGí defØes cuttíng edge angle from tool settíng.
Show followíng concrete examples.
set 1 set 2

set 5 set 6
- 255 -
DATA BASE FUNCTION OPERATION в-sз8ıaεиıos
set 9 set 10
set 13 set 14
initialízíng of Too1 Data
Too1 data can be ínítialized Ьy [INIT] soft key. When [INIT] ís pushed,
a message for conflrmíng ínitialízatíon ís dísplayed. By pressíng
[YEs], ínítialízatíon ís performed.
But items to be ínítíalized are on1y items placed in tool data tab and
[Iλ1IT] has no connection wíth offset va1ue.

І
,
- 256 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION DATA BASE FUNCTION
SELECTING TOOL DATA AT PROGRAM ENTERING
To select dada number that ís set in TOOL DATA tab, T code or D
code is used to work machínes.
For lathes, T code is used to specífy numbers of three types, tool
number, geometry tool offset number and wear tool offset number. 1n
these numbers, the geometry offset number wí11 be used for actual
machíne operatíons. There are some ways to specify geometry tool
offset, for example settíng parameter 1. But in a11 case, the
geometry offset number wi11 be used. With tool management functíon,
D code is used to select offset number. But іn this case, the geometry
tool offset number wí11 be used too.
For machining centers, the number of the cutter compensatíon that is
specífıed Ьy D code wí11 be used for actual machine operatíon.
For compound machínes, when T mode, the way to appoint tool data
number ís the same as lathes. So the same number of geometry tool
offset and runs machine.
When M mode, the way to appoint tool data number ís the same as
machiníng centers. So the number of cutter compensatíon for actual
machine operatíon.
In anímated sØulatíon, when tool data number ís selected by T code
or D code, a tool ís drawn.
NOTE
There are 2 ways to draw tools. One is the way to
select tool data number above. The other is the
way to use G code. P1ace T or D code and G
code 2 blocks apart when G code follows T ог D
code . 1f T or D code and G code aren t placed 2
blocks apart, order of G code sometimes doesn t
work correctly.
The relatíon between the specifıed tool kínd and machiníng cycle wi11
be checked. For example, if you try to use chaınfer tool in drí11 cycle,
some correspondíng alarm wi11 occur. But when kínd of tool isn t
ínputted, this checking wí11 not done.
- 257 -
DATA BASE FUNCTION OPERATION в-sзвı4εиıo5
SETTING OF TOOL GRAPHIC DATA
Several ítenıs are needed to execute machíne simulation ín addítíon to
items that explaíned up to here. These ítems are called Graphíc Data.
Graphíc Data is showed below.
1 Too1 Graphíc Data
Too1 graphíc data are defined by parameters, from to
When these parameters aren t defined, appropriate va1ue
wi11 be ínserted automatícally. For detaíls, refer to the description of
Parameter ín APPENDIX.
Too1 Øanhíc data for turníne tools
Kind of tool General Threading Groovín
Data 1 Tip position Tip position Tip position
Data 2 Tip 1en th Tip width Holder 1en th
Data 3 Holder 1en th Holder 1en th Holder width
Data 4 Ho1der width Ho1der width
Data 5 Ho1der 1en th 2
Data 6 Ho1der width 2
Kind of tool Button turning Strai ht
Data 1 Tip position Tip position
Data 2 Ho1der 1en th Tip 1eri th
Data 3 Ho1der width Ho1der 1en th

Data 4 Ho1der width
Data 5 Ho1der 1en th2
Data 6 Ho1der width 2
Too1 aranhic data for milline to 1s
Kínd of tool Drí11 Chamfer F1at endmíll Ba11 endmi11
Data 1 Tip 1en th Tip 1en th Tip 1en th Tip 1en th
Data 2 Cutter 1en th
Data 3 Shank 1en th λ
Data 4 Shank diameter
Kind of tool Tap Reamer Boring Face mi11
Data 1 Tip 1en th Tip 1en th Tip 1en th Tip 1en th

- 25x -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION DATA BASE FUNCTION
ACCESSING TOOL DATA BASE FUNCTION
Accessíng tool data base functíon is the function that tool data
regístered in Manua1 Guíde i are read or wrítten from custom macгo.
So, it is possible that tool data are accessed from a program. And
restoríng the ínítíal oг copyíng tool data can be avaílable.
1 Basíc Specífícatíons
The followíng data can be read and wňtten.
1. Kínd of tool
2. settíng
З. Too1 data 1 ex. cutting edge angle
4. Too1 data 2 ex. nose angle
NOTE
1 Too1 name can t be read and wrítten.
2 The optíon of custom macro B is necessary to use
thís functíon.
3 On1y from custom macro or executíon macro, tool
data can be read and written.
4 To enable this functíon, bít 6 of parameter No.
14852 must be set to 1.
In addítíon to readíng аnd wrítíng, the following functíons are
avaílable.
1. Copyíng tool data
A11 tool data, íncludíng tool name, can be copied íf source offset
number and destínatíon offset number are desígnated.
2. Inítíalízation of tool data
Too1 data per tool or a11 tool data cаn be restored the ínitial.
- 259 -
DATA BASE FUNCTION OPERATION в sзв74εи/0s
System Varíables
Too1 data can be inputted or outputted from custom macro through
5750 - 5756 system vańables. Input adequate va1ue to the system
vańables when you want to access to tool data.
And when Manua1 Guide i fmd that adequate va1ue have been set to ít,
tool data ís outputted or inputted.
The followíng system vańables whose numbers aгe used for the
purpose of accessíng tool data.
5750 : The vańable that ís used to decide the workíng of
accessing tool data base function. Too1 data wí11 be
ínputted oг outputted from system vańables when
Manua1 Guíde i have detected the value of 5750. The
meanings aгe followíng.
0 : Do nothing
1 : Read tool data
2 : Wríte tool data
3: Copy tool data from source to destínatíon
4: Restore the ínít tool data of desígnated
offfset number
5: Restore the ínít of a11 tool data
5751 : Result
The meaníngs aгe followíng.
0 : Id1e
1 : Normal fmish
2: Regístered tool data number exceeds maximum
3: Designatíng the workíng ís wrong
4: Desígnating offset number ís wrong
5: Desígnatíng kínd of tool ís wrong
on1y when wrítíng
6: Designatíng settíng ís wrong on1y when wńting
7: Designatíng data 1 is wrong on1y when wrítíng
8: Designating data 2 ís wrong oп1y when writíng
5752 : Desígnating offset number to be read or wńtten. And in
case of copying tool data, Desígnatíng offset number of
the destinatíon.
If wrong va1ue ís ínputted, 4 wí11 be returned to result ín
readíng or wńting.
- 260 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION DATA BASE FUNCTION
5753 : Gotten kínd of tool in readíng or desígnated kínd of tool
ín writing. And in case of copyíng tool data,
Designating offset number of the source.
If wrong va1ue is ínputted, 5 wí11 be returned to result in
writíng.
10 : General tool
11 : Tbreading tool
12 : Groovíng tool
13 : Button turning tool
14 : Straíght tool
20 : Drí11 tool
21 : Chamferíng tool
ι 22 : F1at end mi11 tool
23 : Ba11 end mi11 tool

24 : Tap tool
25 : Reamer tool
26 : Boríng tool
27 : Face mi11 tool
5754 : Gotten settíng of tool m readíng and desígnated settíng of
tool in writing. If wrong va1ue ís ínputted, 6 wi11 be
returned to result in wńtíng.
ι 5755 : Gotten data 1 ín readíng and desígnated data 1 ín wríting.
If wrong va1ue is inputted, 7 wi11 be returned to result in
wrítíng.
5756 : Gotten data 2 ín readíng and designated data 2 in writing.
If wrong value ís ínputted, 8 wi11 be returned to result in
wrítíng.
Readíng
In readíng tool data, set offset number of tool data that should be
gotten to 5752 and set 1 to 5750. Each data wí11 be outputted to
5753, 5754, 5755 and 5756.
Wrítíng
In wrítíng tool data, set offset number of tool data that should be
written to 5752. And set tool data to 5753, 5754, 5755 and 5756.
Fínally, set 2 to 5750. Each data wí11 be reserved to memory fıeld of
Manua1 Guíde i .
Copyíng
In copyíng, set offset number of destínatíon to 5752, set offset
number of source to 5753 and set 3 to 5750. Manual Guide i wí11
copy tool data of source to destínatíon.
- 261 -
DATA BASE FUNCTION OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
13. 5. 6 1 n ítia 1 ízation
1n ínítíalízation, set offset number of tool data that should be restored
to the init to 5752 and set 4 to 5750. This tool data of desígnated
offset number wí11 Ьe restored to the ínit.
13. 5. 7 lnitializatíon of A11 Too1 Data
In inítíalízation of a11 tool data, set 5 to 5750. A11 tool data wi11 be
restored to the inít. But in case of multí path system, the data that wi11
be restored to the inít aгe on1y the data of the path that custom macгo
executes.
And ín case of compound machínes, the data that wi11 be restored to
the ínit are oп1y the data of the mode that custom macro executes
míllíng mode or turning mode .
- 262 -
8-63874EN/05 OPERATION 14.ED1TING OF FREE FIGURE AND F1XED FORM FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM
14 EDITING OF FREE FIGURE AND F1XED
FORM FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM
FORM
On the program editing screen, after movíng the cursor on the sub
program ca11 command M98 P which ís composed by the free
fıgure blocks or just one fixed form fıgшe block, pressíng the
[INPUT] key dísplays the wíndow for editing the fıgшes to edít
dírectly.
- 263 -
14 EDiTiNG OF FREE FIGURE AND F1XED FORM FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM OPERATION Bfi3874EN/05
EDITING A FREE FORM FIGURE SUBPROGRAM
The operatíons are as follows.
1 On the program edíting screen, press the [INPUT] key or the
[ALTER] soft key after movíng the cursor on the sub program
ca11 command M98 P whích is composed by the free

figure blocks.
2 The followíng wíndow for edítíng the free fıgures іncluded sub
program ís dísplayed.
o ııя
,
I Г Γ їіr1
88
ьи 3. і

і

Lεcτ Ø У.
Γ
/ Г J σ
ιτε ε Ø 9
cε α τε εØετε kECλLc CRFA7П cл4ixε_
-264-
6-63874EN/o5 OPERATION 14.ED1TING OF FREE FIGURE AND F1XED FORM FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM
3 Oп the window to fmish edítíng the free figures, the operatíons
aгe as follows.
Pressíng the [OK] soft key alters the exístíng blocks ínto the
edítíng figures ín the machíníng program and returns to the
maіn program dísplayíng screen.
But, at the case that the another free fıgшes exíst after the
edítíng fıgшes, for example the ísland figures exist after the
pocket outer free fıguτes, the edítíng wíndow of the next
free fıgures ís dísplayed.
At the case of edítíng the free figures for pocketíng,
pressíng the [1SLAND] soft key displays the wíndow for
editíng the free fıgшes START POINT to make the new
ísland figшes after alteríng the edítíng figшes.
j Aы-,
lι
Γ NOTE
Oп the edítíng sub program wíndow, the free
fıgures cannot be output into the another sub
program.
r
F
İ

- 265 -
14 EDITING OF FREE FIGURE AND F1XED FORM FIGURE OF sUBPROGRAM FORM OPERATION B-63874EN/05
4 On the wíndow of edíting the free figures, pressing the
[CANCEL] soft key displays a window for the confØation to
ínterгupt edíting. From this window, pressíng the [YES] soft key
cancels the edítíng operatíons aтіd returns to the main program
dísplayíng screen.
t
s ıı5e

NOTE
1 Duríng editing the subprogram of free figure,
dísplaying free fıgure edítíng window, this edítíng
mode is canceled and the editing window is closed
by the followíng operatíons. The selected program
is kept to the edíted subprogram.
Mode ís changed to other than ED1T mode when
foreground edítíng ís done.
Change to CNC screen.
Power turned off.
2 1n thís case, the free figure edíting wíndow ís
closed. The program that is then displayed in the
program display area is a subprogram.
- 266 -
8-63874EN/05 OPERATION 14.ED1TING OF FREE FIGURE AND F1XED FORM FIGURE OF SUBPROGRAM FORM
WARNING MESSAGE
The followíng warníng messages are dísplayed at the edítíng of the
subprogram.
5UB PROGRAM IS NOT FOUND
When the [INPUT] key or the [ALTER] soft key ís pressed after
movíng the cursor on the sub program ca11 command, thís
warníng message ís dísplayed at the case that the program
number specífıed by address P doesn t exísts.
PROGRAM IS PROTECTED.
When the [INPUT] key or the [ALTER] soft key ís pressed after
movíng the cursor on the sub pτogгam ca11 command, thís
warníng message ís dísplayed at the case that the program
number specífıed by address P ís protected.
PROGRAM IS NOT FREE FIGURE
When the [INPUT] key or the [ALTER] soft key ís pressed after
movíng the cursor on the sub program ca11 command, thís
warníng message ís dísplayed at the case that the program
number specífıed by address P doesn t іnclude the free figure
blocks.
PROGRAM IS SELECTED FOREGROUND
When the screen changes to the maіn program dísplayíng screen
after the [OK] soft key or the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed at
background edítíng, this warníng message is displayed at the case
that the maín program ís already selected at foreground.
EDITING A F1XED FORM FIGURE SUBPROGRAM
When bít 1 of parameter No. 14851 ís set to 1, a fixed form figure in
subprogram form can be edited directly Ьy placíng the cursor on the
subprogram ca11 commaпd of the main program then pressíng
[ALTER].
The procedure is as follows:
<1> P1ace the cursor on the block of a subprogram ca11 command
M98P of the main program, then press the [ALTER] soft
key or the [INPUT] key.
<2> The wíndow for ínput of fıxed form figure data on the
subprogram ís dísplayed. Enter data, then press the [ALTER]
soft key.
<3> The modífıed data ís output to the machíníng program, аnd the
fixed form fıgure data ínput wíndow ís closed. The maіn
program is then displayed agaín.
NOTE
When the cursor is placed on a subprogram ca11
command of the maín program, fıxed form fıgure
drawíng ís not performed on the graphic wíndow.
- 267 -
15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS OPERATION B-63874EN/05
1 S SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS
On 1VIANUAL GUIDE i, almost a11 the operations excepting
numerical data entering are done by soft-keys. However, íf you are
we11 experienced іn those operatíons, you can operate more quickly by
usíng other key instead of the assígned soft-key. Thís other key
operatíon is called shortcut key.
Pressing HELP key oп the ØI panel dísplays the wíndow in whích
explanatíons of shortcut key are dísplayed. Into details, refer to II 16.
HELP sCREEN.
NOTE
1f the sma11 MD1 key board is attached to the CNC,
shortcut key operatíons cannot be used.
- 268 -

B δ3874EN/05 OPERATION 15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS
SHORTCUTS FOR VARIOUS CONFIRMATION
OPERATIONS
Soit key Shortcut ke
YES 1NPU
NO CAN
SHORTCUTS FOR RANGE SELECTION
Soft key Shortcut ke
SELECT 1NPUT
CANCEL CAN
SHORTCUTS FOR COPY OPERATION
Soft Кеу Shortcut ke
COPY 1NPU
CANCEL CAN
SHORTCUTS FOR CUT OPERATION
Soft key Shortcut ke
CUT 1NPU
CANCEL CAN

- 269 -
15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS OPEØTION в-6з874εиıo5
SHORTCUTS FOR THE BASE SCREEN SOFT KEYS
Soft key Shortcut ke
< - + 1NPU
SF1 1 + 1NPU
SF2 2 + 1NPU
SF3 3 + 1NPUT
SF4 4 + 1NPUT
SF5 5 + 1NPU
SF6 6 + 1NPU
SF + 1NPUT
SF8 8 + 1NPU
SF9 9 + 1NPU
SF10 0 + 1NPU
> + 1NPU
By settíng bit 1 of parameter No. 14703 to 1, a number for
shortcut operatíon can be dísplayed uııder each soft key.
SHORTCUT FOR STARTING THE CYCLE CHANGE
SCREEN
Soft kу Shortεut key
A[ LTER] 1NPU
SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
SELEC 1NPU oг numeral + 1NPU
CANCEL CAN
SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM 1NSERTION
SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
1NSER 1NPU oг numeral + 1NPUT
CLOSE CAN
- 270 -
1
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS

SHORTCUTS FOR THE M CODE 1NSERTION SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
1NSERT 1NPUT
CLOSE CAN
SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM L1ST SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
OPEN 1NPUT or 9
CLOSE CAN or 0
DELETE DELETE or 3
EDTCOM ALTER or 4
NE 1
COPY 2
SEARCH 5
M CARD 6
ALLDEL 7
SRTORD 8
SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM CREATtON SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
CREATE 1NPU
CANCEL EOB
Z SHORTCUTS FOR THE COMMENT EDITING SCREEN
Softkey Shortcut ke
CREATE [INPUTJ
CANCEL EOB
SHORTCUTS FOR THE SEARCH SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
SEARCH 1NPU
CANCEL EOB
- 271 -
15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS OPERATfON Bf3874ENl05
SHORTCUTS FOR THE CYCLE 1NPUT SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
1NSERT 1NSER
ALTER ALTER
CANCEL EOB
SF1 1
SF2 2
SF3 3
S F4 4
SF5 5
S F6 6
SF7 7
SF8 8
SF9 9
SFO [0] _
> + 1NPUT
SHORTCUT FOR THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE
SYSTEM SETTING SCREEN
L
Soft key Shortcut key
CL[OSE] [EOB]
SHORTCUT FOR THE TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN
Soft key Snortεut key
CLOSE] [EOB]
SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM
REGISTRATION SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
CLOSE 1NPUT
NE 1NSERT
DELETE DELETE
ALTER [ALTER]
- 272 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION 15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS
SHORTCUTS FOR THE CREATION SCREEN FOR
REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION
Soft key Shortcut ke
1NSERT 1NSERT
ADD ALTER
CANCEL EOB
SHORTCUTS FOR THE ALTER SCREEN FOR REGULAR
PROGRAM REGISTRATION
Soft key Shortcut ke
ALTER ALTER
CANCEL EOB
15.ZО SHORTCUTS FOR THE PRESET SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
ALTER ALTER
CANCEL EOB
SHORTCUT FEEDRATE THE MEASUREMENT RESULT
SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut key
CLO[ SE] C[ AN]
SHORTCUT FOR THE MANUAL MEASUREMENT
SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut key
CLO SE] [E06]
SHORTCUT FOR VARIOUS SETTING SCREENS
Soft key Shortcut key
CLOSE E OB]
- 273 -
15.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS OPERATION B-63874EN/05
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE MA1N SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
CREATE 1NPU
CANCEL CAN
DELETE DELETE
ALTER ALTER
<
SF1 1
SF2 2
SF3 3
SF4 4
SF5 5
SF6 6
SF
SF8 8
SF9 9
SF10 0
>
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE 1NPUT SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
O 1NSER
CANCEL EOB
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE CREATION
SCREEN
Soft key Shortcut ke
O 1NSER
CANCEL EOB
- 274 -
B-63874εN/05 OPERATION SCREEN
1 6 HELP SCREEN
Pressíng the [HELP] key on the ØI keyboard displays the HELP
window, in whích explanatíons for shortcut key operatíon are
dísplayed.
In the wíndow, CONTENTs and TOPIC tabs are displayed.
.,
nt1 1,ukilf O , x 59 4 . + ø н e12э4
7 Y C e 8. 8 . e ы e J ee τe
Y oe 58
2 s 8 іі 8
z 6.66ø n F A , ` 18 81 2485488
і. ,549 98 98 69 A θ.E і
СOнTE łT5 1 ІØ C _ ... ,., ..І.
3. ьІ
2. ØτC1Π SεLECT 8. І 745.
3. 5 ,а,т Е Ø7 1ffY
a. sORY TCYQE мoDІεr
s. siFtQIT [QWY] 8rστaτ[oи
І.І :р :.:[І:іі 6. Øτcuτ: QJTI erεR пІ8и
s1в6e Rв. Ø. [. Јıы, κs. xвi :
ж
cØ
Movíng the cursor Ьy T or sL, place the cursor to the ítem of shortcut
key to dísplay the explanatíon.
3. ØІpΠ 50FT KEY
a. Il IClJTCYCLE lOD1FY 39. 168. 345.
s. Øτaπ: iQWY] oнσ:яτгои
6. SF10RTpП: [C1П1 ePERBTIeN
7. SHeRτC1П:ØCT 1EM1
[Іі [ и; С:іІ[іІ : ;,6
ј 4 61 , 55. t3. I18. K8. 141.
cІesε
-27J-
SCREEN OPERATI ON 6-63874EN/05
Pressíng the cursor key --> displays the tab TOPIC tab and
explanation of the selected shortcut key.
Pressíng the cursor key < returns to CONTENTS tab.
Pressing [CLOSE] closes the HELP wíndow.
- 276 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
1 7 MEMORY CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION
- 277 -
CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
1 7. 7 MEMORY CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT OF PART PROGRAM
1 7. 1. 1 Memory Card lnput/Output Screen of Part Program
NE WPRG O LIST 5RCHT SK ł1v Ć 5K H COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE

Select EDIT mode on the machíne operator s pane1. Pressíng [O
LIST] dísplays the program líst window, programs registered in the
CNC.
B123л ;τ B
εцoσгви HeН. BsεulFHεε 29 29
ΓEØτ Я 85EDlFREE 1 8
Ø_ T MODIFIED HΘτЕ
8BB1: 2083-ØЬ-17 1551
BB11: PSlEDO REF 2083-96-12 1684
BBSB: 2883-B4-1B 1656
0696 2883-84-10 1133
8897: 2e83-84-10 1в:aв
eΘ9B: 11э2
ee99: 2003-84-11 ıB:5з
0290 лτи ØіЅ 2083-86-89 1641
BЯ1: 4τH B Is 2003-86-89 1521
8793: 4TH pК1Ѕ 2083-86-89 1652
BЯB: dτH в Is 2883-86-89 1357
0?99 ΔTH Ø1ѕ 2803-86-89 1317
1000 : 1pIN TESТ PROG 2863-84-10 89 19
cτ ØosRθг нuмвεw. 6911 τειεcτ SiWT ırtv.
Following soft-keys are dísplayed.
NE W COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEARCH MCØD ALL DEL sRTORD OPEN CLOSE
-278-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
Pressing the [M CARD] soft key on the program líst screen displays
the INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD] screen.
Following soft-keys are displayed.
INPUT DELETE SEØCH OUTPUT FORMAT RETURN
[INPUT] : Inputs a program from the memory card.
[] : Inputs a program from the memory card by changing
the O number .
[DELETE] : Deletes files oп the memory cаrd.
[SEØCH] : Seaтches for a fi1e on the memory cаrd.
[OUTPUT] : Dísplays the screen for output to the memory card.
[FORMAT] : Formats the memorу cаrd.
[RETURN] : Returns the screen display to the program list screen.
In order to delete a fıle іп the memorу card, place the cursor on the
fi1e name in the above window and press [DELETE]. This soft key
dísplays a message for checkíng íf selected fıle may Ьe deleted.
Pressing [YES] deletes the fi1e in the memorу cаrd. Pressíng [NO]
cancels the deletion of a11 programs.
YEs o
τ
In case of inítíalízing the memorу card such as deletíng a11 fıles ín the
memorу cаrd, press [FORMAT]. This soft key displays a message for
checkíng íf the memorу card may Ьe ínitialized. Pressíng [YES]
inítialízes the memorу card and a11 fıles in the memorу cаrd aгe
deleted.. Pressíng [NO] cancels the deletíon of a11 programs.
- 279 -
CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Memory Card Output Operation for Part Program
Pressíng the [OUTPUT] soft key on the INPUT/OUTPUT
PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD screen displays the OUTPUT
PROGRAM TO MEMORY CARD screen.
ϊ τ

PRØGkf 9 И 1, åíSED2řREE
1 xØЯY idčEA 11SEDıfREE
E:0lCENτ
ØØ81:
9811: ØDO РЕЕ 2883-96-12 16:84 68
BB50: 2883-84-18 1856 108
θB : 2BB θ4-18 1133 1ØØ
86 2883-94-18 18:d8 188
8699 : 2883-84-18 1132 188
8899 2883-84-11 1B:5з 188
8799 aτx Øıs 2883-86-89 16:d1 198
8?91 4τx ØIs zeвз-e6-89 15:21 saØ
aяз: aτx θms 2983-86-89 16; 52 240
8798 4τx ØІ5 2883-86--99 1з:5з 688
8799 aτн exιs 2eвз-e6-eч 13; і? 248
1B0B: MØІН TE3τ PRBf 2803-84-18 89:19 848
PRBEййill N1R18ER. Ø ØCi 50Fi KEY.
The followíng soft-keys are dísplayed.
SEØCH OUTPUT ALLOUT sктoRll RETURN
[SEARCH] : Searches for a program.
[OUTPUT] : Output a selected program to the memory card.
[ALLOUT] : Output a11 programs to the memory card.
[SRTORD] : Swítches the sort order for dísplayíng a program list
between ascendíng order and descendíng order.
[RETURN] : Returns the screen dísplay to the [INPUT/OUTPUT
PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD] screen.
Pressing [SEARCH] dísplays the followíng window of program
searchíng.
и äì2tiσ
τB
rResRaı ıası. υsεu.яεε 29 , 35
xEMØНY ØFJł ØIIıFREE ,
LØOIΓ[ED ØTE

ίІ]łØ
дØØ1: 2983-06-17 1551 Ьд
ІІд11: Pц1F..DØ REF 2003-06-12 1684 6E1
ØE15Ø: 2083-04-18 18 56 lefł 0896: 2803-04-1e 1133
φ.4. Т: :á4: ı:iıiг:ı:-:-
eØ SεØp+ Ø äРex фo. 1 Ø
B IN 9FARCN1Nfi PR86RYцt NIMHER.
81 ØØØe
9793; 4Tx ØX15 2903-06-09 16:52 248
8798; 4τx Ø15 2083-96-89 13; 53 680
8799: 4τН Nf15 7983-06-89 13:17 248 .
1BOØ: 8818 TESτ PRØΓ 2803-04-18 0919 EWØ
Enter the program number to be searched, then press [SEARCH].
-280-
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
1. Output single part program
Select the part program to be outputted by placing the cursor on
ít. Pressing [OUTPUT] dísplays the following wíndow for
enterín outputtinя fıle name.
. . ьь

ł B
Y η ØØRØM 8131. L15EDıΣRεε áØ / 95 мB
1G MEHΠR7 ØEØ ОSεBrΣRE 188Bθ / 513548
CКI мEій iIODTFIED DIiiF ıISiZE CNNR 54 ве
fMı: 2003-86-17 15: 51 69
Ø11: PSUEDO REi 28B3-Ø6-12 160d
Ø SØ: 2BB3-04-18 18:56
896: 2883-84-18 1133 ь. .. ь..
ØØ UH7YU7 PRUGRHм Ю. : 1BUB
UU7PUT f1LE Ыймε =
θ7 Γ DОτPUт 0110 SUBнкп6кRM
07 Т 10 f7tE HM fBR iBJIPUT
Ø799: d7H Λ I5 2883-86-89 1317
:ЧКі3-Ø з-1A 1 l: 1
ON OFF OUTPUT CANCEL
If the program number can Ьe used as the outputted fıle пame,
press [OUTPUT] wíthout enteríng fıle name.
In case that the outputted fi1e name should be changed, enter the
fi1e name to OUTPUT FILE NAME and press [OUTPUT].
In order to output the selected program together wíth subprogram
called from the program, press [ON] for OUTPUT WITH
SUBPROGRAM ítem. If not, press [OFF].
2. Output a11 part programs
Pressing [ALLOUT] dísplays the following wíndow for entering
outputtín file name.
B ]23`
x 7 и 83 B 234
Y
ØOØ Юм. u9εo/ЕRЄε
2B , О
мÉМOкї aRεB uŚEBıFкEE 10080 513548
іA CBмlEКТ _ liODIFiED BλТE SIZξCCMØ1
ОіЈØ1: 2803-86-17 1551 6Ø
ØØ11: P511ED0 REE 2B83-B6-12 16:86 60
0050 : 2B83-Θ4-1B 18:56 180
Ø96: 2BØ3-Ød-1Ø 11:33 1BB
ØØ 8θ
Ф1 PUT PRЛ6RRM Ю. : Е PRUC 1M
θ ΘBuπчπ FI E wпε ^aйЈкaм.aιι eE1 e _ Ø er Cεx и ε ιε иB ε Ø ouτe π
Ur 040
8798 dTH Bxıs 2083-06-09 13 53 600
07991 47H Øx13 2003-06-89 1317 2dØ
і f . ь sº
11 11
If the fi1e name PROGRAM ALL can be used as ít is, press
ł
[OUTPUT] wíthout enteríng fi1e name and a11 part programs stored
Γ - 281 -
ł
CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION OPERATION в-6звıaεи10s
in the CNC, the currently selected path when multi-path 1athe, are
outputted to the memory card wíth thís name.
In case that the outputted fi1e пame should be changed, enter the
fıle name to OUTPџT FILE NØ and press [OUTPUT].
Memory Card lnput Operatíon for Part Program
INPUT DELETE 5EØCH OUTPUT FOØT
Select the fıle to be ínputted Ьy placing the cursor on it on the program
input/output wíndow.
Pressíng [INPUT] begíns to read the part program in the fıle from
memory card to CNC.
Pressíng [] displays the followíng wíndow for changíng the
readíng program number, so enter the new program number and press
UT1.
X
F LE нo. 4
1Eи0 8 uSEDıFREE 16966 ı 513548
80. jFlLE иRMε јмσD]FІεo D TE sı2E
ε3 o
fіΦ?_: fNCPNRNH. DflT 2003-146-05 17 ІВ 74738
ОΦ3: 0Ю791 2863-86--05 17 58 572
НІ9fA: П79σΠ 2σΠ1-86-fH 15:68 2σ7
lHPUt FILE іЮlE
Іигfπ Ряocøw иσ.
ffY 7N NU18Eft FÓR 1ЧPUi
When the fı1e, in which a11 part progτam was outputted with fıle name
of PROGRAM ALL , ís read to CNC wíth changíng the program
number by [], the program number of the 1st program is
changed to the new number.
- 282 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
INPUT DELETE SEØCH OUTPUT FORMAT RETURN
In order to search the fıle to be ínputted to CNC, press [SEARCH] and
the followíng fıle searchíng wíndow ís dísplayed.
8 1 5
0 и 81?3A
1 и e Y
fl i іЯі a м и
Ğ м n _ мі . aіl e u:; u і мгі ıв88εі ı sıı,a8 Г
иo. ε υ ι uυіτ иіε tıı a 8и A 9 13. 1
иuи1: ΠICPHКRИ.Dи7 28Π7-86-Ø5 17:18 79738
ΘBΘ3: e8791 2θ83-86-95 17:18 572
u Юa Ггчиe 29113-4 0-09 ıs:ee 2112
ILE Ч κ1E iØ 5ÈØ ]1
FУ 1H SĚItliCN1N8 FtLE 1WlE.
Enter the fi1e name to be searched, and press [SEARCH], then the fi1e
ís searched íf the fi1e is stored in the memory card.
17. Fí1e Format A1lowed for Memory Card lnput/Output
0n1y text files can be ínput to and output from the memorу card. The
fıle format descńbed below must Ьe observed.
<1> A fi1e must start with and LF .
<2> A fıle must end wíth .
<31> For ínput, data read operatíon is skipped after the fırst 0/e ís
detected untíl аn LF ís detected.
<4> A block must end not wíth a semicolon ; but wíth an LF .
LF is OA of ASCII code.
<5> When a fıle contaíníng lowercase alphabetic characters, kana
characters, and some specíal characters such as , \, and ís
ínput, those characterístícs are ígnored.
<6> ASCII code ís used as ínput/output code, regardless of the setting
parameter ISO/EIA .
<7> Whether to output an LF on1y or an LF, CR, CR as an EOB
can be chosen usíng bít 3 NCR of parameter No. 0100.
<8> Characters usable for a fıle name
Alphabetíc characters : A to Z
Numeńc characters : 0 to 9
Specíal characters : e/e - ^ _
- 283 -
CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION OPERATION B-63874EN/05
MEMORY CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT OF TOOL DATA
1 1 Memory Card lnputlOutput Screen of Too1 Data
Ø ,2
4 F 9
99 88
Øna
F 5060
GBØ 17 40 54 BØ
U49 98 98 69
1111.П. μF -ы : 1 aUL ØіØ
жı. ταн IFi
eвЇ έМО 1
Øe2 Д F εыØ 1
603 Г ØIL1 1 ГііГ б
ØBA д` F EЧD 2
605 F εиσ 2
F EЧD 1
ı 0 a 0 B 7 6-
5FLFCT Ø1 KEY.
During dísplayíng TOOL DATA wíndow, the followíng soft-keys aτe
dísplayed by pressíng the leftmost soft key [<] oг ńghtmost soft key
[>] several tØes.
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
In order to ínput or output the tool data between memory card, select
EDIT mode on the machíne operator s pane1.
Insert the memory card ínto the memory card slot on the LCDØI
pane1.
- 284 -
B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
1 Memory Card Output Operation for Too1 Data
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE

Pressíng [OUTPUT] dísplays the followíng wíndow for entering the
output fıle name.
, вІ д ıгτs
X и 01234
18
Y uв нe
s eнв і 5800
F ___ ø ØY ,вa τ, ae 54 00 .fl 6d9 90 98 69 1
UF.
ILIUL σεbΣT тØ Ŕi1R 1
Øυτ στ ε ε иa s : , θo .oaτ
00 18 fıLE иRΓE εØα auτP1Л
иg
Øea ε Ø 2
005 Г Σ1Ø 2
806 y ε Ø І 007-
τ Øτ эcεУ.
________ ------
ØІ ІаЈτ cІжcεL
Pressíng [OUTPUГ] wíthout enteríng the fıle name outputs the tool
data with the fıle name ].
In order to change the fıle name, enter the fi1e name and press
[OUTPUT].
- 285 -
CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION OPERATION B-б3874EN/05
Memory Card lnput Operatíon for Too1 Data
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
1
Pressíng [1NPUT] dísplays the followíng window of f the fıle líst store
in the memory card.
X θ.θθθ
z θ.θθθ
s eнa
C θ.θθθ F B.θΘBθ
G81 18 A8 54 88
G9P 99 69. 1 13. 1
1

iIŻE DRfE
σσσ2 τOOLUы.ы4τ s59 zы8a. 02. 12
нι
eI
81
Ф
81 ,
81 i
Ф
8I
iILË 11N R. HFΦ 8E1ΣC KEY.
Select the fi1e in whích tool data are stored and to be read to CNC by
placíng the cursor by the cursor key.
Pressíng [1NPUT] begíns readíng the tool data to CNC form the
memoгy card.
Data Format
The following format can be ínputted or outputted.
1. Machining Center
1
G 1980 P_ K_ T_ S_ A_ ;
P : Offset Number 1 - 999
K : Kind of Too1

T : Name of Too1
S : Setting
A : Too1 Data
2. Lathe
G1981 P_ J_ K_ Q_ S_ A_ B_ ;
P : Offset Number 1 -i 999
J: Path Number on1y multiple paths
K : Kínd of Too1
T : Name of Too1
S : Settíng
A : Too1 Data1
B : Too1 Data2
- 286 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
E MEMORY CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT OF F1XED FORM
SENTENCES
Memory Card lnput/Output Screen of Fíxed Form Sentences

The followíng soft key ís dísplayed after [SETING] ís pushed and
REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCES FOR MILLING or
REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCES FOR TURNING ís
selected.
NEw ALTER DELF,TE STØ. oUTPUT INPUT TΛ MNi
Select EDIT mode on the machine operator s pаne1.
Insert the memory card ínto the memory card slot on the LCDØI
pane1.

- 287 -
CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
Output Fíxed Form Sentences
NE W ALTER DELETE sTØ. OUTPUT INPUT TO MNU
τ
Pressing [OUTPUT] dísplays the followíng window for entering the
outnut fıle name.
Pressíng [OUTPUT] wíthout enteríng the file name outputs the fixed
form sentences wíth the fıle name Output fıxed
form sentences for milling and turning in a 1ump.
In order to change the fi1e name, enter the fıle name and press
[OUTPUT].
- 288 -
B-б3874EN/05 OPEØTION CARD 1NPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
lnput Fíxed Form Sentences
NEW ALTER DELETE sTØ. OUTPUT INPUT TO MNU
Pressíng [INPUT] dísplays the followíng wíndow of the fi1e list store
ín the memory card.

,. ,.
Іі іe. ε :ипaε зıгε Влг
8882 йВСРYО8О. 83888278 2883. 88. 87
, 8883 ХЯØTH. , Ø 2883. вв. 84
eeea ØØ,н.іεИ 2837390 2883. 86. 84
8883 В5Ø.ЕН 2897288 2883. E7. 91
é. 8886 524288 2883. eі. 23
8887 SRpLieH. FDH 52d2883. θі. n
к 8880 524288 2883. д1. 23
9 SIцMCtθλ. FD9 52428 2B
8819 5RA1[ł_θE.řDB 52e288
LГ FILE іімaeг. 888 чaεcτ sвεa 881. :..
Select the fıle іn whích fixed form sentences are stored and to be
read to CNC by placing the cursor Ьy the cursor key.
Pressing [INPUT] begíns reading the tool data to CNC form the
memory card.
Format of Fíxed Form Sentences
The following format can Ьe ínputted or outputted for fixed form
sentences.
Mode : Settíng the mode of Fixed form sentences Míllíng oг
Turníng .
1:Fixed Form Sentence for turníng mode
2:Fíxed Form Sentence for milling mode
3: Fíxed Form Sentence for mílling and turning mode
Tab : The number of tab 1 - 5
Tít1e : Setting the name of Fixed Form Sentence
Code : Settíng Fixed Form Sentence
4 words, =, =, <Tít1e>=, =, cаn t be ínputted as
the name of fixed form sentence or fıxed form sentence.
- 289 -
18.HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63874EN/05
1 S HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS


1
- 290 - 1
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 18.HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS
SETTING A MAXIMUM PROGRAM S1ZE THAT CAN BE
HANDLED
In parameter No. 14795, specífy a maximum allowable memory size
to be used for program management.
Parameter
<1> = 0 = 0
Set the maximum allowable program síze to 250K bytes.
<2> = 1 = 0
Set the maximum allowable program size to 500K bytes.
<3> = 0 = 1
Set the maxímum allowable program síze to 1 M bytes.
<4> = 1 = 1
Set the maxіmum allowable pгogτam síze to 2M bytes.
A síze of 200K bytes represents about 100,000 characters 4,000
blocks when one block consísts of 25 characters on average.
Q CAUTION
To specify a maximum allowable memory size
greater than 250K bytes in parameter No. 14795,
set an appropriate value in parameter No. 8781
DRAM size that can be used by a C language
application .
To íncrease the DØM síze, the custom capacíty
optíon ís separately required.
1f the DRAM síze ís increased by 1 M bytes by
using parameter No. 8781, about 500,000
characters about 20,000 blocks can be
increased as a guídelíne when one block consísts
of 25 characters on average.
Restrictíons
<1> If a large program ís selected, the tíme requíred for switchíng
from the NC screen to MGi screen increases.
<2> If a large program ís selected, a longer time is requíred to move
the program cursor as the program nØber increases.
- 291 -
18.HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS OPERATION B-63874EN/05
HANDLING A PROGRAM LARGER THAN THE MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE S1ZE
If the size of a program calculated accordíng to the formula below
exceeds the maximum allowable memory síze set ín parameter No.
14795, the program cannot Ьe handled oп MANUAL GUIDE i.
Calculated síze = 18 bytes x total number of blocks + number of
program characters x
A program larger than the maximum allowable size is handled as
descńbed below.
1 If the screen dísplay ís swítched from the NC screen to the MGi
screen
If the screen display ís switched from the NC screen to the MGi
screen when a program largeτ than the maxiinum allowable
memorу size ís selected, the screen descńbed below appears.
A11 MGi operatíons are disabled. 0n1y swítchíng to the NC
screen wíth the function key is enabled.
2 If a selectíon ís made on the program líst screen
If a program larger than the maximum allowable memorу síze ís
selected wíth the cursor and the [OPEN] soft key ís pressed on
the program líst screen, the [PROGRAM EXCEED MAXIMUM
sIZE.] message ís dísplayed in the message dísplay fıeld on the
program líst screen and the selectíon of the program ís dísabled.
Q CAUTION
1f the program list screen contains only those
programs that are larger than the maximum
allowable memory size, the program líst screen
cannot be closed. 1n thís case, create a program to
close the program list screen.
3 If an O search ís made
<1> If the program number of a program larger than the
maximum allowable memorу síze is entered ínto the key-in
buffer, and the [O SRCH] soft key is pressed, the
[PROGRAM EXCEED MAXIMUM sIZE.] message is
dísplayed ín the message display fıeld on the base screen.
<2> If the program number of a program larger than the
maximum allowable memorу síze ís not entered ínto the
key-in buffer, but the [O SRCH] soft key ís pressed, the
program ís not searched for.
- 292 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 18.HANDLING LARGE PROGRAMS
4 If a program larger than the maximum allowable memory síze ís
E called by a subprogram ca11 duríng operatíon or anímated
símulatioñ
If a progτam larger than the maxímum allowable memory síze ís
called by a subprogram ca11 duríng operatíon or anímated
símulation, the [PROGRAM EXCEED MAXIMUIVI sIZE.]
message ís dísplayed ín the program dísplay fıeld, and the
ι
program ís not displayed.
ι
ь
ι
ι
ι

ι



- 293 -
19.CALCULATOR FUNCTION OPEØTION 6-63874EN/05
1 9 CALCULATOR FUNCTION
- 294 -

B-63874EN/05 OPEØTION 19.CALCULATOR FUNCTION
CALCULATOR FUNCTION
When numeríc data ís input, expressions for arithmetíc operations,
trigonometńc functíons, square root calculations, and so forth can Ьe
input for calculatíon.
1 Applications
The fıxed-point format calculation functíon can be used for cycle
ínput, arbítrary figure ínput, contour program ínput, setting of
various data ítems basis settíng, measurement condítion settíng,
t
calibratíon settíng , relative coordinate preset ínput, and the
key-in buffer .
2 Calculation methods
Arithmetíc operatíons additíon, subtraction, multíplication,
and divísion
Arithmetíc operatíons are performed usíng the key
operatíons descńbed below. The result of a calculatíon is
t displayed at the cursor positíon for ínput data.
1 Additíon : 100.. [INPUT]
2 Subtractíon : 100.-200. [INPUT]
3 Multíplication : 100. 200. [INPUT]
4 Dívísion : 100./200. [INPUT]
Example of innut
.
ü 1123 X θ θθ Н 81323 τ6
τøx. caτm. aπ cσиn-ıjaЈτ ca+n-zts Øτ paІи
sıІІЄ тиІООІεss Ѕ=]іё
вσГІoн τиIcкнεЅs τ 1ы з 1.
1 .
cU7 DεYГн oF Rλыгus ι= fì. -
cστ икτн oε АХHs Ј 15.
sıDE FІиτ 11rioBні .K--Ø 5
HOiTOM F1NI5N BИT. .tf- 1 5
C1..FARиNCE Λf ØoІІ/5 В]3
cLERRИNCE oF H [5 CD4lR.
Y 1Н NUNERRLS.
[
İ
- 295 -
19.CALCULATOR FUNCTION OPEØTION в-sзв74εNıo5
Trigonometric ftuıctíons sine, cosine, tangent, aresíne,
arccosíne, arctangent
Tńgonometńc Øctíon calculatíons are made usíng the key
operatíons descńbed below. The result of a calculatíon ís
displayed at the cursor posítíon for ínput data.
1 Sín : SIN 45 [ІNРUT]
2 Cosíne : COS 45 [lNPUT]
3 Tangent : TAN 45 [INPUT]
4 Aresíne : ASIN [INPUT]
5 Arccosine : AC05 [ІNРUT]
6 Arctangent : ATAN 20,2 [INPUT]
Note that for an arctangent calculatíon, a specíal format
usíng two argØents is requíred. Enter data accordíng to the
format ATAN a,b . aτctan aЉ ís calculated.
For a calculation. ís requíred at a11 tímes.
Squaτe root
A square root calculation ís made using the key operations
descńbed below. TЬe τesult of a calculation is displayed at
the cursor posítíon for ínput data.
1 Square root : SQRT 45 ØUT]
For a calculatíon, is recLuіred at a11 times.
Exponentíal functions
Exponential function calculations are made usíng the key
operations descríbed below. The result of a calculatíon ís
displayed at the cursor posítíon for ínput data.
1 Exponentíal functíon 1 An exponentíal function of e=
can be calculated. :
EXP 4 [INPUT]
2 Exponentíal function 2 a raísed to the power of b
cаn be calculated. :
PWR 4,3 [INPUT]
Note that for a calculation of exponential function 2, a
specíal format asíng two argØents ís required. Enter data
accordíng to the format PWR a,b . a raised to the power
of b is calculated.
For a calculatíon. Q ís requíred at a11 times.
Logarithmic Øctíons common logarithm, natural
logańthm
Logańthmic fimctíon calculatíons are made using the key
operations descríbed below. The result of a calculatíon ís
dísplayed at the cursor positíon for input data.
1 Common logarithm : LOG 45 [ІNРUT]
2 Natural logarithm : LN 45 [1NPUT]
For a calculation. η ís requíred at a11 tímes.
- 296 -

ι
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 19.CALCULATOR FUNCTION
и
Absolute value
An absolute value calculation is made usíng the key
operatíons descńbed below. The result of a calculatíon is
dísplayed at the cursor position for input data.
1 Absolute value : ÃBS -45 [fNPUT]
For a calculatíon. O ís requíred at a11 tímes.

Roundíng
Roundíng operations are performed usíng the key ι
operations described below. The result of a calculatíon ís
dísplayed at the cursor posítíon for ínput data.
L 1 Roundíng 1 rounding off to an ínteger :
RND [INPUT]
2 Rounding 2 roundíng off a to the decіmal places
specífıed Ьy Ь :
RND2 , [INPUT]
Note that for a calculatíon of roundíng 2, a specíal format
ί
usíng two arguments ís requíred. Enter data accoτdіng to the

format RND a,b . The va1ue of a ís rounded off to the 1
decímal places specífied Ьy Ь. As b , do not specify a
value other than 1, , , аnd so forth.
For a calculatíon, O ís requíred at a11 tímes.
Díscardíng
Thís operation díscaτds a11 decіmal places. A díscardíng
operatíon ís performed using the key operatíons descńbed
ι
1 below. The result of a calculatíon ís dísplayed at the cursor
position for ínput data.
1 Díscardíng : FIX [INPUT]
For a calculation, O ís requíred at a11 tímes.
1 Circle ratío
A círcle ratío calculatíon ís made usíng the key operatíons
Γ descríbed below. The círcle ratío ís índícated.
` 1 Círcle ratío : PAI [INPUT]
In the case of key-ín buffer ínput, no decіmal poínt ís assigned
when an ínteger is produced as the result of a calculatíon. In
cases other than key-ín buffer ínput, the respectíve ínput formats
ł are to be followed.
F
- 297 -
Γ k
1
ι
20.AUTOMATIC SETTING OF 1N1T1AL VALUE DATA OPERATION B-63874EN/05
2 O AUTOMATIC SETTING OF 1N1T1AL
VALUE DATA
- 298 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION 20.AUTOMATIC SETTING OF 1N1T1AL VALUE DATA
AUTOMATIC SETTING OF 1N1T1AL VALUES ON THE
1NPUT DATA SCREEN
Data previously entered on the data ínput screen of the cycle menu or
drawing defmítíon menu blank figure block and tool defmítíon block
ís automatícally set as initíal ínput va1ue data.
Accordíngly, the operator needs to enter cycle menu and drawing
defmítion menu data just once at the beginning. Then, the prevíously
entered data ís set as inítíal values.
The ínput data items other than the [TOOL COND] tab of the cycle
menu are automatícally set. The ínput data of the [TOOL COND] tab
ís automatícally set accordíng to Sectíon , AUTOMATIC TOOL
DEFINITION BLOCK COPY .
For the figure menu, input data depends on the drawíng data, so that
no inítial values are automatícally set.
AUTOMATIC TOOL DEF1N1T10N BLOCK COPY
If the user does not use Too1 Data Base function, the user needs to
ί specífy the tool defmitíon block of Drawíng Defmitíon menu before
Míllíng cycles or Turníng cycles.
ί In that case, the user specífıes the same data as the tool condition data
of each cycle menu.
Thís time, in each cycle menu, the tool condítion data ís set
automatically by copying the data of tool defmítíon block.
That ís, when data is ínput ín the tool defmítíon block of the drawíng
ι
defmitíon menu, the data ís oпce saved as ínternal data. Then, when
data ís to be ínput accordíng to the cycle menu, the tool defmítion
block data saved ínternally ís copied as tool condítíon ínput data.
Accordíngly, the operator just needs to enter a tool defmitíon block
initíally. Then, the operator need not enter tool condítíon data ín
subsequent cycle menus.
ι The following tool defmitíon block data ís saved as ínternal data:
Míllíng tool
1 TOOL DIAMETER D
Tuming tool
1 NOSE RADIUS R
2 CUT EDGE ANGLE A
3 NOSE ANGLE B
- 299 -
21.SUPPORT FOR FOLDER MANAGEMENT FOR Series 30i ONLY OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Z SUPPORT FOR FOLDER MANAGEMENT
FOR Seríes 30í ONLY
Thís function ís supported on1y for the Seríes 30i.
- 300 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 21.SUPPORT FOR FOLDER MANAGEMENT FOR Series 30i ONLY
PROGRAM L1ST SCREEN

This sectíon describes the specífıcations of folder management on the
ί
program list screen.
MØNURL GUIDE 13:1852
а і,Ј -1І1
1
ь
Y PROG.ıFOLDER NUM. USEDıFREE 21 е 908
MEMФ2Y ØEA USEDıFREE 7668 i 542588
Z ØEHT MODIFIED DATE SI2ECCNØRI
p RETUiő1 UØR FOLDER
00111 DRILL 2883-11-21 13:11 580
00Ø70Ø12 FLAIT 2863-11-21 13:112 5080Ø
Γ 00783 FLRT Н 2803-11-21 13c12 580
1 00921 TRP 2023-11-21 13:12 580
01801 SθIØ 2883-11-86 17:52 580
01616 TURN 2883-11-21 13:13 580
01817 IURN 2883-11-21 13:13 588
01228 TEST 2083-11-21 13:14 588
01701 TURN 2003-11-21 13:13 580
01703 τEST 2803-11-21 13:14 580
02806 SRMPLE 2083-11-21 13:15 1ØØ0
Nl1 E7t. Ø SELECI SOFI 1ffY.

Data Dísplayed ín the Program Líst

1 Program number
Thís program number ís equívalent to a conventional program
number.
2 Comment
If a comment ís longer than the displayable range, ... ís
índicated at the end.
3 Program update tíme Yeaг/month/day/hours/mínutes
4 Program size number of characters
5 [RETURN UPPER FOLDER]
6 Program attríbute whether to enable edíting
The character R ís índicated at the ríght end of a program that
must not be edited.
- 301 -
21.sUPPORT FOR FOLDER MANAGEMENT FOR Seńes 30i ONLY OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
21. Operations Added for the Program Líst Screen
1 Changíng the program name/folder name
Pressíng the [RENØ] soft key dísplays the [ALTER
PROGRAM NØ oг FOLDER NØ] screen.
. і Ј :ііџаігіі а 1 .
NRME
INPUT PROGRAt1 NAME or FDLDER КAME.
2 Program detaíl informatíon
Pressing the [DETAIL] soft key dísplays the [PROGRAIVI
PROPERTY] screen. Thís screen dísplays the followíng
informatíon:
<1> Program name Character string: 32 characters max. o
<2> Comment Character string: 48 characters max. NOTE
<3> Date and tiine of program modífıcatíon
Yeaг/month/day/houτs/mínutes/seconds
<4> Program síze Number of characters
<5> Pτogram attribute Whether to enable edítíng
., .І.
PRОGRЯ 1 НAME : //qС_NЕМ/USERØTNI/Ø1ØØ8
cOMHEНT : SFNtPLE НO. 1
MΠDIFIED DFlTE : 2BØ3/11/21 13:1452
SIZE : 5NО CNAR
Aľ7RIBUTE : ЫITE EЧЯBLE
NOTE
VVth the Series 30i, lowercase letters can be used
for a program name and comment.
3 Program condensatíon
Pressing the [CONDEN] soft key condenses programs.
4 Changíng the program attribute write protection /folder attribute
wńte protection
Pressíng the [ØROT] soft key changes the attńbute
cyclіcally.
The character R is índícated at the ńght end of a program that
must not be edíted.
- 302 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 21.SUPPORT FOR FOLDER MANAGEMENT FOR Series 30i ONLY
5 Device selection
Pressing the [DEVICE] soft key dísplays the [SELECT
DEVICE] screen.
. .
DATA_sV DATA SERVER
MEM CARD MEMØY CARD
When you select a device then press the [SELECT] soft key, the
list of programs oл the device is displayed.
6 Creation of a new program
In the check box, choose whether to create a program oг folder.
і σ
f : PROGRAt1 +л FOLDER
NAME
INPUT NEW PROGRAM NAHE or NEW FOLDER NpME.
Support for the Data Server
1 MGi supports the editíng and operatíon of a program on the data
server.
By swítching the devíce on the program líst screen, a program on
the data server can be handled in the same way as a program in
the program memory.
However, there are dífferences [n operation as índicated below.
The dífferences comply wíth the operatíon specifıcatíons of the
NC screen.
Operation Pгo гam мемогу Data Server
Creating a new program Possíble impossibIe
Co ın a r ram Possíble The program currently selected
py g p og cannot be co ied.
Deletíng a program Possible The program currently selected
cannot be deleted.
Renamíng a program Possíble The program currently selected
cannot be renamed.
Мемогу card inputioutput Possíble 1m ssible
2 The other functions on the data server such as settíng and FTP
transfer aτe to be performed on the NC screen program list
screen .
- 303 -
21.SUPPORT FOR FOLDER MANAGEMENT FOR Seńes 30i ONLY OPERATION B-δ3874EN/05
MEMORY CARD 1/0 SCREEN
The current folder ís input/output.
Ĺ SUBPROGRAM TAB ON THE CYCLE FIGURE
SELECTION SCREEN
The folder contaíning the program currently selected as the main
program ís displayed as the current folder. When a folder ís selected
using the same operation as for the líst of programs, the programs in
the folder are dísplayed.
RETURN UPPER FOLDER
й <ΣOEDER>
POCxE Cг POCKET Cł
.η1ΠC
Jί0Q
ί л0 :

SELECT CflLLING sUB PROGRAM AND PUSH [SELECT].
OUTPUT OF AN ARBITRARY FIGURE AS A
SUBPROGRAM
As a folder for subprogram output, one of the following caп Ьe
selected:
<1> Current folder
<2> Common program folder
//CNC_MEM/U SER/LIBRARY/
1 і І
INSERT IN CURRENT PROGRAM
CREATE ЯS SUB PRUGRRN

ELECT CREЯTIVE HETHOD.
- 304 -
B δ3874EN/05 OPERATION 21.SUPPORT FOR FOLDER MANAGEMENT FOR Series 30i ONLY
DISPLAY OF ARBITRARY FIGURES OF M98
SUBPROGRAMS
The followíng folders are searched ín thís order, and the progranı first
found ís displayed:
<1> Folder contaíníng the main program
<2> Common program folder
//CNC_MEM/USER LIBRARY/
- 305 -
HARD COPY OPERATION B-63874EN/05
2 Z SCREEN HARD COPY
1n order to make a copy to memory card of the screen of 1VIANUAL
GU1DE i, you need to operate as follows.
1. Settíng of parameters
In addítíon to the parameter for hard copy of standard CNC
screen, = 1, setting of the parameter for C
executor, = 1, ís necessary.
And furthermore, you need to set the parameter for memory card,
= 4.
2. Operatíons
Mount a memory caтd and display a necessary screen, then push
SØT key more than 5 seconds.
Release SHIFT key after checkíng the clock dísplay on the
screen stops. The clock dísplay wí11 move agaín when copyíng
the screen completes.
3. Created Fí1e
By the above operatíons, new fıle with name of
is created in the memory card. ís the seríal
number and numbered as 001, 002. However, once the CNC
power ís turned off, this number ís ínítíalízed to 000 from the
next tíme of creatíng hard copy fi1e.
- 306 -
6-63874ENl05 OPERATION 23.D1SPLAYING MACHINING T1ME FOR Series 16i/18i/21 i ONLY
Z3 DISPLAYING MACHINING T1ME FOR
Seríes 16i/18í/21і ONLY
During simulatíon, the logícal machíníng tíme of each block ís
calculated from feedrate and distance for movement. And the result ís
displayed.
- 307 -
23.D1SPLAYING MACHINING T1ME FOR Series 16i/18i/21 i ONLY OPERATION B- 3874EN/05
23. 7 FORMAT OF MACHINING T1ME DATA
Machíníng tíme data ís ínserted in program and it ís conserved.
The place when the data aгe ínserted ís in the comØent that ís next to
O number.
The format ís ,T_,A_ . ,T_ is cuttíng tíme data and ,A_ is
non-cutting time data.
Ex. Cuttíng tíme ís 1h 34 38 = 5678 s and non-cutting tíme ís 20
34 = 1234 s
02888 H RH UPPE , T56?8,A1234 ;
2 CRK38221á B Ø01 -F17 .
3 2ØØ3. Ø8. 22 ;
4
5 628 U0 ;
6 628 440 VØ H?Ø6 ;
7 6341 T 23. ;
8 MØ1 :
9 .
i.Ø L2 Pі X-122Ø.Ø Y0 :
618 L2 P2 X-122Ø.0 Y0 :
- о8-
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 23.D1SPLAYING MACHINING T1ME FOR Series 16i/18i/21i ONLY
Ĺ OPERATION FOR 1NSERTING MACHINING T1ME
The followíng soft keys are displayed on MEM mode after [SIMLAT]
soft key ís pushed.
RE WIM START PAUSE 5INGLE STOP INIT CUTDSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
LARGE SMALL AUTO REVERS ROTATE MOVE MOVE T MOVE MOVE CENTER
WK SET T-OFS SETING
RE WIM O LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRE5ET INSERT
After [START] ís pushed and símulatíon is started, the machíníng
tíme is calcurated and ít ís kept in the memory tempoτaтily. After
that, the coloτ of [INSERT] soft key is changed. If [INSERT] soft
key ís pushed in this state, the message MACHINE TINIE DATA
IS 1NSERTED. OK? ís displayed. Then, if YES is selected, the
machíníng time data are ínserted to the end of comment.
- 309 -
23.D1SPLAYING MACHINING T1ME FOR Series 16i/18i/21i ONLY OPERATION B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 Don t operate the machine during inserting
machining time data.
2 When the machining time isn t kept in the memory,
the machiníng time can t be inserted.
3 When the program has been protected, the
machining time can t be ínserted.
4 The machíning time can t be inserted duríng
operation.
5 A11 paths must be on MEM mode to insert
machining time data. When at least one path isn t
on MEM mode, The machining time can t be
ínserted.
6 Even if a11 path is on MEM mode, íf at least one
path is on background edíting, machining time data
can t be ínserted.
7 When the machining time data are inserted on one
path, the machining time data are inserted on other
paths too. But when símulation for each path is
executed, the machining time data are ínserted on
only the path in which the simulation ís executed.
- 310 -
6-63874EN/05 OPERATION 23.D1SPLAYING MACHINING T1ME FOR Series 16i/18i/21i ONLY
Ĺ DISPLAY MACHINING T1ME
The followíng soft keys are displayed after [O LIST] soft key ís
pushed.
NEW COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEØCH MCØD ALLDEL SRTORD OPEN CLOSE
TIME
If [TIME] soft key ís pushed, the índication of modífıed date and
program síze are changed to machíníng time as follows.
If TIME is ushed a ain, modifıed date is dís 1a ed a ain.
e 0812 o eeıı
и08e1e τ e М e Н 88811 18 M 8
S 8 F S 8 Г ,. ,
2 61992 PROGRfë1 USEDıFREE 23 40
MEMORY i čEA U5ED/FREE 6988 / 124268 і .aг8 ω CnIIMENI Icuτ тІгІε нoи-cOт т мε г1 628 8 0Ø01: CURSOL MOVE IIME тi 61988 0985: TE57 00:14:d9 8887: 6UID0NCE TEST 08 : 48: 26 61998 8088: И10 C 8889: 61918 0011: SAMPLE . F1. L.
658 β Øe2e: 123 1 60 64 0123:EXCEL
01e0: 03:17:55 08:14:49 г вee x M6I TEST
0180:
0189: 03:18:83 80:48:26 61128 0191: H18B.; 0200:
E8. 1 :
..: Г22 , LECT РРіЈбРfM1 NUMHER. pND SELECT SØFT KEY.
_= 1
TІME
NOTE
The parameters about displaying machining time are
from 27390 to 27392.
- 311 -
24.PROGRAM COORDINATE sYsTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHlWG1NG FUNCTION OPERATION 6-63874EN/05
2 4 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM
CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL
OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING
FUNCTION
Programming, machíníng símulatíon and ínput/output of data whích
aτe fit for changíng coordínate Ьy Program Coordínate System
Changíng Functíon and Too1 Offset Memory Changíng Function
can be executed in MANUAL GUIDE ί.
NOTE
1 About the details of these functions, refer to the
document of FANUC Seríes 16 і/18 ί/21 ί-TB
Program Coordínate System Changing Functíon and
Too1 Offset Memory Changíng Function
Specífıcations.
2 The Program Coordinate System Changíng Functions
of MANUAL GU1DE i caп be used under the following
case.
1 The axes, whích are possíble to reverse the
direction by the Program Coordínate System
Changing, must be Z-axis and Y-axis.
2 The ríght-handed coordínate system must be
stí11 used after changíng the program coordinate
system.
- 312 -
8-63874EN/05 OPERATION 24.PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CWINGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING
FUNCTION
In this paragraph, the way to select program coordínate duríng
operation, executíng símulation and makíng arbítrary fıgures ís
explained.
NOTE
1 The turning cycle option ís essential to use thís
functíon.
2 By settíng the prameter Ø=1, thís
functíon becomes avaílable
24. 1. 1 COORDINATE SYSTEM SELECTION COMMAND
The program coordínate system ís selected by Process Start B1ock
G1992.
lnsert Coordinate System Selectíon Command
<1> G1992 B1ock
When the ce11 is ínserted on the fvst spíndle side, the followíng
block ís inserted.
Please refer to the sectíon of process list edítíng function about
ce11.
Anú when thís block ís executed, the program coordínate system
changes to the cooтdіnate system-1.
G1992 S1 W1 COØNT ;
When the ce11 ís ínserted on the second spindle side, the
followíng block ís inserted. And when this block ís executed,
the program coordinate system changes to the cooтdinate
system-2.
G1992 S2 W2 COØNT ;
When the ce11 is copied or moved between the process líst of the
different spíndles, `W 1 or `W2 are automatícally changed
accordíng to the spíndle whích the ce11 ís moved to.
- 313 -
24.PROGRAM COORDINATE sYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION OPERATION B-63874EN/05
Executing Program
When G1992 block is executed, the program coordínate system can be
changed Ьy the followings.
<1> Change bγ M-code specífied ín the parameter
Please input M code number to parameter No. 27180 for
changíng to the coordinate system-1 and to parameter No.
27181 for changíng to the coordinate system-2.
When G1992 S W block ís executed, the M-code which is
specífıed іn the each parameter is outputted. Thus the program
coordínate system changes.
<2> Change by executíng P-code macro sub-program specífied in the
parameter
Please ínput P-code program number to parameter No. 27184
for changíng to the coordínate system-1, аnd to parameter No.
27185 for changíng to the coordínate system-2.
When G1992 S W block ís executed, the P-code program
whích is specífıed in the each parameter ís outputted. Thus the
program coordínate system changes.
If both parameters the above <1> аnd <2> aгe specífıed, the P-code
program ís called fvst. And next, the M-code ís output.
- 314 -
B-δ3874EN/05 OPERATION 24.PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
24. COORDINATE OF ARBITRARY FIGURES XZ, ZC, ZY PLANE
On the following arbitrary fıgures enteríng window, the programmíng
figures are dísplayed accordíng to the selected program coordínate
system.
<1> Arbitrary Figures for the XZ P1ane
<2> Arbítrary Fígures for the ZC P1ane
<3> Arbitrary Figures for the ZY P1ane
Select Dispiay Coordinate System
The dísplay of coordinate system can Ьe selected on the enteríng
wíndow for Start Poínt.
If COORDI ís selected, the dísplay of coordínate system changes to
the program coordínate system-1. And íf COORD2 ís selected, the
display of coordínate system changes to the program coordinate
system-2.
Entering Wíndow for Start Point
., ј τпг
. t
ELEHENT В8
sт Øт roτ ит DK дx= sø.
SтARτ Poґит z Z σ: .,
PRØRAM COύRDINATE ы
L Ci T KEY.
SELECT SOFT KEY.
[Т.іґ
:1R β1 C0 F д2 ј __.. _._.. __._._._.._ :- О. , C
- 315 -
24.PROGRAM COORDINATE sYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION OPERATION B-δ3874EN/05
24. MACHINING SIMULATION
In the case of executing the machíníng símulatíon Too1 Path and
Anímated , the program coordínate system ís changed by the address
W1 and W2 of G1992 block.
NOTE
1f the machining operation is fınished at the status
of selecting the coordinate system-2 and the
machíníng operatíon ís started agaín, the program
ís executed on the coordínate system-2.
- 316 -
B 63874EN/05 OPERATION 24.PROGRAM COORDINATE sYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
sτдτus DIPLAY
The current program coordínate system displays in the status dísplay
wíndow Ьy the ícon.
1jØ 2700 o 2003
.3-в1 N 827ое 38 M Θ і l t 1 N 82ео3 T 9 M 8
S 8 F 8. 8Ø88 ı - S Ø F θ. θ8θ8
Σ 02788 ; t 02003 :
? 70505 S .
+ 61060 D8. T1. S1. 11. J1. FSB. í:I 613ΘØ T2. Σűλ. ü-Ø. О. L-
USØ. E5Ø. W1. C3. P3. R5. 03. 01. :
X5. 22. ; Σ 61301 N45. V--5Ø. K1. L0. HD. T
ä 61521 72. H8. L-18. t-І5e. tо.
R58 21. : 61303 N5t3 V45 č5 I45 J 45
M3Ø E5. P45. 45 11 H1 T1
ı G _ 61321 HЅе U5Ø K3 C50 A58
;:END ØГ 8L0CK l

The dísplay ícon, whích ís descríbed the selected pгogτam coordinate
system, ís specífıed by the parameters and 27189.
ь
- 317 -
24.PROGRAM COORDINATE sYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGtNG FUNCTION OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
Too1 offset, tool data and work shíft for program coordínate system 1
and 2 can Ьe inputted separately.
NOTE
The following functíons can be used when the Too1
Offset Memory Changíng Functíon ís enabled.
1 TOOL OFFSET DATA WINDOW
It ís possíble to set the tool offset data for each program coordínate
system 1 and 2.
Select Coordínate System
The dísplay of the data for each coordínate system changes as
followíng Ьy the parameter GCC
<1> In the case parameter GCC ís 0
It ís possíble to charıge the dísplay of the tool offset data for each
coordínate system by pressíng the [14-->2] soft-key.
ACTPOS Л4EA5UR +INPUT CHCURS І - 2 CLOSE
<22> In the case parameter GCC ís 1
The dísplay of the tool offset data for each coordínate system changes
accordíng to DO-sígnal F0347 GCO dynamícally.
- 318 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 24.PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION ANDTOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
Dísplay Selected Coordínate System
The symbol for the selected coordínate system ís dísplayed m the title
of the window. The symbol ís dísplayed accordíng to the parameters
and
When the coordínate system-2 ís selected.
.τ
GEOMETRY OFFSET EAR OFFSET TOØι ºAтA 1
0. X-RXIS Z-AКIS Y-fłКIS RADtUS
901 [:ЧФІ Ø
002 Ø
0133 13
Ø04 Ø. ΘΘ0 Ø. 0ØØ Ø
005 Ø
Ø06 Ø
00? Ø. ØØØ Ø

CEY 1і NUMERALS.
1 Settíng of Too1 Data
When the Too1 Offset Memory Changíng Functíon ís effectíve, the
maxіmuτn tool number whích ís possíble to set to the tool data base ís
as follows.

for Program Coordínate System-1 : 150
for Program Coordínate System-2 : 150 É

The tool data for each program coordínate system are possíble to ínput
from and output to the memory card.
ί
- 319 -
24.PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION OPERATION B-63874EN/05
WORKPIECE SH1FT OFFSET DATA WINDOW
It ís possíble to set the workpíece shíft offset data for each program
coordinate system 1 and 2.
Select Coordínate System
The dísplay of the Øta for each coordínate system changes as follows
by the parameter GCC
<1> In the case parameter GCC is 0
It ís possíble to change the display of workpiece shíft data for each
coordínate system by pressíng the [14---2] soft-key.
ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT CКCURS 1<-->2 CLOSE
<2> In the case parameter GCC ís 1
The dísplay of the data for each coordínate system charıges accordíng
to DO-sígnal F0347 GCO dynamícally.
- 320 -
B-63874EN/05 OPERATION 24.PROGRAM COORDINATE sYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTIONS
There ís not improvement ín Set-Up Guídance Function.
So, even íf the Too1 Offset Memory Changing Functíon is effectíve,
the exclusive measurement condítíon data and the calibratíon data for
each program coordínate system are not provided. So it had better to
dístínguish these data between for the measurement ín the program
coordínate system-1 and 2.
1 MANUAL MEASUREMENτ
When Too1 Measurement or Measure is executed, the measurement
data ís set to the tool offset data of whích program coordínate system
ís selected.
мεдsuRεмεиτ CYCLE
When Too1 Measшement oг Measшe ís executed, the measurement
data ís set to the tool offset data of whích program coordínate system
is selected.
MEASUREMENτ RESULτ DISPLAY SCREEN
In the case that the measurement data is set to the tool offset data,
whether the offset data for program coordínate system-1 or for
program coordínate system-2 is described after `G oг `W character
as follows.
Example
Z - Z T-Z10-G1
Geometry offset data for program coordínate system-1 was set.
Z Z T-Z10-G2
Geometry offfset data for progam coordínate system-2 was set.
Z Z T-Z10-W1
Wear offset data for program coordinate system-1 was set.
Z Z T-Z10-W2
Wear offset data for program coordínate system- 2 was set.
- 321 -
24.PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CMANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION OPEØTION B-63874EN/05
cAuτІoиs
If the machiníng operation ís fınished at the status of selectíng the
coordinate system-2 and the machíníng operatíon ís started agaín, the
program ís executed on the coordinate system-2.
So be sure to ínsert the coordinate system selection commands to
the top of the machíning program to avoid executíng machíning
under the wrong coordínate system.
There are the followíng restrictíons.
The Program Coordinate System Changíng Functions and the
Too1 Offset Memory Changíng Functíons can not be used on
turnin mode of compound machine.
- 322 -
M

1 `
1M
1

111. CYCLE MACHINING TYPES
,
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
1 M1LLING
MANUAL GUIDE i supports the followíng types of millíng.
Ho1e machínín wíth the tool rotated
Machining type block Milling Turning
Note Note
G1000 G1110 Center drillin
G1001 G1111 Drillin
G1002 G1112 Tapping
G1003 G1113 Reamin
G1004 G1114 Borin
G1005 - Fine bońn
G1006 - Back borin
G1210 Random points
G1211 Linear points same intenıal
G1212 Linear points different interval
Ho1e position block XY plane G1213 Grid oints
G1214 Rectan 1e points
G1215 Circle ints
G1216 Aгc points same interval
G1217 Aгc points different interval
G1310 Random points
G1311 Linear роіntѕ same intenıal
G1312 Linear points different interval
1 Ho1e position block YZ p1ane G1313 Grid oints
G1314 Rectan 1e points
G1315 Circle ints
G1316 Aгc роюtѕ same ınterval
G1317 Arc points different intenıal 1
Ho1e position block XC p1ane, G1572 Circle points
ί
end face G1573 Random points
Ho1e position block ZC p1ane, G1672 Circle points
cylindrical surface G1673 Random points ι
Ho1e position block XA plane, G1772 Circle points
cylindrical surface G1773 Random points
ι
Γ
NOTE
Ho1e Machining with the tool rotated has 2 type for
Mílling machíne and Turning machine Lathe .

Therefore, please set the parameter 1
in order to use suitable one for your machine.
r : For Milling machíne
: For Lathe
- , -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
G1020 Rou hin
Machining type block
_ G1021 Finishin
G1220 Rectan 1e
Fixed-fıgure block XY p1ane G1221 Circle
G1222 Track _
G1200 Start point _
G1201 Strai ht line
G1202 Arc C
Arbitrary-fıgure block
XY p1a e G1203 Aгc CC
G1204 Chamferin
G1205 Corner roundin
_ G1206 End
Fixed-fıgure block G1320 Rectan 1e
YZ plane G1321 Circle
G1322 Track
G1300 Start point
G1301 Strai ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block G1302 Arc C
YZ plane G1303 Aгc CC
G1304 Chamferin
G1305 Corner roundin
G1306 End
Fixed figure block XC p1a e, G1520 Rectan 1e
end face G1521 Circle
G1522 Track
G1500 Start point
G1501 Strai ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block XC p1ane, G1502 Aгc C
end face G1503 Aгc CC
G1504 Chamferin
G1505 Comeг roundin
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straì ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block ZC p1ane, G1602 Arc C _
cylindrical surface G1603 Arc CC
G1604 Chamferin __
G1605 Corner roundin
G1606 End
G1700 Start point _
G1701 Strai ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block XA p1ane, G1702 Arc C
G1703 Aгc CC
cylindrical surface
G1704 Chamferin
G1705 Corner roundin _
G1706 End
- 326 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACH_1_N1NG TYPES 1.M1LLING
Contouring
G1060 Outer Wa11 Rou hin
G1061 Outer Wa11 Bottom finishín
G1062 Outer Wa11 Síde fınishin
G1063 Outer Wai1 Chamfeńn
G1064 lnner Wa11 Rou hín
Machining type block G1065 inner Wa11 Bottom fınishin
G1066 1nner Wa11 Síde finishin
G1067 1nner Wa1i Chamfeńn
G1068 Partíal Rou hin
G1069 Partíai Bottom fıníshin
G1070 Partial Síde finishin
G1071 Partíal Chamferín
Fixed-figure block G1220 Rectan ie
G1221 CírGe
XY p1a e
G 1222 Track
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straí ht iíne
Arbitrary-fıgure block G1202 Arc C
XY plane G1203 Aгc CC
G1204 Chamfeńn
G1205 Comer roundin
G1206 End
Fíxed-fıgure block G1320 Rectan 1e
G1321 CirGe
YZ p1a e
G1322 Track
G1300 Start point
G1301 Strai ht 1іпe
Arbítrary-fıgure block G1302 Arc C
YZ p1a e G1303 Arc CC
G1304 Chamferín
G1305 Comer roundin
G1306 End
Fixed-figure block XC p1a e, G1520 Rectan 1e
e d face G1521 CirGe
G1522 Track
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straí ht 1іne
Arbitrary-figure block XC plane, G1502 Arc C
end face G1503 Aгc CC
G1504 Chamfeńn
G1505 Corner roundin
G1506 End
G 1600 Start point
G1601 Straí ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block ZC p1ane, G1602 Arc C
cylindrical surtace G1603 Aгc CC
G1604 Chamfeńn
G1605 Corner roundín
G1606 End
- 327 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
G1700 Start point
G1701 Strai ht line
Arbítrary-figure biock XA p1aпe, G1702 Arc C
cylíndńcal surtace G1703 A c CC
G1704 Chamfeńn
G1705 Coгпeг roundín
G1706 End
Emboss machinín
G1080 Rou hin
Machiníng type 1αk G1081 Bottom finíshin
G1082 Side fınishin
G1083 Chamfeńn
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straí ht 1іne
Arbitrary-fıgure block G1202 A c C
XY plane G1203 Aгc CC
G1204 Chamfeńn
G1205 Comeг roundín
G1206 End
G1300 Start роіпt
G1301 Strai ht líne
Arbitrary-fıgure block G1302 Arc C
YZ plane G1303 Aгc CC
G1304 Chamfeńn
G1305 Comeг roundin
G1306 End
G1500 Startpoint
G1501 Strai ht líne
Arbítrary-figure blαk XC p1a e, G1502 Arc C
e d face G1503 Aгc CC
G1504 Chamfeńn
G1505 Comeг roundin
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Strai ht line
Arbítrary-figure 1αk ZC plane, G1602 Arc C
cylíndńcal surface G1603 A c CC
G1604 Chamferin
G1605 Comeг roundin
G1606 End
G1700 Start point
G1701 Straí ht line
Arbítrary-fıgure 1αk XA plane, G1702 Arc C
cylíndńcal surface G1703 Aгc CC
G1704 Chamfeńn
G1705 Comeг roundin
G1706 End
- 328 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Pocketing
G1040 Rou hin
Machining type block G1041 Bottom fınishin ;
G1042 Side fınishin
G1043 Chamferin
Fixed fıgure block G1220 Rectan 1e
G1221 Circle
XY plane G1222 Track
G1200 Start point
G1201 Strai ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block G1202 Arc C
XY p1a e G1203 Aгc CC
G1204 Chamfeńn
G1205 Corner roundin
G1206 End
Fixed fıgure block G1320 Rectan 1e
YZ plane G1321 Circle
G1322 Track
G1300 Start oint
G1301 Strai ht line
Arbitrary fıgure block G1302 Arc C
YZ p1a e G1303 Arc CC
G1304 Chamferin
G1305 Comeг roundin
G1306 End
Fixed fıgure block XC plane, G1520 Rectan 1e
e d face G1521 Circle
G1522 Track
G1500 Start point
G1501 Strai ht line
Arbitrary fıgure block XC plane, G1502 Arc C
e d face G1503 Aгc CC
G1504 Chamfering
G1505 Corner roundin
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Strai ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block ZC p1ane, G1602 Arc C
cylindrical surtace G1603 A c CC
G1604 Chamfeńn
G1605 Coгпeг roundín
G1606 End
G1700 Start point
G1701 Strai ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block XA plane, G1702 Arc C
cylindrical surtace G1703 Aгc CC
G1704 Chamfeńn
G1705 Coгпeг roundin
G1706 End
- 329 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Groovïng
G1050 Roug hín
Machining process block G1051 Bottom_ fınishin
G1052 Side finishin
G1053 Chamfeńn
G1220 Rectan 1e
Fíxed-fıgure biock G1221 CirGe
XY plane G1222 Track
G1223 Radíal groove
G1200 Start point
G1201 Strai ht line
Arbítrary-fıgure block G1202 Arc C
XY plane G1203 Aгc CC
G1204 Chamfeńn
G1205 Comeг roundin
G1206 End
G1320 Rectan 1e
Fixed-fıgure Ь1ьсk G1321 CirGe
YZ p1ane G1322 Track
G1323 Radíal gгооvе
G1300 Start point
G1301 Strai ht line
Arbitrary-fıgure block G1302 Arc C
YZ plane G1303 Aґc CC
G1304 Chamfeńn
G1305 Comeг roundin
G1306 End
G1520 Rectan 1e
Fíxed-figure blαk XC p1aпe, G1521 CírGe
end face G1522 Track
G1523 Radial gгооvе
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straí ht 1ine
Arbitrary-figure Ь1αk XC p1ane, G1502 Arc C
e d face G1503 Aгc CC
G1504 Chamfeńn
G1505 Comeг roundin
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straí ht line
Arbitrary-flgure blαk ZC plane, G1602 Arc C
G1603 Aгc CC
cylíndńcal surface
G1604 Chamfeńn
G1605 Comeг roundin
G1606 End
G1700 Start point
G1701 Strai ht line
Arbitrary fıgure block XA plane, G1702 A c C
G1703 Aгc CC
cylindrical surface
G1704 Chamferin
G1705 Coгпeг roundin
G1706 End
- ; ;O -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
C axis grooving
Machining process block G1056 C axís grooving
Fixed-fıgure block XC p1ane, G1570 C axis groove _
end face G1571 X axis groove
Fíxed-fıgure block ZC plane, G1670 C axis groove
cylíndrical surface G1671 Z axis groove
A axis grooving
Fíxed-fıgure block XA p1aпe, G1770 A axis gгооvе
c lindńcai surface G1771 X axis gгооvе
ι
t
г
ь
t
- 331 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 MANUAL GU1DE i supports three types of hole
machining, that is, hole machining by mílling, hole
machining by turning with the tool rotated , and
hole machining by turning with the workpiece
rotated .
On the CNC for milling, only hole machining by
milling is usable. On the CNC for lathe turnïng, hole
machining by turning wíth the tool rotated and
hole machining by turning with the workpiece
rotated are usable.
On the CNC for complex machíning, a11 types of
machining are usable, and what machining type to
use can be selected using parameters.
Refer to manuals from respective machine tool
buílders for explanations about what type is
actually usable.
2 When MANUAL GU1DE i is used to enter cycle
machining data, combinations of a machining type
block and a fıgure block must be entered in
succession for a11 machining types except hole
machining by turning.
Moгe than one fıgure block can be entered for one
machining type block.
For arbitrary fıgures, however, more than one set of
arbitrary fıgures can be entered if one set is
assumed to consist of up to 90 fıgures enclosed
between start and end points.
3 A data item whose address is indicated with [ ] in
the following tables is automatically set with a
typical value unless a value is entered for it. You
need to enter no data if you accept the typical
value.
4 On the screen, [ ] is displayed in the right end of
the data item.
5 1n some of the input data items, the system sets
the last ínputted data as an initial data. As to these
input data items, the mark of COPY was
described.
6 1n the input data item of APROCH MOT10N ,
when the machine is 2 axes of Maximum
simultaneously controlled axes, please sure not to
specify the [3 AXES] soft-key.
1f [3 AXES] is specifıed, the alarm 15 occurred
during execution of Cycles.
- 332 -
в-63вıaεNıos CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
NOTE
7 1n the input data item of CUT ANGLE of
Pocketing Rough G1040 and Bottom Finish
G1041 , when the machine is 2 axes of Maximum
simultaneously controlled axes, please sure not to
set the data.
1f the data is set, the alarm 15 occurred during
executíon of Cycles.
8 The motíons go back to the start poínt where the
machining cycle started after completíng the a11
cycle motions.
1t ís possible not to go back to the start poínt when
the parameter No. 27002 7 is set to 1.
9 Cyc1e machining cannot be performed in any of
control modes of the high-speed and hígh-precisíon
functíons commands for advanced prevíew
control, A1 advanced prevíew control, A1 contour
control, A1 nano contour control, hígh-precísion
contour control, A1 high-precísíon contour control,
and A1 nano high-precision contour control . To
perform cycle machining, control mode must be
canceled.
10 On the CNC for lathe turning with G-code system B
oг C, when cycle machíníng ís specifıed, G90 must
be specifıed in advance to make a switchover to
the absolute coordínate system. For hole
machining by turning with the tool rotated , G98
initial 1eve1 return or G99 R position 1eve1 return
must be specifıed in advance.
11 On the CNC for mílling, when cycle machiníng is
specífıed, a swítchover to G90 absolute command
occurs internally. Therefore, G91 must be specifıed
íf incremental commands are used after cycle
machining.
- 333 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/o5
Remarks Cyc1e retract motíons
In case of , Retractíng motíons índícated as
broken línes in the followíng drawing wi11 be outputted. The
order of motíon axís wí11 be opposíte to the approached motions
Retractíng motions of a Posítíon where the
machíníng cycie .. machíníng cycle started
Approaching motíons of a
machining cycle
In case of carrying out plural figures machíning Ьy oпe G4 dígít cycle,
such like dńlling or C-axis groovíng, this retractíng motions wí11 Ьe
available at the last figure machining.
- 334 -
в-6звıaεNıo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
HOLE MACHINING BY M1LLING
Ho1e Machiníng Type B1ock
Center Dríllíng: G1000
CLJT c0ид. ] .
MACHINIHG TYPE w Ф
RĚF. PT. MODE
7=r _
1 POINT
CUT DEPTH E=І
.CLEHRANCE C=і -
FEED RRTE F=ј P=Ì_ _
DNELL T ME
RPROCH MOT OH 2= 2 RКES M0О
.LECT ØT ØY.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : No dwelling is performed.
initial value
DWELL : DwеіІіпg ís регfогмеd.
1 REF. PT. MODE [1N1T-1]: An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to
the 1 point. initial value
[1N1T-2]: A11 movements between holes, including
the last return, are made as an 1 point
return.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including
the last return, are made as an R position
return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surtace and R
sition radius value, positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate osítive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom. 1f omitted, 0 is
assumed. units of seconds, positive value COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : VVhen moving from the current position
to the machining start point, the tool flrst
moves in the machining p1ane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.
- 335 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
Too1 path
<1> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start positíon + clearance
C in rapíd traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the cuttíng end posítíon at the cuttíng feedrate
F .
<3> Move the tool to the positíon cuttíng start posítíon + clearance
C in rapíd traverse.
- 336 -
в-s3в7aεnυo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Dríllíng: G1001
,.
C11т COND. η
. ,. ІІІ MRCHIHING TYPE W
PECKING CUT DEPTH Q--
REF. PT. I10DE
I POINT 7ј-
CUT DEPTH L=i
GO PfiST NnOUNT K=
CLERRHHCE G=Γ-
FEED RRTE F=I
RPROCH n0TI0N 2-2 RКES м0о
ІЅЕLECT SØT KEY.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : One cut with no dwelling performed
initial value
[DWELL] : One cut with dwelling performed
[PECK] : Peck drilling Note 1
H SPED Hi h_-speed peck dńllin Note 2
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut made by one cut radius value, positive
value COPY
1 REF. PT. MODE [1N1T-1] : An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a retum is made to
the 1 point. initial value
[1N1T-2] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an 1 point return.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an R position
return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
K GO PAST AMOUNT Length of the incomplete hole portion at the tool tip If
omitted, 0 is assumed. Radius value, positive value
COPY
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R
osition radius value. positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom. 1f omitted, 0 ìs
assumed. units of seconds, positive value COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to
the machìning start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining p1ane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.
- 337 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 1п the case of `MACHINING TYPE =`PECK , the
system refers to the parameter as the
return amount. Therefore, please set to
suitable vaiue before machining.
2 1n the case of `MACHINING TYPE =`H SPED , the
system refers to the parameter as the
return amount. Therefore, please set to
suitable value before machinin .
Too1 path
A drillíng tool path can be selected from the followíng:
- INORMALLDWЕLL1
<1> Move the tool to the posítion cuttíng start posítíon + cleaгance
C ín rapid traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the cuttíng end posítíon at the cuttíng feedrate
F .
<3> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start posítion + clearance
C in rapid traverse.
- 338 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
<1> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start positíon + clearance
C in rapid traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the positíon cuttíng start posítíon - primary cut
depth D 1 at the cuttíng feedrate F . Γ
<3> Move the tool to the positíon cuttíng start posítion + clearance
C іn rapíd traverse.
<4> Move the tool to the posítíon prevíous cuttíng end posítíon +
return clearance U ín rapíd traverse.
<5> Move the tool to the positíon prevíous cuttíng end position -
compensatíon cut depth Dn at the cuttíng feedrate F .
<6> Repeat steps <3> to <5> untíl the last cuttíng end posítíon ís
reached.
<7> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start posítíon + clearance
C in rapíd traverse.
i
- 339 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
SPED
,
1
<1> Move the tool to the position cuttíng start position + clearance
C ín rapid traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start posítíon - prímary cut
1 depth D1 at the cırttìng feedrate F .
<3> Move the tool to the position current posítíon + return clearance
U in rapid traverse.
<4> Move the tool to cut to the posítion previous cutting end
posítíon - compensatíon cut depth Ø at the cuttíng feedrate
F .
<5> Repeat steps <3> and <4> Øtil the cuttíng end position ís
reached.
<6> Move the tool to the posítíon cutting start position + clearance
C ín rapíd traverse.
- 340 -
Bб3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHININGTYPES 1.M1LLING
Tapping: G1002
CUT COND. R1G1D TЯP
MACNIHING TYPE U ıı
TF čEAD LEflD D=ј
REF. PT. HODE
I POINT J=ј-
COT DEPTN L=Í--
CLEЯRANCE C=ј
DUELL T2Ø P=І -
APROCH MDTION ć=2 A ES NOV
SΣLECi SOFT KEY.
CUT COND.
Data item Meanín
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : CW tapping initial value
REVERS : CCWtapping
D THREAD LEAD Tapping tool lead radius value, positive value
COPY
1 REF. PT. MODE [1N1T-1] : An R position return is made in moving г
between holes. Finally, a retum is made to
the 1 point. initial value
[1N1T-2] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an 1 point return.

[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including the
ĺ last return, are made as an R position
return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
C CLEARANCE Distance between the wrorkpiece surface and R
osition radius value. positive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME DØ11 time at the hole bottom. 1f omitted, 0 is
assumed. units of seconds, positive value COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to
the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining p1ane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. ìnitial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.
R1G1D TAP
Data ítem Meanin
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT]: Specifles the float tappìng. initìal value
R1G1D : S ecifies the ri id ta in . Note
S SPINDLE SPEED S indle s eed mìn
- 341 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
NOTE
1 When you use rígíd tappíng mode M code
command , the system refers to
0г as the va1ue of M code.
Therefore, please set 0г to
suítable value before machíníng.
Too1 path
<1> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start posítíon + clearance
C in rapid traverse.
<22 Move the tool to the cuttíng end posítíon at the cuttíng feedrate
F .
<3> Stop the spíndle.
<4> Rotate the spíndle ín reverse.
<5> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start posítíon + clearance
C at the cuttíng feedrate F .
<6> Cause the spíndle to start rotatíng normally.
- 342 -
в sзв74εrυo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Reaming: G1003

CUT CDND.
MRCNININ6 τYPE - и
RĚr-. PT. M[ЗDE
І нaτиτ τ --
Cuτ aεPτн L
CιεARAНCε C-4
.FEED RRTE
DЧELL τ І 1Σ P
EϊECτ sFτ KEY.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
W MACHINING TYPE [CUT] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in
cutting feed. initial value
[RAP1D] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in
rapid traverse.
[DWELL] : After dwelling at the hole bottom, the tool
retracts in cuttin feed.
1 REF. PT. MODE [1N1T-1]: An R position retum is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to
the 1 point. initial va1ue
[1N1T-2]: A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an 1 point return.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an R position return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R
osition radius value, positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate positive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom. 1f omitted, 0 is
assumed. units of seconds, positive value COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to
the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining p1ane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initìal value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.
- 343 -
,
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPEŠ 6-63874EN/05
Too1 path
De Ďs
Fe F F s
Fr +
EH _ SH C
<1> Move the tool to the positíon cutting start posítíon + clearance
C in rapíd traverse. ,
<2> Move the tool to the cuttíng end positíon at the cuttíng feedrate
F .
<3> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start posítíon + clearance
C at the returning feedrate Fr .
- 344 -
в s3вıaεNı05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Boríng: G1004
Cuτ COHD.
T1A--Н[Ч11й , TYPE U=[i11 1
REF. PT. ØDE 1
1 P01НT J=
CUT DEPTH L-f
CLEARANCE C=
FEED RATE F=
DWELL TIHE P=Г
f LECT ØT KEY.
CUT COND.
Data item Meanin
W MACHINING TYPE [CUT] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in
cutting feed. initial value
[RAP1D] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in
rapid traverse.
[DWELL] : After dwelling at the hole bottom, the tool
retracts in cutting feed.
1 REF. PT. MODE [1N1T-1]: An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to
the 1 point. initial value
[1N1T-2]: A11 movements between holes, including the
last return. are made as an 1 point return.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an R position return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R
osition radius value, positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive va1ue COPY _
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom. 1f omitted, 0 is
assumed. units of seconds, positive value COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to
the machining start point, the tool flrst
moves in the machìning p1ane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.
- 345 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Too1 path
<1> Move the tool to the posítíon cutting start position + cleaгance
C in rapid traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the cutting end posítíon at the cuttíng feedrate
F .
<3> Move the tool to the position cuttíng start posítion + clearance
C at the returníng feedrate Fr .
- 346 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Fine Boríng: G1005
cuT CØD.
sнτεт øºouиτ
REF. PT. NODE
Poτит
cui ВεPтн
CLERRRUCE
FEED RAiE
ЛWELL тІИE
pPROCN H JFION
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
Q SH1FT AMOUNT Shift amount radius value at the hole bottom after
s indle orientation COPY
1 [1N1T-1] : An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to
the 1 point initial value
[1N1T-2] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, aгe made as an 1 point return.
[REAF.]: A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an R position
retum.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R
sition radius value, positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom. 1f omitted, 0 is
assumed. units of seconds, positive value COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : Wher moving from the current position to
the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining plane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point ir three axis
synchronous operation.
- 347 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
Too1 path
<1> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start posítíon + clearance
C in rapíd traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the cuttíng end posítíon at the cuttíng feedrate
F .
<3> The tool retracts to the positíon cut end posítíon + clearance
Ut along the tool axis at the feedrate Fut specifıed for
clearance along the tool axís.
<4> Spíndle orientatíon is performed.
<5> The tool retracts to the posítíon current posítion + clearance
Ur ín the tool radíus dírectíon at the feedrate Fur specífıed
for clearance in the tool radius directíon.
<6> Move the tool to the posítíon cuttíng start posítíon + cleaгаnce
C at the returning feedrate Fr .
- 348 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TIΓPES 1.M1LLING
Back Boring: G1006
CUI COHD.
5NIFT FlΓΦUNт 0-- --
Cuτ дεгτн м_ј
Dısr. FRon иoτтoм L
REF. PT. NODE
I PDINτ J=ј
GO PpS7 RHOUNT K=ј
CLEARØCE C=j
FEED RATE F=i
D4JELL T 1 HE P=ј
pPROCн Нo7I0н 2=2 RКES м0џ
Y I Н Ní1MERЯе.S. Clf1. 1 иCHэ
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
f Q SH1FT AMOUNT Shift amount radius value at the hole bottom after
s indle orientation COPY
İ M CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
L D1ST. FROM BOTTOM Distance radìus value at the hole bottom in the lifting
direction
1 [1N1T-1] : An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to the
1 point. initial value

[1N1T-2] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an 1 point return.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return. are made as an R osition return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
K GO PAST AMOUNT Go-past amount at the hole bottom. 1f omitted, 0 is
assumed. radius value, positive value COPY
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R position
radius va1ue. positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive va1ue COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom after 1ift machining. 1f
omitted, 0 is assumed. units of seconds, positive value
ι COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to
the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves ir the machining plane in tvvo-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position to
the machining start point in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.

- 349 -


A
1.M1LLING CYCLE ØCHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
Too1 path
<1> Move the tool to the positíon cuttíng start posítion + clearance
C in rapid traverse.
<2> The tool is shífted away from the tool típ.
<32> The tool moves to the bottom of the hole R poínt Ьy rapid 1
traverse.
<4> The tool retunıs by a shíft amount toward the tool típ.
<5> The spíndle ís turned in the norma1 direction to cut in to the
posítíon K + L along the tool axís at the feedrate F specífıed
for cut-ín.
<6> The spindle ís stopped.
<72 After beíng shifted away from the tool típ, the tool is pulled out
from the ho1e.

- 350 -
B-63874ENl05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Ho1e Posítion B1ock XY P1ane
Random Points: G1210
,
HULE Рas-Т1нoιε Pos-21
вaЅε PØτ т І СЊз
PolHT-l X: u=Fzi
POINT-1CY Џј
PO[НT-ě X? A=ј
PU1NI-2CY> C=ј
ØINT-3iК? Aј
PO[HT-3 Y E
POINI-4CX> Ej
POINI-4CYλ Iј
EY IИ HUłRfłLs. CMM, IHCN7
HOLE POS-1
Data ítem Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the work iece surface
H PO1NT-1 X X coordinate of the fırst hole
V PO1NT-1 Y Y coordinate of the fırst hole
A PO1NT-2 X X Ørdinate of the second hole
C PO1NT-2 Y Y coordinate of the second hole
D PO1NT-3 X X Ørdinate of the third hole
E PO1NT-3 Y Y coordinate of the third hole
F PO1NT-4 X X coordinate of the fourth hole
1` PO1NT-4 Y Y coordinate of the fourth hole
HOLE POs-2
Data ítem Meanín
J PO1NT-5 X X coordinate of the fıfth hole
K PO1NT-5 Y Y coordìnate of the fıfth hole
M PO1NT-6 X X coordinate of the sixth hole
P PO1NT-6 Y Y coordinate of the sixth hole
Q PO1NT-7 X X coordinate of the seventh hole
R PO1NT-7 Y Y coordinate of the seventh hole
S PO1NT-8 X X coordinate of the ei hth hole
T PO1NT-8 Y Y coordinate of the ei hth hole
NOTE
1t is unnecessary to enter values for every hole
position. 1f entered, however, both X and Y
coordínates in a pair must be entered for a hole
position.
-351 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Linear Poínts Same lnterval : G1211
,..
нOιE P05τт 5KIP ı
NASE POSITTON B=ι
START POτНT К н=[^а
START POINT Y V=
ЯИGLE A-- 0. -
HØE POS. TYPE D=LENGTH
LENGTH/P1TCH Ej
HUMBER OF HOLE C4
Y IN lΛJfЕRfц S. HM> [НCн
HOLE POS1T
Data ítem Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the work iece surface
H START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start point fırst hole of a strai ht line
V START PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the start point fırst hole of a strai ht line
A ANGLE An 1e of a strai ht line from the X-axis initial va1ue = 0
D HOLE [LENGTH] : Specified with the distance between the fırst
and last holes, and the number of holes.
[PITCH] : Specifıed with the distance between two
ad acent holes. and the пumЬeг of holes.
E LENGTH / P1TCH Length : Distance betØen the fırst and last holes
if [LENGTH] is selected for item D
Pitch : Distance between two adjacent holes
if P1TCH is selected for item D
C NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes
SK1P
Data ítem Meanin
F OMITTING PO1NT 1 Point where no hole is to Ьe made 1
1 OMITTING PO1NT 2 Point where no hole is to be made 2
J OMITTING PO1NT 3 Point where no hole is to Ьe made 3 - - -- -
K OMITTING POINT 4 Point where пo hole is to be made 4
NOTE
1t is unnecessary to enter a value for any item of an
omitting point.
- 352 -
в-sзв7aεиıo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Linear Poínts Different lnterval : G1212
ι , ,> >
HПІE PØ-11HΠLE POS-21
AA ;E POSI T I ΠN B=Γ
57ДRT PΠ1И7ĺК> н=[
TRRT POIНTCYэ V=Γ
FlNGLE
HOLE POS-1
Data ítem Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the work iece surface
H START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start point fırst hole of a strai ht line
V START PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of the start point fırst hole of a strai ht line
ι
ıı A ANGLE An 1e of a straight line from the X-axis initial value = 0
HOLE POS-2
Data ítem Meanín
C P1TCH w1DTH-1 Distance between the fırst and second holes positive or
ne ative value
D P1TCH VИDTH-2 Distance between the second and third holes positive or
ne ative value
E P1TCH ИπDTH-3 Distance between the third and fourth holes positive or
ne ative value
F P1TCH W1DTH-4 Distance between the fourth and fıfth holes positive or
ne ative value
1 P1TCH W1DTH-5 Distance between the fıfth and sixth holes positive or
ne ative value
J P1TCH W1DTH-6 Distance between the sixth and seventh holes positive or
e ative value
K P1TCH W1DTH-7 Distance between the seventh and eighth holes positive
or ne ative value
M P1TCH w1DTH-8 Distance between the eighth and ninth holes posìtive or
ne ative value
P P1TCH W1DTH-9 Distance between the ninth and tenth holes positive or
ne ative value
Q P1TCH W1DTH-10 Distance between the tenth and eleventh holes positive
or ne ative value
NOTE
1 1t is unnecessary to enter a value for every pítch
width data item.
- 353 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Grid Points: G1213
HOLE гчЅτт sкτP 1
вЯsε иosτтІ0и в=
ETRRT POINT X н=
START POINT Y U=Γ

LEHGTH FOR X AX2S U=

LENGTH FOR Y RXIS ы=Г
Ní1MBER FOR X AXIS 2 =
NUMBER FOR Y AК2S з=Г
ØLE FOR X RXIs к=Γ
qHGLE FOR Y AXIs
KEY 1и NUt RALS. 1l1. IHCH
HOLE POS1T
Data ítem Meanín
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the work iece surface
H START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start point fırst hole of a straight
line
V START PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of the start point fırst hole of a straıght
line
U LENGTH FOR X ÃX1S Length of the fırst side of a grid sitive value
W LENGTH FOR Y AX1S Len th of the second side of a grid sitive value
1 NUMBER FOR X AX1S Number of holes on the fırst side of a grìd positive
value
J NUMBER FOR Y AX1S Number of holes on the second side of a grid
ositive value
K ANGLE FOR X AX1S Ang1e of the fırst sıde of a grid from the X-axis
initial value = 0
M ANGLE FOR Y AX1S Ang1e of the second side of a grid from the X-axis
initial value = 90
SK1P
Data ítem Meanin
A OMITTING PO1NT 1 Point where no hole is to be made 1
C OMITTING PO1NT 2 Point where no hole is to be made 2
D OMITTING PO1NT 3 Point v,ıhere no hole is to be made 3 _
E OMITTING PO1NT 4 Point where пo hole is to be made 4
NOTE
1t is unnecessary to enter a value for any item of an
omitting point.
-35-ı-
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Rectangle Poínts: G1214
,
н[aLε POsτт sкτF 1
вЯSε POsITtON в=
START POINTCXI H=Р
STARт POINT Y V=Г
LENGTH FOR X AКIS U=r
LENGTH FOR Y AКiS W=
NlkцłER FOR X AКIS 1=Γ
NO?1BER FOR Y flXIS J=r
ANGLE FOR X AX1S K=Íď.
ANGLE FOR Y A IS
КЕY IN NIq RALS. Cfa1. 14ЦН>
FłOLE POSІT
Data ítem Meanín
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the иvгk iece surface
H START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start point first hole of a straight
line
V START PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the start point fırst hole of a straight
line
U LENGTH FOR X AX1S Len th of the fırst side of a rectan 1e ositive value
W LENGTH FOR Y AX1S Length of the second side of a rectangle positive
value
1 NUMBER FOR X AX1S Number of holes on the fırst side of a rectangle
ositive value
J NUMBER FOR Y AX1S Number of holes on the second side of a rectangle
ositive value
K ANGLE FOR X AX1S Ang1e of the fırst side of a rectangle from the X-axis
initial value = 0
M ANGLE FOR Y AX1S Ang1e of the second side of a rectangle from the
X-axis initial value = 90
SK1P
Data ítem Meanin
A OMITTING PO1NT 1 Point where no hole is to be made 1
C OMITTING PO1NT 2 Point where пo hole is to be made 2
D OMITTING PO1NT 3 Point where пo hole is to be made 3
E OMITTING PO1NT 4 Point where no hole is to be made 4
NOTE
1t ís unnecessary to enter a value for any item of an
omitting point.
-3 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Círcle Poínts: G1215
і - ,
HDLE PRSIT SKIP t
BRSE POSIT10Fλ в=Γ
CENTER PD1HTCXi н=ΓΓ
CERTER P пHTtY V=Γ
RADIUS R=Γ
sTØT POІHT NHGLE R Ěł
HUMBER OF HОІE C=Γ
EY N FRN11ER8LS. MM+ IØ
HOLE POINTS
Data ltem Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the vvork iece surface
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center of a circle
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of the center of a cirde
R RADIUS Radius of a cirde sitive value
A START PO1NT ANGLE Central angle of the first hole from the X-axis
ositive or ne ative value initial value = 0
C NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made sitive value
SK1P
Data ítem Meanin
D OMITTING PO1NT 1 Point where no hole is to be made 1
E OMITTING PO1NT 2 Point vvhere no hole is to be made 2
F OMITTING PO1NT 3 Point where no hole is to be made 3
1 OMITTING PO1NT 4 Point where no hole is to be made 4
NOTE
1t is unnecessary to enter a value for any item of an
omitting point.
->56-
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Arc Points Same lnterval : G1216
.,
łOLE P05ττjSкіP І
вя5ε POSітτOH в=
CENTER POINT К H=Γ
CEHTER PEIIHT Y V=f
RRDIUS R=
START POINT ØE H=
P TCH QHGLE C=
NUł1BER 0F HDLE D=
- 1 NUMERALS. CłR1. INCH>
HOLE POS1T
Data ítem Meanín
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the vиork iece surface
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center of an arc
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center of an arc
R RADIUS Radius of an arc ositive value
A START PO1NT ANGLE Central angle of the first hole from the X-axis
ositive or ne ative value initial value = 0
C P1TCH ANGLE Central angle between two adjacent holes positive
oг ne ative value
D NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made ositive value
SK1P
Data ítem Meanin
E OMITTING PO1NT 1 Point where no hole ìs to be made 1
F OMITTING PO1NT 2 Point where no hole is to be made 2
1 OMITTING PO1NT 3 Point where no hole is to be made 3
J OMITTING PO1NT 4 Point where no hole is to be made 4
NOTE
1t ís unnecessary to enter a value for any item of an
omitting point.
- 357 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Arc Points Dífferent lnterval : G1217
нΠLε Pos- н0ιε POs-2
BflSF POsIHON Ds
CENIER PflINf X нѕ
cεитεк POıит Y V=Г
RRDIUS R=Γ
STRRT POINT RNGLE A=Γ
Y IN NUМЕRRLS. MM. 1HCH
HOLE FOs-1
Data item Meaníng
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the work iece surface
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center of an arc
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center of an arc
R RADIUS Radius of an arc ositive value _
A START PO1NT ANGLE Central angle of the fırst hole from the X-axis
ositive or ne ative value initial value = 0
HOLE POs-2
Data ítem Meanin
C P1TCH ANGLE-1 Central angle between the fırst and second holes
ositive or ne ative value
D P1TCH ANGLE-2 Central angle between the second and third holes
ositive or ne ative value
E P1TCH ANGLE-3 Central angle between the third and fourth holes
ositive or ne ative value
F P1TCH ANGLE-4 Central angle between the fourth and fıfth holes
ositive or ne ative value
1 P1TCH ANGLE-5 Central angle betvveen the fıfth and sixth holes
ositive or ne ative value
J P1TCH ANGLE-6 Central angle between the sixth and seventh holes
ositive or ne atìve value
K P1TCH ANGLE-7 Central angle between the seventh and eighth holes
ositive or ne ative value
M P1TCH ANGLE-8 Central angle between the eighth and ninth holes
ositive or ne ative value
P P1TCH ANGLE-9 Central angle between the ninth and tenth holes
ositive or ne ative value
Q P1TCH ANGLE-10 Central angle between the tenth and eleventh holes
ositive or ne ative value
- 35 8 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Ho1e Posítíon B1ock YZ P1ane
The same hole posítíon block types as for the XY plane explØed in the
prevíous subsectíon are available for the YZ plane. They are províded
wíth the followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ plane ís the same as for the XY plane except
that the XY plane ís changed to the YZ plane and that the direction ín
whích the tool moves to cut ís changed from the Z-axís to the X-axis.
RØdom Poínts : G1310
Línear Poínts Same Interval : G1311
Línear Poínts Dífferent Interval : G1312
Grid Points : G1313
Rectangle Points : G1314
,ı
Cігc1e Poínts : G1315
l Arc Poínts Same Interval : G1316
Aгc Poínts Dífferent Interval : G1317
- 359 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-68874EN/05
1. Ho1e Position B1ock XC P1ane and End Face
A menu for selectíng a hole posítíon block ín whích the C-axis ís used ín
mØg holes ís dísplayed by selectíng the C-axís Figure tab from the
mílling figure menu, usíng the and -+ cursor keys.
C Axís Ho1e oп Face Circle Poínts : G1572
,
IN NUИERИ >
POs І síZE
Data item Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z Ørdínate of the work iece surface
X X AX1S POS. RAD. X coordinate of a hole position common to a11 holes
A START ANGLE Central angle of the first hole form the CO axis
sítíve oг ne atíve value
REPEAT
Data í Meanín
C P1TCH ANGLE Amount of movement betvreen t holes along the
C-axis sítíve oг ne atíve value
M NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made sítíve value
- 360 -
Bδ3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHININGTYPES 1.M1LLING
C Axís Ho1e on Face Random Points : G1573
HOLE Pos-ıіноιε РОs-гЈ
Hp:,E PUStHOH в=Ј
X AКІS POs. 1 RяD. λ и=І
c ιшІs Pos. і w
x AXıs Øs. г RAD. A=Γ
c axıs иπs.г c=Ј
X flXls 1 D=
C AXIS E_
К flX15, F=
C AX1S I=
HOLE PO -1
Data ítem Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the work iece surface
H X AX1S RAD. X coordinate of the flrst hole radius value
V C AX1S C coordinate of the first hole
A X AX1S RAD. X coordinate of the second hole radius value
C C AX1S C coordinate of the second hole
D X AX1S RAD. X coordinate of the third hole radius value
E C AX1S C Ørdinate of the third hole
F X AX1S RAD. X coordinate of the fourth hole radius value
1 C AX1S C coordinate of the fourth hole
HOLE POS-2
Data ítem Meanín
J X AX1S RAD. X coordinate of the fıfth hole radius value
K C AX1S C coordinate of the fıfth hole
M X AX1S RAD. X Ørdinate of the sixth hole radius va1ue
P C AX1S C Ørdinate of the sixth hole
Q X AX1S RAD. X coordinate of the seventh hole radius value
R C AX1S C coordinate of the seventh hole
S X AX1S RAD. X coordinate of the ei hth hole radius value
T C ÃX1S C coordinate of the ei hth hole
- 361 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-бз8ıaεиıo5
1. Ho1e Position B1ock ZC P1ane and Cylíndrícal Surface
The same hole posítíon block types as for the XC plane explained in the
prevíous subsectíon are available for the ZC plane. They are provided
wíth the followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the ZC plane ís the same as for the XC plane except
that the XC plane blank end face is changed to the ZC plane blank
cylindrical surface and that the dírection ín whích the tool moves to cut
ís changed from the Z-axís to the X-axís.
Ho1es on a cylindrical surface ZC fıgure along the C-axis -
Círcle Points: G1672
Ho1es on a cylíndrical surface ZC figure along the C-axis -
Random Poínts: G1673
Ho1e Position B1ock XA P1ane and Cylíndrícal Surface
The same hole posítíon block types as for the ZC plane explaíned ín the
prevíous subsectíon are available for the XA plane. They are provided
wíth the followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the XA plane ís the same as for the ZC plane except
that the ZC plane blank end face ís changed to the XA plane blank
cylíndńcal surface and that the dírectíon ín which the tool moves to cut
ís changed from the X-axís to the Z-axís.
Ho1es on a cylíndrical surface XA fıgure along the A-axís -
Circle Poínts: G 1772
Ho1es oп a cylindrical surface XA fıguтe along the A-axis -
Random Poínts: G1773
NOTE
The following parameter settíng is necessary to
execute XA plane cycle.
. , 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
- 362 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
12 HOLE MACHINING BY TURNING W1TH THE TOOL
ROTATED
1 Machiníng Type Blocks for Ho1e Machíníng by Turning wíth
the Too1 Rotated
NOTE 1
1 Ho1e machiníng by turning wíth the tool rotated is
enabled when bit 1 of parameter No. 27000 = 1.
2 The hole position blocks for hole machining by
turning wíth the tool rotated are the same as
those for hole machiníng by milling. See the
previous section Ho1e Posítíon B1ock .
Center dríllíng: G1110
CUT COHD.
REF. Pτ. ІіoτЕ τ 1І І і
I P IIHT J=f
cuτ DEPTH ι
αεяaεЫκε c
FEED RRTE F
1HdEιі T I ME P=ј
RPRrDκ.н MOTIĺk1 2 =f->z MOU
Cutting condítion
Data ítem Meanín
1 [1N1T-1] : An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to
the 1 point. initial value
[1N1T1-2]: A11 movements between holes, including
the last return, are made as an 1 point
return.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including
the last return, are made as an R position
return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R
osition radius value, positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 tíme at the hole bottom units of seconds,
ositive value . COPY
- 363 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B- 3874EN/Q5
Cuttíng conditíon
Data ítem Meanin
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the
machining start point. the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[X Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
- 364 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Drilling: G1111
CUT CUHD.
PE:CKTHG CUT DEf TH Q-- ^І-
: REF. PT. MODE і 1Ю
PO HT J= -
CUT DÉPTH LЖІ -
t PqST RMOUNT K= -
CLEFlRRHCE CГ-
RNTE F=І -
lL TJME Pж4 -
RPROCH MOTIOH 2 К->Z MOV
Cutting condítíon _
Data ítem Meanin
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut made by one cut radius va1ue, positive
value COPY Note
1 [1N1T-1]: An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to
the 1 point. initial value
[1N1T-2] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an 1 point return.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an R position
return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative va1ue
K GO PAST AMOUNT Length of the incomplete hole portion at the tool tip
radius value, positive value COPY
C CLEARANCE Distance between the vvorkpiece surface and R
osition radius value, posItive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive va1ue COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom units of seconds,
ositive value . COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z >X] : From the current position to the machining
start point, the tool moves in the Z-axis
direction and then in the X-axis direction.
[X--ıZ] From the current position to the machining
start point, the tool moves in the Z axis
direction and then in the X-axis direction.
initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the machining
start point, the tool moves simultaneously
in the X and Z-axis directions.
NOTE
The system refers to the parameter as the
return amount. Therefore, please set to
suitable value before machining.
- 365 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874E N/05
Tapping: G1112
CUT COND. RIG D TAP
TNRFAD LERD B=` ^І
REF. PT. HODE 1
PO] HT J= -
CUT DEPTN Lј------
CLEARλНСE
DUELL T1ME
APROCN MOTIOFI Z X->Z HOV
IN N11Γ1ЕRЯLS. ίriM, INCN
Cutting condítíon
Data ítem Meanín
D THREAD LEAD Tapping tool lead radius value, positíve value
COPY
1 [1N1T-1] : Aп R position retum is made in moving
Øtween holes. Finally, a return is made to the
1 point. inítíal value
[1N1T-2] : A11 movements between holes, índudíng the
last retum, are made as an 1 point retum.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, includíng the
last retum, are made as an R position retum.
J 1 PO1NT Coordínate of the 1 роіпt COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radíus value, ne ative value
C CLEARANCE Dístance between the workpiece surface and R position
radius value, роѕіtіvе value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 tíme at the hole bottom units of seconds, posítive
value . COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z iX] : From the current positíon to the machíníng
start poínt, the tool moves in the Z-axis
direction and then in the X-axís dírectíon.
[X Z] : From the current position to the machíning
start poínt, the tool moves in the Z-axís
direction and then in the X-axís directíon. 1
ı
initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the machining
start poínt, the tool moves simultaneously in
the X- and Z-axis directions.
Rí id tарріпg
Data ítem Meanin
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT] : Specifıes the float tapping. ínitial value
R1G1D : S ecifles the ń id tapping.
S SPINDLE SPEED S índle s eed min Note
- 366 -
в-63в7aεrυo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
NOTE
1 V\Ihen you use rigid tapping mode M code
command , the system refers to
0г as the value of M code.
Therefore, please set or to
suitable value before machíníng.
- 367 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Reamíng: G1113

Ø eø+д. l
RSF. PV. MODE
í POINT J=1
WT DEPTH L=I
CL.EHRRHCE C-І
FEED RATE F=
DtЕLL 7IME P=
RPRΠCH MΠTIØ Z-X->2 M JO
1ECT SOFT KEY.
Cuttín condítíon
Data ítem Meanin
1 [1N1T-1] : An R posítion retum ìs made in moving
between holes. Finally, a retum is made to
the 1 poínt. ínítíal value
[1N1T-2] : A11 movements between holes, índudíng the
last retum, are made as an 1 poínt retum.
[REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an R position
retum.

J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne atíve value
C CLEARANCE Dístance Ьetwеeп the workpiece surface and R
sítíon radíus value, роѕіtіvе value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate sítíve value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom uníts of seconds,
sitive value . COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z ıX] : From the current posítion to the machınìng
start poínt, the tool moves in the Z-axís
direction and then in the X-axís dírection.
[X iZ] : From the current posítion to the machíníng
start poínt, the tool moves ín the Z-axis
dírectíon and then ín the X-axís dírectíon.

initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current posítion to the machíning
start point, the tool moves símultaneously
in the X- and Z-axis directions.
,
- 368 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Boríng: G1114
:І ј ..
cuT cОND.
ØF. Pτ. н01и ι = .
I POINT J-
cUT DEFTM L-f
ØRfüλCE c=f
FΣΣD ØTE F=i
1HdELL T [ ME P=f
ЧØCH MUTION - ->Z M0о
SE1ECτ sOFT KEY.
Cutting condítíon _
Data item Meanin
1 [1N1T-1] : An R position return is made in moving
between holes. Finally, a return is made to
1 the 1 point. initial value
[1N1T-2] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, aгe made as an 1 point return.
` [REF.] : A11 movements between holes, including the
last return, are made as an R position
1 return.
J 1 PO1NT Coordinate of the 1 point COPY
L CUT DEPTH Cut de th radius value, ne ative value
C CLEARANCE Distance between the июгkpiece surface and R
osition radius value, positive va1ue
F FEED RATE Cutiing feedrate ositive value COPY
P` DИ/ELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the hole bottom units of seconds,
sitive value . COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the machining
start point, the tool moves in the Z-axis
direction and then in the X-axis direction
[X Z] From the current position to the machining
start point, the tool moves in the Z-axis
direction and then in the X-axís direction.
initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the machining
i
start point, the tooi moves simultaneously г
in the X- and Z-axis directions.
ι
1
M
- 369 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
FACING
Machíníng Type Blocks for Facíng
Rough: G1020
-.--.
TП04 COND. ØT CD1JD. tBETAiI 1
TH1CKНEςS
FΣNISH pИПtAJT H=
СШ DEPTH OF RHD1U ì
CllT DEPTH ПF RКI ; 7-і
FEED RRTE - RfλDIIlS F Г
FEED RRTE - RКIS E=Γ
KEY IИ NUMERqLS.CИИ, IHCH
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
D TOOL DIAMETER Face mi11 diameter
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset wíndow.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
- - -- -----
CUT COND.
Data ítem Mearxin
T THICKNESS Face mi11 diameter
H F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance in facin
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut in the tool radius direction to the next
cutting path
J CUT DEPTH OF AX1S Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting
o eration _
F FEED RATE RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cuttìng ıs performed in
the tool radius direction
E FEED RATE AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting ıs performed in
the tool axis direction
NOTE
1f the parameter 27030 1=1, only the menu of
perpendicular directions to CUTTING
DIRECTION can have been displayed during in
case of selecting CUT SH1FT DIRECTION . Thus,
the extra selection can be removed.
- 370 -
в-63в74εNı05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
1 1N1T1AL FEED OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the fırst cutting. The
initial value is 100 1 to 200, positive value .
W CUTTING METHOD [SINGLE] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is
always performed in the same
direction.
[ZIGZAG] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is
performed back and forth.
COPY
P PATH MOVE METHOD [PULL] : Retracts to point R before moving to the
start point of the next cutting path in
the tool axis direction .
1 [KEEP] : Moves to the start point of the next
cutting path directly without retracting to
point R.
Remark1 This data item is indicated only when
[ZIGZAG] is selected for CUTTING
1 METHOD.
Remark2 This data item is enabled when the
parameter = О.
Remark3 1n case that the movement ís done
Ьy 1 axís, tool ís kept even íf [PULL]
ís specífıed.
Remark4 1f [KEEP] ís specífıed, aп end poínt
1
Γ of prevíous cuttíng motíon ís
adjusted in order to enable a tool to
ł move wíth 1 axís to next cuttíng
ł start poínt
COPY
V PATH MOVE FEED RATE Feedrate applicable when the tool moves to the
ł ıı start point of the next cutting path. 1n case that
the feedrate ís set to 0, the tool moves at a
i rapid traverse rate. 1
Г Remark1 This data item is indicated on1y when
[ZIGZAG] is selected for CUTTING
METHOD.
Remark2 This data item is enabled when the
parameter = О.
COPY
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis dìrection radìus value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
M CLERANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the end of a blank being
machined and the end of the tool placed at the
retract position radìus va1ue
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial va1ue.
- 371 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
-- --_ = DETAIL ---_ -_
Data item -Meaning
A CUTTING [R1GHT] : Performs cutting rıghtward as indicated
in the illustration. When both directions
aгe selected, cutting for the fırst cutting
path is pertormed rightward.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting leftward as indicated irı
the illustration. When both directions
aгe selected, cutting for the fırst cutting
path is performed Ieftward.
[UP] Performs cutting upward as indicated in
the illustration. When both directions
aгe selected. cutting for the first cutting
path is performed upward
[DOИ/N] Performs cutting downward as indicated
in the illustration. When both directions
aгe selected, cutting for the flrst cutting
path is performed downward.
Remark The actual cutting direction is determined
Ьy the coordinate axis indicated in the
illustration. COPY
B CUT DEPTH DIRECTION [R1GHT] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path rightward as indicated in
the illustration.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path leftward as indicated in the
illustration.
[UP] Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path upward as indicated in the
illustration.
[DOWN] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path downward as indicated in
the illustration.
Remark The actual cutting direction is determined
by the coordinate axis indicated in the
illustration. COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current
position to the machining start point,
the tool fırst moves in the machining
plane in two-axis synchronous
operation and then moves along the
tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis s nchronous o eration.
- 372 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Finish: G1021
TOOL coиD.lCυт COHD. τtεтAτι
CUTTING tETNOD i= z, iZQ
PЯTH rIOUE METHΠB P= KEEP--ł1Ì6Fii
PATH 1YOUE FEED RATE V=ј γ
CLEARANCE OF A 1S C=ј
CLEARANCE OF RADIUs M=ј -
CU7TING DIRECTION R=RI6NT
.CШ DEPTN DIRECTION B=DΠWN
QPROCH MΠTION z=2 AXES MΠЏ
Y 1Н INCH
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
D TOOL DIAMETER Face mi11 diameter
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordínarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Too1 Offset wíndow.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
`TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut in the tool radius direction to the next
cutting path
F FEED RATE RADIUS Feedrate applicable włıen cutting is performed in
the tool radíus dírection
E FEED RATE AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
the tool axis direction
- 373 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-δ3874EN/05
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
W CUTTING METHOD [SINGLE] Cutting in the tool radius direction ıs
always perFormed in the same
direction.
[ZIGZAG] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is
performed back and forth.
COPY
P PATH MOVE METHOD [PULL] Retracts to point R before moving to the
start point of the next cutting path in
the tool axis direction ,
[KEEP] : Moves to the start point of the next
cutting path directly without retracting to
point R.
Remark1 This data item is indicated on1y when
[ZIGZAG] is selected for CUTTING
METHOD, and [KEEP] is set
automatically.
Remark2 This data item is enabled when the
parameter = 1.
COPY
V PATH MOVE FEED RATE Feedrate applicable when the tool moves to the
start point of the next cutting path. lnitially, the
feedrate is set to 0, allowing the tool to move at a
rapid traverse rate. COPY
Remark1 This data item is indicated on1y when
[ZIGZAG] is selected for CUTTING
METHOD.
Remark2 This data item is enabled when the
rameter = 1.
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
M CLERANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the end of a blank being
machined and the end of the tool placed at the
retract position radius value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
- 374 -
в-εзв7aENıos CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
DETAIL
Data item I Meanin
A CUTTING DIRECTION [R1GHT] : Performs cutting rightward as indicated
in the illustration. When both directions
aгe selected, cutting for the fırst cutting
path is performed rightward.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting leftward as indicated in
the illustration. When both directions
aгe selected, cutting for the fırst cutting
path is performed 1eftward.
[UP] : Performs cutting upward as indicated in
the illustration. When both directions
aгe selected, cutting for the fırst cutting
path is performed upward.
[DOWN]: Performs cutting downward as indicated
n the illustration. When both directions
aгe selected, cutting for the fırst cutting
path is performed downward.
Remark The actual cutting direction is determined
by the coordinate axis indicated in the
illustration. COPY
B CUT DEPTH DIRECTION [R1GHT] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path rightward as indicated in
the illustration.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path leftward as indicated in the
illustration.
[UP] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path upward as indicated in the
illustration.
[DOWN] : Performs cutting while shifting the
cutting path downward as indicated in
the illustration.
Remark The actual cutting direction is determined
by the coordinate axis indicated in the
_ illustration. COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current
position to the machining start point,
the tool fırst moves in the machining
plane in two-axis synchronous
operation and then moves along the
tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis s nchronous o eration.
1
г
NOTE
When a cutting direction is selected, only those
menu items that are perpendicular to the cutting i
direction can be displayed to delete unnecessary
options by setting bit 1 of parameter No. 27030 to 1.
-;ı5-
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Fíxed Form Fígure Blocks for Facing XY P1ane
square: G1220 XY plane
Pos. sτ2ε
fIGURE TYPE T-FRCE
βHŠE PΠSITIØ B=
CEHTER POIHTCX>
CENTER ØIHT Y
EENGTH FOR X RXlS
0 IENGTH F CORNER RRD[U5
HHØEE R
Y iH NUlQMY_S.
PO ./SІĽť
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When facing is selected as machining type,
be sure to select FACE].
B BASE POS1T10N Z Ørdinate of the fınal surface for facing in the tool
axis direction
H CENTER PO1NT X X Ørdinate of the center position of a rectangular
fi uгe
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center position of a rectangular
figure
U LEBGTH FOR X AX1S Length of the side in the X-axis direction radius value,
ositive value
W LENGTH FOR Y AX1S Length of the side in the Y-axis direction radius value,
ositive value
R CORNER RADIUS Radius for corner rounding positive value
A ANGLE 1nclination angle of a rectangular fıgure relative to the
X-axis ositive oг negative value
- 376 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Circle: G1221 XY plane
POS.ıSτzε
FIGURE τYØ т-εRcε
вHSE POSττıØ
CENTER POIHV X H=ј
CENTER POINTťY7 V=
RAI IUS R=
EY IN tdA 3ü1L5.
POS.IsIĽť
Data ítem Meanin _
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer figure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When facing is selected as machining type,
Ьe sure to select FACE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the fınal surface for facing in the tool
axis direction
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of a circular fi uгe
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center position of a circular fı uгe
R RADIUS Radius of a circular flgure radius value, positive
value
г
ι
L
l
ι
1
1
`
r
1 ε
- 377 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Track: G1222 XY plane
РoS. /sI E 1
FIGURE TYPE т 4.і
BASE POSITlQł B
CENTER P01HІCК H=Г
CENTER P01НTCY U=Г
BETЧEEН D1StAИCE U=
RADIUs R
ANGLE A=
LECT 50F7 KEY.

Data ítem Meanin
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When facing is selected as machining tyØ,
Ьe sure to select FACE .
B BASE POS1T10N 2 coordinate of the flnal surface for facing in the tool
axis direction
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of the 1eft
semicircle
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of the center position of the 1eft
semicircle
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of the right and 1eft
semicircles radius va1ue, positive value
R RADIUS Radius of the 1eft and right semicircles radius value,
sitive value
A ANGLE lndination angle of a track fıgure relative to the X-axis.
The blank is regarded as 0 degrees. positive oг
ne ative value
- 378 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Fíxed Form Figure Blocks for Facing YZ P1ane, XC P1ane
The same fixed-figure block types as for the XY plane explained in
the prevíous subsection are avaílable for the YZ plane and the XC
plane polar coordinate interpolatíon plane . They are provided with
the followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ and XC planes ís the same as for the XY
plane except that the XY plane ís changed to the YZ or XC p1ane and
that the dírectíon in whích the tool moves to cut ís changed to the
X-axís YZ p1аne or the Z-axís XC p1аne .
Square : G1320 YZ p1аne
Círcle : G1321 YZ p1аne
Track : G1322 YZ p1аne
Square : G1520 XC p1аne, po1aг coordínate ínterpolatíon p1аne
C vcle : G1521 XC p1аne, po1aг cooτdіnate ínterpolatíon p1аne
Track : G1522 XC p1аne, po1aг cooτdіnate ínterpolatíon p1аne
NOTE
When performíng machining po1ar coordínate
ínterpolatíon on the XC plane, note the followíng:
When bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be swítched to the po1ar
coordínate interpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífically, enter before the machíníng
type.
Enter for cancelíng po1aг coordínate
ínterpolatíon as requíred.
When bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
and aгe automatícally output before
and after cycle machíníng, respectívely.
- 379 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-sз8ıaεиıo5
Arbitrary Fígure Blocks for Facíng XY P1ane
When an arbitrary figure for facíng ís ínput, data such as a figшe type
and machíníng reference position ís specífied ín the start poínt block.
Other data iteØ to be input such as a straight line Ød arc are exactly the
same as for arbitrary figures of other machíníng types.
So, thís subsectíon describes only the start point block of Ø arbítrary
figшe for facíng.
For other arbítrary figшes, see Chapter 5, DETAILED
DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES, in
Part Il.
Start poínt: G1200 XY p1ane
ELEMENT
Data item Meanín
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a figure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer figure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouríng and
emboss machíníng or as a figure for
Øketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a figure for groovíng
Remark \Nhen facíng is selected as machining type, be
sure to seiect FACE .
X START PO1NT X X Ørdinate of the start роіпt of an arbitrary fi ure
Y START PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fi uгe
Z BASE POS1T10N Z Ørdinate of the final surface for facíng ín the tool axis
dírection
- 380 -
в-sз8ıaεи1o5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Arbítrary Fígure Blocks for Facing YZ P1ane, XC P1ane, ZC
P1ane, XA P1aпe
The same arbitrary-figure block types as for the XY plane explained
ín the prevíous subsection are avaílable for the YZ p1ane, the XC
plane polar coordínate ínterpolatíon plane , ZC plane and XA plane
cylíndrícal surface . Their start poínts are specífied wíth the
followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC, аnd XA planes ís the same as
for the XY p1аne except that the XY p1аne ís changed to the YZ, XC,
ZC or XA p1аne and that the dírectíon in which the tool moves to cut
ís changed to the X-axis YZ аnd ZC planes or the Z-axís XC and
XA plane .
Start poínt : G1300 YZ p1аne
Start poínt : G1500 XC p1аne, polar coordínate ínterpolation p1ane
Start poínt : G1600 ZC p1ane, plane
Start poínt : G1700 XA plane, plane
NOTE
1 When performíng machiníng po1ar coordínate
ínterpolatíon on the XC plane, note the followíng:
\Nhen bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be switched to the po1ar
coordinate interpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífıcally, enter before the machíníng
type.
Enter for cancelíng po1aг coordínate
interpolation as requíred.
When bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
and are automatícally output before
and after cycle machíníng, respectívely.
2 When performíng machiníng cylíndrícal
interpolatíon on the ZC and XA plane, note the
following:
When bít 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be switched to the cylíndrícal
coordínate ínterpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífically, enter C cylínder radíus before
the machining type.
Enter CO for cancelíng cylíndrícal
interpolatíon as requíred.
When bít 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
C cylínder radíus and CO aгe
automatícally output before and after cycle
machíníng, respectively.
3 The following parameter setting is necessary to
execute XA plane cycle.
. , 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
- 381 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-б3874EN/05
CONTOURING
1 Machiníng Type Blocks for Contouring
Outer Wa11 Rough: G1060
lnner Wa11 Rough: G1054
Partíal Rough: G1068
TOOL COND. CUT COND. DETAIL
BOTTOM THiCKNESS T==Гї
SI1E THICKHE55 5=
CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Lf
CUT DEPTH OF AXIS λ=Г
SIDE FIHISH AHOUNT K=r
HOTTØ FINISH AMT. Hf
FEED RATE- Ff
FEED RATE- V=;
FEED RATE - AК7ti E
KEY IN й , INCH>
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dispiay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND
_ Data ítem Meaníng
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom in sìde face
machinin radius value, positive value
S S1DE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face radius value,
ositive value
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut per side face machining operation in
the tool radius direction radius value, positive
value
ı J CUT DEPTH OF AX1S Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting
operation radius value, positive value
The default is bottom surplus thickness - bottom
fnіѕhіпg allowance .
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face The blank is
re arded as 0 radius va1ue, posıtıve value
H` ı BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face
ı machining. The blank is regarded as 0 radius
value. positive va1ue
-382-
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
CUT COND
Data ítem Meanín
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 is used for cutting. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than initial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- BOTH CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of
an end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is
used for initial cuttin .
E FEED RATE AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
the tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side
face being machined
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
M 1N1T1AL FEED OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the fırst cutting. The
initial value is 100 1 to 200, positive va1ue .
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
COPY
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitìal value.
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the
straight line tangent to the fırst fıgure
in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the
straight line norma1 to the fırst fıgure in
side face cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC]
is specifıed. radius va1ue, positíve value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnìtial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed.
The default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
[ARC] is selected for APPROACH TYPE.
COPY
- 383 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
- - -
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
Q ı ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along aп
aгc.
[TANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straight line tangent to the last figure
ı in side face cutting.
ı [VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straight line normal to the last fıgure in
side face cutting.
COPY
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] oг [VERTIC]
is specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified.
The default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when
[ARC] is selected for ESCAPE TYPE
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current
position to the machining start point,
the tool fırst moves in the machìning
p1ane in two-axis synchronous
operation and then moves along the
tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
posìtion to the machining start point in
three-axis synchronous operation.
-зя-ı-
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
TOOI path
1n-feed machining
in the tool radius
direction
Approach Retract
гю
1n-feed machining
in the tool aıás
directíon
The side-face contour of a machiníng profıle ís cut off.
The following tool path is created.
<12 The tool moves to above the approach start poínt.
<22> The tool moves to the heíght of the cuttíng surface.
<3> The tool cuts along the síde-face contour of the machiníng
profile.
The tool performs ín-fced machíníng in the tool radíus dírection untíl
the cuttíng allowance ín the tool radíus dírectíon ís removed.
<4> Steps <2> and <3> are repeated untíl the cuttíng allowance in the
tool axís dírectíon ís removed.
<5> The tool retracts.
1
ι
- 385 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
- Approach
First ín-feed
machíníng cydе
in the tool radíus
dírectfon
Cuttíng start point
Approech start point
C1earance Ct in the tool aıás dírectíon
Machiníng profıle top
surface heíght
Amount cu[ іп the
fırst ín-feed
madıíning cyde
in the tool aıás
dírectíon
<1> The tool moves to the posítíon machíníng profíle top surface
heíght + clearance Ct in the tool axís direction by rapid
traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the posítíon amount to be cut in the fırst
ín-feed machining cycle ín the tool axís direction - clearance Ct
in the tool axis direction at the feedrate Ftm specified for
movement in the tool axis dírection.
<3> The tool cut ín to the posítíon amount to be cut in the fırst
in-feed machíning cycle іn the tool axís d vectíon at the feedrate
Ft specífıed for cuttíng in the tool axís direction.
<4> The tool approaches, in the tool radíus dírectíon, the start point of
the fırst ín-feed machiníng cycle in the tool radíus dírectíon.
- Retraction
<1> The tool moves from the approach end point to the posítion
machíníng profile top surface heíght + clearance Ct in the tool
axis d vectíon at the feedrate Ftm specífıed for movement іn
the tool axís diτectíon.
- 386 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
- In-feed machiníng ín the tool radíus dírectíon
Fnishing
allona κe in th
tØ Øus
сігэc6ά
Cutting
a11oи пce in tne
tØ radíus
dírection
FrSt iri-
fвed
mØining
ιycle
SeØd іn,
feed
madıining
Thírd ináeed mactıíníng ,
1 Amount to Ьe
aıt in each in-
feed madıining
cyde in the tØ
`radius dґeιЬαı
Retraction from Øe wa11 at
the end of in-feed adlining
1 Feedrate IrI the tod radius diı Òоп singl
1
Start еnd en ints af tfıe first in-feed madıíníng cyde
they Øncide thís case
<1> The tool moves to cut along the contour from the fırst in-feed
machining cycle start poínt to the end point at the feedrate Fs
specífıed for síngle-edge thread cuttíng.
<2> The tool approaches, using the following method.
When the ín-feed machíníng start point coíncídes with the in-feed
machíníng end poínt:
The tool dírectly approaches the next ín-feed machíníng start poínt in
the norma1 dírectíon at the feedrate Fd specifıed for double-edge
thread cuttíng.
When the in-feed machíníng start poínt does not coіncіde wíth the
ín-feed machiníng end point:
The tool approaches the second ín-feed machíníng start poínt.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the contour of the machíning profıle
at the feedrate Fs specifıed for síngle-edge thread cutting.
<4> Steps <2> and <3> are repeated until the cuttíng allowance
cuttíng allowance in the tool radíus dírection - fmíshíng
allowance ís removed.
<5> The tool retracts.
t
-387-
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874ENl05
Outer Wa11 Bottom finish : G1061
lnner Wa11 Bottom finísh : G1065
Partíal Bottom finísh : G1069
, :
LOOL COND. CUT COHD. DETHIL
BOTTOH THICKNESS T=Г-
SIDE THICKNESS 5--Г
SIDE FINISH R90UNT KГ-
BOTTOM FINISH HHT. H Г
CüT DEPTH OE RADIUS L=FІ
FEED RRTE- F=Г
FEED RRTE- U= -
FEED RqTE - A IS E=Г
ЕY IH IHCH>
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, ít ís not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND
Data ítem Meanin
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face
machinin radius value, positive value
S S1DE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face radius value,
ositive value
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank
is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
H BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in sìde face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
Remark This data ìtem is used when machining is
to be performed with a sma11 amount of
cuttín allowance 1eft.
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut per sıde face machinıng operation ìn
the tool radius direction radius value, positive
value
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applıcable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 is used for cuttíng. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than initial ćuttin .
- 388 -
B-б3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
CUT COND
Data ítem Meanin
V FEED RATE- BOTH CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of
an end mi11 is used for cutting. Thís feedrate is
used for initial cuttin .
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
the tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side
i face being machined
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
COPY
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the
straight line tangent to the fırst fıgure
in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the
straight line normal to the fırst fıgure in
side face cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius wıhen [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC]
is specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed.
The default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[ARC] is selected for APPROACH TYPE.
COPY
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an
aгc.
[TANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straight line tangent to the last fıgure
in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straight line normal to the last fıgure in
side face cutting.
COPY
- 389 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-δ3874 E N/05
DETAIL
Data ítem_ Meanín _
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed
Straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC]
is specified. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitíal value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed.
The default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[ARC] is selected for ESCAPE TYPE.
COPY _
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current
position to the machining start point,
the tool fırst moves in the machining
plane in two-axis synchronous
operation and then moves along the
tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis s nchronous o eration.
- 390 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Too1 path
The bottom surface of the side-face contour of the machíníng profıle ís
fmished.
The following tool path is created.
1 ι, ц1 \
1n-feed гnachınıng
in the tooi radius
directíon
U
Retract `J Approach
1 1 Ч
<1> The tool approaches the approach start poínt of the machíníng
profıle.
<2> The tool moves to the bottom surface height of the machíníng
profıle.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the side-face contour of the
machiníng profıle.
In-feed machining in the tool radius directíon ís performed untíl the
cuttíng allowance in the tool radíus dírectíon ís removed.
<4> The tool retracts.
- 391 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
- Approach
/
Fírst in-feed
machiníng cycle in
1
the tool radíus
dírection \

Cuttíng start poínt
Ì
1
A pp oac h start po t
C1earance Ct in the tool axís dírection
Machiníng profıle top
surface heíght
Ftm
Machíning profıle
bottom surface
Ft heíght
<1> The tool moves to the position machíníng profıle top surface
heíght + clearance Ct ín the tool axís direction by rapid
traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the positíon machíning profile bottom surface
+ cuttíng allowance Vt in the tool axís dírectíon + cleaгаnce
Ct in the tool axís d vectíon at the feedrate Ftm specífıed for
movement in the tool axis direction.
<3> The tool moves to the machiníng profile bottom surface at the
feedrate Ft specified for cutting ín the tool axís d vectíon.
<4> The tool approaches, ín the tool radius direction, the in-feed 1
machíning start poínt in the tool radius direction.
;

1
- 392 -
B-6θ874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
- Retractíon
C1eaгaпce Ct in the tool aıós dírectíon
Machíníng profıle top
surface heíght \
1
ι <1> The tool moves from the approach end poínt to the position
machíning profile top height + clearance Ct in the tool axis
dírectíon at the feedrate Ftm specífied for movement in the
tool axis directíon.
ι In-feed machíníng in the tool radíus dírection
ι This movement is the same as for contouring roughíng .
See descriptíons about contouríng roughing for detaíls.
ι
ι
г
`
ь
ι
1
ι
г
k
L

ί
ι
- 393 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Outer Wa11 Side fínísh: G1062
1ппeг Wa11 Síde fínish : G1066
Partíal Síde finísh : G1070

IUOL CDND. DFTRIL.
SID THICKH S5 SјІ
SID FINISH flHUUNT K
HUIiBER UF FINISH7NG H4
FEED RRTE- F
PE D RNTE- U=i
FEED RATE - AКIS E=ј
ЕY 1Н NLRiERAI . CMM INCN
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
1 1NPUT TYPE [1NPUT] : lnputs a cutter compensation value
directly.
[REF.] : lnputs a cutter compensation number to
read a cutter compensation value by
that number.
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter posítive va1ue
Remark This item is indicated oп1y when [1NPUT]
ís selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
M CUTTER Cutter compensation number of an end miil
posítive value
Remark This ítem is indicated only when [REF.] ís
selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordínaríly sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín To01 Offset wíndow.
Therefore, ít is not necessary to display the tab
`TOOL COND.
3 Tab `TOOL COND. is not enabled when bít 3
CN3 of parameter No. 27040 = 1.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
S S1DE THICKNESS Cutting allowance in síde face fınishing radius
value, positive value
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Fíníshíng allowance of the síde face. The blank is
regarded as O. radius value, posítíve value
Remark This data item is used when machining is
to be performed wíth a sma11 amount of
cutting aílowance 1eft.
-394-
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
B NUMBER OF F1N1SH1NG Number of cuts for fınishing positive va1ue
Remark Depth of each cut = side surplus
thickness / number of finishin cuts
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 is used for cutting. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than initial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of
an end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is
used for initial cuttin .
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
the tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side
face being machined
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Pertorms machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Pertorms machining in down-cut
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
COPY
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
t machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
ι P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the
straight line tangent to the flrst figure
in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face aiong the
straight line normal to the fırst figure in
г side face cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC]
is specified. radius value, positive va1ue
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specífied.
The default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only vdhen
[ARC] is selected for APPROACH TYPE.
COPY
- 395 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
DETAIL _
Data ítem Meaning --11
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] Retracts from a side face along an
aгc. ı
[TANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straight line tangent to the last fıgure
in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straight line normal to the last fıgure in
side face cutting.
COPY
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC]
is specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifed.
The default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[ARC] is selected for ESCAPE TYPE.
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current
position to the machining start point,
the tool fırst moves in the machining
plane in two-axis synchronous
operation and then moves along the
tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis synchronous operation.
- 396 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Too1 path
The side-face contour of the machíning profile ís fmished.
The followíng tool path ís created.
I
r
ι
<1> The tool approaches a poínt above the approach start point.
<2> The tool moves to the bottom surface of the machining profıle.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the síde-face contour of the
machíníng profile.
In-feed machíníng is performed for the cuttíng allowance Vt ín the
tool radius directíon a specifıed number of fmíshíng cycles.
<42> The tool retracts.
- 397 -
i
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05

- AØroach
1


1
Cuttíng start poínt ĺ
Approach start poínt
Clearance Ct in the tool axis direction
Machining profıle top
surface height
Ftm
Ft
<1> The tool moves to the posítíon machíning profile top surface
height + clearance Ct in the tool axís direction Ьy rapid
traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the positíon machíning profıle bottom surface
+ finishing allowance Tt in the tool axis direction + clearance
Ct in the tool axís dírectíon at the feedrate Ftm specífıed for
movement in the tool axis directíon.
<3> The tool moves to the posítion machíníng profıle bottom surface
+ fmishing allowance Tt in the tool axis dírection at the
feedrate Ft specífıed for cutting ín the machíníng profile.
<4> The tool approaches, in the tool radíus dírectíon, the in-feed
machiníng start point in the tool radius directíon.
- 398 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
- Retraction
<1> The tool moves from the approach end poínt to the posítíon
machíníng profile top surface heíght + clearance Ct in the tool
axís direction at the feedrate Ftm specified for movement ín
the tool axis dírectíon.
- In-feed machíníng ín the tool radius dírectíon
Feedrate Fr specífied for cutting
іп the tool radius dírectíon
Overlapped length
Fina1 finíshing cyGe
Fírst finishing ηcle
VFeedra in tet h F e rmto o sp l r e a c d íf í i u e s d d fo ír r em ct o io v n eme
<1> The tool approaches the cuttíng start poínt in the tool radíus
directíon at the feedrate Fr specified for cuttíng in the tool
radíus díτectíon.
<2> The tool moves to cut along the contour from the fvst ín-feed
machíníng cycic start poínt to the fıтst ín-feed machíníng cycle
end poínt at the feedrate Fr specífied for cuttíng ín the tool
radius díтectíon.
<3> The tool retracts from the cuttíng end poínt ín the tool radíus
d vection at the feedrate Fr specífied for cutting in the tool
radíus dírectíon.
<4> The tool approaches the next ín-feed machiníng cycle start poínt,
using the specifıed [movement method for in-feed machíníng].
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated as many times as the requíred
number of fmíshíng cycles.
-399-
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPEs B-63874EN/o5
1
Outer Wa11 Chamfer : G1063
lnner Wa11 Chamfer : G1067
Partíal Chamfer : G1071
T OΠL C ND. Y1T COND.
ς1 łMFØ
EJECiIΠN STROKE łł=
FEED RRTE - RRDIUs F=
FEED RATE - RКIS E_Г
ЕУ IИ HUMERfäS. MM. INCН
λ
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
K TOOL SMALL DIAMETER Diameter of the tip of a chamferìng tool positive
L L va і u _
NOTE 1
1 Tab TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it ís not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
S CHAMFER Chamfer 1en h radius value, positive value
1 H EJECTION STROKE Dístance between the típ of a chamfering tool and
an actually cut posítion in the tool axis directíon
radíus value, роѕіtіvе value
F FEED RATE- RADIUS Feedrate applícable when cuttíng ís performed іп
the tool radíus dírectíon
E FEED RATE- AX1s Feedrate applicable when cuttíng ís performed in
the tool axís direction
D ETA1 L
Data item Meanín
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining ín up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwíse.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machiníng ín down-cut
mode, assumíng that the tool is
rotatíng clockwíse.
COPY
1
- 400 - 1

İ
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING

_ DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the
1 straight line tangent to the fırst fıgure
in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the
t straight line norma1 to the fırst fıgure in
side face cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC]
ìs specìfied. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed.
The default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
i [ARC] is selected for APPROACH TYPE.
COPY
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an
aгc.
[TANGENJ: Retracts from a side face along the
1 straight line tangent to the last fıgure
ι in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
i straight line normal to the last flgure in
side face cutting.
и COPY`
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specified.
Straìght line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC]
is specified. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified.
The default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when
[ARC] is selected for ESCAPE TYPE.
COPY
- 401 -
i
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
1
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : И1hen movíng from the current
posítion to the machining start poínt,
the tool first moves in the machiníng
p1ane in two-axís synchronous
operation and then moves along the
tool axis. ínitíal value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the ctirrent
posítíon to the machíníng start point ín
three-axís s nchronous o eratíon. 1
Too1 path


İ
<1> The tool moves to the posítion cuttíng start posítíon + clearance

Cг by rapid traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the posítíon amount to be chamfered C +
ejectíon stroke P at the feedrate F specified for cuttíng.
<3> The tool cuts in to the portion to be chamfered Ьy the cut depth
Dr in the tool radíus d vectíon at the feedrate Fd specífıed for
both-edge thread cuttíng.
<4> The tool cuts along the contour of the hole machining profile at a
the feedrate Fr specífıed for síngle-edge thread cuttíng.
<5> Steps <3> and <4> are repeated until on1y the finishing
allowance Tr in the tool radíus directíon ís 1eft uncut.
<6> The tool turns around the fmíshíng allowance Tr in the tool
radíus direction to perform finishing at the feedrate Ff specífied
for fmishíng.
<7> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-ín start posítíon + clearance
Cг by rapíd traverse.
- 402 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
ť
Fíxed Form Figure Blocks for Contouring XY P1ane

square: G1220 XY plane
Pos.ısτ2E
FIGURE TYPE T=CONVEX
BRSE POS1T10H B=
г HEIGNTıDEPTH L= 1
CENTER POINTCX H=і
CENTER POiNTtY іЈ=
LEH6TN FOR X RXiS І_Г
LEN6TH FOR Y H 1S W=
CORNER RfλD [ U5 R=i
AN6LE p=Г
EY IN NU11ERЯ S.
siZE
F Data ítem Meanin
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] Used as a figure for facing
1 [CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When contouring is selected as machining
type, select [CONVEX] if an outer fıgure ìs
1
to be machined; if an inner fıgure is to be
machined, select CONCAVE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the top surface oг the bottom of the

side face of a part to be subject to contouring in the
tool axis direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a vvorkpiece is selected as
the BASE POS1T10N, specify the dìstance to the
bottom of the side face by using a negative value
radius value . i Depth
When the bottom of a side face is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the dıstance to the top
surface of the Ørkpiece by using a positive value
radius value . Height
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of a rectangular
fı uгe
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center position of a rectangular
fi uгe
U LENGTH FOR X AX1S Length of the side in the X-axis direction radius
value, positive value
W LENGTH FOR Y AX1S Length of the side in the Y-axis direction radius
value, positive value
R CORNER RADIUS Radius for corner roundìn ositìve va1ue
A ANGLE 1nclination angle of a rectangular figure relative to
the X-axis ositive or ne ative value
- 403 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACH1NfNG TYPES B-г3874EN/05
Cìrcle: G1221 XY plane
иııs.ısιzE 1
FIGURE TYPE T COНVEК
BRSE POSITION B-,ľ
HE1GHCıDEPTH Lf
CENTER POIHT X Hf
CENTER POINT Y U=
RRDIUS Rf
EY I Н NUMERtäS.
POSJSIZE
Data item Meanin
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] Used as a fıgure for facıng
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When contouring is selected as machining
type. select [CONVEX] if an outer figure is
to be machined; if an inner fıgure is to be
_ machined, select CONCAVE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the top surface oг the bottom of the
side face of a part to be subject to contouring in the
tool axıs direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH И1hen the top surface of a workpiece is selected as
the BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the
bottom of the side face by using a negative value
radius value . - Depth
ИlYıen the bottom of a side face is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top
surface of the workpiece Ьy using a positive value
radius value . Height
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of a circular
fi uгe
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center position of a circular
fi uгe
ı
R RADIUS Radius of a circular figure radius va1ue, positive
value
- 404 -
8-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING

Track: G1222 XY plane

Pos. ısτzε
εıGURε тиPε т=Coиuεx
вдsε РVЅ Ј τ І oи
нεЈcиτıЈ εPτн ι=j i
CENTER POINT x н=Г
CENTER POINT Y u=1
ь HE7wEE3i DISTAHCE U=f
RNDlUS R=f
λН61Σ p=f

1
EY I H NINЕRt S.

POSJSІZE
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facìng
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When contouring is selected as machining
type, select [CONVEX] if an outer fıgure is
Γ to be machined; if an inner fıgure is to be
1 machined, select CONCAVE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the top surface oг the bottom of the
side face of a part to be subject to contouring in the
tool axis direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as
Γ the BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the
bottom of the side face by using a negative value
radius value . Depth
When the bottom of a side face is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top
surface of the иrorkpiece by using a positive value
radius value . > Height
H CENTER PO1NT X X cдordinate of the center position of the 1eft
semicircle
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center position of the 1eft
semicircle
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of the right and 1eft
semicìrcles radius value, positive value
R RADIUS Radius of the 1eft and right semicircles radius value,
sitive value
A ANGLE 1nclínation angle of a track fıgure relative to the
X-axis ositive or ne ative value
ŕ
- 405 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPEs в-sзвı4εи/0s
1
Fíxed Form Fígure Blocks for Contouríng YZ P1ane, XC
P1aпe
The same fixed-fıgure block types as for the XY plane explamed in
the previous subsectíon are avaílable for the YZ plane and the XC
p1ane polar coordínate ínterpolation plane . They aгe provided with
the followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ and XC planes ís the same as for the XY
p1ane except that the XY p1ane ís changed to the YZ or XC plane and
that the direction in whích the tool moves to cut ís changed to the
X-axís YZ p1аne oг the Z-axís XC p1аne .
square : G1320 YZ p1аne
square : G1520 XC p1аne , po1aг coordínate ínterpolatíon p1аne
Círcle : G1321 YZ p1аne
Círcle : G1521 XC p1аne , po1aг coordínate ínterpolatíon p1аne
Track : G1322 YZ p1аne
Track : G1522 XC p1аne , polar coordínate interpolation p1аne
NOTE
VVhen performíng machining polar coordinate
ínterpolation on the XC plane, note the followíng:
When bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0 ,
The mode needs to be switched to the po1ar ι
coordínate ínterpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífıcally, enter before the machining
type.
Enter for canceling polar coordinate
1
ínterpolation as required. ,
VVhen bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
G and G aгe automatícally output before
and after cycle machíníng, respectívely.

Í

- 406 -
B 63874EN 05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Arbitrary Figure Blocks for Contouríng XY P1ane
When an arbitrary fıgure for contouríng ís input, data such as a figure
type and machíníng reference positíon ís specified ín the start poínt block.
Other data items to be ínput such as a straíght líne Ød arc are exactly the
same as for arbitrary figures of other machining types.
So, thís subsectíon describes only the start point block of an arbítrary
figuτe for contouring.
For other arbitrary figures, see Chapter 5, DETAILED
DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES, in
Part II.
Start poínt: G1200 XY p1ane
І
EL6T Ыт 1
FI6lH2E TYPE T-Coнuεx
5iØ PO[НT
? STRRT PΠ1нT Y Y=Γ
1ØSE POS I T I Ø 2=
нЕ rлıEPTH ц=Γ
EY Н Nll1ERf 5.
ELEMENT
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facíng
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer figure for contouńng
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouríng and
emboss machining oг as a fıgure for pocketíng
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for groovíng
[OPEN] : Used when only oпe síde ís cut duńng
contouńng
Remark When contouríng is specífıed as a machíníng type,
one of [CONVEX], [CONCAVE], and [OPEN] must
Ьe selected.
X START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
Y START POtNT Y Y Ørdinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
Z BASE POS1T10N Z coordínate of the top surface oг the bottom of the síde face
of a part to be subect to contourin tool axis directíon
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of the side
face by using a negative value radius value . Depth
When the bottom of a side face is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top surface of the
vvork iece by uѕіnд a positive va1ue radius value . Hei ht
- 407 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
ELEMENT
Data ítem Meanín
P FIGURE [R1GHT] : The right side of an entered figure as viewed with
ATTRI6UTE respect to the directíon of movement is cut. initial
va1ue
[LEFT] : The left síde of an entered figure as víewed with
1
respect to the dírection of movement ís cut. ínitial
va1ue
Remark These items are dísplayed on1y when [OPEN] is
selected as a fi uгe type.
1

Ì
ι
1
1
- 408 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Arbítrary Fígure Blocks for Contouríng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane,
ZC P1ane, XA P1ane
The same arbitrary-figure block types as for the XY plane explained
in the prevíous subsection are available for the YZ p1ane, the XC
plane polar coordínate ínterpolation plane , ZC plane and XA plane
cylindrícal surface . Theír start points are specífıed wíth the
following G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC planes and XA plane is the
same as for the XY p1аne except that the XY plane ís changed to the
YZ, XC, ZC XA p1аne and that the dírectíon in whích the tool moves
to cut is changed to the X-axís YZ and ZC planes or the Z-axís XC
and XA plane .
Start poínt : G1300 YZ plane
Start point : G1500 XC p1аne, po1аr coordinate ínterpolatíon p1ane
Start poínt : G1600 ZC p1аne, cylindrical surface
Start poínt : G1700 XA p1аne, cylíndrical surface
NOTE
1 When performíng machíníng po1ar coordinate
interpolation on the XC plane, note the following:
When bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be swítched to the po1ar
coordínate interpolation mode beforehand.
Specífıcally, enter before the machíníng
type.
Enter for canceling polar coordínate
ínterpolatíon as required.
When bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
and aгe automatically output before
and after cycle machíníng, respectively.
2 When performing machíníng cylíndrícal
interpolatíon on the ZC and XA plane, note the
followíng:
When bít 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be switched to the cylindrical
coordínate ínterpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífıcally, enter C cylinder radíus before
the machining type.
Enter CO for canceling cylindrical
ínterpolatíon as required.
When bit 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
C cylinder radíus and CO aгe
automatícally output before and after cycle
machining, respectively.
3 The following parameter setting ís necessary to
execute XA plane cycle.
. , 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
- 409 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 8-63874EN/05
EMBOSS MACHINING
In the case of the contourmg, the tool cuts along the sıde-face contour
of the machíníng profıle and performs ín-feed machiníng in the tool
radius dírection. These tool passes sometímes generate many air-cut
movement as the following 1eft figııre.
So, the machíning called EMBOSS MACHINING CYCLE that can
reduce the av-cut passes as the followíng ńght figure ís prepared.
/, .` Í
,,.
. гі l.
іf ] г
+ . .. ,
i
NOTE
1 This function is avaílable when parameter
1
2 The parameters for the machining conditïons for
embossing cycles are same with the parameters for ,
pocketíng cycles. Ex. No. 27066
Machíníng Type Blocks for Emboss machíníng
Rough: G1080
I JOL COHD. CUT COHD. дЕTAіι 1
τioτтaм THτcкиεsS τ=
SIDE тнτCKиεss S=
CUT DEPTH UF RRDλUS L=
CUi DEP7H UF RXIS J=1
SIDE FINISH RHOUHT K=1
OTTOM FINISH RHτ. H
FEED RRTE- F=
FEED RATE- V=
FEED RATE- RXIS E=
CEY 1H HiN1ERALS. CtS1 i НСН
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 díameter
- 410 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordínarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
S S1DE THICKNESS Cuttìng allowance of the side face. The blank is
regarded as O. radius value, positive value
Remark When both the side surplus thickness and
bottom surplus thickness are omitted, an
entire pocket aгea is cut.
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face tool radius direction
er cutting o eration radius value, роѕіtіvе value
J CUT DEPTH OF AX1S Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting
o eration radius va1ue, роѕіtіvе va1ue
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is
re arded as O. radius value, positive value
H BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when on1y the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 is used for cutting. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than initial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for
initial cuttin -_
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
being machined
-.-
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
COPY
--1 1 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
+
DETAIL
Data item _ Meaníng
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the side face and a tool retract
position in the tool radius direction radius value,
positive value
Remark1 When oпe pocket cutting operation is 1
completed, the tool performs a retract
operation in the tool axis direction from
ı the side face of the pocket by this
clearance amount.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter İ
minimum clamp vaiue , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value. _
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : Vvhen moving from the current position I
to the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining plane in
two-axis synchronous operation and 1
then moves along the tool axis. initial
value 1
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current 1
position to the machining start point in
three-axis synchronous operation.

,
İ
1

1

Í

- 412 -
B- 3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Bottom Finish: G1081
TODL COND. CUT COND. DEГAIL 1
вDттoм тиІcкиεs τ s =W
SID FINISH QtIOiJHT к=
BOTTDH FIiHsH RitT. н=
CUT DEPTH DF RlλDIUs L=[
FEED RATE- Sıн F=Г
FEED RЯTE- ü=
FEED RATE- RXIS E=
1
Y Іи NLA RALS. CMM. lНCHλ
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter

NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordínarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
1
Therefore, it is not necessary to dísplay the tab
r TOOL COND.
1
CUT COND.
Γ Data ítem Meanín
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance at the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance of the side face. The blank is
re arded as O. radius value, positive value
H BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face tool radíus direction
M eг cutting o eration radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when on1y the one-side cutter
portion of an end mì11 is used for cutting. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than inìtial cuttìn .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for
initial cuttin .
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
1 being machined

м
- 413 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05

DETAIL - _--- -
Data item Meanin
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
COPY
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the side face and a tool retract İ
position in the tool radius direction radius value,
positive value
Remarkl When one pocket cuttíng operation is

completed, the tool performs a retract
operatíon in the tool axis direction from
the side face of the pocket by this
clearance amount.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
_ the data as Inìtial va1ue.
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Dìstance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp va1ue , the system sets 1
the data as lnitial va1ue.
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position r
to the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining plane in
1
two-axis synchronous operation and
then moves along the tool axis. initial
value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis s nchronous o eratìon.

İ

1
-41-3-
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Síde face finish: G1082
TOOL COHD. СUГ COHD. Dεтяτι
SIDE FINISH fltЮUNT K=W
BOTTOM FINISH RHT. H=Г
FEED RRTE- SIИ F=Г
FEED RRTE- V=
FEED RATE- R I5 E_
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
1 1NPUT [1NPUT] : lnputs a cutter compensation value directly.
[REF.] : lnputs a cutter compensation number to
read a cutter compensation value by that
number.
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter positive value
Remark This item is indicated only when [1NPUT] is
selected for 1NPUT.
M CUTTER Cutter compensation number of an end mi11 positive
va1ue
Remark This item is indicated on1y when [REF.] is
selected for 1NPUT.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dispiay the tab
TOOL COND.
3 Tab `TOOL COND. is not enabled when bit 3 PF3
ofparameter No. 27061 = 1.
cuT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance of the side face. The blank is
re arded as O. radius value, positive value
H BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when on1y the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate
ìs used for cutting in retract operation and on the side
face other than initial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mi11 is used for cuttìng. This feedrate is used for
initial cuttin .
- 415 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-6З874EN/05
CUT COND.
Data item Meanin
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
ı tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
being machined
DETAIL _
Data ítem 1 Meanin
w UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotatíng
c1 ockwi se.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
COPY
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank beìng
machined and a cutting start point point R in the tool
axìs direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the straight
line tangent to the fırst fıgure in side face
cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the straight
line пoгma1 to the first figure in side face
cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC] is
specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value ; the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified. The
default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is índicated only when [ARC]
s selected for APPROACH TYPE COPY
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] Retracts from a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straight line tangent to the last fıgure in
sìde face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straight line normal to the last fıgure in
side face cutting.
- 416 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
D ETA1 L
Data item Meanín
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radíus when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] oг [VERTIC] is
specifıed. radius value, positíve value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed. The
default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when [ARC]
is selected for ESCAPE TYPE. COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : VJhen moving from the current posítion to
the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining p1ane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.
г

1
г
ť
- 417 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
Chamfer: G1083
,.,
18 iL COHD. CUI cONn. ]oετAІι
C,NANFER fk10UNT S=Гй
EJECT[uН STROKE H=
FEED RATE - RAD11J5 F t
FEED RATE - RX1S E-
KEY IN N1A1ERiKS.CΓθ1+ lНCH>
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanín
K TOOL SMALL DIAMETER Diameter of the tip of a chamfering tool positive
value
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it ís not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL CON D.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
S CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfer 1en th radius value. positive value
H EJECTION STROKE Distance between the tip of a chamfering tool and an
actually cut position in the tool axis direction radius
value, positive value
F FEED RATE - RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool radius direction
E FEED RATE - AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction
DETAIL _
Data ítem Meanín

W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotatìng
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machiníng in down-cut mode,

assuming that the tool is rotatìng
clockwise. initial value
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cuttíng start point point R in the tool
ı axis directıon radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter I
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
- 418 -
в-s3в7aεNı0s CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
_ DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the straight
line tangent to the first fıgure in side face
cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the straight
line пoгma1 to the first fıgure in side face
cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [ТANGEN] oг [VERTIC] ìs
specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnítial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed. The
default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when [ARC]
is selected for APPROACH TYPE. COPY
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an arc.
[ТANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straight line tangent to the last fıgure in
side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straight line normal to the last fıgure in
side face cutting.
COPY
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [ТANGEN] oг [VERTIC] is
specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed. The
default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when [ARC]
is selected for ESCAPE TYPE. COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to
the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining plane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start poìnt in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.

1
-4]9-
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-6з8ı4εи10s
Arbitrary Fígure Blocks for Emboss machíníng XY P1ane
When an arbítrary fıgure for emboss machíníng ís input, data such as a
figure type and machiníng reference posítíon is specifıed in the start
point block. Other data items to be ínput such as a straight line and arc
are exactly the same as for arbítrary fıgшes of other machíníng types.
So, thís subsectíon describes on1y the start poínt block of an arbítrary
figure for pocketíng.
For other arbítrary fıgшes, see Chapter 5, DETAILED
DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES, ín
Part Il.
In creatíng the arbítrary figure for the emboss machíníng, create the
arbítrary fıgшes which aгe the outsíde boundary of the cuttíng area at
fast. After fıníshíng the outside boundary fıgшes, press [ISLAND]
soft key and create the arbítrary fıgшes whích are the coпtoш product
figure.
Start point: G1200 XY p1ane
.,
5TØT POINT Y Y=r
BFlSE POSITION Z=
HEIGHT/1 EPTH D=
EY 1H NUHERRL5.
ELEMENT
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a figure for facíng
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer figure for contouńng
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouńng and
emboss machining oг as a fıgure for pocketíng
[GROOVE] : Used as a figure for grooving
Remark When emboss machining ís selected as machining
Ьe sure to select CONCAVE .
X START PO1NT X X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
Y START PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of the start point of an arbitrary fı uгe
B вASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece subject to
pocketing oГ the bottom of a pocket ín the tool axis directíon
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of the side
face Ьy usíng a negative value radíus value . i Depth
When the bottom of the síde face is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specífy the distance to the top surFace of the
pocket Ьу using a posítíve value radius value . -+ Height
- 420 -
в-s3s74εиı0s CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Arbitrary Fígure Blocks for Emboss machiníng YZ P1ane, XC
P1ane, ZC P1ane, XA plane
ŕ
The same arbitrary-figure block types as for the XY plane explaíned
ín the prevíous subsectíon are avaílable for the YZ p1ane, the XC
plane po1ar coordinate ínterpolatíon plane , ZC plane and XA plane
cylindrical surface . Theír start points aгe specified wíth the
followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC and XA planes ís the same as
for the XY p1аne except that the XY plane ís changed to the YZ, XC,
ZC or XA plane and that the dírectíon ín whích the tool moves to cut
ís changed to the X-axís YZ and ZC planes or the Z-axis XC and
XA p1аne .
Start poínt : G1300 YZ plane
Start poínt : G1500 XC plane, polar coordínate ínterpolatíon p1аne
Start poínt : G1600 ZC p1аne, cy1іndrіca1 surface
Start poínt : G1700 XA p1аne, cylíndrícal surface
NOTE
1 VVhen performíng machíníng po1ar coordínate
ínterpolatíon on the XC plane, note the followíng:
VVhen bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be swítched to the polar
coordinate interpolation mode beforehand.
Specífıcally, enter before the machíníng
type.
Enter for cancelíng polar coordínate
interpolatíon as requíred.
When bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
and aгe automatícally output before
and after cycle machiníng, respectívely.
2 When performíng machíníng cylindrícal
ínterpolatíon on the ZC and XA plane, note the
following:
When bit 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be swítched to the cylíndrícal
coordinate interpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífıcally, enter C cylinder radius before
the machining type.
Enter CO for canceling cylíndrical
interpolatíon as required.
When bit 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
C cylinder radíus and CO are
automatícally output before and after cycle
machining, respectívely.
3 The following parameter setting ís necessary to
execute XA plane cycle.
, 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
- 421 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 8-63874EN/05
POCKETING
Machíníng Type Blocks for Pocketíng
Rough: G1040
TtXJL COHD. CUT COND. Лεтpτι
вOттoм тнІcκиεss т=Γ
SIDE τнıØиεss s=
CUT DEP TH OF RRDIUs L=
CН7 DÉPTH 0Г FlX1S J=Г
SIDE FINISH AMUUNτ κ
BOΓΓOM FINISH RNT. H=
FEED RATE- F-
FEED RATε- V=
FEED RpTE - flXTS E--1
EY IN NUMERЯLS.Cмм, NCH3
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meaníng _
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1. 1
2 The operator ordínarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it ís not necessary to display the tab
`TOOL COND.
_ CUT COND.
Data ïtem Meanin _
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
S S1DE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face. The blank ìs
regarded as O. radius value, positive value
Remark When both the side surplus thickness and
bottom surplus thickness are omitted, an
entire pocket area is cut.
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face tool radius direction
eг cutting o eration radius value, positive value
1 J CUT DEPTH OF AX1S Depth of cut in the tool axís direction per cutting
o eration radius value, positive value
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Fìnishing allowance on the side face. The blank is
re arded as O. radius va1ue, positive value _
H BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishìng allowance at the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
-422-
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
CUT COND.
Data item Meanín
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when on1y the one-side cutter
portíon of an end mi11 is used for cutting. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than initial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for
initial cuttin .
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
being machined
NOTE
When a non-zero va1ue is input for just one of the
data ítems, síde surpius thíckness and bottom
surplus thickness, cuttíng ís perFormed for the ínput
surplus thickness, and for the omítted surplus
thíckness, cutting operation ís not performed on the
assumption that the omitted surplus thíckness is O.
When non-zero vaiues are input for both the side
surplus thickness and bottom surplus thickness,
cutting ís performed for each surplus thickness.
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
w UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
COPY
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wa11 of a pocket and a tool
retract position in the tool radius direction radius
value, positive value
Remark1 When one pocket cutting operation is
completed, the tool performs a retract
operation in the tool axis directíon from
the side face uf the pocket by this
cleaгaпce amount.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machíned and a cutłing start point point R in the
tool axis dírection radíus value, positíve value
Remark By referńng to the parameter
mínímum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnítíal value.
- 423 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
DETAIL
Data í Meanin
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current positíon
to the machíning start poínt, the tool first
moves ín the machíníng plane ín
tv ro-axís synchronous operatíon and
then moves along the tool axis. initial
value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
posítíon to the machining start poínt ín
three-axis s nchronous o eratíon.
A CUT ANGLE Ang1e at whích the tool cuts into the pocket
oblíquely. The blank ís regarded as 0 degrees. in
one-degree ìncrements, positive value
Remark By perfomvng cuttíng also usíng the side
face of an end mi11, the load on the tool caп
Ьe reduced. COPY
P START AX1S 1st-aıás Ørdinate of the cutting start poínt of
pocketing. When omíttíng this ítem, also omít the
2nd-axís Ørdínate. 1n thís case, the coordinates of
the start point aгe determined automatically.
Remarkl The 1 st axis is the X-axis oп the XY
p1ane, the Y-axis on the YZ piane, the
X-axis on the XC p1ane, the Z-axis on the
ZC p1ane, or the X-axis on the XA p1ane.
Remark2 This item is enab1e when the parameter
No. 27060 7 PR7 = 1.
Q START AX1S 2nd-axis coordínate of the cutting start point of
pocketíng. When thís ítem ís omitted, the coordinate
ís determíned automatícally.
Remark1 The 2nd axis is the Y-axis on the XY
p1ane, the Z-axís on the YZ p1ane, the
C-axis on the XC plane, the C-axís oп the
ZC p1ane, or the A-axfs on the XA p1aпe.
Remark2 Thís item ís enable wtıen the parameter
No. 27060 7 PR7 = 1.
- 424 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
TOOI paÍI1
The insíde of a pocket machíníng profile ís cut off in a spíral manner.
The followín tool path ís created.
ι
Moгe than one ísland machíning profıle and more than one cavity
machíning profile can be defined for a pocket machíníng profile. The
ísland machíníng profıles are 1eft uncut.
The cavíty machining profiles are detoured so that they wí11 not be
cut.
The tool path is created ín such a way that an antícípated ínterference
wíth pocket machíníng profıles oг ísland machíníng profıles can be
avoided.
The created tool path ís effectíve because retractíon іn the tool axis
dírectíon is avoided as much as possible.
For thís tool path, ín-feed machíníng in the tool axís directíon ís
possíble.
Only specífıed cuttíng allowances can be cut of
The dírectíon of cutting can be eíther up-cut or down-cut. The
directíon of cutting ís controlled automatícally around íslands.
It is possíble to cut in from the ínsíde and outside of the machíníng
profıle.
If there is a portíon 1eft uncut at a corner, ít ís possible to
automatícally díscrímínate the uncut portíon аnd cut it off.
It ís possíble to cut ín at an arbítrary angle in the tool axis dírection.
It ís possíble to specífy an arbítrary position as a cuttíng start poínt.
It is possíble to determíne a cuttíng start poínt automatícally.
It is possíble to select a movement method for tool movement.
It ís possíble to control automatically a cut-ín depth on the island
machíníng profile top surface automatícally.
It ís possíble to set up cuttíng condítíons, such as fmíshíng allowance
for ísland machíníng profıles, for each island machíníng profile.

- 425 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
In the followíng pocket machiníng profile, whích has a pocket through
whích the tool can pass, the tool ís lífted automatically to cut on1y a
гange that can Ьe cut. _
If there ís moгe than one cut in the tool axís directíon, each range ís
cut completely before another.
A contour specífıed as an opeп element of a pocket machíníng profıle
ís cut off as shown below.
- 426 -
в-sзв74εNı0s CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Bottom Finísh: G1041
тOпι CUND. cUT COHD. дεтa τι
вOттOН тнτcкиεsτs=јј .
sІдε ετиІsн aМπuит к=1 .
вOTTOн rINISH 1T. H=І
CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS 1l
FEED ØTE- SIИ F=І
FEED RATE- +=l
FEED RY1TE - AX1S E_І
Y IN NWНЕRALS. Cł1n. 1НCH>
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance at the bottom of a pocket. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face of a pocket.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value
H BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom of a pocket. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face tool radius dírection
eг cutting o eratìon radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when on1y the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 ís used for cuttìng. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than initial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for
initial cuttin .
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
being machined
- 427 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES Bô3874EN/05
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
w UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating ciockwise.
COPY
B CLEARANCE OF RAD1Us Distance between the wa11 of a pocket and a tool
retract position in the tool radius direction radius
value, positive value
Remark1 When oпe pocket cutting operation is
completed, the tool performs a retract
operation in the tool axis direction from
the side face of the pocket by this
clearance amount.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position
to the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining plane in
two-axis synchronous operation and
then moves along the tool axis. initial
value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
positíon to the machining start point in
three-axis s nchronous o eration.
A` CUT ANGLE Ang1e at which the tool cuts into the pocket
obliquely. The blank is regarded as 0 degrees. in
one-degree increments, positive value
Remark By performìng cutting also using the side
face of an end mi11, the load on the tool can
be reduced. COPY
- 428 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
P START AX1S 1st-aıás Ørdínate of the cutting start point of
pocketing. When omíttíng thís ítem, also omit the
2nd-axís coordínate. 1n thís case, the coordinates of
the start φint are determined automatically.
Remark1 The 1st axis is the X-axís on the XY
p1ane, the Y-axis on the YZ plane, the
X-axis on the XC plane, the Z-axis on the
ZC p1ane, or the X-axis on the XA p1ane.
Remark2 This ítem is enable when the parameter
No. 27060 7 PR7 = 1.
Q START AX1S 2nd-axís Ørdínate of the cuttíng start φínt of
pocketing. When this item is omítted, the Ørdínate
ís determined automatícally.
Remark1 The 2пd axís ís the Y-axís on the XY
plane, the Z-axis oп the YZ p1ane, the
C-axis oп the XC p1ane, the C-axís oп the
ZC p1ane, or the A-axis on the XA p1ane.
Remark2 Thís ítem ís enab1e when the parameter
No. 27060 7 PR7 = 1.
ľ00І path
The bottom surface of a pocket machíníng profile ís fmíshed in a
spíral maпвeг.
The tool path for ít ís the same as for pocketíng roughíng .
See descńptíons about pocketíng roughíng for details.
No ín-feed machíníng in the tool axis d vection ís performed, though.
The top surface of ísland machíning profiles ís not cut off either.
- 429 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-δ3874EN/05
Side face fínísh: G1042
,
L CЛиì. cuτ cDND. DετA[ι 1
Dι ε іиіsн Anouит kf
τπм ґιиτsн aгн1 тi.
D ØTE- sI ,. CUT F=
D RRTE- Vжј
_D ØTE - AКIS E_
ї IN NUΓtERALs. MM, IFN3H
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanín
1 1NPUT [1NPUT] : lnputs a cutter compensation value directly.
[REF.] lnputs a cutter compensation number to
read a cutter compensation value by that
number.
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter positive value
Remark This item is indicated only when [1NPUT] is
selected for 1NPUT.
M CUTTER Cutter compensation number of an end mi11 positive
value
ı Remark This item is indicated on1y when [REF.] is
selected for 1NPUT.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
3 Tab `TOOL COND. is not enabled when bít 3 PF3
of parameter No. 27061 = 1.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meaníng _
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face of a pocket.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value
H BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom of a pocket. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 is used for cutting. Thıs feedrate
is used for cutting in retract operation and on the side
face other than initial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for
ìnitial cutting.
- 430 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
being machined
D ETA1 L
Data ítem Meanín
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwi se.
ι COPY
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the tool
axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
ь minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the straight
line tangent to the fırst fıgure in side face
cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the straight
line norma1 to the fırst fıgure in side face
cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC] is
specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp va1ue , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] ís specifıed. The
default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when [ARC]
is selected for APPROACH TYPE. COPY
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straight line tangent to the last fıgure in
síde face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straight line normal to the last figure in
side face cutting.
COPY

- 431 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-δ3874EN/05
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radíus when [ARC] ís specífıed.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] oг [VERTIC] is
specified. radíus value, positíve value
Remark By refemng to the parameter
mínimum damp value , the system sets the
data as lnítíal value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] ís specífied. The
default ís 90 degrees. posítíve value
Remark This data ítem ís índícated only when [ARC]
ís selected for ESCAPE TYPE. COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 ÃXES] : Vvhen moving from the current posítíon to
the machíníng start point, the tool fırst
moves ín the machining plane in two-axís
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. ínitíal value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machíníng start poínt in three-axís
s nchronous o eration.
Too1 path
The síde-face contour of pocket and island machíníng profiles ís
fmíshed. The tool path for ít ís the same as for contouríng side-face
fmíshíng .
See descriptions about contouríng síde-face fmíshing for detaíls.
The specíficatíons for the followíng poínts differ in part, though.
No in-feed machíning ís performed in the tool radius directíon or tool
axís dírectíon.
Even íf ít is antícípated that the tool may ínterfere with a pocket or
ís]аnd machiníng profile during fmíshíng, no tool path that can avoid
ínterference is created.
1
- 432 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Chamfer: G1043
TUOI.. COND. CLJI COND. DETAIL
CNRMFER tätΛUNT S=
EJECTION STROKE H=[
FEED RRTE - RADIUS F 1
FEED RRIE - Axλs E=1
KEY [н H1, INCN
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanin
K TOOL SMALL DIAMETER Diameter of the tip of a chamfering tool positive
value
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
S CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfer 1en th radius value, positive value
H EJECTION STROKE Distance between the tip of a chamfering tool and an
actually cut position in the tool axis direction radius
value, positive value
F FEED RATE - RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool radius direction
E FEED RATE - AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
V\/ UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
c1 ockvυi se.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise. initial va1ue
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the tool
axis direction radius value. positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
- 433 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B 63874EN/05
-DETAIL -- -_
Data ítem Meaning
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the straight
line tangent to the first fıgure in side face
cuttíng.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a síde face along the straíght
1ine norma1 to the first figure in síde face
cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radíus when [ARC] is specífıed.
Straíght line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC] is
specífied. radius value, positive value
Remark By referríng to the parameter
mínimum damp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc wtıen [ARC] ís specífıed. The
default ís 90 degrees. φsitive value
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when [ARC]
ís seiected for APPROACH TYPE. COPY
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straíght line tangent to the last flgure іп
side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straíght líne normal to the last fıgure in
side face cutting.
COPY
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specified.
Straíght line length when [TANGEN] oг [VERTIC] ís
specífied. radius value, φsítíve value
Remark By refemng to the parameter
minimum cIamp va1ue , the system sets the
data as lnitíal value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] ís specified. The
defauit is 90 degrees. φsitive value
Remark This data ítem is indicated on1y when [ARC]
ís selected for ESCAPE TYPE. COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 ÁXES] : When movíng from the current φsítíon to
the machining start poínt, the tool fırst
moves in the machining plane in two-axis
synchronous operatíon and then moves
along the tool axís. inítial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start φint in three-axis
s nchronous o ratíon.
Too1 path
The top surface of a wall of a pocket is chaØered. The tool path for ít
is the same as for contouríng chaØering .
See descríptíons about contouτing chaØeríng for details.
-434-
B-δ3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Fíxed Form Fígure Blocks for Pocketing XY P1ane
square: G1220 XY plane

Pos./sτгε
FlGURE TYPE T CONCRV
BRSE POSITION
HEIGHT/DEPTH L4-
CENTER P01ЫT x
CENTER POINT Y
u -
LENGTH FOR X RX1S
W=і _
LFNGTH FOR Y RX1S
CORNER RRDIOs
RNGLE
EY 1H NOMERRLS.

Data item Meanín
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring oг
as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When pocketing is selected as machining type,
Ьe sure to select CONCAVE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece subject to
pocketing or the bottom of a pocket in the tool axis
direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specífy the distance to the bottom of a
pocket by using a negative value radius value .
Depth
When the bottom of a pocket is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the dìstance to the top surface of the
pocket by using a positive value radius value .
Height
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of a rectan u1ar fl ure
V CENTER PO1NT Y coordinate of the center position of a rectan ular fı ure
U LENGTH FOR X Length of the side in the X-axis direction radius value,
AX1S роѕіtіvе va1ue
W LENGTH FOR Y Length of the side in the Y-axis direction radius value,
AX1S positive value
R CORNER RADIUS Radius for coгпeг roundin ositive value
A ANGLE 1nclination angle of a rectangular fıgure relative to the
X-axis ositive or ne ative va1ue
- 435 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Círcle: G1221 XY plane
іzі
POS. /Sızε
FIGIRE TYPE т= coиcRυ
ARSE POsITION B=Γ
HEIG7łT/DEPTH l-
CENTER POlHTК H і
CEнTεR POIHTČY> Ч4
RRDIUS R4
EY IN NUНЕRALS.

Data item Meanin
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a figure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouńng
[CONCAVE]: Used as an ínner fıgure for contouńng oг
as a figure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for groovíng
Remark When pocketing ís selected as machíning type,
be sure to select CONCAVE . i
B BASE POS1T10N Z Ørdinate of the top surface of a wогkpiece subject to
J
pocketing oг the bottom of a pocket in the tool axis
direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece ís selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of
a pocket Ьy using a negatíve value radius value .
Depth
When the bottom of a pocket is selected as the 13ASE
POS1T10N, specífy the distance to the top surface of the
pocket by usíng a positive value radíus value .
ł Hei ht
H CENTER PO1NT X X Ørdinate of the center position of a circular fı uгe
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of the center роѕіtіоn of a circular fi uгe
R RADIUS Radíus of a circular fi uгe radius value, positive value
ı
1
λ
ı
1
-436-
i
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Track: G1222 XY plane
нos. їsτzε
FIGIIRE TYPE T=
8A5E PβsITION 8=
CENTER P01NTCX> н=
CENTER PUINTCY> U=
8ETUЕEłλ DISTANCE u=
RADIUS R=
ANGIE A=
ELECT SаFT KEY.
FOs./ IZE
Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When pocketing is selected as machining
t e, be sure to select CONCAVE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece
subject to pocketing or the bottom of a pocket in the
tool axis direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as
the BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the
bottom of a pocket by using a negative value radius
value . Depth
When the bottom of a pocket is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top
surface of the pocket by using a positive value
radius value . > Hei ht

H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of the 1eft
semicircle
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center position of the 1eft
semicircle
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of the rìght and 1eft
semicircles radius value, positive value
R RADIUS Radius of the 1eft and right semicircles radius value,
ositive value

A; ANGLE 1nclination angle of a track fıgure relative to the
X-axis ositive or ne ative value

M
- 437 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-6з8ı4εи10s
Fíxed Form Fígure Blocks for Pocketíng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane
The same fıxed-figure block types as for the XY p1ane explained in
the previous subsection are available for the YZ plane and the XC
plane polar coordinate interpolatíon plane . They are províded wíth

the followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ and XC planes ís the same as for the XY
plane except that the XY p1аne is changed to the YZ or XC plane and
that the dírectíon in which the tool moves to cut ís changed to the
X-axis YZ p1аne or the Z-axis XC p1аne .
Square : G1320 YZ p1аne
Circle : G1321 YZ p1аne
Track : G1322 YZ p1аne
Square : G1520 XC plane, po1aг coordínate interpolatíon p1аne
Cігc1e : G1521 XC p1аne, polar coordínate interpolatíon p1аne
Track : G1522 XC p1аne, polaτ coordínate ínterpolation p1аne
NOTE
When performíng machíníng po1ar coordínate
interpolatíon on the XC p1aпe, note the followíng:
When bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be swítched to the po1ar
coordínate ínterpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífically, enter before the machíníng
type.
Enter for cancelíng po1aг coordínate
ínterpolatíon as requíred.
When bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
G and G aгe automatícally output before
and after cycle machíníng, respectívely.

1
1

1

- 438 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Arbitrary Fígure Blocks for Pocketing XY P1ane
When an arbitrary figure for pocketíng ís ínput, data such as a fıgure
type and machíníng reference posítíon is specifıed in the start point
block. Other data ítems to be input such as a straight líne and arc are
exactly the same as for arbítrary figures of other machiníng types.
So, thís subsectíon descríbes on1y the start poínt block of an arbítrary
fıgшe for pocketíng.
For other arbítrary fıgшes, see Chapter 5, DETAILED
DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES, in
Part II.
Start poínt: G1200 XY plane
,
ειεмεит ]
FIGURE TYPε т=fсонсnu
STRRT POINT X ^
STfUčT PUINT Y Y=f
I3R5 POSI T I ON 2=f
HEIGNT/DEPTH It=f
EY H HUMERALS.
ELEMENT
Data ítem Meanín
X START PO1NT X X Ørdinate of the start point of an аЊіtгагу fı ure
Y START PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the start роіпt of an arbitrary fi ure
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facíng
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouńng
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouńng oг as
a figure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for groovíng
Remark Иlhen pocketíng ís selected as machíníng type,
be sure to seiect CONCAVE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z Ørdinate of the top surface of a иrorkpiece subject to
pocketing or the bottom of a pocket in the tool axis
direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of a
pocket by using a negative value radius value . -> Depth
VVhen the bottom of a pocket is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top surface of the
pocket by using a positive value radius value . > Hei ht
- 439 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
lnput of 1sland :
After ínputtíng the outer wa11 figure of Pocket, the followíng screen ís
dísplayed by pushíng the soft-key [CREATE].


If there ís a ísland, push the soft-key [ISLAND] ín order to ínput the
ísland fıgure. The following START POINT screen ís dísplayed.
As to the ínput data ítem [FIGURE TYPE] ís set CONVEX
automatícally. When a outer wa11, ít ís set CONCAV .
After that, ínput the ísland fıgure as the same of a outer wa11 figure. İ
1
1
X
Z 1
C
ВН
Y ELĚИEHT ] 13. 1
FIGURĚ TYPE T=
sTARi P I1Hf _Г
STpR7 1 Π1uT Y Y= Э
BΛSE РО51 T I Ø 2 1 J
tETGItf/i t IiH D+;
1
ECT ìC ÉT 1h:Y.
i;і.1:1.CΓ sOFT KEY.
П] ГЕГі
Ωц з4 К ΠК C λF1гΣL 1
Ì
i
NOTE
As to the soft-key [NXTFIG], it is used in the case
of inputting the other pocket fıgure one after
another.

- 440 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Arbítrary Fígure Blocks for Pocketíng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane,
ZC P1ane, XA P1ane
The same aτbítrary-fıguτe block types as for the XY plane explained
ín the prevíous subsectíon are avaílable for the YZ p1ane, the XC
plane polar coordinate interpolation plane , ZC plane and XA plane
cylindrícal surface . Their start poínts are specífied with the
followíng G codes.
The Øta to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC аnd XA planes ís the same as
for the XY p1аne except that the XY plane ís changed to the YZ, XC,
ZC, or XA p1аne and that the directíon ín which the tool moves to cut
ís changed to the X-axís YZ аnd ZC planes or the Z-axís XC and
XA p1аne .
Start poínt : G1300 YZ plane
Start poínt : G1500 XC p1ane, polar coordínate ínterpolatíon plane
Start poínt : G1600 ZC p1ane, cylíndrícal surface
Start poínt : G1700 XA p1аne, cylíndrical surface
NOTE
1 When performíng machining po1ar coordinate
interpolation on the XC plane, note the following:
VVhen bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be swítched to the po1ar
coordinate interpolation mode beforehand.
Specifıcally, enter before the machíníng
type.
Enter for canceling polar coordinate
ínterpolatíon as requíred.
VVhen bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
and aгe automatícally output before
and after cycle machiníng, respectívely.
2 When performíng machíníng cylindrícal
ínterpolatíon on the ZC and XA plane, note the
following:
When bít 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be switched to the cylíndrical
coordínate ínterpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífıcally, enter C cylinder radíus before
the machining type.
Enter CO for canceling cylindrical
interpolation as required.
When bit 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
C cylínder radius and CO aгe
automatícally output before and after cycle
machining, respectívely.
3 The following parameter setting is necessary to
execute XA plane cycle.
. , 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
-441-
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-s3sı4εrvıo5
GROOVING
Machíníng Type Blocks for Groovíng
Roughíng: G1050
IOUL coND. Cш Ci HD. DετHІι
cuτ DEPTH OF RADτυs L=Γ
CUT DEPTH OF AXIS
SIDE FINISH RHOLдiT
вoттoМ FIHIsH AMT.
FEED RAIE-
FEED RRTE- V=
FEØ RλTE - RXIS E
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordínaríly sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it ís not necessary to display the tab
`TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data item Meanín
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face tool radius direction
eг cutting o eration radius value, positive value
J CUT DEPTH OF AX1S Depth of cut in the tool axis directìon peг cutting
o eration radius value, positive value
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance oп the side face. The blank is
re arded as O. radius value, positive value
H вOTTOM F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face
machining. The blank is regarded as O. radius
value, positive value
- 442 -
B-δ3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES [LL1NG
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 is used for cutting. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than inítial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for
initial cuttin .
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
being machined
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
W UP CUT/DOИM CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cutting
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cutting
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockиãse.
COPY
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wa11 of a groove and a tool
retract position in the tool radius direction radius
value, positive value
Remark1 When one groove cutting operation is
completed, the tool performs a retract
operation in the tool axis direction from the
side face of the groove by this clearance
amount.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : Wnen moving from the current position
to the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining plane in
two-axis synchronous operation and
then moves along the tool axis. initial
value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis s nchronous o eration.
- 443 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Too1 path

a
ı
1
,
The following tool path ís created to cut off the ínsíde of a groove
machíníng profile.
i ,
,
;

İ

1n-feed machiníng іп the tool radíus dírection О.
Approach Retract
1 1 Ч
-- г
1n-feed machiníng ín the
tool axís dírection
<1> The tool approaches a poírıt above the cutting start poínt of a
groove machiníng profıle.
- 444 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
<2> The tool cuts in the groove machíníng profıle in the tool radius
direction.
<3> The tool cuts in the groove machíníng profıle in the tool axís
d vectíon.
<4> Step <2> and <3> aгe repeated untíl the cutting allowance ís
removed.
<5> The tool retracts.
- Approach
OCuttíng staıt poínt
го
C1eaгaпce Ct in the tool
aıás direction
Amount to Ø cut ín the fırst in-feed
machíning cycle in the tool axis
dírectíon
Groove machining
proflle top surface
heíght
<1> The tool moves to the position groove machíníng profile top
surface height + clearance Ct in the tool axis d цection Ьy rapid
traverse.
<2> The tool cuts in by the amount to be cut in the fırst ín-feed
machíníng cycle in the tool axís dírectíon at the feedrate Ft
specífied for cutting in the tool axis dírectíon.
- 445 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
- Retract
C1earance Ct ín the tool axis
dírectíon
Groove machíníng profıle
bottom surface
heíghtdírection
<1> The tool retracts from the groove machíníng profıle bottom
surface heíght to the posítíon groove machíníng profile top
surface heíght + clearance Ct in the tool axis dírection at the
feedrate Ftm specifıed for movement ín the tool axís dírectíon.
-Ø6-
e-sзв7aεrυ0s CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Bottom face fínishing: G1051
JUJUL COND. СЫ Ct ND. Dεтяτι 1
DcЈττoH Тиτcкиεss τ=[^ј
1 sIDF FINISH λMФ1НT K=
BOTтOM FIHISH fł11T. H=І
CUT DEPTH OF RRDIUS t._
FEED RATE- F=І
FEED RATE- ц=
FEED RRTE - RXIS E=І
EY IN NUl Rf S. CHM. 1 НСН
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
1 D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter
ь NOTE
1
г 1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.

2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
T BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom of a groove. The
blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
` value
г
ι K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance of the side face. The blank
ь is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
H BOTTOM F1N1SH1 AMT. Finishing allowance of the bottom of a groove.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face tool radius direction
eг cutting o eration radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 ís used for cutting. This
feedrate is used for cutting in retract operatíon and
on the side face other than initial cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of
an end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is
used for initial cuttin .
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cuttìng is performed in
the tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side
face being machined
- 447 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
DETAIL
Data ítem Meaníng
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cutting
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockиàse.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cutting
mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
COPY
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wa11 of a groove and a tool
retract position in the tool radius direction radius
value, positive value
Remark1 When one groove cutting operation is
completed, the tool performs a retract
operation in the tool axis direction from the
side face of the groove by this clearance
amount.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value.
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnitial value. t
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position
to the machining start point, the tool fırst
moves in the machining plane in
two-axis synchronous operation and 1
then moves along the tool axis. initial
value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis s nchronous o eration.


- 448 -
B-δ3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Too1 path
The following tool path ís created to cut off the ínsíde of a groove
machíning profıle.
1
1n-feed machiníng іп the tooi
radíus direction
O
Approach Retract


.......-. r
<1> The tool approaches a poínt above the cuttíng start point of a
groove machíníng profıle.
<2> The tool cuts in the groove machíníng profıle in the tool radius
direction.
<3> The tool retracts.
-Ø9-
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
- Approach
Cutting start point
cleaгaпce Ct in the tooi aюs
direction
GØve Ftm ct + cutting a1loизпce in the
machining pm51e tooi aюs dírectíon
top surface
heíght GØve madıining profi1e
Øom surface height
<1> The tool moves to the posítíon groove machíníng profıle top
height + clearance Ct in the tool axís dírectíon by rapíd
traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the positíon groove machíníng profile bottom
surface heíght + clearance Ct in the tool axís dírection at the
feedrate Ftm specífied for cuttíng in the tool axis dírection.
<3> The tool cuts in to the heíght of the groove machíníng profıle
bottom surface at the feedrate Ft specifıed for cutting in the tool
axís d vectíon.
- Retract
C1eaгапce Ct in the tooı axıs
directíon
<1> The tool retracts from the heíght of the groove machíníng profile
bottom surface to the posítíon groove machíníng profile top
surface height + clearance Ct іn the tool axís dírectíon at the
feedrate Ftm specífied for movement in the tool axís dírectíon.
- In-feed machíníng in the tool radíus dírectíon
This operation ís the same as groovíng roughíng .
See descńptíons about grooving roughing for detaíls.
- 450 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Síde face fíníshing: G1052
Ю Іі
TΠΠL COND. C1Л COND. ]DETAIL
SIDE THICKNESS 5Ж[ј
S[DE FIN1sH AMπUНT K=
NUMBER 0F FIN[SH1NG B
FE D RRTE- S[NG. Ć:UT F=1
FEED RAIE- V-
FEED RFlTE - AКIS E
EY IN Hц1ERAL5. C1β1, INCH>
TOOL cOND.
Data ítem Meanín
1 1NPUT [1NPUT] : lnputs a cutter compensation value directly.
[REF.] : lnputs a cutter compensation numЬeг to
read a cutter compensation value by that
number.
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter positive value
Remark This item is indicated on1y when [1NPUT] is
selected for 1NPUT.
M CUTTER Cutter compensation number of an end mi11 positive
value
Remark This item is indicated on1y when [REF.] is
selected for 1NPUT.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordínarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
Γ 3 Tab `TOOL COND. is not enabled when bít 3
GF3 of parameter No. 27081 = 1. f
cuT COND.

Data ítem Meanín
S S1DE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face The blank is
re arded as O. radius value, positive value
K S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance of the side face. The blank is
гe aгded radius value, positive value
B NUMBER OF F1N1SH1NG Number of cuts for fınishing positive va1ue
Remark Depth of each cut = side surplus
thickness / number of finishin cuts

1 - 451 -
1

1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
F FEED Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter
portion of an end mi11 is used for cutting. Thís feedrate
is used for cuttìng in retract operation and on the síde
face other than initíal cuttin .
V FEED RATE- Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an
end mi11 is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for
initial cuttin . _
E FEED RATE- AX1S Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the
tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side face
being machined
DETAIL
Data ítem Meaníng
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] Performs machining in up-cutting mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cutting
mode, assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwi se.
COPY _ _ __
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the tool
axis direction radius va1ue, positive va1ue
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the straight
line tangent to the flrst figure in side face
cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the straight
line norma1 to the fırst fıgure in side face
ı cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [ТANGEN] or [VERTIC] is
specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value . the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed. The
default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when [ARC]
is selected for APPROACH TYPE. COPY
- 452 -

B-63874ENl05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
DETAIL
Data í Meanín
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a síde face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Retracts from a síde face along the
straíght 1ine tangent to the last fıgure ín
side face cuttíng.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a síde face along the
straíght line norma1 to the last fıgure in
síde face cuttíng.
COPY
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] ís specífıed.
Straíght 1ine length when [ТANGEN] oг [VERTIC] ís
specifıed. radíus value, positive value
Remark By refemng to the parameter
minimum damp value , the system sets the
data as lnítíal value.
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed. The
default is 90 degrees. posítíve value
Remark Thís data ítem ís índicated oп1y when [ARC]
is selected for ESCAPE TYPE.
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When movíng from the current position to
the machiníng start poínt, the tool fırst
moves in the machíníng plane in two-axis
synchronous operatíon and then moves
along the tool axis. ínítíal value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start poínt ín three-axis
s nchronous operation.
Too1 path
The síde-face contour of a groove machíníng profile is fmíshed.
The tool path for ít ís the same as for contouríng síde-face finishing .
See descríptíons about contouríng síde-face fmíshíng for details.
- 453 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/o5
Chamfer: G1053
ГдOL C.ΠND2CUT COND. ІDfΣ:1A71. Ì
CNRHFER RMOUNT
EJECTION STRФCE H-
FEED RNTE - RRD[US F=
FEED RATE - AКіS E_І
IN 1p1MER k 1 IНСH7
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
K TOOL SMALL DIAMETER Díameter of the tip of a chamfering tool positive
value
NOTE
1 Tab TOOL COND. is enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordínarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Too1 Offset wíndow.
Therefore, ít ís not necessary to display the tab
`TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data item Meanín
S CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfer 1en h radíus value, роѕіtіvе value
H EJECTION STROKE Dístance between the tip of a chamfeńng tool and an
actually cı.ft posítíon in the tool axis direction radius
va1ue, positive value
F FEED RATE - RADIUS Feedrate applic,able when cuttíng ís performed ín the i
tool radius dírection 1
E FEED RATE - AX1S Feedrate appiicabIe when cutting ís performed ín the
tool axis direction
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cutting mode,
assuming that the tool is rotating
dockwíse.
[DWNCUT] : PerForms machíníng in down-cutting
mode, assuming that the tool is rotating
clockwìse.
COPY

- í l-
łı
`
1ι
`
Γ
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance betvveen the surface of a blank being

machined and a cutting start point point R in the tool
axis direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
1 minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value.
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN]: Approaches a side face along the straight
line tangent to the fırst fıgure in side face
cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the straight
line norma1 to the first fıgure in side face
cutting.
COPY
R APPROACH RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specifıed.
Straight line length when [ГANGEN] oг [VERTIC] is
specifıed. radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitiat value.
A APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed. The
default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when [ARC]
is selected for APPROACH TYPE. COPY
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an arc.
[ГANGEN]: Retracts from a side face along the
straight line tangent to the last fıgure in
side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the
straight line normal to the last figure in
side face cutting.
COPY
X ESCAPE RAD./D1ST. Radius when [ARC] is specìfıed.
Straight line length when [ГANGEN] oг [VERTIC] is
specifıed. radìus value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as lnitial value
Y ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specifıed. The
default is 90 degrees. positive value
Remark This data ıtem is indìcated only when [ARC]
is selected for ESCAPE TYPE. COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to
the machining start point, the tool first
moves in the machining p1ane ìn two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves
along the tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position
to the machining start point in three-axis
s nchronous o eration.
- 455 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Too1 path
The top surface of a wa11 of a groove ís chamfered. The tool path for ít
ís the same as for contouring chaØeríng .
See descńptíons abut contouring chaØeríng for details.
1
;

-456-
в-s3в7aεNı0s CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Fíxed Form Figure Blocks for Groovíng XY P1ane
As fixed form fıgures for groovíng, a square , circ1e , track , and
radial grooves are aуaіlaЬle. When any of these pattern figures is
specífied, a groove wíth a specífıed width is cut along the contour.
NOTE
Each of a square , círcle , and track is a closed
fıgure. 1n actual grooving, sets of a start point and
end point are determíned, and cuttíng from the start
point to the end point of a set ís repeated.
square: G1220 XY p1ane

Pos. ısı2Е ]
f1GURE тYPE T=GROOVE
вдsε Øτтτoм
HFIGHI/DEPIH L[
CENTER POINT X H=[
CENTER POlЧT Y V=[
LENGTH FOR qX1s U=[
LENGTH FOR Y AXIs U=[
CORNER RADIUS R=
FłNGLE R=[
GROOVE ЧIDTH D=[
EY 1N HLM1ER/в S.

Data ítem Meanín
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketìng
[GROOVE] : Used as a figure for grouving
Remark Иlhen grooving ìs selected as machining
type, be sure to select GROOVE .
B вASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the top surface oг the bottom of the
side face of a part to be subject to contouring in the
tool axis direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH VVhen the top surface of a workpiece is seiected as
the BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the
bottom of the side face by using a negatìve value
radius value . > Depth
When the bottom of a sìde face is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top
surface of the workpiece by using a positive value
radius value . > Height
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of a rectangular
fi uгe
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y Ørdínate of the center position of a rectangular
fı ure
U LENGTH FOR X AX1S Length of the side in the X-axis direction radius value,
ositive value
- 457 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
POS./S1ZE
Data ítem Meanín
W J LENGTH FOR Y AX1S Length of the side in the Y-axis direction radìus value,
sitive value
R 1 CORNER RADIUS Radius for corner roundin ositive value
A ANGLE 1nclínation angle of a rectangular figure relative to the
X-axis sitive oг ne ative value
D GROOVE W1DTH Groove width radius value, positive value
- 458 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Círcle: G1221 XY plane
POs. sıZE
rIGORE TYPE T=GROOVE
HASE PQSITION H=
HEIGHTıDEPTH L=[
CENTER PΠ1НT Xl H=f
CENTER PO НT Y Џ=[
RRDIUS R=I
GROiJVE UtDTH D=j
Y 1 Н NtЈііЕRfц.S.
FOS.іSIZE
Data ítem Meanin
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouńng
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner fıgure for contouring
oг as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When grooving is selected as machining
type, Ьe sure to select GROOVE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top
1 surface of a workpiece subject to grooving in the
tool axis dìrection
L HEiGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as
the BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the
bottom of the groove by using a negative va1ue
radius value . > Depth
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top
surface of the groove by using a positive value
radius value . Hei ht
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of a circular
fı ure
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center position of a circular
fı uгe
R RADIUS Radius of a circular fıgure radius value, positive
va ue
D GROOVE W1DTH Groove width radius value, positive value
- 459 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING IYPES B-63874EN/05
Track: G1222 XY plane
Pos. /sızε
FIGLJRE TYPE
UASE PiλS τ τ[ oи
нετ sнτ/Øгтн
CENTER PПINT X
CENIER POINT Y
BETUEEN Iц,S7í
RRDIUŚ
RNGLE
GRODVE UIDTH
POSЈSІZE
Data ítem Meaníng
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a fıgure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer fıgure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an inner figure for contouring or
as a fıgure for pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a fıgure for grooving
Remark When grooving is selected as machining type,
Ьe sure to select GROOVE .
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top
surface of a workpiece subject to grooving in the tool
axis direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH \Nhen the top surface of a Ørkpiece is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of
the groove by using a negative value radius value .
> Depth
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top surface of the
groove by using a positive value radius value .
э Height _
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of a 1eft semicircle
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordinate of the center position of a 1eft semicircle
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of the ríght and 1eft
semicircles radius value, positive value
R RADIUS Radìus of the 1eft and right semicircles radius value,
ositive value
A` ANGLE 1nclination angle of a track fıgure relative to the X-axìs
ositive or ne ative value
D GROOVE W1DTH Groove width radius value, positive value
- 460 -
Bfi3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Radíal grooves: G1223 XY plane
POs.ısτaε јRϊΓ[Aт
вasε POsiIiON вή
HEl6HTıDEP7H Lm
CEHTER P0IКTCX> H=ІІ
CENTER POINTCY> Ø
BEIWEEN DISTfäCE
6R00VE WIDTH Df
6RU0VE RN6LE E=
RRDIUS R=ј
START AN6LE
ЊЕУ τ и и я+ERtв s.
POs./s1ZE
Data ítem Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface of
a Ørk iece sub ect to grooving іп the tool axis direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH V\then the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of the
groove by using a negative value radius value . Depth
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top surface of the
groove by using a positive va1ue radius value . + Height
H CENTER PO1NT X X coordinate of the center position of a circle where radìal
rooves are placed
V CENTER PO1NT Y Y coordínate of the center position of a circle where radial
rooves are placed
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of two semicircles along a
radial groove in a track fı ure radius value, positive value
D GROOVE W1DTH Wıdth of a radial groove radius value, positive value
E GROOVE ANGLE Groove inclination angle in an arc where radìal grooves are
laced, in the radial direction ositive or ne atíve value
R RADIUS Radius of an arc where radial grooves are placed radius
value, positive value
A START ANGLE Center angle of the fırst groove position relative to the
X-axis ositive or ne ative value
REPEAT
Data ítem Meanín
C P1TCH ANGLE Center angle formed by two adjacent grooves positive or
ne ative value
M BROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut ositive value
- 461 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-б3874EN/05
,3 Fíxed Form Fígure Blocks for Groovíng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane
The saine fixed-figure block types as for the XY plane explained in
the prevíous subsectíon are avaílable for the YZ plane and the XC
plane po1aг coordinate ínterpolation plane . They aгe provided with
the followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ and XC planes is the same as for the XY
plane except that the XY p1ane is changed to the YZ or XC p1аne and
that the d vectíon in whích the tool moves to cut ís changed to the
X-axís YZ plane oг the Z-axís XC plane .
square : G1320 YZ p1аne
Circle : G1321 YZ p1аne
Track : G1322 YZ p1аne
Radíal groove : G1323 YZ p1аne
Square : G1520 XC p1аne, po1aг coordínate ínterpolatíon p1аne
C цcle : G1521 XC p1ane, polar coordinate ínterpolation p1аne
Track : G1522 XC p1аne, polar coordinate interpolatíon p1аne
Radíal groove : G 1523 XC p1аne, polar coordínate ínterpolatíon plane
NOTE
When performíng machining po1aг coordinate
ínterpolation on the XC p1ane, note the following:
VVhen bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be switched to the polar
coordínate ínterpolation mode beforehand.
Specífically, enter before the machiníng
type.
Enter for canceling po1aг coordinate
interpolation as required.
When bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
G and G aгe automatícally output before
and after cycle machíníng, respectívely.
- 462 -
в-s3вı4εи1o5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Arbitrary Fígure Blocks for Groovíng XY P1ane
When an arbítrary figure for groovíng ís ínput, data such as a iigure type
and machíníng reference posítíon is specífıed in the start point block.
Other data ítems to be ínput such as a straíght líne and arc are exactly the
same as for arbitrary figшes of other machíníng types.
So, thís subsection descńbes only the start poínt block of an arbitrary
figшe for pocketíng.
For other arbítrary figures, see Chapter 5, DETAILED
DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGUREs , ín
Part II.
When an arbítrary figure ís specífıed for groovíng, a groove wíth a
specífled width ís cut along the aτbіtτarу fıgwe 1íne.
Start poínt: G1200 XY p1ane
.,
ELEMEHT
FiGURF TYPE τ-cкooυε
sтØт иoτит x x=
sTRWT PLHNT Y и=
;τэHsε Posτττoи z
ıι> NEIGHT/D PTH D=
2oUЏε WiDTH W
Y I N NUHERf S.
ELEMENT
Data item Meanín
X START PO1NT X X Ørdínate of the start point of an arbitrary fi ure
Y START PO1NT Y Y Ørdinate of the start point of an arbitrary fi ure
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a figure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer figure for contouring
[CONCAVE]: Used as an ínner figure for contouring oг as a
figure for pocketíng
[GROOVE] : Used as a figure for groovíng
Remark When groovíng ís selected as machíning type, be
sure to select GROOVE .
B l3ASE POS1T10N Z Ørdinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface of
a иrork іece sub ect to gгооvіпg in the tool axis dírectíon
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpíece ís selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specífy the dístance to the bottom of the
groove by usíng a negatíve value radíus value . > Depth
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specífy the distance to the top surface of the
roove by using a posítíve value radius value . Hei ht
D GROOVE WlDTH Groove width radíus value, positive value
- 463 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
1
Arbítrary Figure Blocks for Groovíng YZ P1ane, XC P1ane, ZC
P1ane, XA P1ane
The same arbitτary-fıgure block types as for the XY plane explained
in the previous subsection are avaílable for the YZ plane, the XC
p1аne po1аr coordínate ínterpolation plane , ZC p1аne and XA p1аne
cylindrical surface . Their start poínts aгe specífıed with the
followíng G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC, XA planes is the same as for
the XY plane except that the XY p1аne ís changed to the YZ, XC, ZC
oг XA p1аne and that the directíon in whích the tool moves to cut is
changed to the X-axis YZ and ZC planes oг the Z-axis XC and XA
plane .
Start poínt : G1300 YZ p1аne
Start poínt : G1500 XC p1аne, po1аr coordínate interpolatíon plane
Start poínt : G1600 ZC p1аne, cylindrical surface
Start poínt : G1700 XA plane, cylíndrical surface
NOTE
1 \Nhen performíng machíníng po1ar coordinate
interpolation on the XC p1aпe, note the following:
When bít 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be switched to the po1ar
coordínate interpolation mode beforehand.
specifıcally, enter before the machining
type.
Enter for canceling polar coordínate
ínterpolation as required.
VVhen bit 2 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
and aгe automatícally output before
and after cycle machiníng, respectívely.
2 When performíng machining cylindrical
interpolatíon on the ZC and XA plane, note the
following:
When bít 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 0
The mode needs to be swítched to the cylíndrícal
coordínate interpolatíon mode beforehand.
Specífically, enter C cylínder radíus before
the machining type.
Enter CO for canceling cylíndrical
interpolation as required.
When bít 3 of parameter No. 27000 = 1
C cylínder radíus and CO are
automatícally output before and after cycle
machining, respectively.
3 The followíng parameter settíng ís necessary to
execute XA plane cycle.
. , 27003 1=0 and 27003 0=0
- 464 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
C-AX1S GROOVING
1 Machíning Type Blocks for C-axís Groovíng
Roughing: G1056
TOOL COND. CUT COND.
CUT DEPTH OF fłx15 J=јІ
FEED RATE - RNDIUS F=j
FEED RЧTE - A IS E_І -
CIERRλNCE OV QXIS C=l -
APROCH ΓІІЈTIOЫ 2=2 RКES H0U
EY IN HUłіЕRi S. MM. INCH>
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
D TOOL DIAMETER End mi11 diameter
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27002 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
J CUT DEPTH OF AX1S Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting
operation. By default, one cutting operation is
used. radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE- RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in
the side face direction of the end mi11
E FEEDRATE - AX1S Feedrate applicable when cuttìng is performed in
the tool axis direction toward the bottom of a side
face being machìned
C CLEARANCE OF AX1S Distance between the surface of a blank being
machined and a cutting start point point R in the
tool axis direction radìus value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as lnìtial va1ue.
- 465 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
CUT COND.
Data ítem ; Meaníng
APROCH MOT10N [2 AXES] : When moving from the current
position to the machining start point.
the tool fırst moves in the machining
p1aпe in tиro-axis synchronous
operation and then moves along the
tool axis. initial value
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current
position to the machining start point in
three-axis svnchronous operation.
- 466 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Fígure Blocks for C-axis Groovíng and A-axís Groovíng
As C-axís groovíng fıgures, a C-axís groove on the polar coordínate
plane XC plane , X-axís groove on the po1ar coordínate plane XC
plane , C-axís groove on the cylindrical surface ZC p1Øe , A-axís
groove on the cylíndrícal surface XA plane , Z-axís groove on the
cylíndrícal surface ZC plane and X-axís groove on the cylíndrical
surface XA plane are available. When any of these figures ís specified,
a groove with the díameter as large as the end Ø1 díameter ís cut.
In C-axís groovíng, ín-feed cuttíng ín the tool aхіs d vectíon ís perfoØed,
but ín-feed cuttíng ín the width d vectíon ís not performed.
NOTE
C-axís groovíng uses neíther polar coordinate
ínterpolatíon nor cylinder ínterpolatíon. So, it ís
unnecessary to switch to the po1ar coordínate
ínterpolatíon or cylínder ínterpolatíon mode.
- 467 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
C-axís groove: G1570 XC p1aпe, end face
PΠS.,SIZE R PEfłT ı
BASF POSIIION B=Γ
HEI6HIıDEP1H L-
x AXIS P05. CRAD. 1 x=
GR ОVE ANØE ø-1^а
STØT iłN6LE
IN UR 5.
On the end face of a workpiece, cіτculaг grooves aгe cut by rotatíng the
C-axís wíth the X-axís posítíon of the tool fixed. Multiple grooves of the
same fıgшe can be cut.
POs./S1ZE
Data ítem Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top
surface of a иrorkpiece subject to grooving in the tool
axis dírection
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of
the groove by using a negative va1ue radius value .
-- Depth
Wrien the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top surtace of the
groove by using a positive value radius va1ue .
Hei ht
X X AX1S POS. RAD. X coordinate of the center line of a groove radius value
Q GROOVE ANGLE Center angle formed by the start point tool center and
end point tool center of a groove positive or negative
value
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point tool center of the fırst
roove
REPEAT
Data ítem Meanín
C P1TCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points tool centers of
two ad acent grooves ositìve or ne ative value
M` GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut positive value
- 468 -
B-s3в7aEN/o5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
X-axís groove: G1571 XC p1aпe, end face
POS./SI2E REPERT
BRSE POSITION 8
HEIGHTıØPTH L=
К RXIS POS.ťRRD. X
GROOVE LENGTH P=
STRRT R JGLE R=r
jkEY IN NIRЕRRLS.
On the end face of a workpíece, radia1 grooves are cut by movíng the tool
in the X-axis directíon wíth the C-axis position fıxed. Multíple grooves of
the same figure cØ Ьe cut.

Data ítem Meanín
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface
of a workpiece subject to grooving in the tool axis
direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH VVhen the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of the
groove by using a negative va1ue radius value . -> Depth
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top surface of the
roove by using a positive value radius value . Hei ht
X X AX1S POs. RAD. X coordinate of the start point of a groove radius value
P GROOVE LENGTH Distance between the start point tool center and end
point tool center of a groove radius value,
ositive/ne ative value
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point tool center of the fırst
roove
REPEAT
Data ítem Meanin
C P1TCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points tool centers of
two ad acent grooves ositive or ne ative value
м GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut positive value
- 469 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
C-axís groove: G1670 cylíndrícal surface
Øs. ısτ2ε аεØaт
sRSE POsτ τ 10 i в=
нειGεпıВεPτн L
Z Rxıs Pns. z
GROØ RNGLE Q і
STRRT RNGLE R
EY і Н НПlRЯІs.
On the peńpheral surface of a workpíece, grooves are cut by rotatíng the
C-axis with the Z-axís positíon of the tool fixed. Multíple grooves of
same fıgшe can be cut.
_
Data ítem Meaníng
B BASE POS1T10N X coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top
surface of a workpiece subject to grooving in the tool
i axis direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH \Nhen the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the bottom of
the groove by using a negative value radius value .
> Depth
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE
POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top surtace of the
groove by using a positive value radius va1ue .
> Height
Z Z AX1S POS. Z coordinate of the center line of a groove
Q GROOVE ANGLE Center angle formed by the start point tool center and
end point tool center of a groove positive or negative
va1ue
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point tool center of the fırst
roove
REPEAT _
Data ítem Meaníng
C` P1TCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points tool centers of
two ad acent grooves ositive or negative value
M GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut positive value
- -37O -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Z-axís groove: G1671 cylindrical surface
On the peńpheral surface of a workpíece, straíght grooves are cut by
moving the tool in the Z-axís dírectíon with the C-axís posítion fixed.
Multíple grooves of the same figure can be cut.
POs./s1ZE
Data ìtem Meanín
B BASE POS1T10N X coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top
surface of a workpiece subject to grooving in the
tool axis direction
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as
the BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the
bottom of the groove by using a negative value
radius value . > Depth
VVhen the bottom of a groove is selected as the
BASE POS1T10N, specify the distance to the top
surface of the groove by using a positive value
radíus value . -+ Hei ht
Z Z AX1S POS. Z coordinate of the start point of a groove
P GROOVE LENGTH Distance between the start point tool center and
end point tool center of a groove radius value,
osìtive/ne ative value
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point tool center of the fırst
roove
REPEAT
Data ítem Meanin
C P1TCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points tool centers
of two ad acent grooves ositive or ne ative value
M GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut ositive value
- 471 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
REAR END FACING BY M1LLING
Rear End Facíng
By settíng bit 4 of parameter No. 27000 to 1, the ínput ítem FACE
POSITION is dísplayed on the fıgure menu for mílling below. By
enteríng this data, rear end facíng is enabled.
1. Arbitrary-fıguτe XY plane - Start poínt : G1200
2. Ho1e posítion XY p1аne - Random poínts : G1210
З. Ho1e posítion XY plane - Línear points same ínterval : G1211
4. Ho1e posítíon ХY p1аne - Línear poínts different interval :
G1212
5. Ho1e position XY plane - Gríd poínts : G1213
6. Ho1e positíon XY plane - Rectangle poínts : G1214
7. Ho1e posítion XY plane - Cігc1e poínts : G1215
8. Ho1e positíon XY plane - Arc points same interval : G1216
9. Ho1e posítion ХY plane - Arc poínts different ínterval :
G1217
10. Fixed-fıgure XY plane - Rectangle : G1220
11. Fixed-figure XY plane - Círcle : G1221
12. Fixed-figure XY plane - Track : G1222
13. Fixed-fıguτe XY plane - Radial groove : G1223
14. Arbítrary-figuτe ХC plane - Staτt poínt : G1500
15. Fixed-figure ХC plane - Rectangle : G1520
16. Fixed-figure XC plane - Circle : G1521
17. Fixed-fıguτe XC plane - Track : G1522
18. Fixed-fıgшe XC plane - Radial groove : G1523
19. C-axis groove on the polaτ cooгd шate p1ane: G1570
20. X-axis groove on the polar cooτdinate plane : G1571
21. C-aıcís hole on the polar coordinate plane cіrc1e poínts : G1572
22. C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane random poínts :
G1573
- 472 -
B-δ3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Example C-axis groove on the polar coordínate p1ane: G1570
PQs.ısıZε ІRε:PEAτ
- FNCε PnSIT2D 4 Z- - Ø-
FACE POS1T
Data ítem Meanín
Z FACE POS1T10N [+FACE ]: References the fıgure below + end face .
-FACE : References the fı ure below - end face .
Reference position Reference φsítíon
Λ
- Depth
+Z +Z

1.. Height
F
+ end face - end face
Reference φsition Reference φsition
,
- IDepth Depth
+Z +Z

Height Height +
ŕE
- ertd face + end face
- 473 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874ENl05
7. 70 ADDRESS SETTING OF ROTATION AX1S
Support for C-Axís Machíning with Rotatíon Axis
By settíng bit 0 of parameter No. 27001 to 1, the ínput ítem
ROTATION AX1S NAME ís displayed on the fıgure menu for
millíng below. By enteríng this data, C-axís machíning using a
rotatíon axís is enabled.
1. Rectangle on the polar coordínate p1ane: G1520
2. Círcle on the po1ar coordínate plane : G1521
З. Track on the polar coordinate plane : G1522
4. Radíal groove on the po1ar cooτdіnate plane : G1523
5. C-axís groove on the po1ar coordínate p1аne: G1570
6. X-axís groove on the po1аr coordínate p1ane: G1571
7. C-axís hole on the polar coordínate p1ane cіrc1e poínts : G1572
8. C-axís hole oп the po1ar coordínate plane random poínts :
G1573
9. C-axís groove on the cylindrical surface : G1670
10. X-axís groove on the cylíndrícal surface : G1671
11. C-axis hole on the cylíndrical surface círcle points : G1672
12. C-axís hole on the cylíndńcal surface гаndom points : G1673
13. Arbitrary-fıgure on the end face : G1500
13. Arbítrary-figure on the cy1indrica1 surface: G1600

- 474 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Example C-axís groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1570
ROT. AX1S
Data ítem Meanin
Y ROTATION AX1S NAME When bit 1 of parameter No. 27001 1 = 1
[C]: The rotation axis is the C-axis.
[A]: The rotation axis is the A-axis.
Иlhen bit 2 of parameter No. 27001 2 = 1
[C]: The rotation axis ís the C-axis.
[B]: The rotation axis is the B-axis.
When bit 3 of parameter No. 27001 3 = 1
[C]: The rotation axis is the C-axis.
E: The rotation axis is the E-axis.
NOTE
Thís data ítem ís enabled when the parameter
= 1.
-47s-
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
1. 1 1 C AX1S CLAMPING M CODE OUTPUT
Outlíne


C axís clamping and unclampíng M codes are automatícally output in
C axís cycles as followíngs, whích posítíon C axís ín the cycle motion.
C axís represents a rotatíng axís around Z axis ín thís
specifıcatíons.
1 Ho1e machíníng cycles
In hole machíníng cycles combíned with following fıgures, C
axís clampíng and unclampíng M codes are automatícally output.

a C-axís hole on the end face : G1572
b C-axís hole on the end face arbítrary : G1573
c C-axís hole on the cylíndrical surface arbítrary : G1672
d C-axís hole on the cylíndrícal surface arbítrary : G1673
2 Groovíng cycles
In groovíng cycles combíned wíth followíng figures, C axís
clampíng and unclampíng M codes are automatícally output.
a X-axís groove on the end face : G1571
b Z-axís groove on the cylíndrícal surface : G1671
Va1ue of M Code Output
M code set ín following parameters are output
When zero ís set, M code is not output.
1 C axís clampíng M code for maín spíndle : Parameter
2 C axís unclampíng M code for maіn spíndle : Parameter
3 C axís clampíng M code for sub spíndle : Parameter
4 C axís unclampíng M code for sub spíndle : Parameter
- 476 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
Dístínctíon between Maín and Sub Spíndle
When an axís name C ís specífıed ín fıguτe command and пo axís
name ís specifıed, M code set in parameter or 27006 for
maіn spíndle ís output.
When an axís name A , B , oг E ís specífıed in fıgure command,
M code set іn parameter 0г 27012 for sub spindle ís output.
Posítion of M Code Output
1 Ho1e machíníng cycle
G90
G17
Mb.............................................................. . 1
G00 X x1 C c1 Z I poínt
G99
G81 Z depth R R poínt F feed Ma ......... 1
Mb
X x2 C c2 Ma 1
Mb
X x3 C c3 Ma 1
MЬ
G80
G00 Z I poínt
1 Ma means C axís clampíng M code, Mb means C axís
unclampíng one.
a, b should be set in parameters , ,
and
When value of the parameter ís zero, no M code ís output.
2 Groovíng Cyc1e
a X-axis groove on the end face : G1571
G 1056J
C axís grooving cycle command
G 1571
X-axís groove on the end face
In case above commands are specified, C axís unclampíng
M code ís output at the begínníng of a cycle, C axis
clampíng M code is output before cutting motion, and C
axís unclamping M code is output after cutting motíon
duríng a cycle
мј3..................................... 1
G17

- 477 -
1.M1LLING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
GOZ2.
Ma..................................... 1

100.

Mβ..................................... 1
G17
120.
GOZ2.
Ma..................................... 1



MЬ..................................... 1
1 Ma means C axis clamping M code, Mβ means C axis
un clamping one.
a, f should Ьe set ín parameters , ,
and
When value of the parameter is zero, no M code ís
output.
Э
b Z-axís groove on the cylíndrical surface : G1671
,

C axis groovíng command
G1671
Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface
1
In case above commands are specifıed, C axis unclampíng
M code is output at the begínníng of a cycle, C axís
clampíng M code is output before cuttíng motion, and C
axis unclamping M code ís output after cutting motion
during a cycle
Mβ............................... 1
G19

GOX104.
Ma............................... 1

1

Mβ............................... 1
G19

GOX104.
Ma............................... 1
100.


мβ............................... 1
,
- 478 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 1.M1LLING
1 Ma means C axís clamping M code, Mβ means C axis
un clampíng one.
a, β should be set in parameters , ,
and When va1ue of the parameter
is zero, no M code ís output.
ŕ

É
Γ
ł

4
- 479 -

t
ι
J
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-63874εwı05
2 TURNING
λ
Wíth IVIANUAL GUIDE i, the cycles motíorıs lísted below are available
for tØg.
Ho1e machínin work iece rotatíon
G1100 Center drillin
G1101 Drillin λ
Machining type block G1102 Tapping
G1103 Reamin
G1104 Borin

Turnín
G1120 Outer surface rou hin
G1121 1nner surface rou hin
G1122 End face rou hin
1
G1123 Outer surface semifınishin 1
Machining type block G1124 lnner surface semifinishin
G1125 End face semifınishin
G1126 Outer surface fınishin
1 G1127 lnner surface fınishin
__ G1128 End face fınishin
G1450 Start point
G1451 strai ht line
G1452 Aгc C
Tuming fıgure block İ ZX plane G1453 Aгc CC
G1454 Chamfer 1
G1455 Coгпeг roundin
G1456 End
ί
Turning groove
G1130 Outer surface rou hin
G1131 1nner surface rou hin
G1132 End face rou hin
G1133 Outer surface roughing and fınishin
Machining type block G1134 1nner surface roughing and fınishin
G1135 End face roughing and finishin λ
G1136 Outer surface fınishin
G1137 lnner surface fınishin
G1138 End face fınishin _
G1470 Outer normal groove
G1471 Outer tra ezoìdal groove
Groove fıgure block G1472 1nner normal groove
ZX plane G1473 1nner tra ezoidal groove
-G- 1474 End -f-a-ce normal roove : --
G1475 End face tra ezoidal roove
- 480 -
e-s3в74ENıo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Threadín
G1140 Outer surface Г Machining type block
G1141 lnner surface
G1460 General- ur ose thread
Thread fıgure block G1461 Metric thread
ZX plane G1462 Unifıed thread
G1463 PT thread
G1464 1 PF thread
NOTE
1 \Nhen cycle motions are input wíth MANUAL
GU1DE i, sets of a machining type block and fıgure
blocks must be input ín succession for a11 cycle
motions except turning hole machining.
For one machining type block, multiple fıgure
blocks can be input.
However, multipie sets of arbitrary fıgures can be
input, with one set includíng up to 50 fıgures
enclosed between a start point and end block.
2 For each item marked with [ ] in the tabies below, a
standard value is automatically set íf no value is
input.
The screen displays [ ] to the right of a data item.
3 1n some of the input data items, the system sets
the last inputed data as an initíal data. As to these
input data items, the mark of COPY was
described.
4 The motions go back to the start poínt where the
machíníng cycle started after completing the a11
cycle motions.
1t is possible not to go back the satrt point when
the parameter is set to 1.
5 Cyc1e machíníng cannot be performed ín any of
control modes of the high-speed and high-precision
functíons commands for advanced preview
control, A1 advanced preview control, A1 contour
control, A1 nano contour control, high-precision
contour control, A1 hígh-precision contour control,
and A1 nano high-precision contour control . To
perform cycle machining, control mode must be
canceled.
6 On the CNC for lathe turníng wíth G-code system B
oг C, when cycle machining is specifıed, G90 must
be specifıed in advance to make a switchover to
the absolute coordinate system. For hole
machining by turning with the tool rotated , G98
initial 1eve1 return or G99 R position 1eve1 return
must be specifıed in advance.
- 481 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Remarks Cyc1e retract motíons
In case of , Retracting motions índícated as bloken
línes in the following drawing wi11 be outputted. The order of
motíon axís wi11 be opposíte to the approched motions
Retracting motion of a
machiníng cycle Position where the
machining cycie
started
Approaching motíons
of a machining cycie


,

In case of carryíng out p1ura1 fıgures machiníng by one G4 digit
cycle, such like groovíng, thís retracting motíons wí11 be
available at the last fıgure machining.

- 482 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Z. 1 HOLE MACHINING WORKPIECE ROTATION
2. 1. 1 Machining Type Blocks for Ho1e Machining Workpíece
Rotatíon
NOTE

Ho1e machíning workpiece rotatíon ís performed
only at the center of a workpiece. So, unlike other
cycle motions, fıgure blocks cannot be specifıed.
Center dríllíng: G1100
Cuт C ЖD. Pas. isrZE ]FACE PilSI η
CLEARANCE C=Γ
FEED ØTE F=
DWELL T1HE P=
flPRUCH HOHUN 2= - Z M0џ
1
KEY Iи HUMERЯ iHCH
Ì
CUT COND.
г
Data ítem Meanin
C CLEARANCE Distance between the surface of a workpiece and
oint R radius value, positive value COPY
1 F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the bottom of a hole in seconds,
ositive value COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z >X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axìs direction.
[X Z] : From the current position to the
machiníng start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis dírection and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.

Data item Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the surface of a vиoгk iece
L CUT DEPTH Ho1e de th radius value, ne ative value
г
- 483 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Drilling: G1101
CUT COND. ]P05./SλZE FRCE POSITt_
PECKING CUT DEPiH θ=а-
GO PAST AMOUИT K= -
CLENRpNCE C
FEED RRTE F -
DЧELL T[HE P=i -
flPROCH MOT OН Z-К->2 H0L
1H NUMERIІS. ClA1, IFКHλ
CUT COND.
Data item Meanín
Q PECKING CUT DEPT Depth of cut peг drillıng operation radius value,
sitive value COPY Note
K GO PAST AMOUNT Length of the incomplete hole at the tip of the tool
radius va1ue, positive value COPY
C CLEARANCE Distance between the surface of a workpiece and
oint R radius value, positive va1ue COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the bottom of a hole ìn seconds
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[X 2] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.

Data ítem Meanín
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the surface of a work iece
L CUT DEPTH Ho1e de th radius value, ne ative value
NOTE
The system refers to the parameter as the
return amount. Therefore, please set to
the suitable value before machining.
- 484 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING

Tappíng: G1102
-
Øτ cp D. ]Pоì. ısτZE Rт6тD тtłP Fс i p
TNREpD L[AD D=Γ
t=Г
P=Г
2=К->Z M0о
`
CUT COND. _
Data item Meanín
D THREAD LEAD Lead of a tapping tool radius value, positive value
COPY
C CLEARANCE Distance between the surface of a workpiece and
oint R radius value, positive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME DØ11 time at the bottom of a hole ìn seconds,
sitive value COPY 1
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
F
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[X-+Z] : From the current position to the
Γ machining start point, the tool moves in 1 ι the Z-axis direction and then in the
1
X-axis direction. initial va1ue
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.

Data ítem Meanín
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the surface of a work iece
L CUT DEPTH Ho1e de th radius value, ne ative value
R1G1D TAP
Data ítem Meanín
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT] : Specifles the float tap. initial value
R1G1D : S ecìfıes the ri id ta . Note
S SPINDLE sPEED S indle s eed miñ
NOTE
When you use the rigid tap M code command
, the system refers to the parameter
or as M code. Therefore, please
set 0г to the suitable va1ue
before machining.
- 485 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACH N1NG TYPES B-63874EN 05
Reamíng: G1103
cIIT COHA. POS.ıSIZF FFlCć 1:1
: CLENRRNØ C=
FEEA Rλ7E
DλJFLL T i ME P=
APROCN t10TI0N Z=IX->Z H0V
IN NUMER Нs. Cмм INCN7
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
C CLEARANCE Dıstance between the surface of a wıırkpiece and
oint R radius value, positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME Dwe11 time at the bottom of a hole in seconds,
osítíve va1ue COPY _
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axìs direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[X >Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES]: From the current position to the
machiníng start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
POs./s1ZE
Data ítem Meanin
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the surface of a work iece
L CUT DEPTH Ho1e de th radíus va1ue, ne ative value
- 486 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Boríng: G1104
ь
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
C CLEARANCE Distance between the surface of a workpiece and
oint R radius value, positive value COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate ositive value COPY
P DWELL T1ME DØ11 time at the bottom of a hole in seconds,
г sitive value COPY
Ь
1 Z APROCH MOT10N [Z- X] : From the current position to the
ł machining start point, the tool moves in ι
the Z-axis direction and then in the
ь
X-axis direction.
i [X Z] : From the current position to the
ı` machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machinìng start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
ł directions.
r
POS./S1ZE 1
Datв ítem Meanín
B BASE POS1T10N Z coordinate of the surface of a work iece
L CUT DEPTH Ho1e de th radius value, ne ative value
G
1
[
- 487 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-6звı4εNЮs
TURNING
. 1 Machíníng Type Blocks for Turníng
Outer surface roughing: G1120
TQQL CØD. CUT COØ. вεТAlι
CUT1IN6 DIRECTIØ P=
CUT DEPTN
RATE DF GUT AEPTH H=100.
-flλfIS FINISH AMT. C=f
Z-йXIS FIMISH RHT. h І
CUT DIRC. FEEDRRTE F=І
CUT DEPTH FEEDRAľE E
CUi RISE FEEDRATE tλ=

SËLECT SbFT KEY.
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanín
R NOSE RADIUS Tooi nose radíus of a rou hin tool sitíve vaiue
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool posítive
value
B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hín tool ositive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE imaginary tooi nose роѕіtіоn of a roughing tool

NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinaríly sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Too1 Offset wíndow.
Therefore, it ís not necessary to dísplay the tab
`TOOL COND.

CUT COND.
Data item Meanin
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] : Cuts in the -Z dírectíon.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z directíon.
Remark [+Z] ís used for cutting in the reverse
direction or for machining with a
subs indle. COPY
Q CUT DEPTH De th of each cut radius value, positive value
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
rate in steps of 1 0. A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones aгe sequentially multiplied by a
specifıed change rate. The default is 100 , meaning
that the depth of cut remains unchanged. 1 to 200,
sitíve value
C X-AX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance in the X-axis direction. The
blank is re arded as 0. radius value, positive value
- 488 -
B 63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
ь
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
D Z-AX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance in the Z-axis dırection. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
F CUT D1RC.FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the
work iece radius direction ositive value
E CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the Z-axis
direction ositive value
V CUT R1SE FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts up in the
direction of retraction from the workpiece positive
value
DETAIL
Data item Meanín
K 1ST OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the fırst cut. Specify aп
override value in steps of 1 . The default is 100 .
1 - 200, positive value
Remark This data item is used, for example, to cut
the black coating of a cast work iece.
W CUT R1SE METHOD [SPEED]: The tool retracts by a distance specifıed
with ESCAPE AMOUNT in the XZ
direction immediately after cutting.
[CUT] : The tool retracts by a retract distance
after cutting along the fıgure.
COPY
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27128
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
L X-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start poìnt
approach point in the X-axis direction radius
value, posìtive value
Remark By referríng to the parameter No. 27129
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value. C
M Z-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point

approach point in the Z-axis direction radius value,
positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27130
minimum clamp value , the system sets
ł the data as an initial va1ue.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z-+X] : From the current position to the
l
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[X->Z] : From the current position to the
machìning start point, the tool moves in
f the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axís direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
- 489 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
DETAIL
Data í Meanin
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the X direcłíon.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X directíon.
Remark This data ítem is enab1e when the
arameter = 1. COPY
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a Øcket. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a Øket.
Remark Thís data item is enable when the
rameter = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. ínítíal va1ue
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark This data ítem is enable when the
arameter = 1.

1
- 490 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Too1 path
<1> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-in start poínt + clearance L,
M Ьy rapid traverse.
<2> After cuttíng in in the X-axís directíon at the feedrate F
specífıed for the cutting direction, the tool cuts in to the
entered-figure posítion where there ís sti11 a finishing allowance
in the Z-axís dírection at the feedrate E specífied for the cut-in
d vection.
<3> If [SPEED] ís selected, the tool ímınedíately retracts Ьy a return
cleaгаnce U іn the X- аnd Z-axís d vectíon. If [CUT] is selected,
the tool fırst cuts along the figure and then retracts by a return
cleaτаnce U in the X- and Z-axís dírectíon.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-ín start posítion in the Z-axis d vectíon
Ьy rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated until the lowest portíon ín the
X-axis dírectíon ís reached.
<6> If there ís another pocket, the tool ís posítioned on the pocket,
аnd steps <2> to <4> aгe repeated.
<7> Once a11 portions are cut, the tool retracts to the posítíon cut-in
start positíon + clearance L in the X-axis direction at the rapíd
traverse rate.
NOTE
1t is possible to specify PART and BLANK as
ELEMENT TYPE for an índívidual arbítrary fıgure.
Thís BLANK can be used to enter an arbitrary
figure resemblíng a blank fıgure to be actually
machíned, so any portíon other than the blank
portíon wí11 not be cut. Thís way, optímum rough
turníng can be realízed.
- 491 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Example of outer-surface machiníng
start Øint
L----------------------- ----------------------fi

7 і
fi
i
_ i ___ : Too1 path for cuttíng
____ : Too1 path for C1earance
rapid traverse
---- : Product fıgure
: B1ank figure
---- -- _ - -
Motíon of the tool ín the cuttíng dírectíon on the blank element portíon
When the tool advances in the cuttíng directíon, the excessíve amount
of ttravel of the tool ís as describe below.
When bít 0 of parameter No. 27120 is set to 0, and the tool advances
in the cuttíng dírectíon, the excessíve amount of travel of the tool ís
nose radíus R íf the attńbute of the figure across whích the tool moves
ís the blank element. In this case, the excessíve amount of travel ís
the dístance from the end poínt of the part fıguτe.
B1ank figure
- -1-

Product figure
R
When bít 0 of parameter No. 27120 ís set to 1, аnd the tool advances
in the cuttíng directíon, the excessíve amount of travel of the tool is
[clearance + 2 x nose radius R] íf the attríbute of the fıgure across
whích the tool moves ís the blank element. In thís case, the
excessíve amount of travel ís the dístance from the blank element.
B1ank figure
---------------1---- ---,
,
Product fıgure
ClearanceR
- 492 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
lnner surface roughing: G1121
f
тo0ι COHD. cUT coид. DEHHL 1
CtΠτ1Н 6 DlRECHOH P=
CUT DEPTH Θ=
RpTE ØF CUT DEPTH
x-Axτs Fτиτsн Øт. á ,=f м
ϊ-RКlS FINISH RMT. D=I +
CUT DIRC. FEEDRATE F-
CUT DEPTN FEEDRATE E-
CUT R [ SE FEEIøčHT E џ=і
_......_ LECT SOFT KEY.
1 TOOL COND.
ь
Data item Meanín
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a roughing tool posıtive
value
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool positive
value
B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hin tool sitive value
1 J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enab[ed when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinaríly sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.

Therefore, it ís not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] : Cuts in the -Z direction.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z direction.
Remark [+Z] ìs used for cutting in the reverse
direction oг for machining vvith a
subs indle. COPY
Q CUT DEPTH De th of each cut radius value, positive value
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
1 rate in steps of 1 . A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplìed by a
specifıed change rate. The default is 100 , meaning
that the depth of cut remains unchanged. 1 to 200,
ositive value
C X-AX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance in the X-axis dìrection. The
blank is re arded as 0. radius value, positive value
D Z-AX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance in the Z-axis direction. The
blank is re arded as O. radius va1ue, ositive va1ue
- 493 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
F CUT D1RC.FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the
work iece radius direction ositive value
E CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the Z-axis
direction osìtive value
V CUT R1SE FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts up in the
direction of retraction from the workpiece positive
value
DETAIL
Data item Meanin
K 1ST OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the fırst cut. Specify aп
override value ín steps of 1 . The default is 100 .
1 - 200, positive value
Remark This data item is used, for example, to cut
the black coating of a cast work iece.
W CUT R1SE METHOD [SPEED]: The tool retracts by a distance specifıed
with ESCAPE AMOUNT in the XZ
direction immediately after cutting.
[CUT] The tool retracts by a retract distance
after cutting along the figure.
COPY
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut radius va1ue, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27128
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initìal value.
L X-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the X-axis direction radius
va1ue, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27129
minimum clamp value , the system sets
_ the data as an initial value.
M Z-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machinìng start point
approach point in the Z-axis direction radius value,
positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27130
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an inìtial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[X Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start poìnt, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
dírections.
- 494 -
Bfi3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
DETAIL
Data item Meanin
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axís Cut dírection,
[-X] : Cuts ín the X dírectíon.
[+X] : Cuts ín the +X dírectíon.
Remark Thís data ítem ís enable when the
rameter = 1. COPY
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a pocket. ínítíal value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a Øket.
Remark Thís data ítem is enab1e when the
rameter = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. initíal value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark Thís data ítem ís enab1e when the
arameter = 1.
Too1 path
<1> The tool moves to the position cut-ín start poínt + clearance L,
M by rapid traverse.
<2> After cuttíng in in the X-axis direction at the feedrate F
specifıed for the cuttíng direction, the tool cuts in to the
entered-fıgure posítion where there is sti11 a fmíshíng allowance
in the Z-axis directíon at the feedrate E specífied for the cut-ín
dírectíon.
<3> If [SPEED] ís selected, the tool ímmedíately retracts by a return
clearance U in the X- and Z-axís dírection. If [CUT] is selected,
the tool fırst cuts along the figure and then retracts by a return
clearance U in the X- and Z-axis dírectíon.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-ín start position ín the Z-axis dírection
by rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated untíl the lowest portíon in the
X-axis d vectíon ís reached.
<6> If there ís another pocket, the tool ís posítíoned on the pocket,
and steps <2> to <4> aгe repeated.
<7> Once a11 portions are cut, the tool retracts to the posítion cut-in
start posítion + clearance M ín the Z-axis direction at the rapid
traverse rate.
- 495 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 8-63874 E N/05
End face roughíng: G1122
пі
тлπι CoκD. cuт COHD. jIILfflIL јFACE PΠsττ]
CUTTTHG DIRECTIΛH P=
CUT DEPTN
RHTE 0F C11T DEPTN i иyJ1ØB. L
x-pxıs FІиτsн ιэг т. c
?-RXIS FINIsH fkfт. D=
CUT DIRC. FEEDRATE F-I
CUT DEPTH FEEDRNTE E
CUT R1SE FEEDRATE
sειεст S FT кεи,
r-
_ TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a roughing tool positive
value
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool positive
value
B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hin tool ositive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Too1 Offset wíndow.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
_ CUT COND.
Data ítem Meaníng _
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark [+X] is used for cutting in the reverse
directìon oг for machining with a
subs indle. COPY
Q CUT DEPTH _ De th of each cut radius value, positive value
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
rate ìn steps of 1 . A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied by a
specifıed change rate. The default is 100 , meaning
that the depth of cut remains unchanged. 1 to 200,
positive va1ue
C X-AX1S F1N1SH AMT Finishing allovvance in the X-axis direction. The
blank is regarded as O. radius value,Qositive value
D Z-A 1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance in the Z-axis directıon. The
blank is re9arded as 0 radius va1ue. positive valueZ
- 496 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
F ı CUT D1RC.FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the
work iece radius direction ositive value
E CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the Z-axis
direction sitive value
V CUT R1SE FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts up in the
direction of retraction from the workpiece positive
value
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
1 K 1ST OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the fırst cut. Specify an
override value in steps of 1 . The default is 100 .
1 - 200, positive value
Remark This data item is used, for example, to cut
1 the black coatin of a cast work iece.
1 W CUT R1SE METHOD [SPEED]: The tool retracts by a distance specifıed
1
with ESCAPE AMOUNT in the XZ
г direction immediately after cutting. initial
va1ue
[CUT] : The tool retracts by a retract distance
after cutting along the fıgure.
COPY
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27128
minimum clamp va1ue , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
L X-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the X-axis direction radius
value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27129
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
M Z-AX1s CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the Z-axis direction radius value,
positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27130
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z ,X] From the current position to the ь
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[X >Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis directìon.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start poìnt, ťhe tool moves ι
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
1
- 497 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
DETAIL
Data item Meanín
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a pocket. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a Øket.
Remark Thís data ítem is enable when the
rameter = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark Thís data ítem ís enabie when the
rameter = 1.
Too1 path




<1> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-ín start poínt + clearance L,
M by rapíd traverse.
<2> Affter cutting ín ín the Z-axís dírectíon at the feedrate F
specífied for the cuttíng dírectíon, the tool cuts ín to the
entered-fıgure positíon where there is sti11 a fmishing allowance
in the X-axis dírection at the feedrate E specífıed for the cut-ín
dírectíon.
<3> If [SPEED] ís selected, the tool ímmediately retracts by a return
clearance U in the X- and Z-axis dírectíon. If [CUT] ís selected,
the tool fırst cuts along the figure and then retracts by a return
cleaгance U in the X- and Z-axís dírection.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-ín start posítíon in the X-axís directíon
by rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated until the lowest portion in the
Z-axís d vectíon is reached.
<6> If there is аnotheτ pocket, the tool ís posítíoned on the pocket,
and steps <2> to <4> are repeated.
<7> Once a11 portíons aгe cut, the tool retracts to the posítíon cut-ín
start positíon + cleaτаnce M in the Z-axis directíon at the rapíd
traverse rate.

- 498 -
1
Bδ3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Outer surface semífínishing: G1123
IC OL CUND. CUJ coND. ØтЧІι
CUтττłѕ I IRECTJIN P=D
г x-Axτs FıиıЅН Aмτ. cf-
z-яxтs гґиτsн ядм=τі. -
FEED RATE F=l
IECT SОГr KEY.
TOOL COND.
ь Data item Meanín
1 1NPUT TYPE [1NPUT] : Directly inputs the tool nose radius of a
tool used for semifınishing. ínitial value
Ì [REF.] : lnputs the offset number of a tool used for
l semifınishin to read the offset value.
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a roughing tool positive value
Remark This data ıtem is indicated only when
ι 1NPU is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool positive
Г
va1ue
1 B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hin tool ositive value
г J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
Remark This data item is indicated only when

1NPU is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
T OFFSET NO. Offset number of a roughing tool positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when

REF. j is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.

NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
г
Therefore, it ís not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] : Cuts in the -Z direction.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z direction.
COPY
ь C X-AX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allovvance in the X-axís direction. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
D Z-AX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allovvance in the Z-axis dìrection. The
k
blank is re arded as O. radius value, posttive va1ue
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for semifınishìn ositive value
Γ
ί
- 499 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
DETAIL
Data item Meanin
L X-AX1s CLEARANCE Distarıce Ьetиπeen a blank and machiníng start point
approach point in the X-axís dírectíon radius
value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No.
27129 mіnіmum damp value , the system
sets the data as aп initial value.
M Z-AX1S CLEARANCE Dístance betØn a blank and machiníng start φint
approach φіпt in the Z-axis direction radíus value,
φsítive vaiue
Remark By refemng to the parameter No. 27130
mínímum damp value , the system sets
the data as aп ínítíal value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z- X] : From the cuпeпt φsítion to the
machíníng start φint, the tool moves in
the Z-axís dírection and then in the
X-axís dírectíon. ínítial vaiue
[X-iZ] : From the ctirrent φsìtion to the 1
1 machíníng start φínt, the tool moves ín
the Z-axís dírectíon and then in the
X-axis dírectíon.
, [2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machiníng starł φint, the tool moves
simuitaneously іп the X- and Z-axis
directíons.
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut dírectíon,
[-X] : Cuts in the -X dírectíon.
, [+X] : Cuts in the +X dírectíon.
Remark This data ítem ís enab1e when the
rameter = 1. COPY
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a φcket. ínítíal value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a pocket.
Remark Thís data item ís enable when the
rameter = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. inítíal value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark Thís data ítem ís enab1e when the
arameter = 1.

1
- 500 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Too1 path
<1> The tool moves to the posítion cut-in start point + clearance L,
M Ьy rapid traverse.
<2> The tool cuts along the entered fıguτe on whích the fmíshíng
allowance ís 1eft uncut at the semifinishing feedrate until the fmal
figure is obtaíned.
<3> Once a11 portions are cut, the tool retracts to the posítíon cut-in
start position + clearance L in the X-axis directíon at the rapid
traverse rate.
έ

- 501 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
lnner surface semífiníshíng: G1124
TDOL CØD. CλJT COND. ]ПETA1t_
CUTTItі DIØCTION F= Ф
КØК1S FIN15N RMT. C-
Z-RКIS FINISN ЯНΩ. D=Í
FEE] ØTE f=
јѕ ЕсТ SØ KEY.
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
1 1NPUT TYPE [1NPUT] : Directly inputs the tool nose radius of a
tool used for semifınishíng. initial value
[REF.] : lnputs the offset number of a tool used for
semif[nishing to read the offset va1ue.
R NOSE RAD1Us Too1 nose radius of a roughing tool positìve value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
1NPUT is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool positive
va1 ue
B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hin tool ositíve value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
Remark This data item is indicated only when
1NPUT is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
T OFFSET NO. Offset number of a roughing tool positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[REF.] is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it ís not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] : Cuts in the -Z direction.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z direction.
_ COPY
C X-AX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishìng allowance in the X-axis direction. The
blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive value
D Z-AX1s F1N1SH AMT Finishing allowance in the Z-axís dïrection. The
_ blank is re arded as 0 radius value. ositive va1ue
F + FFEp RATE Cutting feedrate for semifinishin ositive va1ue
- 502 -
8-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
L X-AX1s CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start poınt
approach point in the X-axis direction radius
value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27129
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
M Z-AX1s CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the Z-axis direction radius value,
positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27130
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z-эX] : From the current position to the
machining start point. the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
1 [X >Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial va1ue
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
dìrections.
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1. COPY
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] Cuts a pocket. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a pocket.
Remark This data item is enab1e when the
arameter = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark This data item ìs enable when the
arameter = 1.
- 503 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-6звıaεи/os
Too1 path
<1> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-ín start poínt + clearance L,
M by rapíd traverse.
<2> The tool cuts along the entered figure on whích the finishing
allowance ís left uncut at the semífmíshíng feedrate untíl the fmal
fıguτe ís obtaíned.
<3> Oпce a11 portíons aгe cut, the tool retracts to the positíon cut-іn
start posítion + clearance M ín the Z-axís dírectíon at the rapid
traverse rate.
- 504 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
ł
End face semífiníshíng: G1125
1
тΠOL COND. СUТ COND. 1п[тAlι FACE POsτт C
CUттING DIREıCTION P= Ф
X-HXIS FINISN Rt1т. C=
Z-AXIS FINISN RMт. D
ŕ; FEED RflтE F=[
ł
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanin
1 1NPUT TYPE [1NPUT] : Directfy inputs the tool nose radius of a
tool used for semifinishing. initial value
ι [REF.] : lnputs the offset number of a tool used for
semìfınishin to read the offset value.
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a roughing tool positive va1ue
Remark This data item is indicated only when
1NPUT is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool positive
value
B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hin tool ositive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
1NPUT is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
T OFFSET NO. Offset number of a roughing tool positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
REF. is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Tooi Offset window.
Therefore, it ís not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
1
`
I
- 505 -
t

2.тURNıNG CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
İ CUT COND.
Data ítem Meaníng
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
COPY
C X-ÃX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance ın the X-axis direction. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value. posftive value
D Z-AX1S F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance in the Z-axis direction. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for semifınishing positive value _
DETAIL
Data ítem 1 Meanin
L X-AX1S CLEARANCE Dístance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the X-axis direction radius

value: posìtive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27129
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial va1ue.
M Z-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the Z-axis direction radius va1ue,
positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27130
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis directìon. initial value
[X- Z] From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axís direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a pocket. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a pocket.
Remark This data item is enable when the
parameter = 1. _
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] Cuts an overhang. initìal value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1.
1

- 506 -

8-83874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Too1 path

<1> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-in start poínt + clearance L,
M Ьy rapíd traverse.
<2> The tool cuts along the entered figure on whích the fmishing
allowance ís 1eft uncut at the semifmishing feedrate untíl the fØa1
fıgure ís obtaíned.
<3> Oпce a11 portions aгe cut, the tool retracts to the posítion cut-ín
start posítíon + clearance M ín the Z-axís direction at the rapíd
traverse rate.
t
k
- 507 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B δ3874EN/05
Outer surface finishing: G1126
,.
TOOL CIJND. Ctft CDHD.
CUTTING DIRECTION P=
FEED RRTE F=İ -
X-AК1S CLERRQNCF L=f
2-RXIS CLERRfk10E H= -
RPROCH MOTIOИ Z= Z->X H0о
CUT DEPTH DIRECTION S=Γ-
PπCKET CUTTING X=fCUT1ING
ØRHRNG CUTTING Y=CUTTIN6
TOOL COND. _
Data ítem Meanín
1 1NPUT TYPE [1NPUT] : Dìrectly inputs the tool nose radius of a
tool used for semifınishing. initial value
[REF.] : lnputs the offset number of a tool used for
semifınishin to read the offset value.
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a roughing tool posìtive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
1NPU is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool positive
value _
B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hin tool ositive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
1NPU is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
T OFFSET NO. Offset number of a roughing tool positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
REF. is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Too1 Offset wìndow.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
r


- 5oи -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES [NG
CUT COND.
Data item Meanin
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] : Cuts in the -Z direction.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z direction.
COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for fınishin ositive value
L X-AX13 CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start poínt
approach point in the X-axis direction radius
value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27129
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as an initial value.
M Z-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the Z-axis direction radius value,
positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27130
minimum clamp va1ue , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axís direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[X >Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1. COPY
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] Cuts a pocket. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a pocket.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1.
- 509 -
2.TURNІNG CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Too1 path
ĺ
<1> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-in start poínt + cleaгaвce L, ,
M by rapid traverse.
<2> The tool cuts along the entered fıgure at the finishing feedrate
untíl the fmal fıgure is obtaíned.
<3> Once a11 poıtions are cut, the tool retracts to the position cut-ín
start posítíon + clearance L in the X-axís d vection at the rapid
traverse rate.

4
1

Э
- 510 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
lnner surface finishíng: G1127
тooι COHD. CUT COØ. ]
CUTTING DIRECTIOH P
FEED RAIE F
X-AXIS CLEpRRNCE L
ϊ-AX S CLEARNNCE Ms1
APRUCH HOTIФλ Z X->Z HOV
CUT DEPIH DIRECTION S= --
POØET CUTTING К CUTTING
OVERHFlNG CUTTING Y CUTTING
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanín
1 1 1NPUT TYPE [1NPUT] : Directly inputs the tool nose radius of a
tool used for semifınishing. initial value
[REF.] : lnputs the offset number of a tool used for
semifınishin to read the offset value.
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a roughing tool positive va1ue
Remark This data item is indicated only when
1NPUT is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool positive

value
B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hin tool sitive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when
1NPU is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
T OFFSET NO. Offset number of a roughing tool positive value Γ
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
REF. is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
ι
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordínariiy sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
1
ł
ι
- 511 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874ENl05
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] Cuts in the -Z direction.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z direction.
COPY
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for fınishin ositive value
L X-AX1S CLEARANCE Dìstance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the X-axis direction radius
va1ue, positive value
Remark By referrin^y to the parameter No. 27129
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as an initial value.
M Z-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the Z-axis direction radius value,
positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27130
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z-,X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[X->Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1. COPY
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a pocket. initial value 1
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a pocket.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark This data item is enab1e when the
arameter = 1.

- 512 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Too1 path
<1> The tool moves to the position cut-ín start point + clearance L,
M by rapid traverse.
<22 The tool cuts along the entered figure at the fıníshing feedrate
until the fmal fıgшe is obtained.
<3> Once a11 portions aгe cut, the tool retracts to the positíon cut-ín
start posítíon + clearance M in the Z-axis d vection at the rapid
traverse rate.
- 513 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
End face fínishing: G1128

т0Iц COND. СUТ COHD. ]rRCı:: POSττ
CuτтІиG DIRECHOH н=-
і ΓEED RRTE Ff
-AКlS CLEØHHCE Lf
F-йК1S CLERRANCE M=І
ПCH MOHOH Z-Ž->К MOV
КET CUTTlNG X=ІCUTT1иG
ØRHRHG CUTTíNG Y CUTT1иG
sELECT stFT KFY.
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanin
1 1NPUT TYPE [1NPUT] Directly inputs the tool nose radius of a
tool used for semifınishing.
[REF.] : lnputs the offset number of a tool used for
semifınishin to read the offset value.
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a roughing tool positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
1NPUT is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool positive
va1 ue
B NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a rou hin tool ositive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
1NPUT is selected for 1NPUT TYPE. _
T OFFSET NO. Offset number of a roughing tool positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
REF. is selected for 1NPUT TYPE.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bít 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinariiy sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
_ CUT COND.
Data item Meaníng
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the -X direction
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
_ COPY
F ; FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for fınishin osıtive value
- 514 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin _
L X-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the X-axis direction radius
value. positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27129
minimum clamp value , the system sets the
data as an initial value.
M Z-AX1S CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point
approach point in the Z-axis direction radius value,
positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27130
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z ,X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis directíon. initial value
[X Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a pocket. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a pocket.
Remark This data item is enab1e when the
arameter = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. initial value
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1.
Too1 path
L
κti ξ
P
κ ς
._ κκ
M
<1> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-ín start poínt + clearance L,
M by rapid traverse.
- 515 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES δ3874EN/05
untíl the fØa1 figure ís obtained.
<3> Once a11 portions are cut, the tool retracts to the posítíon cut-in
start posítíon + clearance M in the Z-axís dírection at the rapid
traverse rate.
Arbítrary Fígure Blocks for Turníng
When an arbítrary figure ís input, a functíon such as the automatic
íntersectíon calculatíon function can Ьe used. For detaíls, sec Sectíon ,
ARBITRARY FIGURES FOR ØG ZX PLANE , in Part H.
,
1

- 516 -
в-s387aεNıo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
TURNING GROOVING
1 Machíníng Type Blocks for Turning Groovíng
Outer surface roughíng: G1130
тOCі coND. cuI CIJND. ]o[тΩiL. 1
5IDE FINISH FlMOUNT C=ј
BOTІOH FINISH pHT. D=j
FEED RRTE f=l
PECKIHG И=PECK3HG
PEcKING CІЈІ DEPTH Θ=
RATE OF cuT DEPTH
RETURN λλHIUыT U=i
KξY 1H NlA1ERiй.S.
TOOL COND. -1
Data item Meanin
R 1 NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. ositive value
B TOOL W1DTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radius va1ue, positive
value
J i 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving too1.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
C S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance for the side faces of a groove.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value
D BOTTOM F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allovwance for the bottom of a groove. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE Feedrate for cutting in the tool axis direction
positíve value
W PECKING [NOTHIN] : Does not perform pecking in cutting for
groovìng initial value .
[PECKIN] : Performs pecking in cutting for
roovin .
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut in the tool axis direction peг pecking
operation radius value, positive vaIue
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[PECKINJ is selected for PECKING.
- 517 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
CUT COND. _
Data ítem Meaníng
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
rate in steps of 1 . A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied by a
specifıed change rate. 1 to 200, positive value
COPY _
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cuttìng
surface after each cut by pecking. radius value,
ositive value COPY
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and a
machining start point approach point in the Z-axis
direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27176
minimum clamp value , the system sets
_ the data as an initial value.
P DWELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. in seconds, positive value
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the
machining start point. the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[X Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
S CUT DEPTH FOR W1DTH Depth of each cut in the grooving tool width dírection
radius value, positive va1ue COPY
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut. The blank is regarded as O.
radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27177
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
parameter = 1. COPY _
- 518 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Too1 path

ι
<1> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-ín start poínt + clearance L,
M by rapíd traverse.
<2> Affter moving to the center of the groove in the Z-axís dírectíon
Ьy rapid traverse, the tool cuts in ín the X-axís dírectíon at the
feedrate F specífıed for the cuttíng dírectíon. If peckíng ís
г
specífied, the tool cuts a specífíed peckíng amount while
retτactíng in the +X-axis díтectíon between pecking cycles.
<3> When the tool reaches the groove bottom but the fmíshing
allowance in the X-axís dírectíon, the tool retracts ín the
ι +X-axís direction, shífts by a cut-ín amount through the wídth in
ι the -Z-axis direction, and then cuts in the X-axís d vectíon.
<4> After step <3> ís repeated untíl one groove wa11 ís reached, the
tool cuts another wa11.
<5> After a11 portíons are cut, the tool moves to the posítion cut-ín
start posítíon + cleaгaпce L in the X-axís d vectíon Ьy rapíd
traverse.


ł
- 519 -
2.TURN1NG CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
lnner surface roughíng: G1131
TOOL CUND. CUT COND DETAiL
IDE FINISH R110UNT C=1y
a0TT011 FINISH ЯMT. D=İ-
FEED RRTE F
PECKING PECKING
PECКING CUT DEPTN U
RRTE OF CUT DEPTN
RETURN NNOUNT tλ
Y I Ы NIp RЯІs. εlR1 Н
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanín
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. positive
value
B TOOL W1DTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radius value,
ositive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving too1.
NOTE
1 Tab TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1..
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, ít is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND. - _-_------
Data ítem Meanin
C S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allovvance for the side faces of a groove.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value _
D BOTTOM F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance for the bottom of a groove. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE Feedrate for cutting in the tool axis direction
ositive value
W PECKING [NOTHIN] Does not perform pecking in cutting for
grooving initial value .
[PECKIN] : Performs pecking in cutting for
roovin .
O PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut in the tool axis directíon per pecking
operation radius value, positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
[PECKIN] is selected for PECKING.
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
rate in steps of 1 . A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied by a
specıfied change rate. 1 o 200, positive value
COPY _J
- 520 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut by pecking. radius value,
ositive value COPY
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and a
machining start point approach point in the Z-axis
direction radíus value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27176
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
P DWELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. in seconds, positive value
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z-X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[X-Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
S CUT DEPTH FOR W1DTH Depth of each cut in the grooving tool width direction
radius value, positive va1ue COPY
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut. The blank ìs regarded as O.
radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27177
minimum ciamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut dìrection,
[-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable v,ıhen the
arameter = 1. COPY
- 521 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Too1 path
<1> The tool moves to the position cut-ín start poínt + clearance L,
M by rapíd traverse.
<2> After moving to the center of the groove in the Z-axís dírection
by rapíd traverse, the tool cuts in in the X-axís dírection at the
feedrate F specífıed for the cuttíng direction. If peckíng is
specífied, the tool cuts a specified peckíng amount whíle
retractíng ín the -X-axis d цectіon between peckíng cycles.
<3> When the tool reaches the groove bottom but the fmíshing
allowance ín the X-axís d vectíon, the tool retracts іn the -X-axís
direction, shífts by a cut-ín amount through the wídth ín the
-Z-axís dírection, and then cuts in the X-axis direction.
<4> After step <3> ís repeated untíl one groove wa11 is reached, the
tool cuts another wa11.
<5> After a11 portíons aгe cut, the tool moves to the posítíon cut-ín
start poínt + clearance M in the Z-axís d vectíon Ьy rapid
traverse and ís pulled out from the workpiece.
- 522 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
End face roughíng: G1132
r
тoαι CUND. СцІ CдиВ. DEτaτι εмCE Posττ
sτВε FINISH QNOHNT .
BOIIOH FlNJsH fθΩ. D -
FEED RRTE F
PECKING ЈРЕСкІЫІ
PECKING C T DEPTH Q=
RRTE oF CHT DEPTH
RETURN flΓ1ouHT
ЕУ IN N1йtERALS. CMM. 1HCH3
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. ositive value
B TOOL W1DTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radius value, positive
value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving too1.
NOTE
1 Tab TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordínaríly sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
C S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance for the side faces of a groove.
The blank is regarded as 0. radius value, positive
value_______
D BOTTOM F1N1SH AMT. Finishing a1lowance for the bottom of a groove. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
F FEED RATE Feedrate for cutting in the tool axis direction
osìtive value
W PECKING [NOTHIN] : Does not perform pecking in cutting for
grooving initial value .
[PECKIN] : Performs pecking in cutting for
roovin .
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut in the tool axis direction peг pecking
operation radius value, positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
PECKIN is selected for PECKING.
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
rate in steps of 1 . A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied by a
specifıed change rate. 1 to 200. positive va1ue
COPY
- 523 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by whích the tool retracts from a cuttíng
surface after each cut Ьy pecking. radius value,
sitíve value COPY
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanín
L CLEARANCE Dístance Øtиеeп the top surface of a groove and a
machíníng start poínt approach point ín the Z-axís
dírectíon radíus value, posítíve value
Remark By refemng to the parameter No. 27176
mínimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an ínítial value.
P DWELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. іп seconds, posítíve value
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current posítion to the
machiníng start poínt, the tool moves ín
the Z-axís directíon and then in the
X-axís dírectíon. ínítial value
[X Z] : From the current posítíon to the
machíníng start poínt, the tool moves in
the Z-axís dírection and then in the
X-axís dírectíon.
[2 AXES] : From the current positíon to the
machíníng start poínt, the tool moves
símultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
S CUT DEPTH FOR WlDTH Depth of each cut ín the grooving tool wídth dírectíon
radius value, роѕіtіvе value COPY
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Dístance Ьy which the tool retracts from a cuttíng
surface after each cut. The blank ís regarded as O.
radíus value, posítíve value
Remark By refemng to the parameter No. 27177
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an ínitíal value.
- 524 -
в-sзв74εrυos CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Too1 path
<1> The tool moves to the position cut-in start poínt + clearance L,
M Ьy rapid traverse.
<2> After movíng to the center of the groove in the X-axís d vectíon
Ьy rapid traverse, the tool cuts in ín the -Z-axis d vection at the
feedrate F specífied for the cuttíng directíon. If peckíng ís
specífıed, the tool cuts a specifıed peckíng amount whíle
retractíng іn the +Z-axís direction between peckíng cycles.
<3> When the tool reaches the groove bottom but the finishíng
allowance in the Z-axis direction, the tool retracts іn the +Z-axis
direction, shífts Ьy a cut-in amoØt through the width ín the
-X-axís d vection, and then cuts ín the Z-axis d vectíon.
<4> After step <3> is repeated until one groove wa11 is reached, the
tool cuts another wa11.
<5> Aiìer a11 portions are cut, the tool moves to the position cut-ín
start posítíon + clearance M in the Z-axis dírection by rapid
traverse.
- 525 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Outer surface roughing and finíshíng: G1133
, ,
ГіјОІ CaND, cuт COND. >
sІдε εІиІsіиouиτ
βQτтoм εıиІsH Hмт.
RUHGH FEEDRNTE F=
FlNISH FEEDRA7E E_
PEØI NG W= PECKING
PECKING cuT DEPTH 0=1
RflTE OF CUT DEPTH
RETURN цíOuНT
Y 1N NiB Rfä.S. . Ø
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meaníng _
ł R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. positive
value
B TOOL W1DTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radius value,
sitive value _
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving too1.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset wíndow.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
C S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing aliowance for the side faces of a groove.
; The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value _ _
D BOTTOM F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance for the bottom of a groove.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value
F ROUGH FEEDRATE Feedrate for roughing ın the tool axis direction
ositive value
E F1N1SH FEEDRATE Feedrate for fınishin ositive value
W PECKING [NOTHIN] : Does not perform pecking in cutting
for grooving initial value .
[PECKIN] Performs pecking in cutting for
roovin
O PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut in the tool axis direction peг pecking
operation radius value, positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
PECKIN is selected for PECKING
- 526 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES [NG
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
rate in steps of 1 . A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied by a
specífıed change rate. 1 to 200, positive va1ue
COPY
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut by pecking. radius value,
ositive value COPY
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and
a machining start point approach point in the
Z-axis direction radius value, positive va1ue
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27176
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
P DVVELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. in seconds, positive value
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
in the Z-axis direction and then ın the
X-axis direction. initial value
[X Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
in the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
S CUT DEPTH FOR W1DTH Depth of each cut in the groovìng tool width
direction radìus value, positive value COPY
K CUT END POS1T10N [CENTER] : Cuts both of the ńght and 1eft side
faces of a groove evenly in
fınishing.
[CORNER] : Cuts one side face and the entire
bottom successively then cuts the
other side face on1y in fınishing.
COPY
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface when fınishing is completed radius value,
positive value
Remark1 This item is displayed on1y when
[CORNER] ìs selected as a cutting end
position. The default value is 0.
Remark2 By referńng to the parameter No. 27177
minimum clamp value , the system
sets the data as an initial va1ue.
- 527 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axís Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts ín the X dírectíon.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X dírectíon.
Remark Thís data item is enable when the
rameter = 1. COPY
TOOI path
Groove roughing and fmíshíng aгe contínued, usíng the same too1. See
respective descńptions about the tool path for detaíls of roughíng and
fvцshíng.
- 528 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
lnner surface roughíng and finishíng: G1134
TOΠL COHD. CUT Coнд. DLiflIL
зτПε FіиЈsн ιмouит
BOTTOИ FINISH RИT. D=r
RОІ1GH f EEDRATE F=
FLNISH FFEDRATE E_І
PECKING W=PECKING
PECKING CUт DEPTH Q=
RATE OF CUT DEPTH : H
RETURN ØOUNT u=t
Y IN NüMERiä.S. Γ11 1НCH
TOOL COND.
Data item Meanín
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. positive
value
B TOOL WlDTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radius va1ue,
ositive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE імаgіпагу tool nose position of a grooving too1.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA ín Too1 Offset wíndow.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
C S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance for the side faces of a groove.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value
D BOTTOM F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance for the boítom of a groove.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value
F ROUGH FEEDRATE Feedrate for roughing in the tool axis direction
ositive value
E F1N1SH FEEDRATE Feedrate for fınishin ositive value
W PECKING [NOTHIN] : Does not perform pecking in cutting
for grooving initial value .
[PECKIN] : Performs pecking in cutting for
roovin .
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per peckìng
operation radius value, positive value
Remark This data item is ìndicated on1y when
PECKIN is selected for PECKING.
ι
- 529 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-63в7aENı05
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meaniі
RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specıfy a change
rate in steps of 1 . A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied by a
specifıed change rate. 1 to 200, positive value
COPY
ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance Ьy which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface after each cut by pecking. radius va1ue,
ositive va1u COPY _
DETAIL
_ Data ítem 1 _ Meaníng
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and
a machining start point approach point in the
Z-axis direction radius value. positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27176
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial va1ue.
P DWELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. in seconds, positive value
COPY _
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z-. X] : From the current position to the
machining start point. the tool moves
in the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[X-- Z] From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
in the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
S CUT DEPTH FOR W1DTH Depth of each cut in the grooving tool width
direction radius value, positive value COPY
K CUT END POS1T10N [CENTER] Cuts both of the ńght and 1eft side
faces of a groove evenly in
fınishing.
[CORNER] : Cuts one side face and the entire
bottom successively then cuts the
other side face only in fınishing.
COPY _
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surtace when fınishing is completed radius value,
positive value
Remark1 This item is displayed only when
[CORNER] is selected as a cutting end
position. The default value is 0.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter No. 27177
mìnimum clamp value , the system ı
sets the data as an ìnitial value. J
- 530 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES [NG
DETAIL
Data ítem Meanin
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axís Cut dírection,
[-X] : Cuts in the X dírection.
[+χ] ; Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark Thís data ítem ís enable when the ι
rameter = 1. COPY
Too1 path
Groove roughíng and fınishing aгe contínued, using the same too1. See
respectíve descńptions about the tool path for details of roughíng and
fınishíng.

ι

ι
- 531 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874ENl05
End face roughing and finishíng: G1135
IFJOI CUNI СІЈТ COHD. ØετяІι F4łCÉ PτJS41І
ŚIUĚ F1N1sH AMOElkT С=
BOTTOη FINISfl AMT. І
RTuJGN FEEDRpTE
FINISN FEE1ıRATE
PECkING u= гεcκІи6
PECκING CtJT ЛεPTH 0=- --
RfTTE OF C1JT ØTH У.
RETURN яH0Ј1λiT U r
IH kÆi 1L IиCІł
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. positive
value
B TOOL VИDTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radius va1ue,
ositive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving too1.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, ít is not necessary to dispiay the tab
TOOL COND.
--- CUT COND. ------ -_-_
Data item Meanín
C S1DE F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allowance for the side faces of a groove.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
va1ue
D BOTTOM F1N1SH AMT. Finishing allowance for the bottom of a groove.
The blank is regarded as O. radius value, positive
value
F ROUGH FEEDRATE Feedrate for roughing in the tool axis direction
ositive va1ue
E F1N1SH FEEDRATE Feedrate for fınishin ositive value
W PECKING [NOTH1N] : Does not perform pecking in cutting
for grooving initial value .
[PECKIN] : PerForms pecking in cutting for
roovin .
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut in the tool axis direction peг pecking
operation radius value, positive value
Remark This data item is ìndicated on1y when
[PECKIN] ís selected for PECKING
- 532 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change
rate in steps of 1 . A second depth of cut and
subsequent ones are sequentially multiplíed Ьy a
specifıed change rate. The defauit is 100 ,
meaning that the depth of cut remains unchanged.
1 to 200, positive value COPY
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cuttíng
surface after each cut by pecking. radíus value,
ositive value COPY

1
DETAIL
Data item Meanín
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and
a machining start point approach point in the
Z-axis direction radius va1ue, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27176,
the system sets the data as an initial
value.
P DWELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. in seconds, positive value
COPY
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z-+X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
in the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[X-iZ] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
in the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
S CUT DEPTH FOR W1DTH Depth of each cut in the grooving tool width
direction radius value, positive value COPY
K CUT END POS1T10N [CENTER] : Cuts both of the right and 1eft side
faces of a groove evenly in
fınishing.
[CORNER] : Cuts one side face and the entire
bottom successively then cuts the
other side face only in fınishing.
COPY
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Dístance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface when finíshing is completed radius value,
positive value
Remark1 This item ís dísplayed only when
[CORNER] is selected as a cutting end
position. The default value ís O.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter No.
27177, the system sets the data as an
initial value.
- 533 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 8-63874ENю5
Too1 path
Groove roughíng and fıníshing are continued, using the same too1. See
respectíve descriptions about the tool path for detaíls of rougØg and
finísØg.

- 534 -
Bfi3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Outer surface finíshing: G1136

v І и иІЈtЕкa Vмtи, VRЕυ, ІиcнЛмІи, ІиcØVэ
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. ositive va1ue
B TOOL W1DTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radius value, positive
value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving too1.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
F FEED RATE Feedrate for fınishing in the tool axis direction
ositive vaiue
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and a
machining start point approach point in the Z-axis
direction radius value, positive va1ue
Remark By referring to the parameter No 27176
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an ınitiai value.
P DWELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. in seconds.. posıtive value
COPY
- ;ıJ-
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-6З874EN/05
CUT COND.
Data ítem _ _ _ Meaníng _
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z >Xj From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial va1ue
[X >Z] From the current position to the
machining start poìnt, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in tńe
X-axis direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions
K CUT END POS1T10N [CENTER] Cuts both of the right and left side
faces of a groove evenly in finishing.
[CORNER] : Cuts one síde face and the entire
bottom successively then cuts the
other sìde face on1y in finishing.
COPY
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface when fınishing is completed radìus value,
positive value
Remark1 This item is displayed on1y wiıen
[CORNER] is selected as a cutting end
position. The default value is O.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter No. 27177
minímum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1. COP J
- 536 -
6-63874ENl05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Too1 path
Cutting end posítíon [CENTER] Cutting end posítíon [CORNER]
<1> The tool moves to the position cut-ín start posítion + clearance
L, M Ьy rapid traverse.
<2> If [CENTER] ís specífıed as the cutting end position, the tool
cuts іn one of the groove wa11s and continues cuttíng to the center
іn the Z-axís dírection of the groove at the frnishing feedrate.
After retractíng in the X-axís dírectíon, the tool performs the
same cutting operatíon for the other groove wa11.
<3> If [CORNER] is specífied as the cuttíng end poínt, the tool cuts
іn to the bottom from the wa11 in the -Z-axis d vection, and
retracts by a return clearance іn the X- and Z-axis directions аnd
then in the X-axís d vection. After thís, the tool starts cutting
from the other groove wa11 аnd contínues cuttíng to the edge of
the bottom, and then retracts by a return cleaтаnce in the X- and
Z-axís d vectíons.
<4> The tool moves to the posítion cut-ín start point + clearance L
іn the X-axís d vection by rapid traverse.
- 537 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874ENN5
lnner surface fínishíng: G1137
TOOL COND. CUT COND.
FEED RRTE F ;i
CLEpRRNΓΣ L-r
DWÉ L ι P=Г
ЯPROcн 110тЈΠN z=x-ï2 Øù
CUT END POSITlΠN K=І
ESCAPE fК1ΠUЫT V=j
CllT DEPTH DIRECTIUN R=f
Y IN NUMERL S. Cltl1/M1Н, MMıREV INCHıMIN INcH,REU
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin _
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. ositive value
B TOOL w1DTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radíus value, positive
value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE lmaginary tool nose position of a groovıng too1. -
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dìsplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND. _
Data ítem Meanin
F FEED RATE Feedrate for fınishing in the tool axis direction
ositive vatue
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and a
machining start point approach point in the Z-axis
direction radius value. positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27176
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.
P DWELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. in seconds, positive value
COPY
- 53 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanín
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z-yX] : From the current position to the
ı machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then ın the
X-axis direction.
[X Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
K CUT END POS1T10N [CENTER] : Cuts both of the right and 1eft side
faces of a groove evenly in fınishing.
[CORNER] : Cuts one side face and the entire
bottom successively then cuts the
other side face on1y in fınishing.
COPY
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface when fınishing is completed radius value,
positive value
Remarkl This item is displayed only when
[CORNER] is selected as a cutting end
position. The default value is O.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter No. 27177
minimum clamp value , the system sets
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction.
[-X] : Cuts in the X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enab1e when the
arameter = 1. COPY
- 539 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-63874EN/05
Too1 path
V
F`
F;
, τ
L L
Cutting end Øsitíon [CENTER] Cutting end posítíon [CORNER]
<1> The tool moves to the position cut-in start posítíon + clearance
L, M Ьy rapid traverse.
<2> If [CENTER] is specifıed as the cuttíng end positíon, the tool
cuts ín one of the groove wa11s and contínues cuttíng to the center
in the Z-axís dírectíon of the groove at the finishing feedrate.
After retractíng in the X-axís d vectíon, the tool performs the
sarne cutting operation for the other groove wa11.
<3> If [CORNER] is specified as the cutting end point, the tool cuts
in to the bottom from the wa11 ín the -Z-axís d vectíon, and
retracts by a return cleaτаnce іn the X- and Z-axís directíons and
then ín the X-axís dírection. After thís, the tool starts cuttíng
from the other groove wa11 аnd contínues cutting to the edge of
the bottom, and then retracts by a return cleaгаnce in the X- and
Z-axís d vectíons.
<4> The tool retracts to the positíon cut-ín start poínt + clearance
L іn the X-axís direction.
<5> The tool moves to the positíon cut-ín start posítíon + clearance
M in the Z-axis dírection by rapid traverse and then is pulled
out from the workpíece.
- 540 -
в-εзв74εNıo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
End face finishing: G1138
I H L c0Нв.cuт CОНº. 1εAØ POsIrf
FEEll RATE F
CLEARANGE L=f
DWELL P=Г
APROCN MΠTTOы Ğ=ј->К MOV
CüT END POSITI N K=Г
ESCfłPE At10UNT v=f
Y IN Niλ HM/REV. IHCH/MIH> INCN/REV
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanín
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a grooving too1. ositive value
B TOOL w1DTH Too1 width of a grooving tool radius value, positive
value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving too1.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordínarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to dísplay the tab
TOOL COND.
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meanin
F FEED RATE Feedrate for fınishing in the tool axis direction
ositive value
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and a
machining start point approach point in the Z-axis
direction radius value, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27176
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial vaiue.
P DWELL Dwe11 time applicable when the tool reaches the
bottom of a groove. in seconds, positive value
COPY
- 541 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
CUT COND.
Data ítem Meaning
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z >X] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis direction. initial value
[X >Z] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves in
the Z-axis direction and then in the
X-axis directíon.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the
machining start point, the tool moves
simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
K CUT END POS1T10N [CENTER] Cuts both of the right and 1eft side
faces of a groove evenly in finishing.
[CORNER] : Cuts one side face and the entire
bottom successively then cuts the
other side face only in fınishing.
COPY
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting
surface when fınishing is completed radius value,
positive value
Remark1 This item is displayed on1y when
[CORNER] is selected as a cutting end 1
position. The default value is O.
Remark2 By referring to the parameter No. 27177 Í
minimum clamp value , the system sets
the data as an initial value.

- 542 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Too1 path
Cuttíng end posítíon [CENTER] Cuttíng end posítíon [CORNER]
<1> The tool moves to the posítion cut-ín start posítíon + cleaгance
L, M Ьy rapid traverse.
<2> If [CENTER] is specífıed as the cuttíng end posítíon, the tool
cuts ín oпe of the groove wa11s and continues cuttíng to the center
ín the X-axís dírectíon of the groove at the finishing feedrate.
After retractíng ів the Z-axis dírection, the tool performs the
sØe cutting operatíon for the other groove wa11.
<3> If [CORNER] ís specified as the cuttíng end poínt, the tool cuts
in to the bottom from the wa11 in the +X-axis dírectíon, and
retracts by a return clearance in the X- and Z-axis directions and
then in the Z-axis dírectíon. After thís, the tool starts cutting from
the other groove wa11 and contínues cuttíng to the edge of the
bottom, and then retracts by a return clearance ín the X- and
Z-axís d vections.
<4> The tool moves to the posítíon cut-ín start poínt + cleaгаnce
M іn the Z-axis dírection by rapid traverse.
- 543 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Fixed Form Fígure Blocks for Turning Grooving
Outer norma1 groove: G1470 ZX p1ane
C 1; , . . ..
PQS. ıSIZE CØNER [ЧF]RЕPEйT
8й5E POINT SETTING U---
X __
BйθE POIЧT К
BRSE POINT 2
DEPTH DIRECTIΩN P=ј- К S ll
DEPTH L4
WlDTH D
-_ ECT suT 1ЕіY.
PO5./s1ZE
Data ítem Meanín
U BASE PO1NT SETTING [+Z] : Sets the base point in the +Z direction.
initial value
- : Sets the base point in the -Z direction.
X BASE PO1NT X X coordinate of the reference position of a groove
Z BASE PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the reference position of a groove
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Depth direction,
[-X] : Depth is in the X direction.
[+X] : Depth is in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1.
L DEPTH Groove de th radius value, positive value
D W1DTH Groove width radius value, роѕіtіvе value
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. is enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
CORNERINFO
Data ítem Meanín
A CORNER TYPE-1 For corner 1 of the reference position
[NOTHIN] : Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifles chamfering.
ARC : S ecifıes corner roundin .
B CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comeг radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] ìs selected for
CORNER TYPE-1.
- 544 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CORNER 1NF0
Data ítem Meanín
E CORNER TYPE-2 For corner 2
[NOTHIN] : Specifles neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initıal value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifies corner roundin .
F CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comeг radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when
Ì [CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-2.
1 CORNER TYPE-3 For corner 3
[NOTHIN] : Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial va1ue .
1
[CHAMFR] : Specifles chamfering.
ARC : S ecifles coгпeг roundin .
J CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comeг radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y vdhen
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-3.
Q CORNER TYPE-4 For coгпeг 4
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifles chamfering.
ARC : S ecifles corner roundin .
R CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comer radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-4.
REPEAT
Data ítem Meanin
M GROOVE NUMBËR Number of grooves of the same flgure to be
machined. The blank is regarded as 1. positive
value
S P1TCH Distance between the reference positions of two
ad acent grooves radius value, positive value
W P1TCH DIRECTION [-Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the -Z direction initial value .
[+Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +Z direction.
- 545 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Outer trapezoidai groove: G1471 ZX piane
і:
P05./SIZE 1CORHER INF]BOTTOH INΓ]REPERT
HA5E POINT ѕЕTTING U=о а і -
BRSE POINTfК> К
BRSE P01нT 2 Z
DEPTH DIRECTION
DEPTH
W7 DTH
sØT KEY.
FO ./s1ZE
Data ítem Meanin
U BASE PO1NT SETTING [+Z] : Sets the base point in the +Z direction.
initial value
- : Sets the base point in the -Z direction.
X BASE PO1NT X X coordinate of the reference position of a groove
Z BASE PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the reference position of a groove
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Depth direction,
[-X] : Depth is in the X direction.
[+X] : Depth is in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter No.27100Ø = 1.
L DEPTH Groove de th radius value, positive value
D W1DTH Groove width radius value, positive value
CORNERINFO
Data ítem Meanín
A CORNER TYPE-1 For corner 1 of the reference position
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neìther chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifıes corner roundin .
B CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or coмeг radius radius value,
positive value
Remark Thìs data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-1.
E CORNER TYPE-2 For coгпeг 2
[NOTHIN] : Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifies corner roundin .
F CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comeг radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-2. _J
- 546 -
6-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CORNER 1NF0
- --
Data ítem Meanín
1 CORNER TYPE-3 For corner 3
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Speciбes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifies corner roundin .
J CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comeг radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-3.
Q CORNER TYPE-4 For coгneг 4
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : Ѕресіfіеѕ coгпeг roundin .
R CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comer radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-4.
BOTTOM 1NF0
Data ítem ΛAeaпіπ
H BOTTOM TYPE [W1DTH] : Specifles the difference between the
groove entry of each side face and
the width of the groove bottom initial
value .
[ANGLE] : Specifies the angle of a side face of a
roove.
K BOTTOM S1ZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side
face on the reference position side and the width
of the groove bottom when [W1DTH] is specifıed
radius value, positive value .
1nclination angle of the side face on the reference
position side when [ANGLE] ìs specifıed positive
value .
The blank is re arded as 0 for both.
V BOTOM S1ZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side
face on the side opposite to the reference posítion
side and the width of the groove bottom when
[W1DTH] is specifıed radius value, positive value .
1nclination angle of the sìde face on the side
opposite to the reference position side when
[ANGLE] is specifled positive value .
The blank is re arded as 0 for both.
- 547 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
1
_ REPEAT ,
Data item Meaniin
M GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves of the same figure to be
machined. The blank is regarded as 1. positive
value
S P1TCH Dístance between the reference positions of two
adacent grooves radius va1ue, positive value
W P1TCH DIRECTION [-Z] Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the -Z direction initial value .
[+Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +Z direction.
J




1

i

- 548 -
в-63в74ENı05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
lnner normal groove: G1472 ZX plane
POS.ıstZE coαнεR і1.В αεPERт
вASE POINT sετтτH u=І і
BASE P0IHTĆК К=
BRSE POIHT 2
DEPIH DIRECTIФI P-+К S1D
DEPT H L
WIDTH
јЅЕLЕСТ SOFT KEY.

Data item Meanín
U BASE PO1NT SETTING [+Z] : Sets the base point in the +Z direction.
initial value
- : Sets the base point in the -Z direction.
X BASE PO1NT X X coordinate of the reference position of a groove
Z BASE PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the reference position of a groove
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Depth direction,
[-X] : Depth is in the X direction.
[+X] : Depth is in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = І.
L DEPTH Groove de th radius value, positive value
D 1N1DTH Groove width radius value, positive value
CORNERINFO
Data ítem Meanín
A CORNER TYPE-1 For coгneг 1 of the reference position
[NOTHIN : Specìfıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding ìnitial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecìfıes coгпeг roundin .
B CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comeг radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-1.
E CORNER TYPE-2 For coгпeг 2
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neither chamfering nor
corner rounding ìnitial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecıfies corner roundin .
F CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or coгпeг radìus radìus value,
posìtíve value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-2.
- 549 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
CORNER 1NF0
Data ítem Meanín
1 CORNER TYPE-3 For corner 3
[NOTHIN] Specifies neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initíal value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifles corner roundin .
J CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comer radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
Ì
CORNER TYPE-3. _ _
Q CORNER TYPE-4 For cдmeг 4 1
[NOTHIN] : Specifles neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial va1ue .
[CHAMFR] : Specifles chamfering.
ARC : S ecifles corner roundin . λ
R CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comer radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-4.
İ REPEAT
Data ítem Meanín
M GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves of the same 5gure to be 1
machined. The blank is regarded as 1. positive i ,
value

S P1TCH Distance between the reference positions of two
adacent grooves radius value, positive value λ
W P1TCH DIRECTION [-Z] Places a second and subsequent grooves 1
J in the -Z direction initial value .
[+Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +Z direction. Э


İ
i
Э
1

Λ
1

- 550 -
в-6зв7aεNıo5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
lnner trapezoídal groove: G1473 ZX plane
і,
P05. /5I2Е ]CORNER INF BOTTOM INF]REPEAF
BASE POINT sETT1NG 0=
HRSE PO HT X
:-BFl;E POIНTίϊλ Z=I
DEPTN DiRECT10N P=+x sID
>i DĚPTN L=I
WT DT H D=
ELECT sØT KEY.
POS.Is_IZE _
Data ítem Meanin
U BASE PO1NT SETTING [+Z] : Sets the base point in the +Z direction.
initial value
-Z : Sets the base point in the -Z direction.
X BASE PO1NT X X coordinate of the reference position of a groove
Z BASE PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the reference position of a groove
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Depth direction,
[-X] : Depth is in the X direction.
[+X] : Depth is in the +X direction.
Remark This data item is eпaЬ1e when the
arameter = 1.
L DEPTH Groove de th radius value, positive value
D VVIDTH Groove width radius value, роѕіtіvе value
CORNERINFO
Data ítem Meanin
A CORNER TYPE-1 For corner 1 of the reference position
[NOTHIN] : Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial va1ue .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifıes corner roundin .
B CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or corner radius radius value,
posìtive value
Remark This data item is ìndicated oп1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-1.
E CORNER TYPE-2 For corner 2
[NOTHIN] : Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecìfıes corner roundin .
F CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or corner radius radius value,
positive va1ue
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE 2
- 551 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
CORNER 1NF0
_ Data ítem Meaníng _
1 CORNER TYPE-3 For corner 3
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neither chamfering пoг
coгпeг roundıng initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifies chamfering.
ARC : S ecifies corner roundin .
J CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comer radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for 1
CORNER TYPE-3.
- --- - ------- -
O CORNER TYPE-4 For coгneг 4
[NOTHIN] Specifies neither chamfering пoг
corner rounding initial value .
ı [CHAMFR] : Specifies chamfering.
_ ARC : S cifıes coгпeг roundin . Ì
R CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comeг radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-4.
BOTTOM 1NF0
Data ítem Meanin
H BOTTOM TYPE [W1DTH] : Specifıes the difference between the
groove entry of each side face and the
width of the groove bottom initial
value .
[ANGLE]: Specifıes the angle of a side face of a
roove.
K BOTTOM S1ZE/ANGLE Dıfference between the groove entry of the side
face on the reference position side and the width
of the groove bottom when [И/1DTH] is specifıed
radius value. positive value .
1nclination angle of the side face on the reference
position side when [ANGLE] is specifıed positive
1 value .
The blank is re arded as 0 for both.
M ı BOTOM SfZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side
face on the side opposite to the reference position
side and the width of the groove bottom when
[ИΠDTH] is specifıed radius value, positive value .
1nclination angle of the sìde face on the side
opposite to the reference position side when
[ANGLE] is specifıed positive value .

The blank is re arded as 0 for both.
1

- 552 -
B-63874EN/o5 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
REPEAT
Data ítem Meanín
M GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves of the same flgure to be
machined. The blank is regarded as 1. posítive
va1ue
S P1TCH Distance between the reference positions of tию
ad acent grooves radius value. positive value
W P1TCH DIRECTION [-Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the -Z direction initial value .
[+Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +Z direction.
- 3-
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
End face normal groove: G1474 ZX p1aпe

pos. ısτϊε ]caкεlER τиf1κεPεAт ]
Paτит sETττи6 u=о:.і
Poіитaэ x=ј -
вRSf Poτитcz> 2=1 -
DEPTH DIREçTIUN P=-z D1REC71
DEPTH L=ј J
WIDTH D=j
ELECT saFT КЕt.

Data ítem Meanin
U BASE PO1NT SETTING [+X] : Sets the base point in the +X direction.
initial value
-X Sets the base point in the -X direction.
X BASE PO1NT X X coordinate of the reference position of a groove
Z BASE PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the reference position of a groove
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to Z axis Depth direction,
[-Z] Depth is in the Z direction.
[+Z] : Depth is in the +Z direction.
Remark This data item is enable when the
arameter = 1.
L DEPTH Groove de th radius va1ue, positive value
D W1DTH Groove width radius value, positive value
CORNERINFO
Data ítem Meanin
A CORNER TYPE-1 For corner 1 of the reference position
[NOTHIN] : Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamferíng.
ARC S ecifıes corner roundin .
B CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comer radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-1.
E CORNER TYPE-2 For coгпeг 2
[NOTHIN] : Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifıes corner roundin .
F CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or corner radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated on1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-2.
- 554 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CORNERINFO
Data ítem Meanín
1 CORNER TYPE-3 For corner 3
[NOTHIN] : Specifles neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifles chamfering.
ARC : S ecifıes corner roundin .
J CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or corner radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-3.
Q CORNER TYPE-4 For corner 4
[NOTHIN] : Specifles neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifles corner roundin .
R CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or coмeг radius radius value,
positive va1ue
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-4.
REPEAT
Data ítem Meanín
M GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves of the same fıgure to be
machined. The blank is regarded as 1. positive
value
S P1TCH Distance between the reference positions of two
aďacent grooves radius value, positive value
W P1TCH DIRECTION [-X] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the -X direction initial va1ue .
[+X] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +X dìrection.
- 5-
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
End face trapezoidai groove: G1475 ZX piane
Імε]кε ε., :- , , . PØ.ısτ CURHEP іиг воτтoм
вRSE PoІИт SEτтІиG uѕО:аІ,
вASE PΩIHT X7 Ё4-
вpѕЕ PΠINт 2] Z4
ØPTH DIRECHOH P -Z DIRECTI
DEPTH lі
WlDTH D
ELECT SOł т KEY.
FOS./ lZE
Data ítem Meaníng
U BASE PO1NT SETTING [+X] : Sets the base point in the +X directıon.
initial value
-X : Sets the base point in the -X direction.
X BASE PO1NT X X coordinate of the reference position of a groove
Z BASE PO1NT Z Z coordinate of the reference position of a groove
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to Z axis Depth direction,
[-Z] : Depth is in the Z direction.
[+Z] : Depth is in the +Z direction.
Remark This data item is enab1e when the
arameter = 1.
L DEPTH Groove de th radius value, positive value
D W1DTH Groove width radius va1ue, positive value
CORNERINFO
Data ítem Meanin
A CORNER TYPE-1 For corner 1 of the reference position
[NOTHIN] Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifles corner roundin .
B CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or corner radius radius value,
positive value
Remark This data item is indìcated on1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-1. _
E CORNER TYPE-2 For coгпeг 2
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neither chamfering nor
corner rounding inìtial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifıes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifıes corner roundin .
F CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or corner radius radius value,
positive value
Remark Thìs data item is indicated on1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-2. _ J
- 556 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
CORNER 1NF0
Data ítem Meanin
1 CORNER TYPE-3 For corner 3 i
[NOTHIN] : Specifıes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifes chamfering.
ARC : S ecifıes coгпeг roundin .
J CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or corner radius radius value,
positive va1ue
Remark This data item is indicated only when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-3.
Q CORNER TYPE-4 For corner 4
[NOTHIN] : Specifes neither chamfering nor
corner rounding initial value .
[CHAMFR] : Specifes chamfering.
ARC : Ѕресіfіеѕ corner roundin .
R CORNER S1ZE Chamfer amount or comer radius radius va1ue,
positive value
Remark This data item is indicated oп1y when
[CHAMFR] or [ARC] is selected for
CORNER TYPE-4.
BOTTOM 1NF0
Data ítem Meanín
H BOTTOM TYPE [W1DTH] : Specifes the difference between the
groove entry of each side face and the
width of the groove bottom initial
value .
[ANGLE]: Specifıes the angle of a side face of a
roove.
K BOTTOM S1ZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side
face on the reference position side and the width
of the groove bottom when [VVIDTH] is specifıed
radius value, positive value .
1nclination angle of the side face on the reference
position side when [ANGLE] is specifıed positive
value .
The blank is re arded as 0 for both.
V BOTOM S1ZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side
face on the side opposite to the reference position
side and the width of the groove bottom when
[W1DTH] is specifıed radius value, positive value .
1nclination angle of the side face on the side
opposite to the reference position side when
[ANGLE] is specifıed positive value .
The blank is re arded as 0 for both.
ь
- 557 -
E

2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-б3874EN/05
_ REPEAT
Data ítem _ Meaníng
M GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves of the same fıgure to be
machìned. The blank is regarded as 1. positive
value
S P1TCH Distance between the reference positions of two
ad acent grooves radius va1ue, positive value
W P1TCH DIRECTION [-X] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the -X direction initial value .
[+χ] : Places a second and subsequent grooves
in the +X dìrection.
- 558 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
THREADING
1 Machíníng Type Blocks for Threadíng
External: G1140
cUTTING METHOD W=
FINISH RИФ1н1 C
N1 1BER OF F I н I SHI NG K=
ct1T TYPE s=
cUT DEPTH NUHBER P=
cuт DEPTH 0=
lnternal: G1141
IOOL COHB, сІІт c0иВ. [пετAτι
cuтτІиu METHOD W=
FIHlsH anouит c=
NUMDER OF F[NISHING K=Γ
cUT тYPE 5=
CUI DEPIH иuивER P=Г
cuτ DCPIH R= --
TOOL COND.
Data ítem Meanin
R NOSE RADIUS Too1 nose radius of a threadin too1. ositive value
A NOSE ANGLE Too1 an 1e of a threadin tool sitive value
J 1MAGINARY TOOL NOSE 1ma irar tool nose position of a threading too1.
NOTE
1 Tab `TOOL COND. ís enabled when bit 0 TLG of
parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the
tab of `TOOL DATA in Too1 Offset window.
Therefore, ít ís not necessary to display the tab
TOOL COND.
- 559 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63 74EN/05
CUT COND.
j Data item Meaníng
W CUTTING METHOD [] Constant amount of cut, one-edge cutting
[BOTH A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge cutting
ı [] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge zigzag thread
cutting
[] : Constant depth of cut, one-edge cutting
[BOTH D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge cutting
[] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge zigzag thread
cutting
COPY
C F1N1SH AMOUNT Finishing allovwance for threading in the X-axis direction. The
blank is re arded as O. radius value, positive value
K NUMBER OF F1N1SH1NG Number of fınishing operations. positíve va1ue
COPY
S CUT TYPE [NUMBER] : Specifıes threading by the number of cuts.
[DEPTH] Specifıes threading by the fırst amount of cut.
COPY
P CUT DEPTH NUMBER Number of cuts for rough threading 999 max., positive value
Remark The number of fınishing cuts is not included. 1n the
case of both-edge zigzag thread cutting, be sure to
specify an even number of cuts. 1f an odd number of
cuts are specifıed, only one additional both-edge
zigzag thread cutting operation is performed. This
data item is indicated only when [NUMBER] is
selected.
Q CUT DEPTH Depth of cut per rough threading operation radius value,
positive value
Remark The number of cuts is determined by the depth of cut
and the cuttin method.
DETAIL
Data item Meanín
Z APROCH MOT10N [Z >X] : From the current position to the machining start
point, the tool moves in the Z-axis direction and
then in the X-axis direction. lnitial value for
external thread
[X >Z] : From the current positìon to the machining start
point, the tool moves in the Z-axis direction and
then in the X-axis direction. lnitial value for
internal thread
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the machining start
point, the tool moves simultaneously in the X- and
Z-axís directions. _
D SURFACE CLEARANCE Distance between a thread crest and machining start point
approach point in the X-axis direction radius value, positive
va1ue
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27156 mìnimum
clamp value , the system sets the data as an initial
value.
- 560 -
B-б3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
DETAIL
Data item Meanín
L ENTRANCE CLEARANCE Distance between a thread start point and machining start point
approach point in the Z-axis direction radius va ue, positive
va ue
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27157 mínimum
c amp va ue , the system sets the data as an initial
value
M EX1T CLERANCE Distance between a thread end point and threading operation
end point in the Z-axis direction. radius va ue, positive value
Remark By referring to the parameter No. 27158 minimum
clamp va ue , the system sets the data as aп ínitial
va ue.
i Y CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X dìrection.
Remark This data item is enable when the parameter
= 1. COPY
Too1 path
External-thread cutting nternal-thread cutting
i <1> The tool moves to the position thread start point + thread
surface clearance D in the X-axís direction and position thread
ι entry clearance L in the Z-axis dírection by rapid traverse.
ι <2> Threadíng is performed using a specífied cutting method. The
ε end poínt of threading in the Z-axis directíon is the thread exit
clearance apart from the tbread end poínt.
<3> If [NUMBER] is specífıed as a cut-in type, threadíng ís
performed as many tímes as the [NUMBER] value. If [DEPTH]
ís specified, this amount ís used in the fırst cut-ín and threading
ís performed until the specífied thread fıgure ís obtaíned.
<4> After a11 portíons are cut, the tool moves to the posítíon cut-in
start position + clearance L in the X-axís dírectíon at the rapid
traverse rate.
ε
- 561 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
- See the followíng expansions for details of the cuttíng methods.
[] : Constant amount of cut, one-edge cuttíng
[BOTH A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge cuttíng
,

H=Heíght of thread crest, D=Amount of cut, u=Fíníshíng allowance
[] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge zígzag thread cuttíng
dn_2 = D sqrt n-2
d1 = D sqrt п-2 + sqrt n /2
d = D sqrt n
When the amount of cut ís smaller than the minimum amount of cut
parameter No. 27145 , the amount of cut is clamped to the minimum
amount of cut.
1
i


-562-
1

B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
[SIλ] : Constant depth of cut, one-edge cuttíng
ι
ł
[BOTH D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge cutting
[] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge zígzag thread cuttíng
NOTE
Depending on the mínímum amount of cut, the
specífıed number of cuts may be excessíve. 1n
such a case, threadíng ís performed by a number
of cuts less than the specífıed number of cuts.
The number of cuts actually done may differ from
the specífıed number of cuts due to a calculatíon
eггoг.
- 563 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPE5 B-6387dEN/05
Fixed Form Figure Blocks for Threading
General-purpose thread: G1460 ZX plane
Ma1e screw
.,

THREAD TYPE Ч-MRLC SLREW
START POІнT<К> К-
START POlHTC2> ϊ=Γ-
LERD Lf
THREAD DEPTH H= -
END POINrCX A= -
END POIHTε2> I1=f -
ЕY IN НUІEØS.
Female screw
POs.ısC2ε l
THREQD ivPE іЈ=εεмλιε SCR
STRRT POINTCXi X=і -
STAR7 PiJIHT 2 Z=
LEAD L=
THREAD DEPTH H=і
END P01NT X:Σ R-
END POINT Z> H=ј
ЊсЕЃ I N NUMERfäs.

Data ítem Meanín
W THREAD TYPE [MALE] : To be selected when the external
thread is specifıed as threading type
[FEMALE] : To be selected when the internal thread
is s ecifıed as threadin t e _
X START PO1NT X X Ørdinate of a thread start point
Z START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of a thread start point
L LEAD Thread lead radius value, positive value
H THREAD DEPTH Thread depth radius value, positive value
Remark A thread depth is automatically calculated
b ressin CALC after in uttin a lead
A END PO1NT X X coordinate of a thread end point
B END PO1NT Z Z coordinate of a thread end point
NOTE
The thread depth of a general-purpose thread is
calculated from parameter No. 27150 external or
parameter No. 27151 internal and a thread 1ead.
- 564 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
Metríc thread: G1461 ZX p1ane
A metńc thread ís cut. 0n1y one straight thread ís macØed. Be sure to
set a tool angle of 60 degrees.
Ma1e screw
.,
Pos. ısτ2ε
TNREHD TYØ
TØEHD D1fk1ETER
5THRT P02HT<2
LEλD
LENGTH
THREØ DEPTN
Female screw
Pos.ısτzε
THRERD TYØ W-FEHRLE SCR
THRERD DI ЯмЕТЕR D=јІ
STNRT FЮІИT LEND L
LEN6TH
TNREAD DEPTN HЁ
PO ./s1ZE
Data ítem Meanín
W THREAD TYPE [MALE] : To be selected when the external
thread is specifıed as threading type
[FEMALE] : To be selected when the internal thread
is s ecifıed as threading type
D THREAD DIAMETER Thread diameter ositive value
Z START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of a thread start point
L LEAD Thread lead radius value, positive value
M LENGTH Thread 1en th radius value. positive value
H THREAD DEPTH Thread depth radius value, positìve value
Remark A thread depth is automatically calculated
by pressing CALC after inputting a 1ead.
NOTE
The thread depth of a metric thread is calculated
from parameter No. 27152 external or parameter
No. 27153 internal and a thread 1ead.
- 565 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в 6з87aεN/os
Unífíed thread: G1462 ZX plane
A unífied thread ís cut. Øy one straíght thread ís machíned. For a
unífied thread. the number of thread crests/inch ís used ínstead of a
thread 1ead. Be sure to set a tool angle of 60 degrees.
Ma1e screw
.,
ιюs. ısızε
THREAD TY Σ WНАLЕ SCREU
THREAD D14 1ETFJč B і
STØT Po[NTCZ3 2= -
THREAD łä1n8ER L
LENGTH M=
THREND DEPTH H
Female screw
.,
иos.ısızε
THREpD TYPE Ч- ĚnRLE 5CR
THREAD D1FlΓIETER D=Іі
START POlHT Z 2
THØRD NUHBER L
LEHGTH H=
THRERD DEPTH Hј
[ CEY ....і ы ...FйA RfäS.

Data ítem Meanín
W THREAD TYPE [MALE] : To be selected when the external
thread is specifıed as threading type
[FEMALE] : To be selected when the internal thread
is s ecifıed as threadin t e
D THREAD DIAMETER Thread diameter ositìve value
Z START PO1NT Z Z coordinate of a thread start point
L THREAD NUMBER Number of thread crests per inch
M LENGTH Thread 1en th radius value, positive value
H THREAD DEPTH Thread depth radius value, positìve value
Remark A thread depth is automatically calculated
Ьy pressing [CALC] after ìnputting a thread
number.
NOTE
The thread depth of a unífıed thread is ca[culated
from parameter No. 27152 external or parameter
No. 27153 internal and a thread number.
- 566 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
PT thread: G1463 tapered thread for tubes, ZX plane
A PT thread tapered thread for tubes ís cut. 0n1y one tapered thread
tapered by degrees ís machíned. Be sure to set a tool angle of 55
degrees. The taper figuтe of an external thread male thread ís such that
the end face of a blank represents a mínor díameter portion. The taper
figure of an ínternal thread female thread ís such that the end face of a
blank represents a majoτ díameter portíon.
Ma1e screw
.Pos..sızε . . .
THREQD TYPE Ч=HRLL SCREU
THRERD D7HHETER D- ^íť
1STØT POLHI Z 2=1
; HTRL E E R ? D IGN TH UHSER M=І
THREAD DEPTH H=Г- --
Female screw
P05. ıSτZE 1
THREØ TYPE W FEHRLE SCR
THREHD D[HHETER Ø
STHRT POINT Z 2=i
1 THØHD NtN1BER L
LENGTH H=
THREAD DEPTH
EY 1H Nlλ1ER1 5.
1

Data ítem Meanín
W THREAD TYPE [MALE] : To be selected when the external thread is
specifıed as threading type
[FEMALE] : To be selected when the ìnternal thread is
s ecifıed as threading type
D THREAD DIAMETER Thread diameter ositìve value
Z sTART PO1NT Z Z coordinate of a thread start point
ь L THREAD NUMBER Number of thread crests per inch
M LENGTH Thread 1en th radius value, positive value
H THREAD DEPTH Thread depth radius value, posìtive value
Remark A thread depth is automatically calculated by
ressin CALC after inputting a thread number.
NOTE
The thread depth of a PT thread is calculated from
parameter No. 27154 external or parameter No.
27155 internal and a thread number.
- 567 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 6-б3874EN/05
PF thread: G1464 para11e1 thread for tubes, ZX plane
A PF thread parallel thread lor tubes ís cut. 0n1y one straight thread ís
macØed. Be sure to set a tool angle of 55 degrees.
Ma1e screw
POs./SIZE 1
THRERD TYPE W=HRLE SCREW
THRERD DIRIIETER D=ІІ
STNRT POINTQ> Z=r
THRERD HU IBER L= -
LEN TH
THRERD DEPTH
EY I N FAlP1Еt S.
Female screw
.,
Pπs.ısızε 1
THRERD TYPE W-FEHRLE SCR
THRERD D[RHETER D=
STRRT P IH1 Z ϊ=1
THRERD HUHBER E=Γ
LEИ6TH M=j
THRERD DEPTH H=Г
KEY IN N1λ1ERi S.

Data ítem Meanin
W THREAD TYPE [MALE] : To Ø selected when the external thread ís
specífıed as threading type
[FEMALE] : To Ø selected when the ínternal thread ís
s ecífıed as threading tуре
D THREAD DIAMETER Thread díameter osítive value
Z START PO1NT Z Z Ørdinate of a thread start point
L THREAD NUMBER Number of thread crests per inch
M LENGTH Thread 1en th radius value, positive value
H THREAD DEPTH Thread depth radius value, positive va1ue
Remark A thread depth is automatically calculated by
pressing [CALC] after inputting a thread number. I
NOTE
The thread depth of a PF thread is calculated from
parameter No. 27154 external oг parameter No.
27155 internal and a thread number.
- ifi8 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES 2.TURNING
25 REAR END FACING BY TURNING
Rear End Facíng
By settíng bít 4 of parameter No. 27100 to 1, the input ítem FACE
POSITION ís displayed on the followíng menu. By enteríng this data,
rear end facíng ís enabled.
1. Ho1e machíníng Center drillíng : G1 ] 00
2. Ho1e machíníng Drílling : G 1101
3. Ho1e machiníng Tapping : G1 ] 02
4. Ho1e machiníng Reaming : G1 103
5. Ho1e machíníng Boring : 61 104
6. Turníng End face roughing : G1122
7. Turníng End face semifinishíng : Gl 125
8. Turning End face fmíshiııg : G1128
9. Turníng groove End face roughing : 61132
10. Turníng groove End face roughíng and finishíng : G1135
11. Turníng groove End face fmίshing : G 1138
Example Drillíng : G1101
fѕЕLЕс цłF7 KEY.
FACE POS1T
Data item Meanin
Y FACE POS1T10N [+FACE ]: References the figure below + end face .
ínìtial va1ue
[-FACE ]: References the fıgure below - end face .
- 569 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-sзвıaErυo5
Rafereпce φѕі9юП Reference nos,tion

- Deptfr

+ .z

мı нei ъ н
+end face - end face
Refeгeякe po іØ Reference posItion
, t
ĺ Deαh Depth ĺ-
+z
f f
Heıght Heighζ

- end face + end face
- 570 -
Bfi3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION
1
3
SLANT FACE MACHINING
COORDINATE CONVERSION
NOTE
To use slant face machining with MANUAL GU1DE
i, the option for the three-dimensional coordinate
conversion function is required.
For details, refer to the relevant manual issued by
the machine tool builder.


Γ
- 57 І -
FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05

SUPPORTABLE MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Wíth IVlANUAL GUIDE í, slant face machíØg, which ís a mixture of
table rotatíon and tool rotatíon, can be specified.
Those parameters that support a machíne configuratíon used must be set
beforehand.
1 Mixture type
This type of machíníng machínes a slant face by workpíece
rotatíon and tool rotatíon.
Horizontal type
Vertical type
NOTE
1t is assumed that the C-axis rotates about the
Z-axís, and the rotation center ís on the Z-axís.
Moreover, it is assumed that the B-axis rotates
about the Y-axís, and the rotatíon center ís on the
Y-axis.
- 572 -
B δ3874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION
SLANT FACE MACHINING COMMAND COORDINATE
CONVERSION
When slant face machíníng ís performed with MANUAL GUIDE i, a
slant face to be machíned must Ьe fırst specífied wíth thc coordinate
conversion command, then a machíníng program for míllíng to Ьe
performed must Ьe ínput.
Upon completíon of slant face machíníng, coordínate conversion
cancellatíon must be specífıed.
NOTE
S1ant face machining can be performed wíth the
following types of millíng a11 on the XY plane :
1. Ho1e machining
2. Facíng
З. Contouríng
4. Pocketíng
5. Grooving
Wíth MANUAL GU1DE i, the G code commands lísted below are
avaílable to enable coordinate conversíon for slant face machíning.
Coordínat,e conversíon
G1952 Direct ońgin specifıcatíon with the rotation
center oп the Y-axis
G1953 lndírect origin specifıcatíon with the rotation
Command center on the Y-axís
blαk G1954 Direι t ońgin specífıcation wíth the rotation
center on the Z-axís
G1955 lndirect ońgin specífication wíth the rotation
center on the Z-axís
G1959 Coordínate conversíon cancel
:
STRRT COORD CПНN

І-
2.INDIRECT ORI61Ч P01НT TYPE RXIS-Y
OR16IN P01НT TYPE RКIS-2
4.IHDIRECT ORτcτи Poτм TYPE HКIS-Z
5.COORDINRTE CONVERSION CHNCEL
TER SPECIFY METHOD Of CtkJVERS ON PUSN [OK].
-J73-
FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION CYCLE MACHINING TYPES в-sзв7aεNıo5
NOTE
G code for coordinate conversion can be selected
from the COORDINATE CONVERSION tab on
the milling start command menu displayed by
pressing [STARЛ on the milling menu .
Direct origin specificatíon wíth the rotatíon center on the Y-axís : G1952
A macØg surface rotates about the poínt reference poirIt that serves
as the new workpiece ońgin of the slant face.
COORD coNU
NEW UORK ORIGIN x U=1^
NEW WORI OR161N Y U=1
HEW WORK OR16IN Z wf
LpNT ANGLE R=
FCEY I Ы HUMERf S.
COORD cONVERSION
Data ítem Meanin
U NEW WORK OR1G1N X X coordinate of the work iece ori in of a slant face
V NEW WORK OR1G1N Y Y coordinate of the work iece oń in of a slant face
W NEW WORK OR1G1N Z Z Ørdinate of the wıırk iece ori in of a slant face
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle relative to the Z-axis. The CW
direction viewed from the plus direction of the
rotation axis is ositive. -90-R 90 .
-57-1-
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION
lndírect orígín specification with the rotation center on the Y-axis : G1953
A macbiniiig surface rotates about a specífied reference poínt, and the
workpíece ońgín of a slant face, that ís, a new machíníng surface, ís to be
specífied based on the dístance from the reference poínt
positive/negative va1ue .
COORD CO R11
RΣг. POiNT U
REF. POI HT 2 4=
NEW WORK OR16IN I=
NEW WORK OR761N Y J=
NEW WURK QR161N 2 K
SLANT łWGLE Rf
EY Н Má RALS.
COORD CONVERSION
Data ítem Meanín _
U REF. PO1NT X X coordinate of a reference point workpiece
Ørdinate s stem before rotation
W REF. PO1NT Z Z coordinate of a reference point workpiece
Ørdinate s stem before rotation
1 NEW WORK OR1G1N X X Ørdinate of the work iece ori in of a slant face
J NEW WORK OR1G1N Y Y coordinate of the work iece oń in of a slant face
K NEW WORK OR1G1N Z Z coordinate of the work iece oń in of a slant face
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle relative to the Z-axis. The CW
dírection viewed from the plus direction of the
rotation axis is positive. -90<_R_<90 .
- 575 -
FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-63874EN/05
Dírect origin specífícation with the rotatíon center on the Z-axís : G1954
The machíníng plane rotates about the new poínt reference poínt that
ís to become the workpiece ońgín of the XY p1ane.

COORD CONVERSION
Data ítem Meanín
U REF. PO1NT X X coordinate of a new work іece ori in
V REF. PO1NT Y Y coordinate of a пewvюгk iece ori in
W REF. PO1NT Z Z coordínate of a new work iece oń in
R SLANT ANGLE signed angle with respect to the X-axis. The CW
direction viewed from the plus rotatíon axis
directíon is positive -90 <_ R<_ 90 .
- 576 -
B-63874EN/05 CYCLE MACHINING TYPES FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION
lndírect origín specífícation with the rotatíon center on the Z-axís : G1955
The machiníng p1ane rotates about a specífied reference point. Define
the workpíece origín of the XY p1ane, which ís a new machíníng plane,
by specífyíng the dístance posítíve/negatíve va1ue from the reference
poínt.
..:.:
COORD CONU
REF. PO1NT К
REF. PO1NT Y
NEW WORK ORIGIN X I=i
NEW WORK ORIGIN Y
NEW WORK ORIGIN Z K-i
5LAN7 pNGLξ :
Γ
COORD CONVERSION
Data ítem Meanín ь
U REF. PO1NT X X coordinate of a reference point workpiece
coordinate s stem before rotation
l W REF. PO1NT Y Y coordinate of a reference point workpiece
coordinate s stem before rotation
1 NEW WORK OR1G1N X X coordinate of the work iece ori in of the slant
J NEW WORK OR1G1N Y Y coordinate of the work iece ori in of the slant
K NEW WORK OR1G1N Z Z coordinate of the work iece ori in of the slant
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle with respect to the Z-axis. The CW
direction viewed from the plus rotation axis
direction is positive -90 s R<_ 90 .

ι
ь
1
1
İ
`
`
- 577 -
FACE MACHINING COORDINATE CONVERSION CYCLE MACHINING TYPES B-б3874EN/05
Coordínate conversion cancei: G1959
After coordínate conversion is canceled, the tool moves to the entered
end poínt by rapíd traverse. If no end point ís specifed, the tool wí11
not move.

ca кεІ,
END POINT 1 х
END POTHT Y YжГ
END POINT Z
EY I N N11l RALS.
__ CANCEL
Data ítem Meanin
X END PO1NT X X coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid
traverse after coordinate conversion is canceled. 1f
this data is omitted, the tool wi11 not move.
Y END PO1NT Y Y coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid
traverse after coordinate conversion is canceled. 1f
this data is omitted, the tool wi11 not move.
Z END PO1NT Z Z coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid
traverse after coordinate conversion is canceled. 1f
this data is omitted, the tool wi11 not move.
- 578 -
1V. MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
FOR Seríes 16í/18i/21i ONLY




B-63874EN/05 MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS LATHE APPLICATION
1 MULT1-PATH LATHE APPLICATION
The multi-path lathe optíon ís required in this functíon.
Thís functíon corresponds to the following CNC control uníts.
2 CPU - 2-path lathe CNC , 2CPU - 3-path lathe CNC
NOTE
1 The multi-path lathe function is not supported for
the Seríes 30i.
2 The SET-UP Guidance functíon or the Too1
Management functíon ís unsupported ín thís
function.
3 Thís functíon cannot be used wíth the MANUAL
GU1DE i símulator for the personal computer.
- 581 -
LATHE APPLICATION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/05
PREPARATION
The following preparatíon ís needed in order to use thís multí-path
lathe applícatíon.
NOTE
When usíng the path selectíon soft key of Manual
Guide i, make a setting so that the reset key on the
MD1 panel is enabled for a11 paths bit 0 of
parameter No. 8100 ís 0 .
1f the reset key is enabled on a path-by-path basis,
bit 0 of parameter No. 8100 is 1 , the path
selected in the NC is reset regardless of which path
ís selected in Manua1 Guide i.
Machíne Configuration Settíng .
These parameters are set accoтdіng to the machíne configuration.
14702 1 0: No sub-spíndle ís províded.
1: A sub-spíndle ís províded.
14701 1 0: Too1 post 1 cannot be used wíth spíndle 2.
1: Too1 post 1 can be used wíth spíndle 2.
14701 2 0: Too1 post 1 ís placed above spíndle 1.
1: Too1 post 1 ís placed under spíndle 1.
14701 3 0: Too1 post 1 ís placed above spíndle 2.
1: Too1 post 1 ís placed under spíndle 2.
27401 0 0: Too1 post 2 cannot be used wíth spíndle 1.
1: Too1 post 2 can Ьe used with spíndle 1.
27401 1 0: Too1 post 2 cannot Ьe used wíth spíndle 2.
1: Too1 post 2 can be used wíth spíndle 2.
27401 2 0: Too1 post 2 ís placed above spíndle 1.
1: Too1 post 2 ís placed under spíndle 1.
27401 3 0: Too1 post 2 is placed above spíndle 2.
1: Too1 post 2 ís placed under spíndle 2.
27402 0 0: Too1 post 3 cannot Ьe used with spíndle 1.
1: Too1 post 3 cаn Ьe used wíth spíndle 1.
27402 1 0: Too1 post 3 cannot be used wíth spíndle 2.
1: Too1 post 3 cаn be used with spíndle 2.
27402 2 0: Too1 post 3 ís placed above spíndle 1.
1: Too1 post 3 ís placed under spíndle 1.
27402 3 0: Too1 post 3 ís placed above spíndle 2.
1: Too1 post 3 ís placed under spíndle 2.
14706 : D vectíons of the three basíc axes of spíndle 1
14706 : Dírectíons of the three basíc axes of spíndle 2
16 : Ríght-handed coordínate system, right =+Z, up =+X
17 : Ríght-handed coordínate system, right =-Z, up =+X
18 : Ríght-handed coordínate system, right =-Z, up =-X
19 : Right-handed coordínate system, right =+Z, up =-X
27400 0 0: Too1 post ís selectíon by the soflware key.
1: Too1 post ís selectíon by the pMC sígnal.
- 582 -
B-63874EN/05 MULT1-PATH LATHE LATHE APPLICATION
Set lcon for Selected Turret
The ícon dísplayed when tool path-1 or path-2 are selected is set by
the parameter.
27410 : ícon nØber when path-1 ís selected.
27411 : ícon nØber when path-2 ís selected.
27412 : icon nØber when path-3 ís selected.
Icon number list
ıcon
number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
іcoп ј ;
Icon
number 10 11 12 13 14 15
Icon
number 20 21 22 23 24 25
ícon _ _
Icon
number 30 31 32 33 34 35
іcon ђ ;

- 583 -
и
LATHE APPLICATION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 6-63874EN/05
OPERATIONS OF MULT1-PATH LATHE
1 Changíng Screens for Each Path
On the MANUAL GU1DE i for multi-path 1athe, screens and
operations are done on each path respectívely.
On its screen, the icon for selected path wí11 be dísplayed at the upper
right part.
Changing by a soft-key
On the each screen, CHPATH soft-key wí11 be dísplayed.
Press [CHPATH], the dísplayed turret wí11 be changed.
1n case of 2-path system : tuпet-1 > tuτret-2 > turret-1 >...
1n case of 3-path system :turret-1 > turret-2 > turret-3 > turret-1 >...
Changíng by a swítch on a machíne operator s pane1
Connected wíth the path selectíon signal HEAD,
ØD2 , change the display of MANUAL GU1DE i.
HEAD HEAD2 Dísplayed
Path number
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
NOTE
Select turret, dísplay returns to a basíc screen of
each mode when the system is changed
occasionally.
- 584 -
B-63874EN/05 MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS LATHE APPLICATION
ANIMATION FOR MULT1-PATH LATHE
The tool path and anímatíon for multí-path lathe are avaílable.
NOTE
1 VVhen machíning simulation is started, ít is
necessary to set MEM mode for a11 path.
2 Displaying is not done for the combination where
the parameter is set to the combination of the main
axis and the cutlery stand as ínvaliditv.
Too1 Path Drawíng Duríng Machíníng and Too1 Path
Machíníng Símulatíon
In the tool path drawíng duríng machíníng tool path , machíníng
símulatíon tool path , the tuпet selected now ís drawn.
When the path turret ís changed duríng drawíng, the drawíng starts
from halfway status.
When the mode of changed path turret ís other of MEM mode, the
drawíng wí11 stop.
- 585 -
LATHE APPLICATION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B-n3874EN/05
Machíníng Símulatíon Anímation
1n the machíning símulatíon anímated , the Drawíng for each turret ís
executed simultaneously, regardless of selected tuпet.
,
e.BBв
8. eae
ìs 6en9е
B. BeΘ B.eeиB
B.Bвe ceB іB aи sa ве
B. 8ØB 49 69. 1 13. 1
91 2]. :
1.XØ. t
д11 бц7б u1. Ø 2-ZS. L]. 116.
. 11. εı. Іі. 01. мı. иı. :
eкпauτвеìαЈτεя кым зι
StØ E εH T 1C ПП.` 1 HTłRF1НPλτи16
NOTE
0п1y animation for the spindle selected latest
between both turrets ís displayed. The anímatíon
for the other s índle ís not dís 1a ed.
- 586 -
6-63874EN/05 MULT1-PATH LATHE LATHE APPLICATION
MACHINING SIMULATION FOR EACH PATH
In the multi-path system of MANUAL GUIDE i, the machíníng
símulation ís performed on1y at the selected path by the R sígnal.
In the multí-path system of MANUAL GlЛDE i, the machíning
símulatíon is performed on1y at the selected path by a R signal that is
set at the parameter The fvst figure is bit and the other
figure ís the R signal number. .
For example, wíth 2 paths system
- At Path 1, the parameter
- At Path 2, the parameter
Then,
- At Path 1, íf ís 1
- At Path 2, íf is 1
machining símulatíon ís performed at each path. The status of the
signal of each path is displayed at a títle bar of símulation window.
Green is the status for enable the símulation to be performed. Gray ís
the status for dísable.
Wíth 2 paths systeım, the sígnal of Path 1 ís 0 and the one of
Path 2 ís 1.
Wíth 3 paths system, the sígnal of Path 1 is 0 and the ones of
Path 2/3 are 1.
ІІІ;і . ііІІІ .
ІІгъі

ь
- 587 -
LATHE APPLICATION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS в-sзвıaErυos
NOTE
1 1f M code for waiting other paths is commanded,
the machining simulation is in pausing for
performing of the same M code at other paths. So,
if this function is made available in use of M code
for waiting, it must be made disabled by the
management such as the M code is disabled by
using a signal of PMC for ignoríng it.
2 This function needs the optional function MANUAL
GU1DE i Animated Drawing.
3 1n drawíng during machining, R signal that is set at
the parameter No. 27309 is disabled.
4 1f the parameter is not set at any paths,
this function is disabled.
5 R signal, which is set at the parameter No. 27309,
is available in converting into NC formatted
program, too. The NC statement convertinq
function is available only at the path in displaying.
So, when the R signal at the path, which ís the
object for NC statement converting, is off, the
warning message TURN TH1S PATH S
SIMULATE-SVИTCH ON is displayed.
6 1n the NC statement converting function, the status
of the R signal is not displayed.
7 Even if the R signal of a path is turned from ON to
OFF ín the machining simulation, the machining
simulation is not pausing but ís performed at the
path.
8 Even if the R signal of a path ís turned from ON to
OFF in the machiníng simulatíon, [SINGLE] and
[PAUSE] aгe not available at the path. 1n short,
these soft keys are available at the path when the
R signal is on.
9 1f [STOP] or the RESET is pressed in the
machining simulation, ít stops at a11 paths for a11
status of the R signal.
10 1f any paths are in machining, the machiníng
simulation can not be performed.
11 To perform the machining simulation, the mode
must be MEM at the selected path for displaying. 1f
it is turned to another path in the other mode than
MEM in the machining simulation, the machining
simulation is stopped and the animation window
turns off.
- яя -
B-63874EN/05 MULT1-PATH LATHE LATHE APPLICATION
OTHERS
NOTE
1 Guidance window for machíning cycle data
entering screen are displayed following the specifıc
coordinate system upper direction X+: right
direction Z+: parameter 14706=16 .
2 The materíal is common with path-1 and path-2.
The registration of the material is possible from
path-1 and path-2. When registered from both
path, the only latest is effective.



- 589 -
2.SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 8-63874EN/05
2
SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY /
EDITING FUNCTION
- 590 -
в-6з8ıaεи1os MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 2.SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION
OUTLINE
In the multi-path 1athe, siinultaneous a11 path dísplay and edit functíon.
Became available.
Supported machine constructíon ís as follows.
2-path 2-spíndle
3-path 2-spindle
In order to use this feature, the following option is necessary.
Mu1ti-path lathe function for MANUAL GLЛDE i
- 591 -
ι
ι
ι
ί
2.SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B-6387aEгvıo5
DETAILS
How to Start
[λβ,TWIN] ís displayed next to [CHPATH] in each basíc mode.
If the settíng that [CHPATH] ís not used is specífıed, the softkey is
arranged to the same position.
When [MLTWIN] ís pressed, the dísplay mode ís changed as follows.
A11 path display _ Síngle path display
=. 1 . . .. x Otl s Ø н.2,a, 1J
------ ------ .мwe _ 2 2Θ.7376
с r 8 ..oİε, 8 0Ø .пмx в
20 7 3 . 7 B gİ Ø O Ø ι9º τ íεм,+в+в, , ...
c в,m: a 0 ..вe ]ιппм.г u.І
ι н ыa,., ,
ы6и W`1 ιгм2 Rввl1, : ıyi ..... 1n the case of 2-path Ø σ º. eмм 12.ØØ00: + і feв 6L Іĺ.Tц 1m.Λ2 Ye. :
O O0 .1122 а.в І6 лf5. вви 23 rı. e. -
A 122 ІЫщ. в1 2. м,м, . 12. в. σe ıv , aeΦ > 6Ø 91 ІΓм01 .p1Kж ,
1
- aпжі м + κ u.+м илa и. : 1 м ы і ι ь Rм1H . σіІτ 0.Ø 96. іaσ. 7. Р1.
411Я SS <T,.σ Иpp : ь1 t a.mα ε . e κaм.и Z . іі 21 . . λí.
.. P11a К мλ eN. ε. 1І. Q. H1N. Ff. lľ. κLB. 12. :. cш в ι κØ и мπ. вω Тι. α ,в α aw. Φ. a. rı. гв. и rt+r. в u. 11. Ti. vL Zι +

wω1u uч w u .1 Г ..._[ 1 . ı y 1
, .. ω- .4 иΓ
ьвив ј o eв ы aea q W e 1ύ e x B.BΘO
в ы6 . e. . w .. u и
x 2 ` R ı . .
x 8.8ØØ σ. e ; г θ ι ы.иε ив aav
2 ьnяα ıı :Y 8.888ŕ 1
[ Ø.ØBØ , inrκı τвι . 8.Θθ0
Y п . aл- : B a.вв Ø.0Ø0 κ - 65 в
1n the case of 3-path . uч кla1 г1a : σ1sOв с. e.eвв
.. І , иЯ 6199º 0 10-Γu6ж1i, 19 ΦuσІ, , Іασ, + 9 1іі J. 2. ІгомκІ κІ 7 nın ., m , ιe. ь εa e и. ı : 6ик eiΦ Р12> : - κWe. 12. 61. 1L 211, R.ù ϊ.
гη
κ ш.σ
Howto Fínísh
Press [MLTWIN] agaín, and the dísplay mode wi11 be changed to
síngle dísplay mode.
- 592 -
в-sзв74EN/o5 MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 2.SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION
Ĺ.3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION
T1ıe screen composítíon of símultaneously for a11 path dísplay and edít
functíon ís explaíned.
e зeee
и ezeeı т 1e1 м 99
S 8 Г 8,899 B88
. S
X
3 61992 31 CPREØIR3 г с 20ø?Ø00 61993 t
ε 1ИCиıM1Hı ...
ч 0θ .:., 61 9 sı CεR Ø A8U6и7 д a U.
- Γ. 61122 R9. 8156 Ø. 998. Jз. Pз.
__-.__:_......_..__. 62. нiин. εі, εt. κ1и8. i3z,
61999 111. L2. 794 K8. 82 Ø. : 11B. 85 L8. 85 M8. e5 218, К1. Y1.
61993 c 51. :
, э и9 P3992 :
61992 91 ПЦñЫ ROl9h> 61993
1ы1ы1 :
ł з 61120 H95. 988. 39. P1. ,` 61992 91 CεØ Г7HEλ :
92. H1θ8, ε1. E1, κ188. U2. 7 61128 11. R8.81Ø 895, 998, J3.
1 8θ,85 Le,85 218. 93. X1. P3. ε8.Ø04 211], 1.
;;Yλ...Sλ 3,.. .,
.
G J к k .άó -,-
REatиD18 ιIStIBGLDıt H SRCN f 5RG 1 RC7YOŚј f К CS T мCNLRW Sl M1_R1
1 Display Posítíon of Each Path
2-path
First path : 1eft síde
Second path : ńght síde
ł
3-path
The dísplay posítíon of each path wí11 be decided automatícally
accordíng to followíng parameter.
14701 1 : head 1 cannot be used ín spíndle 2 or caті 0/1
27401 0 : head 2 cannot be used ín spíndle 1 or not 0/1
27401 1 : head 2 cannot be used іn spíndle 2 or can 0/1
27402 0 : head 3 cannot be used іn spíndle 1 or not 0/1
27402 1 : head 3 cannot be used ín spíndle 2 or can 0/1

1
1
- 593 -
2.SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/05
Status Dísplay Part
The status dísplay part display the status of each path.
This part ís displayed ín a11 operation mode.
D ØØØØ0ØØ0
и θØOθØ τ 00000ØØØ M 00000Ø
s ØØ00Ø0 F Ø00Ø00.ØØ0
Icon of displayed path.
Operatíon mode
MDI, MEM, RMT, EDIT, HND, JOG, TJOG, THND, INC, REF
A1aгm status
ALM
Emergency stop status
EMG
Reset status
-RESET-
Automatíc operation status
STOP, HOLT, STRT
Axís motion and dwellíng status
MTN, DWL
Executíng auxíliary functions
FIN
O : Program nmnber O nØber
N : Sequence nØber N number
T: Moda1 T code commanded data
M: Moda1 M code commanded data
S: Moda1 S code commanded data
F: Moda1 F code commanded data
- 594 -
B-63874EN/05 MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS2.SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTION
2, Current Posítíon Display Part
Thís screen ís dísplayed out of EDIT mode.
Usíng [ACTPOS], absolute posítíon, relative posítion, machine
posítíon, and dístance to go ín turn.
In case of 2-path, actual spindle speed and actual feed rate are also
dísplayed.
Program Display Part
Thís screen wí11 be displayed in a11 operation mode.
In case of EDIT mode, thís part wí11 be extended because current
position part ís 1ost.
[ІІІІ sss
61980 D1. L2. ?9г1 KØ. Ø2 W0. :
61993 :
? 61992 61 TURN ROUGH ;
8 T01Ø1 :
9 61120 Rθ.0156 A95. B8Ø. 33. P1.
02. H100. F1. E1. K100. W2.
Uθ.Ø5 MØ.Ø5 210. 63. X1.
Y1.
- 595 -
2.SIMULTANEOUS ALL PATH DISPLAY / EDITING FUNCTIMOUNLT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/05
HOW TO SELECT PATH
Select the target path usíng [CØATH] or path selectíon sígnal. As for
the selected path, the títle of position and program dísplay part ís
displayed in b1ue. As for the not selected path, the títle wí11 be
displayed in light b1ue.
For the selected path, a símilar operation system to the normal screen
ís supported.
In case of the screen which is not supported aП path dísplay mode,
the single path display mode wí11 be selected automatícally.
OTHERS
The screen whích need fıı11 size, like anímatíon, convert to nc
program, process list edít, chsíze, and so on, wí11 change to fu11
screen dísplay automatícally.
It is impossíble to operate for the not selected path.
In 3-path, actual spíndle speed and actual feed rate is not
supported because the dísplay area ís too sma11.
- 596 -
B-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
3 PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
Avaílable CNC types..
2 CPU 2 path lathe CNC
Lathe with 2 turrets and 2 spindles, and each turret can perform to
both of spíndle 1 and spíndle 2 respectívely.
2 CPU 3 path lathe CNC
Lathe wíth 3 turrets and 2 spíndles, turret 1 can perform to both
of spíndle 1 and spíndle 2, tuпet 2 can perform to spinlde 2,
and tuтret 3 can perform to spíndle 1.
1 CPU 1 path lathe CNC
Lathe with 2 spíndles, 1 turret can perform to both of spindle 1
and spíndle 2.
NOTE
1 Process líst editing ís available only at ED1T mode.
Under background editing mode, it is not avaílable.
2 When you use a process líst edíting functíon, you
need a lathe machiníng cycle optíonal functíon.
Furthermore, if you use [Add I] and [De1 I]
functíons, you need an optional block skíp function.
- 597 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS в-6з874εи/os
PREPARATION
Parameter
The following parameter ís needed to be set.
14703 3 = 1: Use the process líst edít function
In case of usíng Add / function and De1 / functíon,
14701 6 = 1: Use program check function for each spíndle.
- 598 -
в-6з8ıaεN/o5 MULTi-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
START AND END OPERATIONS
,1 start
Set CNC to EDIT mode, and press [<] or [>], followíng soft-keys wí11
appear.
Г Y . _ - , r- ,. t b ,, 11

Тt
c zε ιτиεнo L_Ј wτε п 1 ιØн ј]
Press thís [EDTCEL], process table edít screen wi11 appear.
If the consistency of G1992 and G1993 ίs lacked when the process
table edít furıctíon start, the process table edít functíon wí11 not appear,
and 1ine number and message of the warning wí11 be shown at the
lower 1eft.
Warning Messa e Descrí tíon
Тор G1992 is short G1993 арреагѕ without G1992.
G1993 is du-iicate. P=к/L=кxxx G1993 is doubled because of no G1992 in the intervai.
LAST G1993 ìs short. Pro гam ends without the last G1993
G1992 is du lìcate. P=x/L=xxxx G1992 ıs doubled because of no G1993 in the interval.
M CODE is du licate. P=x/L=xxюc The same waiting M code is used a ain.
Waiting tar et is short. P=x/L=xxxx Waiting M code does not exist at waiting tar et with P.
111e a1 waiting order. P=x/L=xxxx The order waiting M code appears is not correct..
No program . The program selected now does not exist.
No waiting M code. P=x1L=xxxx Waiting M code is lost at transfer.
111ega1 P command. P=x/L=xxxx The value of P command is different even if the value
of waiting M code is the same.
Own path number is lost in the P command of waiting
M code.
111e a1 S command. P=x/L=xxxx Spindle number is not correct.
WAITING EX1ST. P= d/L= 1d A wаіtіпg M code exists for a 1- ath lathe.
TRANs. EX1ST. P= d/L= 1d A Q command exists for a 1 ath lathe.
- 599 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/05
End
Press [RETURN] soft-key, and the simultaneously for a11 path display
screen appears, which also appears when [MLTWIN] soft-kcy ís
pressed in the normal EDIT mode. _____
Changing CNC mode, the screen change for the other mode.

- 600 -
в-6зв,aεNıos MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
DISPLAY CONTENTS
Ceι1
,
Each process ís corresponded to the frame in the table whích ís called
a ce11.
Orily followíng ínformatíon ís dísplayed ín thís frame.
ι r
sequence number Comment
Moreover, there aгe followíng kínds of ce11s.
Kínd Descríption Graphic
Ce11 where the process
Normal Ce11
exísts.
There is frame for
lnput lmpropńety Ce11dísplay, but the process
does not exist for ít.
Current Ce11
The target ce11 for the operation ís shown. It ís possíble to move wíth
the cursor key. As for the selected ce11, the background co1oг ís
dísplayed in yellow.
г
M
M

- 601 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTi-PATH LATHE FuмCτιOмS B-δ3874EN/05
Spíndle
Fírst of a11, each process ís arranged accordíng to the spindle.
The operator can see the process belongs to whích spindle at a glance.

Turret
Each process ís arranged further in the spíndle accordíng to the turret.
,
ORIlL20 N7D R01Ј014 ,
GROOVE .
N30 F1MSΓı і 0 Øp
1Λ OĎ. ŘOUGH_
λøL
Ø10 OD. FlÑt9N4 EΛp
X 99 EPO._...._ X - X - ----т- X τ

в в


Waitíng Líne
The líne that shows waítíng exists is displayed.
řλλ1P, FλC Я 1 яiT

12Ø FACE FINE
BI I ,_.._....
------
- 602 -
6-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTιoNs 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
Transfer
When transfer exists, that is displayed by blue character.
Transfer ís arranged at the top and bottom.
- 603 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FuмCTιoıvS в-sзвıaεи/0s
BAS1C OPERATIONS
The followíng operations can be done in each ce11.
Basíc Operatíons
A cunent ce11 can Ьe moved up, down, right, and 1eft by operatíng the
cursor key.
Directíng 1eft at the Díreeting ńght at the
leftmost ce11, current ńghtmost ce11, cuпent
ce11 moves on the ce11 moves on the
ńghtmost ce11 upper Ьy leftmost ce11 lower by
oпe piece. --- -- one pіece.
гялм_ д,εпгr
Operatíng page key, it ís possíble to scroll entire table up and down by
one page.
The range of the movement of the cursor ís from the head to about
each row.
- б0-i -
Bô3874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTιONS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
3,5 EDITING OPEARTIONS
The following operatíons are avaílable on each ce11.
O eration _ Descrí tíon
1NSCEL lnsert process to the upper part of the s ecifıed ce11.
DELCEL Delete the s ecifıed ce11.
CPYCEL Copy the s ecifıed ce11 to the s ecified position.
MOVCEL Move the s ecifıed ce11 to the s ecifıedposition. _
RENAME Modify the comment of the s ecifıed ce11.
EDTPRG Edit the program inciuding the s ecífıed ce11.
STWAIT Set the waiting to the s ecifled ce11.
CLWAIT Release the s ecifıed waitin .
STTRNS Set the transfer to the sреcifled ce11.
CLTRNS Release the s ecifıed transfer.
ADD / Add the o tional block ski .
DEL / Delete the o tional block ski .
NOTE
Operations marked wíth cannot be used on
1-path lathe.
- 605 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FuıvCτιOnıs в-sзв,aεNı05
lnsertion of a Ce11
Function
Add a process.
Add the process to the upper side.
In NC program,
Pτocess start block : G1992 Sx xxxx
Process end block : G1993
These codes are ínserted automatically.
Basíc operation
1. Move cursor to the ce11 to be inserted.
TURRFT 1 Tl1RRET 2
N10 ROUGH ODDRRJLILL
N20 F1NE N20 TAP

2. Press [1NSCEL] soft-key.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N The díalog for the process name ínput
PROC NAME MIDDLE ís displayed.
lnput MIDDLE as an example.
З. Press OK, and the process wi11 be ínserted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N1 β DR1LL Cursor moves to the new ce11.
MIDDLE N20 TAP
N20 F1NE iú When cаncel ís pressed, return to
ı prevíous state.
Others
In case of having waitíng in the lower, for not breaking the
waítíng 1íne, modífy the heíght of the ce11 of other row that
have the waítíng to twice.
TLTRRET 1 TIJRRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2
Ni0 ROUGH N10 DRILL NlOROUGH N10 DR1LL -
N20 FINE N20 TAP N20 TØ Height of
lnscrt ce11
N20 F1NE
becomes
ı ı
twíce.
- 606 -
B-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FuмCTιoNS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
If the new ce11 ís ínserted on the ce11 havíng the waítíng, the
waíting do not move to the new ce11. Transfer ís also símílar.
TURRET 1 T[JRRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS Leave
N3β ΣIlVE N30 TØ Insert N20 TRANs N20 TRANS transfer
+ as it is.
ıo ıo N30 ΣlNE N30 тØ
/o
Even íf current ce11 ís ínput impropriety one, ínsertíon of the
ce11 ís possíble. After ínsertíon, the entíre table ís dísplayed
agaín, as the result, there are some case where overwńtíng ís
executed.
TLJRRET 1 TLJRRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2 As the
result, N10 ROUGH N10 ROUGH
overwńte on
N20 MIDDLE N10 DRILL N20 MIDDLE N1 O DRILL the ínput
N30 F1NE N20 TØ lnsert N30 FØ N20 TØ impropńety

ce11.
Deletíon of a Ce11
Functíon
Delete the process at the current cwsor.
In NC program,
Pтocess start block : G1992 Sx xxxx
Normal block
Process end block : G1993
These blocks are deleted automatícally.
Basíc operation
1. Move cursor to the ce11 to be deleted.
TURRET 1 TIJRRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 F1NE N20 TØ

- 607 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTi-PATH LATHE FUNcτιoNS в-6звıaεмıos
2. Press [DELCEL] soft-key.
Ø 1 TURRET 2 Ø YOU SURE YOU WANT TO
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL DELETE IT ? is dísplayed ín the
message dísplay part. N20 F1NE N20TØ
Press [YES] or [NO].
3. Press [YES], and the process wí11 be deleted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N16I RILL The cursor posítíon ís 1eft as it is.
/o N20 TAP
In case of TTO , returns to former o,o
state.
Others
hı case of havíng waítíng ín the lower 1ine, for not breakíng the
waíting line Ьy adjustíng after deletíon, modífy the height of
the ce11 that have the waítíng to twíce.
TURRETI TURRET2 Tl1RRET 1 TURRET 2
N 10 ROUGH N10 DR1LL N10 ROUGH N20 TAP Heíght
_
of ce11 N2б FFNE N20 TAP N20 F1NL
Delete becomes
ıo
twíce.
,
There ís the ce11 that cannot be deleted.

TURRET 1 I TØT 2
Input ímpropriety ce11
ce11
When the ce11 that have waítíng, the waítíng ís released.
Transfer as we11
TURRET 1 ØT 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRll,L N10 ROUGH N10 Release the
N2 ґRАN N20TКANS N30 FINE N20 TRANs partner of
Delete
trØfer, N30 FINE N30 TØ e/o N30 TAP
too.
When one of the waiting member among the 3-path is deleted,
the rest waíting will not be released.
- 608 -
B-δ3874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FurvCTιoNS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
Copyíng of a Ce11
Functíon
Copy the pτocess
In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
End process block : G1993
The blocks between above two blocks and comment ín the
G1992 block arc copied automatícally.
Basíc Operatíon
1. Move the cursor to the source ce11.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
г
NlO KCiií .š afi
N20 FINE

2. Press [CPYCEL] soft-key.
TURRET l TURRET 2
y
Add to the top of the source ce11. N20 FINE


3. Move cursor to the destínatíon ce11.
TURRET 1 TIJRRET 2
NfO.ROØ N10 DØL Moreover background color of the source
ce11 become green.
N20 FINE N20 TAF _
- . Press [CPYCEL] or [CANCEL].
4. Press [CELCPY], overwrite copy wí11 be done if destination
process ís vacant.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
NIO Ìl.OU4ŕ N] 0 FINE
When cаncel ís pressed, return to
N2б FINE N20 7Ø previous state.

1
- 609 -

ł
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B 63874EN/05
Others

When the destínatíon process ís not vacant, ít ís possíble to
select overwńte, ínsert, and cancel.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2

Insert N10ROUGH N10DRILL N10 ROUGH FІNE

N20 FINE N20 TØ Select N20 Ø N 10 DR1LL
copy
Insert ıń ^ıo Nz0 тØ

There ís the ce11 that cannot be specífied as source and
destínatíon.
1 TØT 2
N10 ROUGH 4-__ Input íınpropńety ce11
N20 MIDDLE l N10 DR1LL
N3π PINE N20 TAP
ıo ce11
The waítíng and transfer wí11 not be copied.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N20 rRANS Transfer
N20 TКλNS N20 rRANS N20 TRANS N20 TRAN5 wĺ11 not
be copied.
N30 ΣINE N30 TØ Copy N30 FINE N30 ТAP
ıú
1
- 610 -
B-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTιOrvS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
Movíng of a Ce11
Functíon
Move the process The source ce11 ís removed.
In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
Eııd process block : G1993
The blocks between above two blocks and comment ín the
G1992 block are moved automatícal]y.
Basíc Operation
1. Move the cursor to the source ce]1.
TURRFT 1 TURRET 2
NIO RUUGH O DRILL
N20 F1NE N20 TAP

2. Press [CPYCEL].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N2Π FINF N20 TØ Add to the top of the source ce11.
o
3. Move cursor to the destínatíon ce11.
TURRETI TURRET2
N10 ROUGft N1 Π П, Moreover background color of the
source ce11 become green. N20 F1NE N20 TAP
,o ıo Press [CPYCEL] or [CANCEL].
4. Press [CF,I,MΠV]; overwríte move wí11 he done íf destinatíon
process ís vacant.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 F1NE
ø/. N20 TAP When cancel is pressed, return to
prevíous state.
- 61 1 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTi-PATH LATHE FUtyCTιoNS в-sзвıaεиı0s
Others
When the destinatíon process ís not vacant, it is possible to
select overwńte, ínsert, and cancel.
TURRET 1 TURREr 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2
Insert
N10 ROUGH N10 ПRΠЛL N10 ROUGH FINF. óz
N20 FINE N20 TAP Select N10 DRILL move
Insert .ó N20 TAP

There is the ce11 that cannot be specífied as source and
destínatíon.
TIJRRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH Input impropńety ce11
N20 MIDDLE NIO DØL `
N30 F1NE N20 TØ
^ó ce11
The waítíng and transfer wi11 not be moved.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2
Nl0 ROUGH N10 DRILL N 14 ROUGH N10 TRANS Transfer
_
wı11 not N20TRANS N20TRANS N30 Ø N20 TRANS
be
N30 F1NE N30 TAP Move /ó N30 TØ
moved.

It is possíble to move to input ímpropríety ce11 just in case
between the same líne and turret.
SPØLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRAN5 N20 TRAN5
N30 FINE N30 TØ
/o b
1 Move
SPØLE 1 SPØLE 2
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 Ø 1 TURRET 2
NIOROUGH N10 DRILL MOvĺng t0
ínput N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
ímpropríety
: N30 FINE N30 TAP
ce11 ís
ıo o done.
-61?-
6-63874EN/05 MULTi-PATH LATHE FuиCT1oNS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
It ís possíble to move to ínput ímpropriety ce11 just in case that
any ce11 ín the same líne and turret ís ínput ímpropńety one.
SPØLE 1 SPØLE 2
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TØT 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH
N20 TRANs N20 T RANS
N30 Σ1NE N30 TØ

1 Movíng
sP1NDLE 1 SPØLE 2
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TØT 1 TURRET 2
MOvíng to
N10 ROUGH N30 TAP
_ mput
N20 TRANS N20 TRANs ímpropriety
N30 FINE ce11 ís done.

- 613 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI PATH LATHE FuмCτιONS B-63874EN/05
Modíficatíon of Process Name
Functíon
Modífy the process name.
In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
Modífy comment in that block.
When c1ear the process name, delete comment wíth a round
bracket.
Basíc Operation
1. Move the cursor to the ce11 to be modified.
TTJRRET 1 TURRET 2 t
NıOROUGH NiODRILL
N20 FINE N20 TØ

ı
2. Press [RENØ].
1
т[ЛtREт 1 i TURRET 2
The díalog for the process name ínput N
PROC NAMF, MIDDLE ís dísplayed. Input NIIDDLE as an
N.
example.
ıo

З. Press OK, and the process name wí11 be modífied.
TIJRRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRlLL
N2O M1D1 L1: N20 TAP When cancel ís pressed, return to
o,o previous state.
Others
There ís some ce11 whose name cannot be modífıed.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH 4 Input impropríety ce11
N20 MIDDLE N10 DRILL
N30 FINE N20 TØ 1
/u .4 ce11
1
λ
J
-614- ĺ
B-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCτιorvS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
Program Edít
Functíon
Edít the process.
The NC Program wíth current ce11 is opened m a11 screen mode,
and the cursor is set to the head of the process wíth current ce11.
Basíc Operatíon
1. Move the cursor to the ce11 to be edíted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DØL
N20 FINE N20 TØ
/u
2. Press [EDTPRG].
N 10 61992 S 1 ROUGH ; The cursor of the edit screen
automatícally moves to the start
posítion of the process.
61993;
3. Do the edit work.
N 1 Π G 1992 S 1 ROUGH ; The Edít work ís done wíth usual
edít screen. a11 screen dísplay by
G 1993; the size substítutíon
N20 G1992 S1 FINE ;
The following process caв Ьe
simílarly edited because of a usual
edít screen. G1993;
4. Pτess [EDWORK].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 R4UGH N10 DRlLL
The process edíted on a usual edít screen
N20 Ø N20 TAP becomes a current ce11.
oı,
-ńL5-
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 6-63874EN/05
Others
When select head of MANUAL GumE i accordíng to tool post
selectíon sígnal, ít ís necessary to set tool post selection sígnal
to the head that the target ce11 belongs to ín adуaвce.
When edit work ís started on the ínput ímpropriety ce11, the
next effectíve process ín the same turret wí11 Ьe opened.
TURRET TURRET 2
_ N10 G1992 S1 DØL ; Nl0 ROUGH
N20 hцDDLE N10 βAΠ
EDTPRG
N30 ΣINE N20 TØ G1Ø3;
ó

ı
1
- 616 -
B-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCτιorvS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
Assign of Waíting
Functíon
Set the waítíng between the process.
In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
End process block : G1993
Mxxx Pxx wí11 be set to one or both of these blocks.
Basíc Operatíon
1. Press [STWAIT]. Cursor posítion pretermissíon
TIJRRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH Nt0 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TØ The software key array changes ínto
set waítíng mode. wo ıo
2. Move cursor to the source waítíng, and pτess [SELECT].
TURRET I TURRET2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
Add to the top of the selected ce11. N20 FINF, N20TAP
o
3. Move cursor to the destínatíon waítíng, and press [SELECT].
TIIRRF,T 1 TURRET 2
Moreover background color of the
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
source-waítíng ce11 Ьecome green.
N20 FINE N20 TAP
ıe Press any one of [SETTOP], [SETEND],
and [STBOTH].
4. Press [SET-].
When [SETTOP] ís pressed
When fmíshed normally, selected state wi11
be released automatícally.
- 617 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS в-6звıaεи10s
When [SETEND] is pressed
rURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 When finished normally, selected state wí11
be released automatícally. N20 FINE
p/o N20 TØ

When [STBOTH] ís pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH When fmíshed normally, selected state wí11
N20 Ø lNIODRILL Ьe released automatícally.
N20 TØ

5. Press [RETURN], and release set waítíng mode.
Others
There is some ce11 that cannot be specified as source and
destínation waiting.
TURRET i TURRET 2
N 10 ROUGH 4 Input ímpropńety ce11

N20 ØDLE N10 DRП L
;
N30 F1NE N20 TAP r
Љ 4 ce11
When the waítíng has already been set, the waítíng cannot be i
set. 1
λ
TIJRRET 1 TURRET 2
N10ROUGH N10 DR1LL
1 N20 WAIT N20 WAIT
N30 FIINE N30 TAP Waítíng
Operation J

In case of shortage of waítíng M code, the waítíng cannot be 1
set. İ
1
It is possible to set the waítíng just between upper parts or
1
lower parts. İ

- 618 -
в-sзвıaεиıos MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
It ís ímpossíble to set waíting across other waitíng.
TIJRRET 1 TURRET 2
х
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANs N20 TRANs
N3π F1NE N30 тAP
Waitíng
Operatíon
It ís ímpossible to set waíting between the process in the same
path.
TURRET 1 TIJRRET 2 ié
N10 ROUGR N10 DRILL
N20 тRANs N20 тRANS
N30 FINE N30 TØ
ı Waítíng
Op eration
- 619 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FuмCTіOмS 6-б3874EN/05
Release of Waítíng
Functíon
Release the waiting between the process.
In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
End process block : G1993
Mxxx Pxx wí11 be deleted from one or both of these blocks.
Basíc Operatíon
1. Press [CLWAIT]. Cursor posítíon pretermíssíon
The software key array changes ínto
release waítíng mode.
2. Move cursor to the ce11 that have waiting.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
3 1l f RГ ØH ` NλODRLi
Press any one of [CLTOP], [CLEND], N20 FINE N2lYTώP-. ι
and [CLBOTH].
3. Pτess [CL-].
When [CLTOP] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N1Ω ROUGH ` NIO DØ
The opposíte waitíng wi11 also be
N20 FINE N20 TAP released.
ye
When [CLEND] is pressed
TiRRl:i 1 тØІ 2
NïU R.ØH < N14 DRILL
N20 HNF Nî ТAF , The opposite waítíng wi11 also be
. ;. released.
When [CLBOTH] ís pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
NlOROUGH < AfiìU DltiLτ
The opposíte waítíng wí11 also be
N20 FINE ŕŤ1E TAP, released.
3G ..
- 620 -
8-63874EN/05 MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
4. Press [RETURN], and release waítíng mode.
Others
The transfer cannot be operated by release waítíng.
TIJRRET 1 TIJRRET 2
Nł0 Rč UGM N10 DR1LL
N20 rØS N20 ØNS
Release
N30 F1λ]E N30 ТAP Waítíng
ıo Operatíon

ι

ι

1
-621-
k
F
ł
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/05
Assígn of Transfer
Functíon
Set the transfer between the process.
1n NC program,
Staτt process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
QO Mxxx Pxx wí11 be set to above block,
End process block : G1993
Mxxx Pxx wí11 be set to above block.
Basíc Operatíon
1. Press [STTRNs]. Cursor posítion pretermíssíon
ØТ 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
The software key array changes into
N20 FINE N20 ТØ set waíting mode.

2. Move cursor to the source transfer, and press [sELECT].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N 10 DRILL
Add to the top of the selected N20 FINE N20 ТØ
ce11. ıo
3. Move cursor to the destínatíon transfer, and press [sELECT].
Add to the top of the selected
TØT 1 TØT 2
ce11.
N10 ROUGH Nı0 DRILL Moreover background color of the
N20 FINE N20 ТØ source waítíng ce11 Ьecome green.
ıo Press eíther [STTRNS] or
[CANCEL].
4. Press [sTTRNs].
When fmíshed normally, selected state wí11
be released automatícally.
5. Press [RETURN], and release set transfer mode.
- 622 -
в-6звıaεNıos MULTI-PATH LATHE FuNCτιOмS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
Others
There ís some ce11 that cannot be specífied as source and
destínation transfer.
TURRET I TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH Ë .4 Input ímpropriety ce11
N20 MIDDLE NIO DR]LL
N30 ΣLNE N20 ТAP
t ce11
When the waítíng or transfer has already been set, the transfer
cannot be set.
TIJRRET 1 TURRET 2
х
N10ROUGH N10DRILL
N20 WAIr N20 WATr
N30 FINE N30 ТØ Transfer
ıo ıo Operatíon

In case of shortage of waítíng M code, the waítíng cannot be
set.
It ís possible to set the transfer just between the ce11s that have
no waítíng.
It ís írnpossible to set waítíng across other waítíng and transfer.
1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL 9`
N20 rRANS N20 rRAN5
N30 F1NE N30 ТØ
Waiting
Operation
It ís impossíble to set transfer between the process in the same
path.
TURRF,T 1 ØТ 2
эé
N 10 ROUGI3 N10 DRILL
N20 TRANs N20 rRANs
N30 F1NE N30 ТØ
Transfer ıń
Operatíon
F

ł - 623 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FuмCTιoмS Bfi3874EN/05
Release Transfer
Functíon
Release the transfer between the process.
In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
QO Mxxx Pxx wí11 Ьe deleted from above block.
End process block : G1993
Mxxx Pxx wí11 be deleted from above block.
Basíc Operatíon
1. Press [CLTRNS]. Cursor posítíon pretermíssíon
rURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N 0 DRIl,L
N20 TRANS N2б TRANS The software key array changes ínto
release transfer mode. N3б FINE N3б TØ
ıó
2. Move cursor to the ce11 that have transfer.
1
TIJKRET l TIJRRET 2
Ni0 ROUGH N10
N2Π TRANS N20 TRANS Press eíther [CLTRNS] or [CANCEL].
N30 E INE ОТТАAРP
1
Q/o

3. Press [CLTRANs].

TiJRRET 1 TLJRRET 2 i
N10 ROUGH N10I7RILL Ì
N20TRANS N20ØS
1
N30 FINE N30 TAP The opposíte transfer will also be
released. ıa
1
4. Press [RETURN], arıd release transfer mode.

1



- 624 -
6-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FuмCT1oNS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
Others
The waitíng cannot be operated by release transfer.
TURRET 1 TLrRRET 2
N10 Tt t34H NIO DRILL
N20 rRANS N20 TRAN 3 Release
κзo Øε Н 0 2 Р Transfer
Operatíon
X
- 625 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTιoNs 6-63874EN/05
Addítion of Optional B1ock Skip for Each Path Program
Check
Functíon
In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
End process block : G1993
Add any one of /7 , /8 , and 9 to the top of each block
between above two blocks.
/7 : process belong to spindle-1. except transfer process
/8 : process belong to spindle-2. except transfer process
/9 : transfer process
Basíc C+peratíon
Press [ADD /].
SPINDLE 1 І SPØLE 2
TØT 1 ј TØT 2 TØT 1 ј TØT 2
λí10 RÒцβH λi14 DRIï.Σ.
N20 TØNS N3О RA2+TS
ÑЗD FINE ł5i3Ó á 1;I
ıfı : :
ı Addíng of optíonal block skíp
SPØLE 1 SPØLE 2-
Ø 1 TØT 2 TØT 1 j TØT 2
Others
Additíonal processíng ís not done for the block whích has
G1992 and G1993.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;
T0101; /7 T0101;
-,
G00 X0. ZO.; /7 G00 X0. ZO.;
M01; /7 M01;
G1993; G1993;
- 626 -
в-sзв7aεN,05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FurvcτιoNS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
1f , exíst. wí]1 be converted to /] in the additíonal
processíng of optíonal block skíp /7, /8, /9
1992 S 1: G1492 S1:
/TO1Π1: /7 /1 1 O101:
_, / GO XO. ZO.: /7 / 1 G00 X0. ZO.:
/ МO1: /7 /1 MO1:
G 1443: G 1 ЧЧ3:
1f aпy one of /7 , /8 , and /9 has already exists at the top of
the target block, exchaiige ít ínstead ofaddting.
;1 ЧЧ2 S 1: G1992 51:
/ TO]01; 7 TO]01:
/ G00 XO. ĹO.: /7 GOO X0. /0.:
/К M01: /7 MO1:
G 1993: G 1993;
- 627 -
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULT1-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS B-δ3874EN/05
Deletíon of Optíonal B1ock Skíp for Each Path Program Check
Functíon
In NC program,
Start process block : G1992 Sx xxxx
End process block : G1993
Delete /7 , /8 , and /9 at the top of each block between
above two blocks.
Basíc Operation
1. Press [DEL /].
SPØLE 1 SPØLE 2
TURRET ] ј TURRET 2 TURRET 1 ј TURRET 2
ι
Deletíng of optional block skíp
SPØLE 1 1 SPØLE 2
Γ TURRET 1 1 ØT 2 1 TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N 10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANŚ
N30 F1NE N30 TAP

Others
Deletíon processíng ís not done for the block whích has G1992
and G1993.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;
/7 T0101; T0101;
_ł
/7 G00 X0. ZO.; G00 x0. ZO.;
/7 M01; M01;
G1993; G1993;
- 628 -
B-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
DEALING OF THE PART PROGRAM W1TH UNFITTED TO
PROCESS L1ST FORM
1. The following screen wí11 appear when NC program that is not
fitted to process líst edít function ís opened.
Press [YES], and pтocess list edít function screen wi11 appear.
NC program wí11 be modífıed as follows.
TØT 1 TØT 2
00200 00200
G1992 S1 NONECELL ; Add G1992 S1 NONECELL ;
PROCOI : SP-1 PROCOI : SP-1
PA00O2 : ØS PR00O2 : ØS
PR00O3 : SP-2 PR00O3 : SP-2
G1993; Add -И G1993;
ıó
t
-629-
t
3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCτιONS в-6з824εи10s
2. And then, add sum of a11 process 1 pіece ce11 by inserting ce11
operatíon.
TURRET 1 TØT 2
00200 00200
G1992 S1 PROC1 ; G 1992 S 1 РROC 1 ;
PROCOI : SP-1 PROCOI : SP-1
PR00O2 : ØS PR00O2 : ØS
PR00O3 : SP-2 РR00O3 : SP-2
G1993; G1993;
G1992 S1 PROC2 ; Add G1992 S1 РROC2 ;
G1993; G 1993;
G1992 S2 РROC3 ; 4 Add t G1992 S2 РROC3 ;
G1993; G1993;

3. Moreover press [EDTPRG], move the G1993 and G1992 blocks
between of processes usíng cut and paste in the norma1 edít
screen.
ØT 1 _ ØT2
00200 00200
G1992 S1 PROC1 ; G 1992 S 1 РROC 1 ;
РROCOI : SP-1 PROCO 1 : SP-1
G 1993; , Move G 1993;
G1992 S1 РROC2 ; G1992 51 РROC2 ;
PR00O2 : ØNS PR00O2 : ØS
G 1993; / Move G 1993;
G1992 S2 PROC3 ; G1992 S2 РROC3 ;
РR00O3 : SP-2 PR00O3 : SP-2
G1993; G1993;

4. Press [EDWORK] agaín, and set transfer.
_ TURRET 1 ØT2
00200 00200
G1992 S1 PAOC1 ; G1992 S1 PROC1 ;
РROCO 1 : SP-1 PROCOI : SP-1
G1993; G1993;
G1992 S1 QO M200 РROC2 ; Change G1992 S1 QO M200 РROC2 ;
РR00O2 : ØS PR00O2 : ØS
G1993 M201; 4- G1993 M201; Change
G1992 S2 РROC3 ; G1992 S2 РROC3 ;
PR00O3 : SP-2 PR00O3 : SP-2
G1993; G1993;

5. Fínish transítion work.
- 630 -
B-63874EN/05 MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTιoNS 3.PROCESS L1ST EDITING FUNCTION
FORMAT
Start Process : G1992
Sx : Select spindle
S1 : Spíndle-1, S2 : Spíndle-2
Qx : Attribute
QO : Transfer
Mx : Waiting M code
NC paтameter from 8110 to 8111
Px : Waítíng partner
Combínation of exístíng path number
Finish process : G1993
Mx : waítíng M code
NC parameter from 8110 to 8111
Px : waítíng partner
Combinatíon of exístíng path number
OTHERS
Waitíng M code ís recognízed just in the same block for the
process begínníng word and the process end word.
Thís functíon ís not supported in the background mode.
Thís ís because a program to edit must be separately selected for
each path.
As to movíng ce11 and copyíng ce11, the ce11 content ís operated
as it ís.
/7 , /8 , and /9 іn the combínatíon of / and figure for
optíonal block skíp aгe reserved for add / functíon and DEL /
function. Therefore those word should not be used ín the useτ
program freely.
A 1-path lathe does not support the set waitíng , cancel
waíting , set transfer , cancel transfer , add/ , and DEL/
functions.
A 1-path lathe does not dísplay the path name.
A 1-path and 1-spíndle lathe does not dísplay the spíndle name.
- 631 -
V. TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
FOR Series 16í/18í/21í ONLY

B 63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 1.ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS W1TH OFFSET NUMBERS
1 ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS W1TH
OFFSET NUMBERS
NOTE
1 To use tool management functions with MANUAL
GU1DE i, you require tool management function
options.
For details, refer to the manual issued by the
machine tool builder.
2 The tool management functíon of MANUAL GU1DE
i is not supported for the Series 30 ί.
3 This function cannot be used wíth the MANUAL
GU1DE i simuiator for the personal computer.
On the screen for associating a tool number with a offset number, set
the number of the tool that wí11 use a offset number. When regístered
on this screen, the tool nØber is regístered in the tool management
data table, together with the offset number and the tool type.
This screen is effectíve on1y íf bít 0 ORT of parameter No. 14823 ís
1.
- 635 -
1.ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS W1TH OFFSET NUMBERS TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05
7. 7 SELECTING THE SCREEN FOR ASSOCIATING A TOOL
NUMBER W1TH A OFFSET NUMBER
<1> Press [>] on the ínitíal screen of each mode to dísplay the soft
ke т s shown below, then press [SETING]:
- -- --- ----- ---
<2> The follo _ w . ing screen appears.
јІ ј
2.REGISTER FIКED FØ 5EHTEHCE FOR TURNING
3.SETTING Ø ØFSET ØD 7Ø N0.
4. T0ОL NWłAGEMENT DHTp
5. T00L LIFE DRTfł
LIFE DRTд L[S7
ECT SE7TING íTEi1 f ID PUSH L UEGT]
<3> From this screen, select SETTING OF OFFSET NO. Ø
TOOL NO. , and the screen for assocíating a tool nØber wíth a
tool offset number appears.
- 636 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 1.ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS W1TH OFFSET NUMBERS
SCREEN DISPLAY 1TEMS
oεεsεт Aид TOOL NOI
OFs NO. TOOL NO. TYPE
801 _ TURИIHG
005 2 TBRNING
809 3 TIØING
813 4 Tlø2NING
817 5 TURNING
821 101 MILLING
829 102 MILLING
829 103 MILLIHG
833 104 MILLING
837 105 MILLING
841 281 BTHERs
IN NUΓЕRNLS.
Display items
OFS NO.:
You can on1y víew offset numbers, and cannot set new ones.
The range of avaílable offset numbers depends on the settíng of
parameter No. 14824.
TOOL NO:
To register a new tool number in an empty tool number fie1d,
enter a new number and press the INPUT key.
To ínvalídate an exísting tool number, enter O.
NOTE
When a tool number is entered, the associated
offset number is set in the offset number item of
the data havíng that tool number in the tool
management data table.
1f the tool management data table does not contain
data having that tool number, the system searches
for tool management data having no tool number,
and the offset number associated with the entered
tool number is set in that tool management data.
if a tool number is deleted 0 is entered , a11 of the
tool management data having that tool number is
deleted.
TYPE:
To select the desíred oпe, ress the corresponding soft key.
-637-
1.ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS W1TH OFFSET NUMBERS TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05
Soft keys
[тo MNU]:
Return to the menu screen.
[CHCURS]:
Swítches the system between cursor modes.
DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE
WRONG VALUE OF PARAMETER NO. 14824 :
Displayed íf the va1ue of parameter No. 14824 is outside the
range of 1 to 999 and SETTING OF OFFSEт NO. AND TOOL
NO. is selected from the [SETING] menu.
INVALID INPUT :
Displayed if a tool number outsíde the valid range is entered.
TOOL NUMBER ALREADY EXISTS :
Dísplayed íf the same tool number as that entered has already
been set.
TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
Dísplayed íf the system faíls to read or write tool and offset
numbers.
- 638 -
в-6звı4εиıo5 TOOL MANAGEMENT 2.VIEVИNG AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES
2
V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET
VALUES
In addition to the conventional tool offset settíng screen, a screen is
available whích allows you to view and set tool offset values using
tool numbers and offset types.
This screen is effective oп1y if bit 1 TOD of parameter No. 14823 ís
1.


- 639 -
2.V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES TOOL MANAGEMENT в-sз8,aεnυo5
SELECTING THE TOOL NUMBER-BY-TOOL NUMBER
TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN
<1> Pτess [>] on the ínítíal screen of each mode to display the soft
keys shown below:
<2> From this screen, press [T-OFs], and the tool offset settíng
screen appears.
т:GεOм 1т:WεAR τaaι дλτя τ:6Ea-т0ι ]τ:6ЕR-τ0І т:дAтA-τσι 1
00. К-RКIS 2-R IS Y-HX1S RADIUS U1Rτ.τIP
881 : θ.θBØ Ø.BØØ 8
802 8. 888 8.8Ø8 8
Ø83 Ø.ØØØ Ø.BOB 0
084 8.8θθ B.ØØØ 0
НЯ5 8. 888 8.8BØ Ø.ØØØ Ø.OØØ Ø
086 8.8θH θ
087 Ø.ØØØ Ø.BØØ 8
EY 1H FКNIER S.
<3> Movíng the cursor to the T:GEO-TOL tab causes the
geometńc offset screen on a tool number Ьy tool number
basís to appear.
<4> Movíng the cursor to the T:WER-TOL tab causes the
Turníng wear offset screen on a tool number by tool number
basís to appear.
<5> Movíng the cursor to M:OFS-TOL tab causes the Míllíng
offset screen on a tool ntnnber Ьy tool number basís to appear.
NOTE
1f the T:GEOM , T:WEAR , and M:OFFSET tabs
are selected, their respectíve conventional T:Too1
geometríc offset , T:Too1 wear offset , and M tool
wear offset screens appeaг.
-Øo -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 2.VIEИΛNG AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES
22 SCREEN DISPLAY 1TEMS
1 Turníng geometric offset screen on a tool number by tool number basís
т:Gεoм Іт:tερк тOσL Dятя :GFO-IOt. т:wεR-тc 1т:Dятя-тoι
TOOL 80. TYPE X-AXIS 2-AКIS Y-pКI5 RADIUS VIRт.TIP
1 1 8. 888 B.θØθ 8.0Ø0 0
2 8. 888 e.ΘØB 8. 888 Ø.000 0
3 8. 888 B.ΘθØ θ.008 Ø.0Ø0 Ø
4 8.Ø8Ø Ø.00Ø 0.00Ø Ø
2 1 Ø.800 Ø.θØO Ø
2 8. θ8θ Ø. 00θ 0
3 Ø.00Ø 8.Ø00 Ø
Y I н Nt1MERAlS.
1
JJ
CHCURS
- Display ítems
TOOL NO.:
The tool numbers in the tool management data table are
dísplayed.
You cannot set new ones from thís screen.
TYPE:
Offset types are dísplayed.
Values ranging from 1 to the number of offset types set in
parameter No. 14825 are dísplayed sequentíally.
If the setting of parameter No. 14825 is 0, nothíng ís dísplayed in
the offset type column.
X-AXIS, Z-AXIS, Y-AXIS, RADIUS, VIRT. TIP:
The offset number correspondíng to each combinatíon of tool
number and offset type ís determíned, and the offset values of the
offset nunıber are dísplayed.
The settíngs are made in the data for the offset number
determined with the combínatíon of tool number and offset type.
Va1id data range:
Depends on the settíng of the tool offset described later .
Data to be referenced:
Too1 offset data
- Soft keys
[TO MNu]:
Return to the menu screen.
[CHCURS]:
Swítches the system between cursor modes.

- 641 -
2.V1EVVING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES TOOL MANAGEMENT Bδ3874EN/05
2 Turníng wear offset screen oп a tool number by tool number basís
т : GEOΓ1 jItJERR ToOL DAτA јτ:GεØ-τ0ι τ:41ER-τØι T.uAтA-т0І.
TOOL N0. IYPE X-RКIS Z-RК1S Y-AXíS RRDTUS
1 І. . 8. 888 Ø. θ88 8. θθ8 0
2 8.8BØ 0
3 Ø.888 8
4 Ø.8θ8 8.вяя 8
2 1 Ø.888 Θ.8B8 Ø
2 8. 88Ø 8. 8Ø8 8. BØ8 B. BB8 8
3 Ø.BBØ 8
Y IH λLLλЕАLS.
The disp]ay ítems are the same as those on the Turning geometric
offset screen on a tool nØber by tool number basis .
3 Míllíng offset screen on a tool number by tool number basis
M:OFFSET lIDDL DRTR Mг Е5-TоL iM:DATR-TOL i
TØ L LENGTH CØł . CUTTER COMPENSA7tOH
TOOL. N0. TYPE GEOГtETRY wEAR GEΠttETRY wERR
1 1 8. 88Ø 8. 8ØØ 8. 8Ø8
2 Ø. Otо 8.8ØØ 8.8θ8
3 8. Øов 8. Øмо Ø.BBØ
4 Ø.ØBØ 8. ØØØ Ø.BØØ Ø.8Ø8
2 1 Ø.Ø08 8. 8ØØ Ø. Bое 8. 888
2 Ø. ØØ0 Ø. ØоЮ B.ØØB Ø.BBØ
3 Ø. OE ł 8.0ØЛ 8. ØØ8 8. ØØØ
Y IN NUMERiІS.
The dísplay items are the same as those on the Turníng geometric
offset screen on a tool nØber by tool nØber basis .
- 642 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 2.V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES
TOOL OFFSET
A va1ue of up to síx digits not íncludíng - and . can be set. For tool
offset in T mode, if the 7-digít tool offset input option is effective, a
va1ue of up to seven dígíts can be set.
The valid nØber of digits in the fractional part depends on the
settíngs of the NC.
1
ŕ
1

k
- 643 -
2.V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES TOOL MANAGEMENT 8-63874ENl05
NOTES
NOTE
1f bit 1 TOF of parameter No. 14823 ïs 0, the tool
number-by-tool number offset value setting screen
does not appear.
Screens that appear dífferently dependíng on whether optíons are províded
Too1 geometric and wear offset lathe systems standard models and
complex machíníng functions , tool offset memory type B , and
tool offset memory type C machíning systems are optional
functíons. If these optíons are not provided, screens appear as shown
below.
- Screen that appears when Set tool oíf set is selected
T:OFFSEI тo0ι ВКłτe т:oεs-тOL 1т:дAтA-тoι І
Н0. К-fl IS z-HXτs Ч-i3Кτs RAºıus
ØB1 0. ØØØ Ø
902 Ø.100 0
083 8. 090 0
994 B. 008 O
995 Ø.OØO 0
806 9. 008 0
007 Ø.ØØB 0000 Ø
ЕЧ I Ы NUИERfіS.
- Turníng offset screen on a tool number by tool number basís
τ:oεεsετ Іτпaι ºAтA .τ:oεs-тoι ir:DflTa-FoL 1
т0oι иn. τуPε x-Axτs z-Nxτs и-exτs RAºτus
ı і ј 8. 800 e
2 0. 008 e.eØe 8. 000 e
з ] ø
a e
2 1 e.eØe Ø.eee 8. 800 ø
2 e
з e.ø ø e
и Іи τи RЯιs.
- 64-t -
в-6звı4εиıo5 TOOL MANAGEMENT 2.VIEVИNG AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES
- Míllíng offset screen on a tool number by tool number basís
If tool offset memory type B ís provided machíníng systems
T00L Н0. TYPE GEOMETRY tJEAR
1 1 : В. Ø00
2 Ø.BØθ
3
4 0.00Θ
2 1 0.00Ø
2
3
У ы Fй>c1ERяιЅ.
If tool offset memorу type B and tool offset memorу type C aгe
not províded machíníng systems and tool geometńc and wear
offset ís not províded complex machínes
ІІЕ
M:OFFSET ITOOL DRTq M:OFS-TOL MгDRTR-TOL
тΠOL 00. TYPE ΠFSSET VRLUE 1 1 [: :ІІ _
2
3
4
2 1
2
3
Y I H ИtPr RHLS.
Y-axís offset ís an optíonal functíon. If this option ís not províded,
screens appear as shown below.
- Turníng geometríc offset screen on a tool number by tool number basís
T:GEOM 11: ЧERк 11001 . Пπт R τ : GEO-TOL iT : UE:R-TOL lT : DflIR 101 1
І
T00і. ИΠ. ТYPE К-RКIS ?-RXt5 RRDIUS Vı
1 1 8
2 8.8ØB Ø.ΘOØ 8
3 Θ. 088 8
4 8.0Ø0 B
2 1 θ.000 Ø
2 e. e σ e.ØØØ e
з e. 008 e
и Lи н[й ROιS.
İ

- i45-
İ
İ
2.VIEИПNG AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05
Turning wear offset screen oп a tool number by tool number basís
T:cεдо јτ:ІЈεaR 1VtJUL oa1τтa,cεд-тuιT:UER-TOL τ:вØτa-τoι
І
TдOі Ы0. тYPε X-BXIS Z-8X1S RBDIUS
1 1 8. θ88 Ø. θое B
2 θ. eвв Ø.888 θ.BBB Ø
3 θ. BΘe 8. 8Ø8 0. θ0Θ Ø
d θ. θθθ θ.ΘBO Θ.ΘΘΘ Θ
2 1 8. ØØ8 Ø.888 Ø.ØØO Ø
2 8. BØθ Ø.ØØØ Ø
3 8. B88 Ø.88Ø Ø.ØØØ Ø
Y IN lN1MERiІS.
NOTE
1 On machíning center CNCs, the turníng tool offset
setting screen does not appear.
2 For lathe CNCs standard models , the míllíng tool
oífset setting screen does not appear.




,
,
,
- 6-6 -
8-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 2.V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES

DISABLE WARNING MESSAGE
WRONG VALUE OF PARAIVIETER No. 14823 :
Displayed íf the value of parameter No. 14823 ís outsíde the
range of 1 to 999 and the tool number-by-tool number tool offset
setting screen ís selected. No data ís dísplayed on the screen.
TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
Dísplayed íf the system faíls to read or wríte tool and offset
numbers.
-Ø7-
3.VfEИПNG AND SETTING T OL MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05
3
V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL ,
MANAGEMENT DATA
Thís screen ís effective only íf bit 3 TMG of parameter No. 14823 ís
1.
,
,


- 648 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 3.VIEVИNG AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
З. 1 SELECTING THE TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA SETTING
SCREEN
<1> Press [>] on the ínítíal screen of each mode to dísplay the soft
ke s shown below, then press [SETING
A
<2> The followíng screen appears.
вAsıc
аі
2.REGISTER FIXED FØ 5ENTENCE FOR TURNING
3.SETTING OF OFFSET Ø TOОІ Н0.
4.TØ M łNRGEMENT DATH
5.TØ L1FE DATR
6.TØ LIFE DRTA LIST
ІL.ЕсГ ЅЕTTING ITEM [űID Pt1SN [SELECTI
Ј
<3> From thís screen, select TOOL 1v1ANAGEMENT DATA , and
the tool management data settíng screen appears.
-Ø9-
3.VIEVИNG AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05
MAGAZINE DATA SCREENS MAGAZINE 1 TO 4
1 Screen Dísplay ltems
MAGp2INE1 MqG07_INE2 MAGAZINE3 MH6H21НE4 ІSPDLıWA7T
POT 700L н0. TOOL KIND GROUP OFFSET N0.
TURNIIffi 1 881
8Ø2 TUitNING 1 Bθ5
8Ø3 TURNIłG 1 B89
884 TURNING 1 Ø13
ØØØ
1Ø1 MILLIN6 IH 821
ΘØØ
103 MILL2N6 lH Ø29
104 MILL1lБ 18 833
1Ø5 MILLIH6 18 837
088
Y 7Н HѕЈ1EØS.
JJJ_

płCЦR5 stáн 10 г U
The tool number, type, group numЬeг, and offset number
corresponding to each pot are dísplayed.
You can change tool numbers, types, and group numbers.
Dísplay ítems
POT:
Pot numbers aгe dísplayed.
You cannot set new ones from the screen.
NOTE
On the índívidual magazine data screens, as many
pots as the number of data items set ín
parameters Nos. 13222, 13227, 13232, and 13237
aгe dísplayed, begínníng wíth the start pot number
set ín NC parameters Nos. 13223, 13228, 13233,
and 13238.
TOOL NO.:
To regíster a new tool number in an empty tool number fle1d,
enter a new number and press the [1NPUT] key.
To ínvalídate аn exístíng tool number, enter O.
TOOL K1ND:
The tool tуpe coпespondíng to each tool number, as
determíned from the tool management data table, ís dísplayed.
To select the desíred one, press_the correspondingsoft key.
- 650 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 3.V1E1ΛПNG AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
GROUP:
The group number corresponding to each tool number, as
determíned from the tool management data table, is dísplayed.
To set a new one, enter a value.
OFFSET NO.:
The offset number corresponding to each tool number, as
determíned from the tool management data table, is dísplayed.
You cannot change offset numbers from this screen.
Soft keys
[тo лпvu]:
Return to the menu screen.
[CHCURS]:
Switches the system between cursor modes.
Dísplayed Warníng Messages
MAGAZINE MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
Displayed íf the system fails to normally read or write the data
coпespondíng to the pot numbers in the magazíne management
data table.
TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
Dísplayed íf the system fails to read or write tool management
data such as tool numbers, types, and group numbers.
INVALID INPUT :
Dísplayed if the entered value is outside the valid range.
- 651 -
3.V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874ENl05
SPINDLE AND STANDBY POS1T10N TOOL DISPLAY
SCREEN
1 Screen Display ltems
This screen dísplays the tools at spíndle positions and at subpots
standby posítíons .
σ

The number of dísplayed spíndle posítíons аnd the number of
displayed standby posítíons vary dependíng on the settíngs of
Parameter No. 13250 number of effectíve spíndles
Parameter No. 13251 number of effective standby posítíons
If the settíng of parameter No. 13250 ís 4 maximum and that of
parameter No. 13251 ís 4 maxlmum , the screen appears as shown
below.
σ:
ИβΓA21ыFt SРВL/W4τT
>001. Ho. HLOL kIHD αгoОР Øεsεт нo.
sPl>L rosı τuτиτ ив 1 881
Sanι нØsг 805 τІянτы6 s >17
ØDL POS3 041 HILLTNII 48 ıλl
SFDL P054 836 T <2NIN6 31 141
ЧR1T P051 822 TtA2NING 22 885
4Řł I T PıD52 825 TUčNING 22 097
OKiIT PØ53 848 ro1LLIN6 48 157
6äiIT Р0Sd 883 TtИčNING 1 889
εCEY IN HlλYεtőiLS.
Dísplay items
TOOL NO.:
To change the tool number at a spíndle or standby position, move
the cursor to that number, enter a new va1ue, аnd press [INPUT].
To ínvalidate an existíng tool number, enter 0.
- 652 -
в-6звτaεNıo5 TOOL MANAGEMENT 3.V1EWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
TOOL KIND:
The tool tvpe correspondíng to each tool number, as
determíned from the tool management data table, ís displayed.
To select the desíred one, press the corresponding soft ke .

GROUP:
The group number corresponding to each tool number, as
determined from the tool management data table, ís displayed.
To set a new one, enter a va1ue.
OFFSET NO.:
The offset nunıber correspondíng to each tool nunıber, as
determíned from the tool nıanagement data table, ís dísplayed.
You cannot change offset numbers froın thís screen.
Explanatíon of soft keys
[TO MNU]:
Return to the nıenu screen.
[CHCURS]:
Switches the system between cursor modes.
Dísplayed Warníng Messages
MAGAZINE MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
Dísplayed if the system fails to norınally read or wríte spindle or
standby positíon data from the nıagazíne management data table.
TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
Dísplayed íf the system fails to read or write tool management
data such as tool numbers, types, and group nuinbers.
INVALID INPUT :
Displayed íf the entered tool number ís outsíde the va1id range.
-653-
4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT в-sзк74EN/05
4
V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE
MANAGEMENT DATA
Thís screen ís effectíve on1y íf bit 4 TLF of parØeter No. 14823 ís
1.
- 654 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA
4. 7 SELECTING THE L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA SETTING
SCREEN
<1> Press [>] on the initial screen of each mode to display the soft
keys shown below, then press [SETINGJ:
<2> The following screen appears.
виsіc 1
і
2.RfG1STER F1XED FORM SENTEHCE FØ TURHING
3.5ETTIH6 OF OFFSET Ø TOOL Ø.
4. TØ мΦ1RGEMETΠ DRTR
5.TØ L1FE DATΠ
:6.TØ LIFE DRTR LIST
ı

ιεcτ sεττ І Нб І τεм RRD wısı tSELECT]
caиcει
<3> From thís screen, select TOOL LIFE DATA , and the lífe
management data settíng screen appears.
- 655 -
4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT B-б3874EN/05
SCREEN DISPLAY 1TEMS
тπΠL L,FE DATAЭ
GROtØ ØRDER TYPE T80L Ø. LIFE REST LIFE ØTICE L1FE STNTE
І 11 Оriλ1T 580 228 5 uN-HOTICE
CIJLWI 1 188 Ø 5 OVER
2 Ø7 2 38 5 SKIP
3 C8Lλ1T 3 108 8 5 HØ-f108
4 C8 RΠ 4 108 98 5 ENЯ8LE
5 Оt1HT 5 108 180 5 EłйłBLE
6
IN FüA1ERfäS.
Dispiay items
ORDER:
In the first column for each too1, the va1ue indicating the pńońty
of the tool is displayed.
By posítíoníng the cursor on thís ítem and entering a new va1ue,
you can change the pńoríty of that tool descríbed in detaíllater .
As many values as the number of tools in the group plus one are
dísnlaved so that vou can add a new too1.
GROUP:
The group numbers in the tool management data table are
displayed.
COUNT:
The count types time or number of tímes of use ín the tool
management data table are displayed.
For each group, the life count type tíme or number of tiınes of
use can be specífıed.
To specífy the desíred type, press the corresponding soft key.
TOOL NO.:
The tool numbers with the same group number are dísplayed.
The numbers are displayed in the order in whích the tools wi11 be
used.
You can regíster a tool number wíth the group.
To register a too1, move the cursor at the bottom blank portíon
of the tool nurnber column for that group and press [REGIST] or
pτess llYPUT. On the contrary, if you want to delete аn exístíng
too1, move the cursor to the number of that tool and press
DELETE].
ł 1 1 JJ

1ОG[sт DELETεı; cжuRs 6RPLST HHSRti TO NU
- 656 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA
LIFE:
The lífe of each too1, as deterØed from the tool management
data table, ís dísplayed.
You can set the lífe of each too1.
By pressíng [GØALL] a er entering a Ya1ue, you can set the
same lífe for aП the tools ín the group.
In the fırst row for each group, the sum of the lives of the tools

registered with that group ís dísplayed.
REST LIFE:
The rest of the lífe of each too1, as determíned from the tool
management data table, ís displayed.
By reconfiguring data, you can increase the rest of the life.
In the fırst row for each group, the sum of the rests of the lives of
the tools registered with that group is dísplayed.
ł
NOTICE LIFE:
The announced lífe of each too1, as determíned from the tool

management data table, ís dísplayed.
You can set the announced life of each tool rest of lífe after
which an announcement sígnal ís issued .
By pressíng [GRPALL] after entering a value, you can set the
same announced lífe for a11 the tools ín the Øouп.
In the fırst row for each group, the rest of lífe after whích the life
s`ate of that group changes to announced ís dísplayed.
You can also set the announced lífe of each group.
г STATE:
The state of each too1, as determíned from the tool management
É
data table ínvalíd, present, absent, ín use, skipped tool
damaged , ís displayed.
To select the desíred one, press the corres pondíng soft key.
г
In the fırst row for each group, the lífe state of that group not
announced or announced ís dísplayed. г
ι
C
1
- 657 -
4.VIEVИNG AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05
CHANGING TOOL PR10R1TY
You can change the pńońty of the tools in a group.
Procedure for changíng priority
<1> Posítíon the cursor on the príoríty value in the fvst co1Ø for
the desired tool and enter a new value.
<2> Press [ORDER] or press ØUT, and the priońty of the tool
changes to the new value. Those tools that have príoríty values
greater than the entered new value before the change arc
assígned theír prevíous values plus one, respectívely.
- 658 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 4.VIEVИNG AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA
UPDATING L1FE VALUES DISPLAYED ON THE TOOL
L1FE DATA SCREEN
When the tool life data ís changed wíth operatíng program, the tool
lífe data is updated on the toollife management data screen.
Operation
<1> Press [sETTING].
<2> Select TOOL LIFE DATA from the menu screen.
<3> The following screen appears.
Thc case count type ís COUNT
881 Ø.000 x Ø.808
2 Ø.ØOB
L Ø.000 C e. θвtì 5 880
C Y e. eeØ θ.ØθO F
B F Ø 601 18 48 54 88
Ø.ØØØ 697 Ø
і
T00L L ΓE DATił
GROUP ORDER TYPE TODL N0. LIFE REST LIFE NOTICE L3FE STHTE і іі COOHΓ 25 15 1 UH-NOTICE
COUNT 1 5 8 1 ØUER
2 COUHт 2 5 Ø 1 WER
3 Ø7 3 5 5 1 EØ1эıE
4 Clя1HT 4 5 5 1 ØBLE
5 εOнHT 5 5 5 1 EłäłHLE
6
EY IN NOMERfüS.
JJ
.__.
ORDER CHCURS tš2PLST HO . SIOH Tβ MNU
The case count type ís TIME

681
x e. в ѕ 2 e. 1ЈЯ ] Ø ,, 0Ї
-676 .144 ε i
C θ.θ0 Y B. B Θ.и8øIF Ø

iOOL LiFE DHтRj
GROUP ORDER TYPE TOOL N0. LIFE REST LIPE NOT10E L1Γ[ 4TRτE
181 т τ мε 5Ø8Н eØм ОВS 389H 59Ї+ 115 Ø01н 88м 0os ОНhиoт і cε
T ME 101 18ØH ØØH 885 ØBØH 8θM 888 8Ø1H ОЇłM 805 04ER
2 T I ME 102 1Ø0H 8Øм Ø8S ØB Ј 59і1 11S OBІН Ø8M 809 USI HО
3 τ I ME 183 18BH ØØM ØØ 1ИЯйł OØM 805 ΘØ1H ØΘM ØØS εfвi3LE
4 31HE 104 1ØΘH E ЈH 095 1ØØH ØOм 885 eelн 8Θм 085 Ełäłlä.E
5 τ ME 185 λØBН 1H Ø85 108H Ø0H OØS θ01H 08Н 905 ENAВіE
5
- 659 -
4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT в-sзв74EгvІО5
<4> If the tool life data is changed with operatíng program, the
dísplayed life data ís updated.
11 .
2 é: 5 108Н38
r O.ØØØ.в e:в F 1B. ΘBØØ
581 18 48 54 08 0 Y 597 99
H OL L1FE ØTR1
і
GROUP ORDER TYPE TOOL 80. LIFE REST LIFE HOTICE LiFE STRTE
1 CO A1T 25 14 1 UN-tЮTICE
І CBLØłT 1 5 8 1 ØUER
2 CBUNT 2 5 1 ØUER
3 CØLNIT 3 5 1 H51 G
4 CØОRλT 4 5 1 EМA1ІE
5 C1ø.M1T 5 5 1 ENRВLE
6
Y I H FAiMERRLS.
The case count type is TIME
0 2999
?.604 581 H 82999
, X 9 Ø 2. 11 . 8θ88 T 10
2
C 8. θ88 5 2ØØØ H 3
с Y 8. б88 F 10
H 8. Ø88 581 18 48 54 88
G97 98 69. 1
,,
IOOL 1..,FE DRTlλ4
І
GROOP ΠRDER TYPE STRτε
1ΘГ T1hfĚ 5ØFqi BθH ØØS 389H 588 485 Øθ1H 0ØM 805 ІЈН-НØT 1 CE
TInE 181 1Ø ЦІ ØEkı Π85 ØσΠH ØØH ØØS Ø01H ØOM ØØS ØVER 2 τіІІε 1e2 1EйЦł ООkt НВ5 8a9н 588 48 ØØ1н ØØм ØØ5 USI NG з τімЕ 183 1θ Цł зм ØØ5 ІΘσн Πακ ОВŚ eeıн eeм ØØs εHRBLε 4 ττмЕ 184 ıØFqł ØσМ 805 18Øн Øσn 885 Øeıн eeМ Øes EHABLE
5 τı мЕ ıe5 1eΣMł oσn ΘØs 1eØн σσ8 ΘØ5 Øe1н eeМ eeS EHRBLE
6
EY IN NUf1ERALS.
J J
CHC, 3 ØRPLST 80 . SRł1 T 0 nNU
- 66 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA
GROUP NUMBER L1ST DISPLAY
A líst of the lífe states of groups can be dísplayed. Groups can be
sorted in the order of number or life state.
Pressing [GRPLST] when the lífe management data screen ís
displayed dísplays the followíng screen:

6R01.Р Ø. FØEvı0ı15 FЮтІCE STHтε

10
28
38
48 1qTICΣЛ OVER
5θ 1ЮTICED 01 R
188
110 ØTfCED
120 NОhł4К
200
SELECT Cдč H ä , iцΦ PUSN [SEIECT]
In the PREVIOUS NOTICE column, NOTICED ís displayed only
for those groups with the Previous Notíce F1ag set. In the STATE
column, OVER ís dísplayed for a group when the lífe states of a11
tools belonging to the group are OVER , SKIP , and/or
NO-NM C .



ь
ι
f
ŕ

Γ
ť - 661 -
Ì
4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05
Display of groups sorted in the order of number or life state
When [S SORT] ís pressed on the group number list screen, the grotlp
numbers are displayed in the life state/previous notice order.
uo. rкεuі гmтτСЕ sтAтε
NOTICED OVER
SB lC1T CED BVER
118 NOTICED
218 NUTΣCED
1
18
20
38
1ЯВ
288
ѕЕіЕс ěRλ D Pusíł SELECT1
NOTE
Иlhen group numbers are dísplayed in the order of
life state, the groups are dísplayed ín the following
order:
<1> Groups for whích OVER is displayed in the
STATE coiumn
<2> Groups for which NOTICED ís displayed in
the PREVIOUS NOTICE column
<3> Grорs other than <1> and <2>
Pressíng [N SORT] displays groups sorted by group number.
Group selection
P1ace the cursor over a group number to be selected, then press
[sELECT]. The life management data screen of the selected group
number appears.
- 662 -
8-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA
DISPLAY OF GROUP NUMBER L1ST
On the group number 1íst, the state ofthe group which is not managed
is dísplayed as NO-MNG
The lífe of the group of which lífe state ís over can be restored on the
group nunıber 1íst.
4.Ó.1 Dísplay Lífe States of Group
On the tool life data screen, pressíng [GRPLST] displays the
followíng screen.
, .,
Ø. ØØ A
e. σей с Ø
t Лe1W 1tl. IKčEV,σUS HσT10E sТяОТ
вs=ε
1eQ2
1σ03 N9TtCED
1eθ4 H973СЕD
2eθLL
2σf12 Hσ7tC B uд. L-1д. 3θθ .1 tq-MFı 1 я. J8. 5 зeσ2 Ho-мHe L
ke, 1999.; 5ØØ .1 Hσ-Mi Oe. L-18. 8861 NefICEЯ
Ц:C7 Gя01A 40. 641 Рі6H [SFLEC77

When the states of the a11 tools, which belong to same group, are not
managed, the group lífe state ís displayed as NO-MNG .
And the life state of the group, whích is not NO-MNG and does not
include ENABLE or ``USING too1, ís dísplayed as ` OVER
Form this screen, pressing [S SORT] dísplays the followíng screen.
02995 6 eтчe1
18
De 60
eиe
ε 8
0ё 97 ae sa 88
[, .І f09 9e 98 69 13. 1
ьxauP нo. ØіØ иoТτcε sτяІε
1093 йеΓICEB 0Ø 1σ94 HдT1Ø ЈØ
2882 ØlCEB
8881 ØTICED
і:;Ј
1e92
29191
8892
9e01
Øσ1 łФ-ffi
Ø PUSN [9βECT7 .;,
- 663 -
4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63 74EN/05
The group whích state is no managed ís dísplayed at the bottom of the
list as following.


β.00Ø ѕ β H 89981
18
,Y Ø.Ø00 в e 08 H 8 5 e 8 tl 8
2 Ø.ØØØ F A a8B 1? 48 54 88
e. eBB C Γ^T=п. Λ9 9й 98 69 12. 1
w sαoıw ю. Øutαα εaπcε sτиτε .:_._:._ - . 1 2882 ØIICED
8881 ØIICΣD
1801
1802
28θ1 0802
8081.
3оа1 Ψ- MiG
3Ø82
Ю-fNF 1
jSEt CΣ GRФP 80. Ø PkØ [SELECI7
І
-E164-
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA
Restore Group Lífe
On the tool lífe data screen, pressíng [G FILL] displays the followíng
screen.
. г 8 2ччe.
и e79eı ø. øø τe
ee 98
ø.øøø s eмe
ι e
<øøø 886 i7 48 56 88
8. BθΘ C Γ- 1 149 98 9e 59 13. і
БRØIF Ю. PREV3Ø ЮΓ3Cε STRTE
- .Ј
1887
1883 taHICER OØ
1884 ЮTtCEΛ ØØ
Γ 28H1
2882 ЮTΓСЕA 145. 1-18. 2882 Ю-łf18 j. 38. 3Ø, θ 3862 Ю- fй KCB. Ø. 5881 1p-lγ16 i VØ. L-λ8. -
BØØ1 ICED
IRfLEcT hRBUP Ю. qHD FYSN fS[LE:CT]
Move the cursor to the group of which state is OVER , and press [G
FILL]. And the life states of the tools, whích belong to the group,
change to ENABLE , and the rest lífe va1ue becomes same as the life
value.
And the group notice life state changes UN-NOTICE .
Γ
The tool life state whích ís NO-MNG oг SKIP is not updated
when [G FILL] ís pressed.
When the group lífe ís restored, the group lífe state ís no longer
O VER .
ь
02998
4 87983.
ø ι ø øø 8
08 иθ Y ø.øøø dX 5 eмe
г 8 1F A 588 17 48 54 80
B C 9 98 98 69
6 Ø Ю. PRÈVIBUS ЮTìCE STHTE
18Ø1
V 1ΘØ2 Іјe. L196.
јeea нØττгεп Øυεк 6. 18. тØ.
2881 ı 8. κ8. ε99э
2682 нØτ І cεп υØ. L-1Ø. 3861 Ю-MH4 10. 38. se: эeØτ Ю-гыs 0999. : 5681 Ю-миG ЏØ. і. Ѕθ. 8861 Н8T1Ø
lEØBRΛLP Ю. 888 Pt H [SELECT3
H ØRïјS iØk τ ,
V
1
- 665 -
4.V1EWING AND SETTING L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA TOOL MANAGEMENT в-6зв7aεNıos
DISPLAYED WARNING MESSAGES
TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
Dísplayed íf the system fails to read or wńte tool management
data such as tool numbers and group numbers.
INVALID INPUT :
Dísplayed íf the entered value is outsíde the valid range.
GROUP LIFE STATE IS NOT OVER .
When [G FILL] is pressed on the tool life data screen, this
warning ís dísplayed if the group state of the current cursor
positíon ís not OVER .
SETTING THE L1FE NOTICE FLAG
To dísplay the lífe state N0TICED or UN-NOTICE of a group
on the life management data screen, the Prevíous Notice F1ag of tool
ınanagement data needs to be set with the PMC.
The MANUAL GØE í system dísplays T10TICED as the state of
a group when the Previous Notice F1ag ís set to the state descríbed
be1ow.
If bít 3 ETE of paτameter No. 13200 = 0
When the Prevíous Notíce F1ag of one of the tools that belong
to a group ís set to NOTICED
If bít 3 ETE of parameter No. 13200 = 1
When the Prevíous Notíce F1ags of a11 tools that belong to a
group are set to NOTICED
Method of modífyíng the PMC ladder program
Modífy the ladder program so that the tool management data
Previous Notice F1ag of the tool beíng used ís set to 1
T10TICED when the NC outputs a toollife arrival notíce signal.
For the Prevíous Notíce F1ag of tool management data, bit 7 of
customízatíon item 0 ís used.
Bít : Meanin Descrí tïon of data
Previous Notice O:UN-NOTICE
F1a 1:NOTICED
6
5
Customizatíon ítem 4
0 3
2 --- 1 -
0 =
- 666 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT L1FE DATA L1ST SCREEN
STOOL L1FE DATA L1ST SCREEN
The tool lífe state of a11 tools can be dísplayed on the tool life
management data líst screen.
- 667 -
L1FE DATA L1ST SCREEN TOOL MANAGEMENT s sзв7aEwo5
Jr. 7 SELECTING THE L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA L1ST
SCREEN
<1> Press [SETTING], and the followíng screen appears.
2.RE615TER FITED FØ SEіTEHCE FOR Tl1RN1N6
. ЅЕТПі OF UFFSET RND TOOL Ø.
a. TØ Γ1iM1RГΣΓENΓ DHTR
`.i. TØ LIFE DHTR
ıi.TØ LIFE DRTH L15T
This item is dísplayed when the parameter is 1.
- 668 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT L1FE DATA L1ST SCREEN
L1FE MANAGEMENT DATA L1ST SCREEN
<1> From BASIC tab screen on sETTBIGS ınenu, select TOOL
LIFE DATA LIST , and the followíng screen appears.
І.

OOL LiFL oeτe u5тj
Øuн ORDER IVPF icJOL NO. LIFL REsI LIFS нoтτcε LIFE SтHτε
іі Ø і ıвe e 5 Øυεx
Т CØЈHІ 2 1ee 30 5 SKıP
3 Ø 3 180 Ø 5 NØ-ıfłG
4 CØUHt 4 188 98 5 ЕHЯ8LE
5 COtЖT 5 108 18e 5 Etц
1 T 1 HE 181 3Θ0H ON Ø85 BBØH B ä1085 881H 88H B85 ØUER
2 T і HE 182 3Ø8H 80M 885 1e1H 23H 575 Ø81H 8ØN 085 ENBBLE
3 T 1 ME 1Ø3 3ØOH 88M Ø05 3ΘØH ØВі18Ø5 BØ1H θØM 005EJ18eLE
4 T І E 104 3oBH 8Ø 885 3ØOH 8ØH 085 θ81Н Ø8И Ø05 EIWHLE
5 T I E 185 ЭeOH ØBH 00S 3ΘØH eBM 8ØS ØØ1Н θθM θ8SENBALE
26 1 COuttT 281 58 58 3 EиHHCE
2 CØUHT 262 58 58 3 EWTIILE
3 COuНT 283 58 50 3 EHBBLE
a ØHT 2041 58 50 3 εиBBLe
5 ØT 285 5 50 3 ENRØLE
38 1 T 1 HE 381 999H 59H 595 999H 59H 595 0Ø3H 8ØM 885 EHBBLE
Toollífe state for a11 tools are dísplayed as a líst form.
Group number ís displayed at the 1eft end.
The lífe state índicatíon of each tool ís the same as that on
the conventíonallífe management data screen.
On thís screen, you can change the priority of the tools
which are belong to the same group with cursor poínted too1.
The actíon performed Ьy pressíng each soft key is the same
as that on the conventíonallífe management data screen.
<2> Move the cursor to TYPE , and the followíng screen a ears.
τ0oι ιіFε DBτa LITT1
.6ROUP ORDER IVPE IOOL и0. L1FE REST LIFE HОT10E LIFE STflTE
1 1 ι 1 18Ø 8 5 1UfiTt
2 Ø 2 188 38 5 SKiP
3 COUHT 3 108 8 5 Ы0-1Hã
d COoиτ a 180 9e 5 εиRØLε
5 COuиІ 5 1ee ıΘB 5 εиBвЕE
10 1 T t HE 181 3ØØH ØBH ØØS ØΘBH ØθH 885 ØØ1H 8UH 005 КER
2 T 1 HE 102 308H ØOH 085 101ıł 23 1575 Ø81H θ8M 865 EHRΘLE
3 T 1 ME 1Ø3 3ØOH OØH 08S 38ØH 0011805 ØØ1H 8BH 88S ElNЛLE
4 T ύ HE 184 38ØH F łH 005 3B ł 8 14 ΘØ5 ł1H Ø8M 8ØS E HüE
5 T 11 HF 185 30ØH ØOH Ø8S 30ØH BΘH 005 0Ø 1H 08M Ø05E YVłLE
28 1 C ц1H7 281 58 50 3 EHBBLE
2 ClÃ1HT 282 58 54 3 E iHLE
3 CФцП 203 56 58 3 ENRBLE
4 CØØН1 264 58 50 3 E
5 СВІЈНІ 205 58 58 3 εHBHЕε
` 30 1 T 11 HÉ 381 999H 59M 595 999H 5914 595 ØØ3H 8θH 985 EHЯЖ.E
ιнc
On thís screen, you can change the count type of the tools
whích aгe belong to the same group wíth cursor poínted too1.
- 669 -
L1FE DATA L1ST SCREEN TOOL MANAGEMENT 6-63874EN/05
The actíon performed by pressíng each soft key ís the same
as that on the conventíonal life management data screen.
<3> Move the cursor to TOOL NO. , and the followíng screen
appears.
ІІ1Ві1Т8іl
TOOL ı.İFE DRτЧιÌST1
6RØUP ØRDER TYPE TØØL ЫØ. L1FE RΣST LIFI HOTICE LiPE ςTATE
1 1 COfMI 108 8 5 OUER
2 C01λЛ 2 180 38 5 9 íP
3 COUNT 3 108 8 5 łЮ-F і6
4 CO[kΠ 4 108 90 5 EHHHLE
5 COUNT 5 188 1110 5 ENRBLE
18 1 T 1 ME 181 30ØH ØΘM 8ОЅ ØBBH 0 18BS 8Ø1H Ø i 885 OVER
2 T НE 182 ЭBFAi 88M ő8S 181H 2311 575 B81H 608 885 EN88LE
3 T ME 183 3BΘH 8BM 885 3ØØH 8Bм 8Ø5 ΘØ]1ł 08M 885 ENABLE
4 T 1 ME 184 3Θ8H 08 1 085 3ΘBЫ 08 1 Θ8S ØØ1H 88 1 885 EHpBLE
5 T I ME 185 380 4 BENIBBS 30BH BB 1 BBS BB 1H 8BM 865 EHRELE
1 COUHT 281 58 58 3 EHАBLE
2 COØИT 282 58 50 3 EHRHLE
3 CФ1ЫT 283 511 59 3 ENЯ1 <E
4 COUHT 294 58 58 3 ENqBLE
5 C0 /НT 21 5 58 50 3 ENNHLE
38 1 T 1 ME 381 999H 59 1 595 9994 59 1595 Ø83:ł Ø8м ØØ5 EИRØLE
HCEY H N1k R ä.S.
J
βEG 5T ØLETE CNCt1RS H.?PLST ЫΩ .SRH
On thís screen, you can change the tool number of which is
pointed Ьy the cursor. The action performed by pressíng
each soft key is the same as that on the conventíonal life
management data screen.
<4> Move the cursor to LIFE , and the following screen appears.
1001 LIFE DflTA usTi
GROUP ORDER TYPE TOOL O. L1ŕE REST LIFξ NOTICE LI E STRTE
іі 1 CO hП 1 јі 8 5 OVER
2 COUH1 2 188 38 5 SRTP
3 CI UHT 3 10 1 8 5 HQ-MN6
4 C IUNT 4 180 98 5 ENRHLE
5 C0 1HT 5 108 108 5 ENqBLE
1 T 1 ME 101 308H tц1M OØS BØEйł B8M 8ØS ØØ1H 8θM 085OUER
7 T IHE 182 388H ПØM 085 101H 231575 0Ø1H 08 1 085
3 T 1 ME 183 380F10BH 005 388H ØØM 805 801H OOM 885 EHRBLE
4 T 1 ME 104 30Ø1i ØOM 1105 3f6Н ØØM 88S ØØ 1H 88M 005ENABLE
5 T] ME 185 3Økцł ØOM OØS 388 4 OØM 8E6 ØØ1H 08M ØØ E Ѕ NЯ і.É
1 CØØHT 201 58 50 3 EHRBLE
2 COUNT 282 50 58 3 ENRBLÉ
3 COUHT 283 58 56 3 EHAВЕE
4 C M1 H 204 58 58 3 EH88 .E
5 CCUNT 285 50 50 3 ENRA1. E
1 T I ME 383 999H 59M 593 999H 59M 59S О03H 80м 805 ENA łlE
..............._.._._ . KEY 1H 4ІΓERДLθ.
r
JJ J
GkPN1_L CHC11R5 Γft Ч.Si NU . SiTFł 1u nыu
--
On this screen, you can change the tool lífe va1ue of whích
ís poínted by the cursor. The action performed by pressing
each soft key ís the same as that on the conventíonal lífe
management data screen.
<5> Move the cursor to STATE , and the following screen appears.
- 670 -
6-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT L1FE DATA L1ST SCREEN
Γ88L LIεć DRTH LlST
GROIP ØDER iYPE 1001 i40. ` LIłΣ REST LIřE NQTICE L1FE STA7E
1 1 Ø 1 188 8 5 і
2 tblAiT 2 188 3B 5 SKIP
3 C8UH7 3 1Ø8 8 5 NO-MNG
4 COUHT 4 1θ8 98 5 E ł
5 C8lAi7 5 180 1ØØ 5 ENHBLE
18 1 T I ME 181 30ØH 88M 085 θOØн Ø8м 805 Ø81H Ø8M 80S BVER
2 T ı нε 182 388н Ойм 88S 18ін 2341 575 8e1н 8ØM e8s εJ18BLε
3 T I ME 183 38BH 88м Ø8S 3Ø8H BØM 885 BB 1H ØBM ØØS EHRBLE
4 71 ME 184 380H Ø8M Ø85 3[еH 88M B8S 881H θØM 08S EHNBLE
5 T 1ME 185 38ØH 0ØІі Ø85 38Bн B8M ØØ5 B81H 80M 085 EHBHLE
28 1 CBIЯtT 281 58 58 3 ElNBLE
2 CBUHI 282 58 58 3 EHBHLE
3 CBUHT 283 58 58 3 EHЯBLE
4 CBUHT 284 58 58 3 EHRffiE
5 CUUHT 205 58 58 3
38 1 T МГ 381 9998 5941 59S 99944 59м 595 8B3H Ø8м ØØS EWłBLE
On thís screen, you can change the tool life state of whích is
pointed by the cursor. The action performed Ьy pressíng
each soft key is the same as that on the conventional lífe
management data screen.
<6> Pressing [GØLST] displays the líst of the lífe states of groups.
The data dísplayed ís the same as that on the conventíonal group
number list screen. When a group number ís selected in the
group number líst wíndow, the lífe management data list screen
appears wíth the cursor placed on the fırst tool of the selected
group.
<7> When the tool lífe data ís changed wíth operatíng program, the
toollífe data is updated on the toollife data líst screen.
- 671 -
DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES TOOL MANAGEMENT в-sзв7aErυos
6
MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES
Two tool offset number specífıcatíon methods are available: the
conventíonal method in whích a offset nØber índependent of a tool
nØber ís directly specífied, and the method in whích a offset type
assocíated wíth a tool number ís specífıed. Wíth the latter, when a
offset type ís specífıed, the ofFset type ís dísplayed at the modal
ínformatíon dísplay posítíon as long as the offset type remaíns
effectíve.
ı
- 672 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES
SCREEN DISPLAY 1TEMS
Screen that appears when a offset nØber ís d vectly specifıed
on the lathe
., e 28zs
X e.во8 ıs и еевоо
0 τ 135999
Z fl 0. Ø 0 Ø c s eоe
C ε e.eeøв
0.Øø0 в é: F 0 6ee ıe ae sa ю
v e.eeeв e. eee . 697 99
Thís screen is the same as the conventíonal one.
Screen that appears when a offset type ís specífıed on the lathe
., јo 2025
ñ 6ee
x S 0
z r eY 2
c e м e
C ø . ø r 0ø e σee F e eииe
e e:eee F Ø Г8e 1848 54 ee
и. йо8 в и. 8ee , G97 99
If bit 7 STS of parameter No. 14823 ís 1 and the offset type ís
displayed, the offset type ís displayed after T- ín the status
display section.
Screen that appears when a offset nØber is diτectly specífıed
on the millíng machíne
., o 88eé
Ø . 0 cee 0Ø н eoeeи
х x s В. 888 0 τe
r
Y 8999 H 999 ? e. ойо s eи99
в
F e
Z c В. 8 F 88 0 6ee 1? ae sa ee
e. ew c a. Øee 669 98 98 69
Thís screen ís the same as the conventíonal one.
Screen that appeaτs when a offset type ís specífıed on the
mílling machíne
.,
X ø . ØØØ Ј 6 іІіі o τ гš
и eeвe Y ø Øø x Yø e e . 0 ey τ a_,_
-і 999 н-4 993
. z e. eee F eн99
z 0. 00Ø é: В F
Gee 1, Ge 54 8e
в e. еой c e. eøe - G49 9e 98 69 13. 1 8:
If bit 7 STS of parameter No. 14823 is 1 and the offset type ís
dísplayed, the offset type ís dísplayed after D- and H- ín the
status dísplay section.
- 673 -
DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05

DISPLAYED OFFSET TYPES SET BY THE MACHINE
TOOL BUILDER
In the status dísplay sectíon, offset types are dísplayed by referencíng
the followíng vańables:
90248, D code offset type on the mílling machíne
90249, offset type on the lathe and H code offset type on the míllíng
machine
When specífyíng a tool offset number, the machíne tool buílder ís
required to set a offset type in vańables 90248 and 90249 in the
called macro program, usíng T, D, and H codes.
If dírectly specífyíng a offset number, ínstead of specífyíng a offset
type, the machíne tool buílder ís required to set the above variables to
nu11.
- 674 -
8-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 7.DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN
7
DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN
By pressíng the soft key dísplayed on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen,
it ís possible to change the screen to the tool management data table
oп the NC síde.
1n order to use thís feature, ít is necessary to set the
TLD
- 675 -
7.DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN TOOL MANAGEMENT B 63874ENıo5
OPERATION
<1> At the case of the parameter TLD settíng 1 ,the
followíng [TL-MNG] ís dísplayed on the base screen in the each
mode.
Example EDIT mode
<2> Pressíng [TL-MNG] dísplays the following tool management
data screen.
Magazíne management table screen
.,І41 ,Г[ю і ,- , 01ØØØ NØIØØØ
HB YPf...łO.
1 16 17
2 j 17 17
S г 3 Г 10 17 a г-a 19 1?
y 5 20 17
`-21 21
ь 1 7 . .._. Г ê2 - 21
N Γ θ ј--23 21
Э г 9 ťQ Г 24
1H 1θ 7 > І 25 25
11 - 11 9 26 j 26 25
12 12 9 72 Г Ľ7 25
13 јі3 13 :2ö.Í28 21
14 Γľıi 13 29 `.і 21 1s Γ15 1з :U . Ю TЭ
Too1 management data table screen
70U 1YNG DНTR 1- 1 0100Ø _ N01ØØØ
.
яі. τииε-+m 0t Рπі τ-1юo cГіиτ wu-ı гεε н τіcε-ι і -,τaτε
1 Γ_ і ι і _ 3 Γ _ __ s ` i εжeιε
2 1 1 2 GÍ1 й 5 Γ - θ 1 ΓØaΣ
3 1 1. 3 1 R Г S Г 5 ľ І H Е
a І 1 1 e 5 5 Š E1W E sг 3 і 1 GfiĞf e 1 ıм
6 -- _5 і 6 G11iØ 8 Γ θ Í 1
7 Г 5 MEŘ 8 ľ 1 Î ØäE в Г s 1 B UHt:p е i ø i г ØГ
9 Γ----4 і 9 uHιyг a s i Γε иaε
10 9 1 . 1e pЧkŔ --- 4 --- 4 ----- ì opвιε
ıı ч t ıı uHIP Γ ď Γ + 1 oweιε
12 і ı .t ĞFј:+k ě Γ` é i Γвlãвιέ
33 -- iэ t iJ Gε,εά а I--5 І і ΓØBιε
ıa Г ı3 і 14 μ lм н c C α k _--і 5 - Š s j Г --i 1 Γ ЕWіuЕ
35 - 1з ,. 11
1 s 81 e4
24 ] 1
[ пГ
- 676 -
f
r
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT 7.DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN
NOTE
Either Magazine management table screen or Too1
management data table screen is displayed. The
sстeen previously displayed is appeared.
<3> On this screen, íf the functíon keys for startup MANUAL
GUIDE i are pressed, the screen returns to the MANUAL
GUIDE i base screen.
ι
- 677 -
TOOL MANAGEMENT B-63874EN/05
SOTHERS
78 -
B-63874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT
ó. 1 RETURN TO MENU SCREEN
It is possible to return to the menu screen from tool management
screen. And ít is possíble to return to the base screen as before by
parameter settíng.
8. 1. 1 Return to SETTINGS Menu Screen
<1> Press [SETTING]
<2> From BASIC menu screen, select TOOL LIFE DATAand
the followín screen appears.
. 09 Xeı e. 888 0 2882
н θ8819
Λ S ø T 8
z Ø ec . θee e ı.
Ś 8 M 8 aa . 99 HB.Øθe F
F Geı 1e 4e 54 ee
Ø
Y ι G9? 99 69. 1 13. 1
ι
т00ι L1FE DMτЯ1
6RΠ Ј ORI]ER τYØ TO IL Ø. LIFE Rεsт L FE H[ TICE LIFE sтЯτε
1 caмτ 1 zs 15 1 UH-HOTICE
CГЛ1HT 1 5 Ø 1 OVER
2 C01RдT 2 5 8 1 OVER
3 COıtłíT 3 5 5 1 ENBЛιE
4 C0і1НT 4 5 5 1 ENBBLE
5 CDUNτ 5 5 5 1 ENBBLE
6
ЕУ I N Nü1 яiLS.
1 1
oRОεя CHLYIRS GRPLST тp Mи 1J
<3> Pressíng [ 10 MNU] dísplays the following menu screen. The
cursor ís displayed on the posítion of previous selected screen
ín this case TOOL LIFE DATA
, ;
568 ø.øøø Ч 8798
x В. 888 τв
Y oe He 1 ι1ι 01 ø.øøø 2 8.eвe s вne
e 2 F 8 ø.øθ c в.e8e Г A 868 17 48 54 811
B 65

с юs c p я ss ε гд o aı вαЯІЇØ і
1.REG15TER FIIffD FвRM SEі4TEНCE F8R MILLING
2.RE61sTER FIØ FBRM SENTEFICE F8R TURHING
Э.sETτIH6 OF ffFŘT Ø TØ Ø. a.τØ гaгa6εгεиτ ØTe
.τ0α LIFE DBTR usτ
Lεcτ sεтτЈHG ιτЕН AHD PUsı гsειεстП

ŕ

- 679 -
і
1
TOOLMANAGEMENT B 63874EN/o5
NOTE
SETTING OF OFFSET AND TOOL NO. , TOOL
MANAGEMENT DATA , and TOOL L1FE DATA
L1ST are the same as TOOL L1FE DATA
When the parameter No. 14850 2 ís `1 , [CLOSE] ís dísplayed ínstead
of [TO MNU]. Pressíng [CLOSE] returns to the base screen as before.
cRІ+ Øs ώ ιwØsr 8. Ѕι
- 6КO -
Bfi3874EN/05 TOOL MANAGEMENT
.Ĺ 1NH1B1T10N OF EDITING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA AT
CNC STANDARD SCREEN
On the tool management data screen of NC síde, it is possíble to
ínhabít to edít the tool management data.
Operatíons
In the case of the parameter on, when [EDIT] ís pressed
on the tool management data screen, the followíng waníng ís
dísplayed. And the tool management data cannot be altered at NC
screen.
WRITE PROTECTED
.3
US1NG TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA
The foll wing customization dala on the tool management data table
are used by the tool management functíons for MANUAL GUIDE i.
Therefore MTB can not use these customízation ítems when the tool
management functíons for MANUAL GUIDE i is used.
ltem Bít Content
Customization item 0 7 Previous Notice F1a
6
5 _
4
3
2
1
0
Customization item 1 TOOL NO.
Customization item 2 OFFSET NO.
Customization item 3 TOOL K1ND
Customization item 4 TOOL US1NG ORDER
NOTE
1n order to enable Too1 Using Order , it is
necessary to set the parameter No. 13203 6 to 1
and to 4. When these parameter are 0,
the shortest life tool is searched not according to
this order.
- 681 -
V1. EXAMPLE OF PROGØMMING
OPERATION

8-63874EN/05 EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 1.EXPLANATORY NOTES
1
EXPLANATORY NOTES
WARNING
A11 data described in this Part such as parameter,
offset data and part program cannot be used for
actual machining. Actual data varies from one
machine model to another. Refer to the applicable
manual supplied by the respective machine tool
builders for details.
1f the set data does not match the characteristic of a
specífıc machine, the tool may bump against the
workpiece, and the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing
damage to the tool and/or machine, and even
injuries.
The part program made by using 1VIANUAL GLIIDE τ has a form of
ISO-code program wíth G-code and so on.
You must enter the program used for such as tool changing, tool offset,
spíndle rotatíon, approachíng and releasing in the form of ISO-code
program.
In addítíon to those actíons, you can enter the part program for
complicated machíníng motions, whích are usually difficult to make
by ISO-code form, as a Cyc1e machíníng by usíng menu
programmíng method. This cycle machíning ís made in form of a
block includíng G-4digits and necessary data items.
In the followíng explanatíons, the contents of a square frame meаn the
actual operatíons, and each operation are described as follows.
[NEWPRG] : Push a soft-key
12345 : Enter numeric data
INPUT : Push an INPUT key
: Push a CURSOR key
ti ÌÌ : Push a PAGE key
CREATE NEW PROG : Name of Wíndow or Data ítem
: Name of Tab
1.CYLINDER : Menu item
- 685 -
EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 6-63874EN/05
2 LATHE
Exarnple Outer Roughíng/Fíníshíng, C-axís dňllíng
Workpíece : Round Ьaг ф100x80
1 st Process : Outer roughíng Ьy General purpose tool
for rougØg T0101
2nd Process : Outer finishing by General purpose tool
for finíshíng T0202
3rd Pτocess : C-axís end face dńllíng Ьy Drí11 T0303
R3
80
R3 C2
60
τ
Q
φ100 φ60 φ22
1
ı

i
F_30 ___
50 __
80 -
- 686 -
8-63874EN105 EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 2. LATH E
SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA
Љ WARNING
1 Operation of tool offset setting varies from one
machine model to another. So operations described
in this section may differ from those ion actual
machine.
As to the actual operation of tool offset setting on
the actual machine, refer to the applicable manual
supplied by the respective machine tool buílders for
details.
1f the set data does not match the characteristic of a
specifıc machine, the tool may bump against the
workpíece, and the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing
damage to the tool and/or machine, and even
injuries.
2 As to the operations on a machine described in thís
chapter, refer to the applicable manual supplied by
the respective machine tool builders for details.
1f the operation does not match the characteristic of
a specifıc machine, the tool may bump agaínst the
workpiece, and the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machiníng, possibly causing
damage to the tool and/or machine, and even
in uries.
- 67 -
Ğ.Lŕ;ľŕiE EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING B-63874EN/05
Settíng of Z-axís Offset Data
1 Set a standard workpíece on a chuck of lathe. After then, for
safety, take measure to keep fu11y safety such as closíng the
machíne door.
2 Execute the machine reference position retunı of X-and Z-axís.
3 Output T-code in MDI mode, and select the tool for measuring.
4 Make a spindle rotate by fu11y safety speed.
5 Cut surface A of the fo1]owíng drawíng in manual mode with a
actual too1.
6 Release the tool ín X-axís d vectíon on1y, without movíng Z-axís.
7 Stop the spíndle.
8 Measure distance β from the zero poínt іn the workpíece
coordínate system to surface A.
Operate as follows on the 1VIANUAL GUIDE i screen.
[T-OFS]
TOOL OFFSET

[CHCURS]
TTEM <--> wí11 be dísplayed on the right upper part of the wíndow

Z-ØS
Offset number for the used tool
[1VIEASUR]
CALCULATE OFFSET 1ИEASURE
R ØUT Z WORK
Check the result of calculatíon dísplayed in the RESULT
ØuT]
GEO1v1TERY OFFSET
- 688 -

B-63874EN/05 EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 2. LATH E
s 8 X 42Ø . 000 1 H 88BB1
ву Θ: Γ 9
5 8 M 8
. θ . θθθY 8.8Θ8 0 F 8. EB88 F 681 12 48 84 88
і
Ø.000
6ΣOf TRY дiFSEi јцERR lYf5E7 ıTПΠL. ЛRTΛ 1
NO. X-6U5 2-flX15 Y-ЯXIS RλD3U5 ЏlRΓ.TlP
p81 [г кς Іјaі :aa::a[Gг:ЅІ:ЈΦ
802 _._-._...._ u- eeз Rκ cдaд.
г.uεКtиτ τHRstı КεκпІ
Ø -2.
lВб 11PТІT ТЯR6EТ OH Ø CWRD.
BB7
Y 3H Γ :..:.
1
1

1 ι
1
Γ
`
L
F
Ý
1
Ì
İ
1

ŕι
1
Í
- 689 -
`
ť
r.
2.LAľНE EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING B-63874EN/05
Settíng of X-axis Offset Data
Continuously after setting of Z-axis offset data, set the X-axis offset
data as follows.
1 Make a spindle rotate by ftilly safety speed.
2 Cut surface B of the followíng drawing in manual mode with a
actual too1.
3 Release the tool in Z-axis dírectíon on1y, wíthout movíng X-axis.
4 Measure the díameter a of surface B. Set this va1ue as the
measured value for X-axís in the desíred offset No.
TOOL OFFSET

ITEM <--> wíll Ьe dísplayed on the ńght upper part of the wíndow
χ_AXIS
Offset number for the used tool
[λЕASUR]
CALCULATE OFFSET МЕАSURE
a ØUT X WORK
Check the resuit of calculatíon dísplayed in the RESULT
[INPUT]
GEOMTERY OFFSET
Repeat the above procedure of Z-axis and X-axís offset data
measurement operations for necessary tools.
NOTE
1 Always measure the axís of díameter specífıcatíon
in terms of díameter va1ue.
2 When the measured value ís ínput as the geometry
offset value by [MEASUR], the corresponding wear
offset value ís set O.
3 Wear offset data ís used for offsetting the error
measured on the machíned product or worn down
amount of a too1.
- 690 -
8-63874EN/05 EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 2.LАľŕ-iE
SETTING OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SH1FT
DATA
After setØg the geometry offset data for necessary tools, set the
workpíece orígín on the actual workpíece used for machíning.
Ø the lathe, the rotating center líne of a workpíece is usually set to
workpíece ońgin of X-axís. So, the workpíece ońgín of X-axís need
not be set again for new workpíece.
For Z-axís workpiece ońgin you must set agaín for new workpíece
when you change to new one.
In thís sectíon, operatíons for settíng the workpiece end surface to the
workpiece ońgín are descńbed.
1 Set the actually machíned workpíece on a chuck of lathe. After
then, for safety, take measure to keep fiılly safety such as closíng
the machine door.
2 Execute the machíne reference positíon return of X-and Z-axís.
3 Output T-code in MDI mode, and select the tool for measuríng.
4 Make a spíndle rotate by fa11y safety speed.
5 Cut surface A of the followíng drawíng in manual mode wíth a
actual too1.
6 Release the tool in X-axís dírectíon on1y, without movíng Z-axis.
7 Stop the spindle.
8 Define the end surface amoØt f.
- 691 -
2. LATH E EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING B-63в7aEгv/o5
Operate as follows on the MANUAL GØE i screen.
[R K SET]
WORK CORRDINATE sYSTEM
<WOØIECE ORIGIN>
TAB < > wíll be displayed on the ňght upper part ofthe wíndow

<WOØIECE sØT>
[СНcЮRЅ]
TГEM < > will be dísplayed on the ńght upper part of the wíndow

7p>
ľлıЕAsrntl
CALCULATE OFFSET МЕАSURE
β ØUT WORK
Check the result of calculation dísplayed in the RESULT
Ø
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
As the result of the above operatíons, confirm that the absolute
coordinate of the Z-axis is changed to the va1ue of entered i vahie.
Π 8uH1
42θ.θθθ S 8 іі 88881 18
2
S 8 M 8
с θ.θθθ Г
F θ G81 18 48 54 88
θ.θθθ G97 99
. мл
M КK ĺ:ł Ø7б]FlіOfθ P1ECΣ 5H1Ff
G Y
8і1lП Јі
aв5αиε іюR coαгo.
aцК uІ CLR IFFNI τнкОЧτ RεsСπτ
z-645.96Θ - 2 2.8θ8 + zM = Z Ø
lFONff тøuHετ oи Міaк coaгa.
И Mλ RALS
IFiL F 1[.uкEt
- 69 ? -
8-63874ENl05 EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 2.LАTHE

PREPARING OF THE F1XED FORM SENTENCE MENU
As to the fıxed form sentence, machíne tool buílder usually sets the
suitable menu for specífıed respectíve machíne. But, you can enter his
own menu on the IVIANUAL GUIDE i screen by yourself.
Entering the Fíxed Form Sentence for Turníng Machíníng
Enter the fixed form sentence menu whích wí11 be called by the
soft-key [FIXΣRM] in the soft-key group for tumíng machíning.
[SETTING]
SETTING

2.REGISTER FDXED FORM SENTENCE FOR ØG
[SELECT]
REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR ØG

CREATE NEW FIXED FORM SENTENCE

sTART PROCEDURE ØUT

G28 UO WO ; T? ; G99 G96 S? ; M03 ; G00 X120. Z20. ;
[INSERT]
[CLOSE]
Γ
`tGø.øøøıx τ в.eee
ć в.w x
Ø6Г5і[RED ΓÉ:
:. їιwІ іκ[Øε
ıı..RELtsτERF_D SΣHT[HCE_: _
2?<.
lPUi F1XED FãRčM 5E1ЛE КΣ MΦ P114ł LIFSERT7 ОR 11D
ECT FI ED FØ YENTENCE pND PІЈ5M ØT KEY.
119 4p
ΦгТ
1


1
1
- 693 -
2. LATH E EXAMPLE OF PROGRAMMING 8-63874EN/05
Enteríng of the Fíxed Form Sentence for Millíng Machiníng
Enter the fıxed form sentence menu whích wí11 be called by the
soft-key [FIXFRM] in the soft-key group for mílling machiníng.
Enter data for the program for millíng starting procedure and program
end procedure.
[SETTING]
SETTING

1.REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR ØLING
[SELECT]
REGISTER FØD FORM SENTENCE FOR NIILLING